Contents

PREFACE
Purpose of this book
Soul-centered healing
Fulfillment of law
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
1. ESOTERIC HEALING—A HIGHER
DESIGN
Some factors in health and disease
The three laws of health
“Happiness”
Disease
Setting the forces flowing
True healing
Meditation
Thought power, a natural energy
The use of thought in healing
Healing as compared to cure
Failure of current healing methods
2. FUTURE HEALING TECHNIQUES
The past
Some great healers
Modern times
Clarifying the purpose of esoteric healing
The Vital Force in the Body
Temporary Cures
Magnetic and Radiatory Healing
Esoteric healing defined
An interpretation of the definition
“Esoteric Healing Is an Art”
“Esoteric Healing Is a Science”
“Esoteric Healing Uses the Mind but Not
the Emotions”
“Esoteric Healing Uses the Mind in the
Service of the Intuition”
“For the Purpose of Transforming
Matter with Life Energies”
“To Bring about Change which Will
Benefit the Whole”
The laws and rules of esoteric healing
Law I
 Law II
Rule One
Law III
Law IV
Rule Two
Law V
Rule Three
Law VI
Law VII
Rule Four
Law VIII
Rule Five
Law IX
Rule Six
Law X
The basic laws governing the soul in healing
3. OUR SEVEN ENERGY BODIES
About the bodies
Exercise
The constitution of man
The Three Principles
The Spirit or Life Principle
 The Soul and Personality Principles
The vital or etheric body
Sources of etheric energy
Freeing Ourselves from Inherited Taints
Death
The Flow of Life-force
The Cloak of Life
The Lesser Centers
The Etheric Esoterically Understood
The emotional body
A Sea of Trouble
A Coat of Many Colors
Astral Centers
The mental body
The Mental Centers
The personality
Balance
The soul bodies
Where Is the Soul?
The Soul in the World
A Soul’s Ladder
The higher mind
 Awakening the Soul
The Causal Body and Soul Body
The intuitive soul
The spiritual soul
The Bridge
The monad
4. THE PURPOSE OF DISEASE
Results in the present
Causes of illness
We can blame no one for the illness we have
Disease or illness is an opportunity
The immune system
Resist and be changed
5. OUR MAJOR LIFE CENTERS
What is an etheric center?
Base center
Sacral center
Spleen center
Solar plexus center
Heart center
Vagus nerve center
Throat center
 Alta major center
Ajna center
Head center
Summary
6. THE ART OF ADMINISTERING
ESOTERIC HEALING
How does esoteric healing work?
Alignment
How to start healing esoterically
Radiatory healing technique
Training in a clinic
How to balance the centers
Some Exercises
The hands in healing
Phases of vital flow
Visualization
Breathing techniques
Balancing the centers
Synchronizing Triangle
Practicing with the major centers
My first encounter
Balancing the other major centers
 The ajna center
Balancing and visualization
Transmittable force
Distant healing
Appointments
The First Appointment
Payment
Preparation of the patient
Asking for Healing
Sitting or Lying
Questioning the Patient
Duality
Confidentiality
Allocating the work to be done
7. HOW TO USE THE TRIANGLE CIRCUITS
OF ESOTERIC HEALING
Understanding the use of triangles
Beginning the act of healing
A. Alignment and attunement
1. Alignment
2. Higher Triangle
3. Opening the Triangle of Healing
 Attunement with the Governing Ray
Energies
4. Protecting Triangle
5. Activating Triangles
6. Triangle of Transfer
Summary of Procedure for Alignment and
Attunement
B. Diagnosis
a. Entry into the Auric Energy Field
b. The Five Centers in the Ajna
C. Vitalization of the bodies of the patient—
The vitality triangles
1. The Pranic Triangle
2. Spleen Triangle of Force
3. Immortality Triangle
4. Lower Prana Triangle
D. Esoteric healing treatment—Triangles used
in esoteric healing: Options for each
treatment
a. The Synchronizing Triangle
b. Balancing the Centers and Triangles
The digestive system
 5. Liver Triangle of Force
6. Stomach Triangle
7. Astral Preparation Triangle
8. Mental Congestion Triangle
9. GIT Triangles
10. The Triangle for Imperil
11. The PSL Triangle
12. Diabetes Triangle
13. Lower Clearing Triangle
14. Responsive Triangle
15. Triangle for Dispelling Astral
Glamor
16. Consciousness Stream Triangle
The base center and the spine
17. The Basic Triangle
18. The Spinal Triangles
19. Triangle for Addictions or
Obsessions
20. Fear Triangle
21. Fear Transformation Triangle
22. First and Second Initiation Triangles
23. Third Initiation Triangle
The reproductive system
24. Sacral Triangle
25. The Two Triangles of Force
26. Triangle for Sexual Problems
27. Fertility Triangles
28. Triangle of Energy
29. Triangle of the Practical Mystic
30. Triangle for Creative Energy
Distribution
31. Triangle of Yoga
Above the diaphragm
The heart and circulatory system
32. Heart Triangle
33. Triangles at Death
34. Immune Triangles
35. Lymphatic Triangle
36. Allergy Triangle
37. Blood Pressure Triangles
38. Kundalini Triangle
39. Samadhi Triangles
The respiratory system
40. Diaphragm Triangle
 41. Service Triangles
42. Parathyroid Triangle
43. Respiratory Triangle
44. Triangle of Purpose
45. Sinus Triangle
46. Sound Triangle
The nervous system
47. Triangle for the Nerves
48. Cranio-Sacral Triangle
49. Migraine Triangle
50. Creative Fusion Triangle
51. The Head Triangle
52. Triangle of Being
53. Triangle of the White Magician
54. Synchronizing Triangle
55. General Healing Triangles
The senses
56. Hearing Triangle
57. Touch Triangle
58. Third Seed Group Triangle
59. Eyes Triangle or Sight Triangle
60. Dissipating Triangles
 61. Taste Triangle
62. Smell Triangle
Useful triangles in more advanced esoteric
healing
63. Triangle for the Majority
64. Triangle for Average Humanity
65. Triangle for Imbeciles and Animals
66. Triangle of Spiritual Facilitation
67. Triangle Aiding Self-Consciousness
68. Threads Triangle
E. Closing and sealing the healing triangle
Balancing the pairs of centers
Head–Base
Heart–Solar Plexus
Throat–Sacral
Summary of the healing procedure
8. TREATING THE THREE INHERITED
PLANETARY INFLUENCES
The spread of cancer
An esoteric view
Esoteric healing and cancer
Syphilis, cancer and tuberculosis
 Tabulation of the three planetary conditions
Appendix A: Our Cosmic Purpose
Part I. The Esoteric Purpose of Healing
Part II. Stanzas and Commentary: The
Inner Purpose of Healing
9. HEALING YOURSELF
10. SEVEN ADVANCED “MAGICAL”
HEALING TECHNIQUES
Ray I technique
Interpretation
Ray II technique
Interpretation
Ray III technique
Interpretation
Ray IV technique
Interpretation
Ray V technique
Interpretation
Ray VI technique
Interpretation
Ray VII technique
Interpretation
11. CASE HISTORIES
12. QUICK REFERENCE SUMMARY
Summary of opening the healing treatment
A. Alignment and Attunement
B. Diagnosis
The triangles of esoteric healing
C. Vitalization of the Bodies of the
Patient
D. Esoteric Healing Treatment
E. Closing and Sealing the Healing
Triangle
The triangles according to their governing
center
Base Center
Sacral Center
Spleen Center
Solar Plexus Center
Heart Center
Vagus Nerve Center
Throat Center
Ajna Center
Head Center
13. CONCLUSION
14. ESOTERIC HEALING GROUP
MEDITATION
15. ANCIENT HEALING MANTRAMS
For All Disciples
Mantram of Heart, Mind and Soul
Group Healing Mantram
Radiatory Mantram
Mantram of Unification
Mantram of the New Group of World Servers
Noontime Recollection
The Affirmation of the Disciple
The Gayatri
Mantram to Destroy Glamor
The Soul Mantram
The Soul Mantram (full version)
Affirmation of Love
Mantram of Group Unity
Mantram for Money
Into the Light Mantram
The Self
Mantram of the Avatar on the White Horse
 Service Mantram
The Great Affirmation
The Great Invocation
The Great InvocationA Mantram for the New
Age and for all Humanity
13. USEFUL ADDRESSES
APPENDIX B: PHOTOS DEMONSTRATING
THE TRIANGLE CIRCUITS OF
ESOTERIC HEALING
BIBLIOGRAPHY
SELECTED READING
TOPIC LIST
ABOUT THE AUTHOR
 ESOTERIC HEALING

Other books by Alan Hopking

The White Ring
The Christ’s Reappearing
The Emergence of the Planetary Heart
Practical Guide to Esoteric Healing
The Esoteric Healing Handbook
Advancing in Esoteric Healing

Alan Hopking, M.A.

Founder of the Global Academy of Esoteric
Healing
Faculty Member of the University of the Seven
Rays, (Healing) USA
Faculty Fellow of the International Network of
Esoteric Healing
Member of the National Institute of Medical
Herbalists, UK
Member of the Register of Chinese Herbal
Medicine, UK
 Esoteric Healing
A Practical Guide
Based on the Teachings of the
Tibetan
in the Works of Alice A. Bailey
ABRIDGED FOR KINDLE

ALAN HOPKING

Blue Dolphin Publishing

Copyright © 2005 Alan Hopking
All rights reserved.

Published by Blue Dolphin Publishing, Inc.

P.O. Box 8, Nevada City, CA 95959
Orders: 1-800-643-0765
Web: www.bluedolphinpublishing.com

ISBN: 978-1-57733-110-0 paperback

ISBN: 978-1-57733-162-9 self-hardcover
ISBN: 978-1-57733-306-7 e-book

Published originally as Practical Guide to Esoteric

Healing in 1991 by WhiteWays Publishing Co., 13 Cowper
Road, Bournemouth, Dorset, U.K.

Permission to quote from the books by Alice A. Bailey has

been granted by Lucis Publishing Company, New York, and
Lucis Press Ltd, London. The extracts from the books by
Alice A. Bailey may not be reproduced except by
permission from the Lucis Trust, which holds copyright.

Wherever possible the author has tried to be accountable

for the quotes used, but a lot of the sources over the years
have, unfortunately, gone to the wind. Some sources come
from colleagues and teachers in the International Network
of Esoteric Healing.

If an ailment is severe or if symptoms persist, please

consult a physician right away. Especially consider one
with a holistic approach. No part of this book is intended to
replace competent medical treatment.

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Hopking, Alan N.
Esoteric healing : a practical guide based on the teachings
of the Tibetan in the works of Alice A. Bailey / Alan N.
Hopking.
p. cm.
Previous title: Practical guide to esoteric healing.
Includes bibliographical references and index.
ISBN 1-57733-110-9 (pbk. : alk. paper) — ISBN 1-
57733-162-1 (self-hardcover : alk. paper)
1. Medicine, Magic, mystic, and spagiric. 2. Seven rays
(Occultism). 3. Bailey, Alice, 1880-1949. 4. Medicine,
Tibetan. I. Bailey, Alice Anne, 1880-1949. II. Hopking,
Alan N. Practical guide to esoteric healing. III. Title.

RZ999.H665 2004
615.8’51—dc22
2004020022
First printing, December, 2004
Second printing, July, 2005
Third printing, January, 2006
Fourth printing, August 2006
Fifth printing, March 2007
Sixth printing, August 2009
Dedicated to the true healer in everyone
 “All that exists are aggregates of the finest
energies.” —Gautama Buddha

“The Science of Triangles governs the human

frame in all its aspects, as well as the frame of a
solar system.” —DK

“Cause involves the idea of duality—that

which initiates and that which is produced
simultaneously by the initiation. The two ideas
are inseparable. The effect involves a third idea
... thus effects are always produced by a
juxtaposition of the pairs of opposites.” —DK

“Only when the pupil or practitioner has an

intelligent appreciation of the trouble affecting
himself or his patient (when his objective is to
equip himself or his patient for service); only
when he has the ability to conscientiously follow
the formulas and methods imparted (when he
aims only at the acquirement of healthy vehicles
for the better carrying out of the Plan); and only
when the objective is unselfish (when he desires
not to escape disease for his own personal
benefit), will he be trusted to clear and enter the
karma and so adjust rightly the form vehicles of
the personality, only then will the formulas work
in connection with the soul consciousness.” —
DK

“Any healing practice should be preceded by

years of careful study about the nature of energy,
of the ray types, of the centers; a minimum of at
least three years should be given to this.” —DK

“Healing, with its understanding of energy

and forces ... will lead later to the rebirth of
humanity.” —DK (DNAI, p. 28)
 PREFACE

Purpose of this book

This book is a complete revision and
enlargement of my first Practical Guide (publ.
1991). It is intended to open up the subject of
spiritual healing as a science to a wider public. It
is a text book for groups of healers as well as for
the individual healer working within a subjective
group. A subjective group is one whose members
are linked by the common nature of their thoughts.
There is already a small band of esoteric healers
in the world working in conjunction with the
Ageless Wisdom or Perennial Philosophy—a
teaching about the spiritual way of life and an
understanding of the spiritual dimension lying
behind the happenings of the world and of
humanity. This teaching arises in new form from
age to age down through all of history. The author
takes this esoteric teaching on healing and presents
it in a form understandable to all. It is therefore
useful to both the advanced and the neophyte.
The purpose of this book carries further my
first book (Hopking, 1988), which was a
compilation of all the references to the etheric
body (the energy giving life to the physical body)
found in what has become to most esoteric healers
a text book of the subject, viz. Esoteric Healing,
which is volume IV of a Treatise on the Seven
Rays, by Alice A. Bailey (1951–70, v. 4). The
present book greatly expands and deepens the
understanding of esoteric healing as described in
my book published in 1990 where I first laid out
the practical steps for the use of esoteric healing as
described by Master Djwhal Khul in Alice
Bailey’s books. As he says of himself, “He who is
known as DK is planning to restore—via his
students—some of the old and occult methods of
healing and to demonstrate:
a) the place of the etheric body,
b) the effect of pranic force and
c) the opening up of etheric vision” (Bailey, 1962,
p. 759).

And elsewhere in another place he says,

“There is a great need for you to collect and
tabulate the scattered information (ancient
initiation and the rays and the centers)[1] so you can
register it as a whole” (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 5, p.
669). The word “register” is important in respect
of our subject of healing. It is this attempt to
facilitate this “registering” on behalf of all and
more adequately which drives me onward with
presenting this subject to sincere students of
healing.
This book is for student healers of all levels
who wish to learn about the etheric and the
esoteric. With this in mind DK says, “Much good
can be accomplished and a great deal learnt if
those interested read, study, meditate, carefully
experiment, and thus gradually build up this much
needed science as a co-partner in the medical
science of modern times” (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4,
p. 659). Hence, this book presents the principles
and an approach to the practice of healing in the
hope of clarifying to some extent the confusion
which exists in some minds regarding esoteric
healing. Confusion can arise because this form of
healing is so new and very little has been written
about it. Confusion also because esoteric healing
constantly refers to the fact of the importance of the
soul. Indeed, according to esoteric healing, healing
is impossible unless it is the will of the soul.

Soul-centered healing
But it is of little use to talk about esoteric or
soul healing unless one has some idea of what is
denoted by the word “soul,” as distinct from the
mind. How does it differ from psyche or ego? In
this book you will find much spoken about the soul.
It is this you must distinguished from anything to do
with either the personality, intellectual thoughts,
emotions, psyche and psychic phenomena, or
bodily feelings. On the soul and other points this
book can offer clear information from the esoteric
tradition, or the Perennial Philosophy.
Much of what is presented may not be
scientific knowledge in the usual sense, but
suggests avenues for future research or at least it
will have suggested ideas. Furthermore, the subject
of esoteric healing is presented with more clarity
and definition than has hitherto been given in the
past by others working in this field. As the
Gautama Buddha reportedly once said,
“Distinguish between those who understand and
those who agree. He who understands will not
tarry to apply it to life, he who agrees will extol
the Teaching as remarkable Wisdom, but will not
apply this wisdom to life. ... Those who understand
are few, but like a sponge they absorb the precious
knowledge and are ready to cleanse the horrors of
the world with the precious liquid” (Roerich,
1971, pp. 143–44).
Fulfillment of law
It is important nowadays to be able to offer a
reasoned explanation for the occurrence of
healings and miracles, as well as for their failure
to occur. For intelligent people can only see a
miracle as a fulfillment of law, not as an
abrogation of it. An intensification of nature rather
than something unnatural. The perspective of this
book suggests that there is no such thing as
metaphysics, only physical laws yet to be
discovered by the everyday investigator. This is
not to say that everything is explained or
completely explainable; that can never be, for if
every mystery of nature were made plain, people
would lose their particular prerogative, which is
that of constant enquiry, and investigation of the
world in which they live.
It is in the exercise of that prerogative that this
book has been written, particularly with the
practical side of healing in view. Such research, it
is hoped, will be found helpful by all interested in
this side of medicine, whether well acquainted
with it or on the verge of entering the inner search
and practice.
I hope that as you read through this book you
will find it far simpler than others on the subject,
which are usually more abstract and less practical.
I know esoteric healing is not an easy subject to
learn, as I find when I give courses on it, so it will
not be as easy to teach through a book. However,
this can be overcome if the student reads carefully
and follows accurately the techniques described. A
lot of practice is needed but the effort will bear
fruit. This book can also be a useful reference for
those who have already done a course in esoteric
healing, or who are embarking on the university-
level degree courses now available.[2] (Please see
reference to these sponsoring organizations in
Chapter 16).
 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

May I here thank all who have traveled with

me along this path so far, both colleagues and
students. I would like especially to mention: Susie
Hopking (whose patience, support and enthusiasm
have been for me a tower of strength during the
long hours, months and years in my research and
practice); Helen Frankland (whose quest has led to
long and profound conversations, and with whom I
have taught many courses in many countries, and
who worked with me for the UK branch of the
University of the Seven Rays, esoteric healing
degree course for three years); Ann Higgins
(whose interest and perception helped me at the
start of this journey); and Janina Waloszek (whose
esoteric insight never fails to astound). You have
all been an invaluable source of inspiration and
encouragement. Acknowledgments are also due to
the many members of the WhiteWays Group of
Bournemouth, U.K., from whom I have gained
many important insights. Brenda Johnston (and her
teacher Rex Riant), founder of the International
Health Research Network (now known as the
International Network of Esoteric Healing), who
personally taught me the introductory elements of
practical esoteric healing and in whose healing
clinic I worked for two years with Ann and Helen;
also Dinah Lawson and the other teachers of
esoteric healing in different parts of the world.
Thanks, too, to Nellie Grose, M.D., whom I
discovered to be a close associate and dedicated
colleague and who, with me, taught the first three-
year degree course in esoteric healing with the
University of the Seven Rays, in the United States.
Thanks are also due to the Directors of the
University of the Seven Rays and the Healing
Faculty. Thank you, Anne Guest, Ph.D., and John
Robinson, and especially Frances Harriman, for
the time and constructive advice you gave during
an early form of the manuscript. Also thanks to my
good friends and fellow students. Dany Vecchio,
M.D., and Daniel Krummenacher, Ph.D., who
facilitated Frances’ support.
I’d also like to thank the Prague Esoteric
Healing Group who have, down the years of my
teaching there, afforded me the many insights that
have helped the shaping of this book. It is to them
also that I owe the benefits of the many digital
photographs contained here.
May I also here thank the publishers and
printers, especially Paul Clemens of Blue Dolphin
Publishing for his openness and readiness and
belief in me as this greatly enlarged second edition
began to take shape. I’d like to make special
mention of Meredith, my son, who was a great help
with the original computer graphics in the first
edition. Lastly, salutation goes to my second son,
Kingsley, who as a baby afforded me the profound
insight into divine purpose now contained in the
Appendix of this book.

Alan Hopking
 1.
ESOTERIC HEALING—A
HIGHER DESIGN

Some factors in health and disease

Normal health may be said to be present when
there is a harmonious inter-relationship between
the individual and his or her[3] environment. Such a
relationship, dynamic not static, involves an
interlacing of outgoing and incoming forces at each
level of consciousness and in each field of activity.
It can never be considered as precisely
determined, but rather is in constant movement and
readjustment. When both the outwards and inwards
flow is normal—normal, that is, for the particular
individual concerned—the tendency is to feel well
and happy. In other words, the person is for the
time being well adjusted to the immediate
circumstances whatever they may be and therefore
is living in harmony with both the self and the
world.

The three laws of health

There are three laws which control right living
or which govern a person living in harmony of
body:
1. The law controlling the will to live. This
involves the First Aspect of Will and Power
(Father, Siva, Life, Spirit). This law controls the
respiratory system.
2. The law controlling the quality of rhythm. This
involves the Second Aspect of Love and Wisdom
(Son, Vishnu, Soul, Consciousness). It controls
the cardiovascular and nervous systems.
3. The law controlling crystallization. This
involves the Third Aspect of Active Intelligence
(Holy Spirit, Brahma, Matter, Appearance). The
law controls the metabolic system (the organs of
 assimilation and excretion) (Bailey, 1951–70, v.
4, p. 106).

“Happiness”
Happiness in this sense is neither simple
contentment nor intense excitement, but rather
consists in a harmonious or “right” relationship to
life and experience. It is a basic condition in nature
—one towards which the forces of nature tend.
Never fixed or static, it is a constant flow of
successive adjustment that results in growth: the
assimilation of ever-expanding experience.
From this viewpoint, we can see how a
conscious life can be maintained in constant health.
But at the same time we can see how it could
become subject to certain maladjustments if the
laws of nature are not kept. The forces in the
person’s body can become confused, sometimes
running amuck. A breakdown in the integrity of life
occurs and illness results.
Disease
Disease is not an easy thing to define. Taber’s
Medical Dictionary (1977, p. D:47) says of
disease: “Literally the lack of ease; a pathological
condition of the body that presents a group of
symptoms peculiar to it and which sets the
condition apart as an abnormal entity differing
from other normal or pathological body states.”
Such a definition simply describes disease as a
state which is abnormal without undertaking to
indicate from where it arises. In esoteric healing
we seek to define disease in a way which includes
some indication of cause. Thus we say: Disease is
a result of an inhibited flow of soul[4] energy to the
body. It is a process of liberation, for by taking on
a disease, a person opens up to greater soul
awareness—an aspect of consciousness not in
expression at the time (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, cf.
Law I & p. 32). So let us consider some causes of
disease (see also Chapter 8, Appendix A).
A. Disease is something incomprehensible to all
 of us. Whatever it is, its cause lies way back in
the lost past of our planet, something which
esoterically we could vaguely term “cosmic
evil,” something that literally goes back to the
“beginning” of life as we know it. But
somewhere in us there is knowledge of its cause.
This book tells us much of what we always
intuitively felt was true but could not put into
words!
B. Epochal causes. Human progress is made
possible by the Law of Rebirth. It prompts the
soul to reincarnate, that is, to periodically, “life
after life for eons,” choose and build suitable
physical, emotional and mental vehicles through
which to learn the needed next lessons. The
history of humanity over the many thousands and
tens of thousands (even millions) of years has
led us to recognize three major and basic
complications in the inherited force-fields of
every person born:
a. Misused application of the procreative
energy;
 b. Misuse of the lower psychic powers for the
acquisition of personal and selfish desires;
c. Misuse of the application of thoughts and
ideas for the purpose of personal power.
These have contravened the ideal of justice,
brotherhood and freedom.
C. Lack of alignment and control by the soul, the
true self. All disease is a result of the misuse of
force in some earlier life or in this. This is what
is called the “mismanagement of force,” whether
it relates to oneself or towards others (or to the
environment). Under this major cause we find the
many lesser causes, i.e., the etheric[5] causes
leading to epidemics; the psychological causes
leading to worry and irritation; obsessions,
depressions and the problems linked with anger,
hatred, grief, resentment, etc; the mental causes
leading to fanaticism, frustrated idealism, etc.;
and “discipleship causes” involving those who
are more mystically inclined and those who are
on a more mental (esoteric) path.
D. Excess or insufficient energy as it vitalizes and
 pours through the centers up the etheric spine and
in the etheric head (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p.
270). This is the result of the misuse of force
whether by individuals or by groups, and in
some earlier life or in this (p. 112). In fact,
disease is seldom of individual origin (p. 31).
E. Three major premises: First, subjective or
inner conditions alone cannot cause disease.
Second, the subjective is a causative factor[6] (p.
309) when in collaboration with the inherited
tendencies of the physical body, since the soul
chooses to incarnate in a specific physical body.
Third, an outer condition alone cannot be a
causative factor. Therefore, all ills are not purely
subjective or psychological in origin as far as an
individual is concerned, but rather are due to
outer causes and to inner causes (p. 74).
F. Ninety per cent of the causes of disease are to
be found in the astral body.[7] Wrong use of
mental energy and misapplied desire are
paramount factors. As the bulk of humanity is
still in the Atlantean stages of consciousness,
 only five percent of the prevalent diseases are
due to mental causes. Disease is therefore the
working out into manifestation of undesirable
vital, emotional and mental conditions. The
remainder of illness is caused by external
influences: bacteria, viruses, accidents and
purely physical reasons.
G. Many diseases are of group origin, or are the
result of infection, or are due to malnutrition,
physically, subjectively and occultly understood.
H. Diseases for the masses, for the average
citizen, for the intelligentsia and for disciples
differ widely and have differing fields of
expression. The Social (Lemurian) diseases,
Cancer (Atlantean) and Tuberculosis (Aryan)
affect the average person (who is not on the
spiritual path) (see Chapter 8). Heart complaints
and nervous diseases affect the intelligentsia and
disciples.
I. Other causes of disease may be listed as:
inherent in the soil; karmic[8]; national; racial;
due to accidents; a conflict of forces; rampant or
 inhibited desire; dominating thoughtforms;
friction of atomic substance; frustration of ideals;
distortion of goodness, beauty and truth;
separateness; lack of etheric coordination;
personality focus; wrong spiritual practices; and
so on. In sum, disease is due to “misaligned
relationships,” and this in turn could be defined
as the blocking of the free life and the inpouring
energy of the soul, the higher self.

Although disease is a fact in nature, it is also a

result of the misuse of force. When this is
accepted, we will begin to work with the Law of
Liberation, with right thought, leading to right
attitudes and orientation, and with the principle of
non-resistance. We must remember too that the
Law of Cause and Effect, or of Karma, governs all
disease. Karma stretches deep into time and space.
[9]
From another angle disease has to do with
“food” and “eating,” for it involves assimilation of
energies on all the planes of life and
consciousness. Even “real” food (vegetables, fruit,
milk, meat, etc.) is but the consolidation of higher
energy for use by the physical body. Keeping to the
purer foods (and not entangling the astral body
with animal flesh) will help to open the
consciousness to fuller expression, thus preventing
or overcoming disease, especially at the earlier
stages on the Path.
Finally, let us be aware of a further approach
to the understanding of disease and its healing, one
which is particularly relevant when we are healing
a specific center (or chakra, as it is called in the
East). DK says that any “cause” involves the idea
of duality—that which initiates and that which is
produced simultaneously by the initiation. The two
ideas are inseparable. He goes on to say that the
true effect actually involves a third idea ... thus
effects are always produced by a juxtaposition of
the pairs of opposites (Bailey, 1962, pp. 798–99).
This must make us work back from the symptom or
the effect being experienced in the patient as being
the result of a juxtaposition of centers. Note also
how it involves three forces and thus a triangle of
energy. This movement of energies around the
points of a triangle distinguishes esoteric healing
in power and effectiveness from any other type of
healing in the subtle bodies.

Setting the forces flowing

Disease, therefore, is a blockage: either an
entity in itself (karma), or a lack of conscious
expression. So the need arises to set the forces
flowing through the body in order to incorporate
wider aspects of the self. To do this, people
usually seek aid from a specialist whom they
believe can help. What therapy do they choose?
Surgery (the first and lazy option, or last resort);
orthodox methods using powerful synthetic
chemical drugs (which the body having evolved
over millions of years cannot recognize and reacts
against, hence the side effects); the “natural”
therapies using herbs in various forms (very safe
and based on knowledge gained over hundreds of
years): herbalists (of whom the author is one),
homeopaths, aromatherapists, naturopaths; the diet
therapies, mostly involving vitamins; and Eastern
methods. There are also the manipulative therapies
of chiropractic and osteopathy, which seek to
realign the body’s bony system. Then there are the
many therapies dealing with people’s emotions—
psychotherapy, psychiatry, hypnotherapy, marriage
counseling; and then one could choose from the
many forms of healing therapies—color therapies,
crystal therapies, laying on of hands, and spiritual
healing. Each of these medical methods can be put
into one of three groups:
1. The ameliorative therapies
2. The psychological therapies
3. The spiritual therapies.

Each individual chooses a therapy according

to his or her need and belief. The first category
deals primarily with the body; the second set
largely deals with the emotions and lower mind,
which will affect the body; and the third mostly
deals with the person’s soul, which will affect the
personality and the body. It may be said, however,
most of the present “spiritual” therapies do not
reach the soul.

True healing
From the esoteric standpoint, true healing,
healing that will change a person’s life and inner
motivation, can only happen when the soul of the
patient is involved. For this reason many so-called
cures, where the person throws away the crutches
and walks, usually do not last. A return to the
former state is frequently worse than before, for
the person feels utterly demoralized, “let down by
God.” True healing is not like this. It is seldom
sudden, for it involves change and adjustment and
reorientation from within. It calls upon the person
to make decisions from within, decisions which the
soul wants, not what the little personality desires.
It usually involves mental and emotional change,
by degrees through a self-imposed discipline and
training. But true healing will often entail new
habits of the body, nutritional change, and changes
with regard to the body’s fitness, types of
entertainment and relaxation. All these are
influenced from within by esoteric healing, not
imposed on the patient from without. We will learn
later that few words are spoken during a
consultation, neither by the healer to the patient,
nor by the healers amongst themselves concerning
the patient. It is a meditative, inner work, a subtle
change of energies and forces by the patient in
inner response to the healer’s challenge.

Meditation
It is considered a prerequisite that one who
wishes to practice esoteric healing should meditate
regularly. One of the aphorisms I have stuck onto
my computer monitor states that, “Meditation
governs all expansions of consciousness.” It is a
constant reminder to me that to live life creatively
and inclusively I am always to work at expanding
my frontiers through meditation. It is a time of
withdrawing within and exploring the realms of the
soul.
There are many dangers that beset a path of
meditation, due in large extent to having to live our
lives in a busy world. Yet this activity in the world
also works as a safeguard for us. Meditating too
long and too often can lead to real problems
psychologically and even physically, so early on
the path of meditation we are to learn the virtue of
discrimination. Meditation is a creative work with
energy, our own energy, and right from the
beginning we will be confronted by decisions and
situations which require a deep and strong
sensitivity and determination to discriminate what
is helpful or harmful to us, and what is unnecessary
or essential to us. It is important to go slowly in
meditation to avoid the pitfalls and temptations that
crop up. Always watch yourself and get to know
how far you can go with safety. Never stretch
yourself beyond those limits. Remember, eternity is
long, and the good you build up slowly and
consciously will last forever and will always be
there for you to call on for assistance. Meditation
is as important as your mealtimes, or brushing your
teeth. Regularity keeps you nourished as well as
unstained!
While this book is not about meditation, to
practice healing in the way described here,
meditation is not only recommended but essential.
[10]

Thought power, a natural energy

When we get down to meditating in earnest,
we are met with the ever awe-inspiring presence
of thought. We feel it as a being, an entity which
has a life and form. In fact, we recognize that, by
producing a thought, effects inevitably follow.
When I first confronted my thoughts and my
thought-maker, I suddenly saw that I was in fact
trapped by my own thought of myself. What I was
in form, and soul, was nothing but a thought-
expression of my present consciousness. This was
a little frightening at first. I felt I was a prisoner of
a process, that escape was literally impossible. It
would be like moving from one cage to another.
For a long time I worked with these ideas in
meditation, sometimes thinking it was hopeless and
pointless. But I came to a point when I had no
alternative. I had to do something about it. I did the
only thing that could be done—I accepted my
predicament! I felt a great relief; I didn’t feel I was
giving in or becoming a mere plaything of my own
thought. I realized that here was a potential for
moving towards a concept of liberating thought
itself, an activity which would or could actually
leave me uncocooned—not reborn, just unraveled
—as Being itself—who I really was—as created.
So the search began, to explore all the ways to
work with this energy of thought as the ultimate
transformative power.

The use of thought in healing

In healing we also work in the realm of
thought. We are manipulating energies of thought—
the threads cocooning a patient in pain and
suffering—and endeavoring through soul-to-soul
contact to unravel some of the untidy or piled-up
threads. Thought is substance and can bring about
effects. Rightly directed, swathed in light and love,
thought can heal. This has nothing to do with our
mundane thoughts and desires, but is rather the
reflective and responsive thought matching the
energy emanating from the patient as a soul. We are
often told that, to cure disease, we must draw
health and strength from the great fount of universal
life by our will and then pour it through the patient
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 1, p. 202). How do we do
this? We can begin by allowing the centers of
energy in etheric matter (the vital force) lead our
thought back to the cause, which we can then
balance or release, as explained later in this book.
In this way we work intelligently with the forces
and energies of a patient—not, let me reiterate,
intellectually, but creatively, and based on “pure
reason” from the soul, directing and focussing a
source of energy which will bring about healing.
The effects are inevitable, but usually entirely
imperceptible and unexpected. Changes are a time
of restructuring and reevaluating, sometimes
bringing great joy and sometimes suffering and
pain, but always resulting in release, and a greater
sense of relief. Disease is a sign that purification is
taking place. Our task is to assist the process. We
try to unhook the chain from the wall itself. We do
this only inasmuch as it is according to the will of
the soul of the one being healed.
Spiritual healers do not work with the
consciousness aspect of the patient. We work
entirely with the life aspect (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4,
p. 628). The life force works through the heart
center, utilizing the blood stream (love), while the
consciousness aspect works through the brain,
using the nervous system (will) (p. 337). The fine
channels called “nadis,” which make up the etheric
body, represent the life aspect (pp. 197, 205).
Love, which is related to the heart, is a substance
as real as dense matter, and can be used to drive
out diseased tissue and provide a healthy substitute
in place of the diseased material that has been
eliminated (p. 102). Of course, to love, one must
think, and think creatively. In fact, love is the
creative power of the Logos (Bailey, unpublished
letters, p. 121). To heal, we have to create a
healing thoughtform (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p.
676). The function of every thoughtform is
threefold:
a. To respond to vibration.
b. To provide a body for an idea.
c. To carry out a specific purpose (Bailey, 1962,
p. 552).

Thought is the carrier, the engine, for love,

which is the quality of the energy used in the
healing thoughtform.
We are truly working with the law of Magnetic
Impulse. With every healing done from soul level,
we lift the whole of humanity (see Bailey, 1951–
70, v. 2).

Healing as compared to cure

 Cures are usually regarded as happening by
themselves, requiring little or no inner work by the
one being treated. For instance, we hear things
like, “He cured me,” or “It cured all my
problems,” or “I didn’t have to do anything yet I’m
cured!” Healing, however, calls for more thorough
work. Even though healing from the spiritual level
is to be regarded as the ultimate in medical
therapy, cure is not inevitable. Life is not that
simple. Healers are human like their patients. It is
true, they endeavor to work closer to the source of
life and creation for the benefit of their fellow
men, but they do not claim to be that source. Their
work is to reflect that source of life so that the
patient can, from within their own individual
spirit, which is usually a completely unconscious
response, decide to change.
Healing helps people to release their
attachments and expectations. This is real healing
and cure. It also means transforming the face of
disease. Disease emerges as a realization that that
particular energy expressed by the illness is
lacking or not being properly incorporated in the
conscious life of the patient. When that element of
consciousness is acknowledged and activated, the
disease moves out; the patient is freed from
disease because that consciousness is now part of
his awareness and thought. This may mean putting
off the physical body. We are not to shy away from
death. Terminal illness can be a positive
opportunity for rapid change of personality defects.
After healing, a patient may come to accept their
healing as involving leaving the physical earth and
everyone on it.
Another point must be clarified which often
worries both healers and patients. I refer to healers
who are selfishly motivated. These are the so-
called Black Lodge “healers” (who only work
with the personality rays). They can, it is true, be
more potent on the physical plane than White
Lodge healers. Thus the spiritual healer, working
with the energies of light, is seldom as effective on
the physical body. But Black Lodge members are
totally unable to work on a patient who is
spiritually oriented, neither can they work through
a healer who is spiritually oriented (Bailey, 1951–
70, v. 4, p. 705). This has to be noted. It is a great
comfort to many.
Healing, and especially esoteric healing,
contains many nuances leading towards wholeness,
which is a better term than “cure.” These may
involve aspects of oneself which one was totally
unaware of before. The bottom line of esoteric
healing, and therefore all healing methods,
concerns relationships. A person is confronted or
faced by a number of possibilities. Each demands
renewed effort towards improving one’s relations
whether it is to the environment, business or work,
outside activities, associates and friends, family
and home, or towards one’s own inner self. In fact,
disease and healing are both aspects of the great
“relationship system” which governs all
manifestation (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 600). This
is something to reflect on.

Failure of current healing methods

 Much of the failure of healing methods
employed at present is due to the inability of the
healer to:

1. Establish the extent of the trouble, where it may

be specifically located, and in what subtle body
it principally arises and lies.
2. Know where the patient stands as a soul upon
the ladder of spiritual development, and where,
therefore, the healer must look for the source of
the difficulty.
3. Differentiate between the diseases which are
due to inner personal conditions, or to inherited
tendencies, or to group distribution.
4. To know whether the disease should be handled
by the local general practitioner, a natural
therapist, a psychologist, or be treated
esoterically with subtle healing methods (Bailey,
1951–70, v. 4, pp. 26–27).
THE RELATIONSHIP ASPECT
“Disease is energy which is not functioning
as desired or according to plan. Inpouring
energies are brought into relation with forces,
and good health, strong and adequate forms and
vital activity result; the same inpouring energies
can, however, be brought into relation with the
same forces and a point of friction be set up,
producing a diseased area, pain, suffering and
perhaps death. The energies and the forces
remain of the same essentially divine nature, but
the relationship established has produced the
problem.” —Djwhal Khul (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4,
p. 588).
 2.
FUTURE HEALING
TECHNIQUES

The past
There are many different kinds of healing
whose arena is the field of energy surrounding a
person. Many of these methods have come down to
us from time immemorial. We instinctively put our
hands on the area giving trouble. Everyone does it;
for instance, when a mother puts her baby’s sore
hand in her mouth or holds her hand on the pain.
Some of these ancient methods have been recast in
modern form. Examples include the laying on of
hands, spiritual healing, chakra healing, color
healing, faith healing, magnetic healing and
radiatory healing. Esoteric healing as described
here is a new method of healing involving a
combination of magnetic and radiatory healing.

Some great healers

It is beyond the scope of this book to do more
than mention some great healers in the history of
the world. A few have found their way into
legends. For instance, in China healing was
practiced as far back as 5,000 B.C. Shen Nong is
regarded as the patron of Chinese medicine and
reputedly wrote the Shen Nong Ben Cao (Shen
Nong’s Materia Medica). His perception of the
vital force (Qi or Chi) in the body has moulded
both Chinese herbalism and China’s unique system
of acupuncture.
Another great healer was Imhotep. He was a
court architect and court magician to King Zoser of
the third Egyptian dynasty who lived about 2,700
B.C. Imhotep was thought to inhabit the body of a
snake, a symbol which has since recurred
frequently in relation to healing, not least in the
winged staff and serpent of the caduceus of the
Western medical profession today.
Then came Huang Di, the legendary and
godlike Yellow Emperor, who is credited with the
authorship of The Yellow Emperor’s Classic of
Internal Medicine (Huang-di Nei Jing). His reign
began around 2697 B.C. It reportedly is the first
book to describe the way energy moves around the
body in particular paths, translated as “meridians”
or “channels” (jing-luo). Jing means “to go
through” or “a thread in a fabric”; luo means
“something that connects or attaches” or “a net.”
Meridians are the channels or pathways that carry
Qi and blood through the body (though they are not
blood vessels). These meridians comprise an
invisible network of energy that links together all
the fundamental substances and organs. To the
Chinese these channels, though unseen, are thought
to embody a physical reality (Kaptchuk, 1987).
Then came Buddha who gave directions for the
healing of the sufferings of people by the
enunciation of the Four Noble Truths: The student
knows according to reality, this is suffering; he
knows according to reality, this is the origin of
suffering; he knows according to reality, this is the
cessation of suffering; he knows according to
reality, this is the path leading to the cessation of
suffering (Thera, 1983). This has been translated
by Alice Bailey in her book, Esoteric Psychology
II, as follows:

Existence in the phenomenal universe is

inseparable from suffering and sorrow. The
cause of suffering is desire for existence in the
phenomenal universe. The cessation of suffering
is attained by eradicating desire for phenomenal
existence. The Path to the cessation of suffering
is the noble eightfold path.[11]

To this end the Buddha developed the Four

Foundations of Mindfulness, which He declared to
be the “Only way” (ekayano maggo). This practice
was to enable the pupil to realize the liberating
truth of Anatta, the Not-self. Asserting the
principle of energy, Buddha regarded all that exists
as aggregates of the finest energies. Similarly, His
affirmations about thought, acting at a distance,
antedate our researches in the domain of thought-
transmission and wireless communication and
distance healing (Roerich, 1971).
Jesus the Christ was perhaps the greatest of all
healers. His amazing influence continues unabated
today. He is the “healer of the nations”; his healing
sacrifice saved humans from the “sin” of the world
(the reader may understand what this implies from
an esoteric standpoint by the end of the book). His
healing work for humanity enabled him to be a
pioneer of the next phase of human existence in that
he rose from the dead in a body not built by hands
(or generative organs), a body entirely galvanized
by the vital etheric forces. His resurrection body
has been the source of inspiration and healing on
all levels for two thousand years.[12] And there
have been famous healers in all traditions since the
life on earth of Jesus Christ.
The picture below is of the Annunciation by
Nicolas Poussin, painted around 1650 A.D. I find it
fascinating and truly inspired. It shows the Angel
Gabriel with head forward, as though with His
Ajna or brow center focussed on Mary’s head
center, which is radiantly alight with a white bird.
His hands are extended, one holding her heart
center and the other her ajna center, both hands far
from the body and in her etheric field. To me this
depicts an esoteric healer! If anyone has ever seen
an esoteric healer at work, one would agree. By
the way, this particular triangle pattern is called
the Triangle of the Third Seed Group, which
represents healers and medicine everywhere.
Gabriel is performing a miraculous operation in
the etheric. How fruitful it would be to study this
painting from the esoteric angle, as it shows the
conception of the coming Christ! Should you ever
visit Munich, go and see the technique and color of
this masterpiece at the Bayerische
Staatsgemäldesammlungen. You’ll be glad you did.
Poussin himself has been acclaimed as “pictor
philosophus.” Ethics, religion and a complex
conception of the universe are the keys to a full
understanding of Poussin’s genius.
 The Annunciation by Nicolas Poussin
Reproduced with permission from Bayerischer
 Staatsgemäldesammlungen, München

Modern times
Throughout the modern era there have been
many healers worldwide who have stood out from
the crowd by showing that there is a force, subtle
and intangible, which can be controlled by the
healer’s mind to bring about healing. There have
been books written by these healers and
biographies written about them, a collection of
useful information.
Around these individuals who developed the
healing powers latent in everyone have grown
many different healing organizations and groups in
the Hindu, Buddhist, Muslim, Christian and Jewish
traditions, amongst others all over the world. To be
sure, there are healers in every land and tradition
and of all ages.

Clarifying the purpose of esoteric healing

THE VITAL FORCE IN THE BODY
 In the past healing was done only on the
physical body up to the level of the “fourth ether”
(the lowest level on which exists the etheric body).
But with the incoming of the seventh ray (the
Aquarian Age) we can now heal through the whole
etheric body (without needing to touch the physical
components, since the etheric is the template of the
dense physical body). The seventh ray is gaining
strength and impact. It is with this understanding
that we undertake to study and practice the science
and art of esoteric healing. Hence it is fundamental
to become more acquainted with the etheric body.
The “etheric body” is a great network of
energy weaving through and around the physical
body. It is the vital force which maintains the
activity of every function of the body. It is the
cause and the process of the interacting cellular
movements in the body. If there is a withdrawal of
vitality, atrophy and flaccidity results. If, on the
other hand, too much energy is pouring through to a
limb, for instance, tetany or tension occurs. A
balanced, rhythmical flow through and round the
body is the goal of healing. To achieve the goal,
however, may require techniques extremely
complex and detailed and subtle. But the purpose
is the same: to bring about homeostasis (balance)
in the body tissues. In this way the etheric body is
able to vitalize the physical body.
The etheric body is neutral in its relation to the
rest of the subtle bodies, which include the
energies of life, thought, abstract vision, and the
intuition. Thus the etheric vehicle becomes a kind
of crystal ball or mirror of the person. Onto it the
whole of the person is reflected, from the subtler
bodies “downwards” and “upwards” from the
physical body. For this reason, the etheric body is
frequently referred to as the “light body,” in the
sense that all is revealed in the light, nothing is
hidden from the light. With etheric sight the healer
is able to apply what is required by the patient.
The etheric body is the reflection of the soul,
formed by the soul of each cell in the body, merged
as one. It is in this energy field that we work and
gain vital information about the patient on the
different levels of their being. More on the etheric
body in Chapter 3.[13]
TEMPORARY CURES
Most healers, rather than using their higher
mind, will unknowingly use an energy drawn
readily from the planet, called “planetary prana,”
to effect a cure. It is only temporarily effective. It
merely deals with the symptoms and effects rather
than the causes. It is the task of the esoteric healer
to work consciously in the etheric body, directing
specific energies with clear thought from the soul
to the patient, which will bring about a healing
according to the will and purpose of the patient’s
soul. Such healing is permanent and will affect a
person’s future life. The methods employed are
magnetic and radiatory healing, another name for
esoteric healing.
MAGNETIC AND RADIATORY HEALING
As said earlier, esoteric healing primarily
deals with the two activities controlling energy,
namely, magnetism and radiation. What do these
two mean?
Magnetism
A healer must be magnetic above everything
else. He must attract:
1. The power of his own soul.
2. Those whom he can help.
3. Those energies, when need arises, which will
stimulate the patient to the desired activity
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 197).
Radiation
The healer must understand also how to
radiate, for the radiation of the soul will do the
following:
1. Stimulate to activity the soul of the one to be
healed thus setting in motion the healing process.
2. The radiation of the healer’s mind will illumine
the other mind and polarize the will of the
patient.
3. The radiation of the healer’s emotional or astral
 body, controlled and selfless, will impose a
rhythm upon the agitation of the patient’s astral
body, and so enable the patient to take right
action, while the radiation of the healer’s vital
body, working through the spleen center, will aid
in organizing the patient’s force body or etheric
body (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 205).

We will be looking at these in detail in a later

chapter. But it is interesting to see the difference
and the similarity of these approaches. We use
magnetic healing to attract to us our own soul, and
the patients we can help. We are then able to
radiate soul energy to activate the soul of the
patient to illumine her mind and polarize her will,
to control and balance the emotional body, and
bring about greater organization of the etheric
body, and hence the physical. In the esoteric
healing as taught in this book we use both magnetic
and radiatory healing, either concurrently or in
alternation, according to the will of the healer and
the demands of the patient’s soul.
 Magnetic Radiatory
Healing Healing
Soul Attracts own soul Radiates to
patient’s soul
Mind Attracts patients Illumines the
(for healing) mind and will
Emotional Activates the Causes right
emotional body action on the
emotional level
Etheric Activates the Has an organizing
etheric body action on the
etheric level
Objective Patient’s physical Patient’s soul
body
Energy Prana or vital Soul Energy
Wielded planetary fluid

Radiatory healing is brought about by linking

the soul with the brain and the heart center (see
Rule Five), then mingling the two auras on all three
levels, both of them responsive to soul contact.
The soul energy of the patient is then directed by
the healer’s soul towards that aspect of the
patient’s physical body needing healing. This
process is said to occur consciously or
unconsciously.
Radiatory healing uses the emanations from the
soul. Magnetic healing involves emanations from
the etheric vehicle. But where do these originate?
It is suggested that the source of radiation, of
which magnetism is a type, is in the domain of
“beingness” or “consciousness,” where the healer
identifies with a greater life than what is generally
accessible (see the Higher Triangle in the
alignment stage of preparing to heal, Chapter 6).
We can really do nothing to bring about the flow of
radiation. No amount of visualization or mental
movement or astral “pleading” or devotion will
cause radiation. But there is a way of being which
sets radiation into motion. A shift in identification
produces the result; this shift is one of the
mysterious results of meditation and the particular
preparation healers undertake before a healing
(McMillan, private paper). In comparing radiatory
healing with magnetic healing the following quotes
from various sources may be found helpful:
 It is the admixture of love and will which
produces radiation (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 5, p.
375).

Magnetic action is more closely allied to

first-ray functioning (with the energy of will and
power) than it is to the second ray (with the
energy of love and wisdom), and is an aspect or
quality of the Law of Synthesis (holding all as
one) (p. 375).

Radiation is a tangible substance and

potency, producing effects ... Joy is the most
powerful impulse behind the right kind of
radiation (Bailey, 1944, v. 1, p. 185).

Magnetic stimulation of the physical atom

emanates from man on astral levels and later
from buddhic levels, the levels of inclusive
love (Bailey, 1962, p. 254).
 Magnetism and the capacity to show love
are occultly synonymous (p. 576).

He must demonstrate the laws of

radioactivity in his own life on the physical
plane. His life must begin to radiate, and to
have a magnetic affect upon others. By this I
mean he will begin to influence that which is
imprisoned in others, for he will reach—
through his own powerful vibrations—the
hidden center in each one (p. 863).

When a healer works magnetically and

radiates his soul force to the patient, that patient
is enabled more easily to achieve the end
desired—which may be complete healing, or it
may be the establishing of a state of mind which
will enable the patient to live with himself and
with his complaint, unhandicapped by the
karmic limitations of the body (Bailey, 1951–
70, v. 4, p. 7ff).
 In magnetic healing, the healer, or the
healing group, does two things: 1) He attracts to
the healing center that type of energy which will
counteract the disease. 2) He attracts to himself
and absorbs those forces which are producing
disease, drawing it forth from the patient (see
the Synchronizing Triangle, defined below) (p.
100).

In radiatory healing, the process is simpler and

safer, for the healer simply gathers power into
himself and then radiates it onto the patient in the
form of energy. It should be directed to the center
nearest to the location of the disease. In this work
there is no risk to the healer, but if the element of
will enters into his thought or the stream of energy
projected is too strong, there may be danger to the
patient. The impact of the force which is being
radiated upon him may not only produce nervous
tension, but may lead to an increase in the power
of the disease and to its intensification by
stimulating the atoms and cells involved in the
activity of the force responsible for the trouble.
Beginners must avoid any concentration upon the
disease itself or the area in the physical body
involved. They must carefully keep all thought in
abeyance, once the preliminary work of visualizing
the trouble and aligning with the soul has been
done, for energy ever follows thought and goes
where the thought is focussed (Bailey, 1951–70, v.
4, p. 101).
In magnetic healing the patient’s physical body
is the objective of the healing art, while in
radiatory healing it is the patient’s soul which feels
the effect of the healing energy. In the first case the
healer works with the prana or vital planetary
fluid, and in radiatory healing with soul energy. We
can therefore divide healers into two groups: one
group wielding the vital etheric fluid which we
call prana, and the second group working on a
much higher level and employing an ability to
draw down soul energy into the body (or rather, the
personality) of the healer and—from the required
center—to send it forth again into the appropriate
center in the patient’s etheric body, but this time
through the stimulation of the patient’s aura
controlled by the patient’s soul (Bailey, 1951–70,
v. 4, cf. Rule 5).
The esoteric healer combines these healing
methods, or uses one then the other, according to
the needs of the patient.

Esoteric healing defined

Now we can turn to a specific definition of
esoteric healing. It is not easy to define anything,
let alone esoteric healing. There are always so
many nuances left out of a definition. But to aid
understanding, a simplified definition of esoteric
healing follows:
Esoteric Healing is an art and a science
calling for the use of the mind, but not the
emotions, in the service of the intuition, for the
purpose of transforming matter with life energies
to bring about change that will benefit the whole.
For completeness I would like to add the
following more esoteric definition: “Esoteric
Healing is the release of the soul so that its life can
flow through the aggregate of organisms which
constitute any particular form” (Bailey, 1951–70,
v. 4, see Law I).
Esoteric Healing is an exact science of
contact, of impression, of invocation, which
includes an understanding of the subtle apparatus
of the etheric vehicle (p. 525). A healer is a
transmitter of spiritual energy (p. 2).
Esoteric is a word that comes from the Greek,
eso meaning “within,” esoteriko, “from within.”
Thus, esoteric healing is to make sound from
within. Sound can be variously understood, either
as an inner vibration, or a radiation from within
signifying wholeness.

An interpretation of the definition

How interesting that such a definition says
nothing of humanity, disease, death, cure! Yet by
understanding the meaning of definitions, these
terms will emerge indirectly.
Let us attempt to elaborate.
“ESOTERIC HEALING IS AN ART”
This simply indicates that the use of this
healing form is a practical skill, and yet it is not
fixed or predetermined; it does not have limitations
attached to it. Under its given principles, its
methods can be employed to create new and better
forms. In other words, esoteric healing can be
developed into a personal creation rather like a
painter and their painting. Each time a new picture
is started, it is different. Art relates to intuition,
and intuition to love.
“ESOTERIC HEALING IS A SCIENCE”
To take the simile of the painter one step
further, each time a new picture is begun, there are
rules to which the artist must conform. The easel
must be at the right height; it must be placed in a
position for the light to show the colors to be used.
The paper, the paints, the brushes, the pallet, and
so on, must first be available and ready. Then the
artist must conform to the rules of painting a
picture (and we know how broad these have
become). But an artist wants to paint a picture, not
write a book or give a lecture or do a scientific
experiment. The end result will be a recognizable
picture. This is the scientific part. The rules we are
to conform to are the springboard into a new
dimension. Esoteric healing, as a science, is
objective; the healer does not intend to be involved
in the result. The healer wants to do the work and
then leave the impact to cause a response in the
patient. To alter its progress new patterns are
added to it (further consultations for treatment are
arranged).
To be sure, esoteric healing, however
objective, changes the healer as well, although not
in the same way as it does the patient. Although
there is an interchange of energies, both persons
are changed in the way required by the
circumstances during the healing. This is due to the
specific patterns of both healer and patient. The
changes are different and impersonal, and so they
can be called objective. In this way we can see
that esoteric healing is a science, since it relates to
mind and to individually woven thinking patterns.
“ESOTERIC HEALING USES THE MIND BUT NOT THE
EMOTIONS”
In esoteric healing we do not work from the
desires and fears of the patient. We have no
interest in psychic phenomena and regard it as an
interference which the work of healing is better
without. The esoteric healing practitioner believes
the emotions and psychic states he might
experience from contact with a patient to be
illusions that are to be avoided. To work from the
emotional or astral level actually encourages those
illusions to be perpetuated and weakens the
individual patient.
Like a scientist, the healer works from the
level of the mind, making intelligent deductions
and decisions based on thought and on soul
impression. The healer works with energy wisely
directed, deflected or retained. Intelligent intent
lies behind all wise direction of energy. In this
way the patient will not be bombarded with our
desires and hopes. Instead, the patient will sense a
clarity, a feeling of purpose and direction, either
immediately or over time.
“ESOTERIC HEALING USES THE MIND IN THE SERVICE
OF THE INTUITION”

This will take some explaining, but I will do

this later and during the course of this book. Let me
just say simply that the Intuition referred to here is
not an instinctual feeling. It is more like being
receptive to pure ideas, to thoughts which have
their origin in the abstract realms where form has
no place. By tapping into intuition, the esoteric
healer believes he or she can work with the causes
of the problem or illness which is being presented.
The intuition is the diagnostic tool.
The healer is totally self-reliant. The soul is an
initiate; the soul is a master. There is no need for
intermediaries, guides, and inner teachers. There is
no doubt that such guides exist on the subtle planes,
but they are not reliable. Mostly they are promoters
of glamor or personal aggrandizement in a
disguised manner. Esoteric healing and the esoteric
healer works from the soul plane or soul
dimension. The healer as a soul is responsible for
the work done, and knows that as long as work is
from the soul and with the soul of another, the
result will be sure. No matter what happens, it will
be determined according to the will of the patient’s
soul. This is the assurance. Thus in healing, the
healer aspires always to remain in touch with the
soul.
“FOR THE PURPOSE OF TRANSFORMING MATTER WITH
LIFE ENERGIES”
To be a healer means working with the subtle
energies and forces which surround and permeate
the patient from the level of the soul as reflected in
the etheric body. These subtle energies flow “in”
and “out” among the various bodies—physical,
etheric, emotional, and mental. To bring about
healing, the healer, having discovered what is
causing the trouble in the subtle anatomy, must be
able to “manipulate” or transform that energy and
so bring it into harmony with the person’s life and
purpose. Here “manipulate” refers to working with
energy reflected from the patient to the healer using
the hands and ajna center to benefit the person from
whom the radiation arises. The esoteric method of
healing is based on selflessness and harmlessness
and thus it handles and transforms the rate and
rhythm of the patient’s energies (according to the
will of the patient’s soul), not for the healer’s
advantage but for the patient’s. From a more
esoteric angle, the whole of the fallen universe is
invisible, yet embodied by the Fourth Creative
Hierarchy. That is, the four kingdoms are aided by
the higher kingdoms which have not manifested
into matter, but have incarnated into the higher
energies of this fallen Divinity or Cosmic Being.
This Cosmic Being has been made manifest in
matter for reasons of healing and must be returned
to its high state of original consciousness and
expression. This is only achieved when all beings
achieve their own enlightenment—be it an atom, a
stone, a plant, an animal, a human, a planet, a solar
system, a galaxy. More about this in Appendix A
(Chapter 8).
“TO BRING ABOUT CHANGE WHICH WILL BENEFIT THE
WHOLE”
This stage, the last part of the treatment, brings
about healing. The esoteric healing practitioner is
not actually trying to cure or willing to cure. The
patient and the patient alone, directed by the
wisdom of the soul, permits the healing. The healer
understands that this phase of the work may not
actually involve a physical change or cure. The
physical illness may be so advanced that organic
reversal is impossible. But suddenly the patient
may “accept” the illness, or “knows why,” or
“forgets the disease in a new wave of enthusiasm,”
among other mental or emotional changes. Healing
always involves a widening or deepening of
consciousness, inevitably benefiting humanity and
the planet as a whole. The truth is that, whenever
we give healing, be it on ourselves or on one who
has asked for it, such service actually raises the
consciousness of humanity, no matter how little.
With this preview of esoteric healing, let us
take a little time to read the Laws and Rules of
Esoteric Healing as laid out in the manuscript of
the Ageless Wisdom and translated into English by
Mrs. Alice Bailey with the help of an Abbot of a
Tibetan Lamasery called Djwahl Khul (Bailey,
1951–70, v. 4, p. v). Try to commit to memory the
first Law as it is foundational in all esoteric
healing practice.

The laws and rules of esoteric healing[14]

LAW I
All disease is the result of inhibited soul life.
This is true of all forms in all kingdoms. The art of
the healer consists in releasing the soul so that its
life can flow through the aggregate of organisms
which constitute any particular form.
LAW II
Disease is the product of and subject to three
influences: first, a person’s past, wherein each
pays the price of ancient error; second, inheritance,
wherein each shares with all humankind those
tainted streams of energy which are of group
origin; third, each shares with all the natural forms
that which the Lord of Life imposes on the body.
These three influences are called the “Ancient Law
of Evil Sharing.” This must give place some day to
that new “Law of Ancient Dominating Good”
which lies behind all that God has made. This law
must be brought into activity by the spiritual will.
RULE ONE
Let the healer train to know the inner stage of
thought or of desire of the one who seeks help. The
healer can thereby know the source from whence
the trouble comes. Let the cause and the effect be
related and know the exact point through which
relief must come.
LAW III
Disease is an effect of the basic centralization
of life energy. From the plane whereon those
energies are focussed proceed those determining
conditions which produce ill health. These
therefore work out as disease or as freedom from
disease.
LAW IV
Disease, both physical and psychological, has
its roots in the good, the beautiful and the true. It is
but a distorted reflection of divine possibilities.
The thwarted soul, seeking full expression of some
divine characteristic or inner spiritual reality,
produces, within the substance of its sheaths, a
point of friction. Upon this point the eyes of the
personality are focussed and this leads to disease.
The art of the healer is concerned with the lifting
of the downward focussed eyes unto the soul, the
true healer within the form. The spiritual or third
eye then directs the healing force and all is well.
RULE TWO
The healer must achieve magnetic purity,
through purity of life and attain that dispelling
radiance which shows itself in every person when
the centers in the head are linked. When this
magnetic field is established, the radiation then
goes forth.
LAW V
There is naught but energy, for God is Life.
Two energies meet in the individual, but five
others are present. For each is to be found a central
point of contact. The conflict of these energies with
forces, and of forces twixt themselves, produce the
bodily ills of humans. The conflict of the first and
second persists for ages until the mountain top is
reached—the first great mountain top. The fight
between the forces produces all disease, all ills
and bodily pain which seek release in death. The
two, the five and thus the seven, plus that which
they produce, possess the secret. This is the fifth
Law of Healing within the world of form.
RULE THREE
Let the healer concentrate the needed energy
within the needed center. Let that center
correspond to the center which has need. Let the
two synchronize and together augment force. Thus
shall the waiting form be balanced in its work.
Thus shall the two and the one, under right
direction, heal.
LAW VI
When the building energies of the soul are
active in the body, then there is health, clean
interplay and right activity. When the builders are
the lunar lords and those who work under the
control of the moon and at the behest of the lower
personal self, then there is disease, ill health and
death.
LAW VII
When life or energy flows unimpeded and
through right direction to its precipitation (the
related gland), then the form responds and ill
health disappears.
RULE FOUR
A careful diagnosis of disease, based on the
ascertained outer symptoms, will be simplified to
this extent—that once the organ involved is known
and thus isolated, the center in the etheric body
which is in closest relation to it will be subjected
to methods of occult healing, though the ordinary,
ameliorative, medical or surgical methods will not
be withheld.
LAW VIII
Disease and death are the results of two active
forces. One is the will of the soul, which says to its
instrument: I draw the essence back. The other is
the magnetic power of the planetary life, which
says to the life within the atomic structure: The
hour of reabsorption has arrived. Return to me.
Thus, under cyclic law, do all forms act.
RULE FIVE
The healer must seek to link the soul, the heart,
the brain and hands. Thus can the vital healing
force be poured upon the patient. This is magnetic
work. It cures disease or increases the evil state,
according to the knowledge of the healer.
The healer must seek to link the soul, the brain,
the heart and auric emanation. Thus can the
healer’s presence feed the soul life of the patient.
This is the work of radiation. The hands are
needed not. The soul displays its power. The
patient’s soul responds through the response of the
aura to the radiation of the healer’s aura, flooded
with soul energy.
LAW IX
Perfection calls imperfection to the surface.
Good drives evil from the form in time and space.
The method used by the Perfect One and that
employed by Good is harmlessness. This is not
negativity but perfect poise, a completed point of
view and divine understanding.
RULE SIX
 The healer or the healing group must keep the
will in leash. It is not will that must be used, but
love.
LAW X
Hearken, O Disciple, to the call which comes
from the Son to the Mother, and then obey. The
Word goes forth that form has served its purpose.
The principle of mind then organizes itself and then
repeats that Word. The waiting form responds and
drops away. The soul stands free.
Respond, O Rising One, to the call which
comes within the sphere of obligation; recognize
the call emerging from the Ashram or from the
Council Chamber where waits the Lord of Life.
The Sound goes forth. Both soul and form together
must renounce the principle of life and thus permit
the Monad[15] to stand free. The soul responds. The
form then shatters the connection. Life is now
liberated, owning the quality of conscious
knowledge and the fruit of all experience. These
are the gifts of soul and form combined (Bailey,
1951–70, v. 4, pp. 532–36).

The basic laws governing the soul in healing

In trying to simplify these profound laws of
healing I have distilled the essential qualities of
esoteric healing into seven statements.
1. All disease is the result of inhibited soul life.
2. Disease is the result of a person’s past,
inheritance, and the environment, both inner and
outer.
3. The conflict of integrating the person’s outer
personality self and the inner spiritual self is a
further cause of disease.
4. The soul is the healer of the form.
5. A person’s imbalance is healed when the flow
of life energy is directed, unimpeded, to the
appropriate major energy center.
6. To release the imperfection in the patient the
healer must use harmlessness.
7. The word of the soul governs both life and
death.
 These are the seven basic laws governing the
attitude of the healer to the patient. I have referred
indirectly to these laws throughout this book, so
while I must introduce the student to them, I will
not speak at length about them here. They could
best be used as meditation seed thoughts to ponder.

1. All disease is the result of inhibited soul life.

Everything that exists in the world—from
pebbles to people—is a soul embodied.
Everything in the world is subject to illness. For
one reason or other, the ensouling principle is not
able to express itself properly. Such inhibition
makes for disharmony resulting in sickness and
dis-ease.

2. Disease is the result of a person’s past,

inheritance, and the environment both inner
and outer.
The source of inhibition is explained in this
law. What one sows, one reaps. But what one sows
is also dependent on other factors: where the seed
comes from, where it grows, under what
conditions it grows, and so on. Causes create
effects, as is obvious to us in our everyday lives.
The decisions one takes today will affect and
change us tomorrow, but not in a deterministic
way. To undo our misdirected actions, words,
decisions, etc., may take a lot of guts and pain and
brain. The “environment” refers to causes that
exceed our capacity to comprehend. These causes
belong to a distant past but which we have to work
out in the present for the purposes of the future.
This second statement is related to the much
misunderstood and misused term, karma.

3. The conflict of integrating the person’s outer

personality self and the inner spiritual self is
further cause of disease.
“The spirit is willing but the flesh is weak” is
an old saying. A conflict between the desires and
ambitions, hopes and fears, stresses and strains of
the personality as opposed to the aspirations and
spiritual ideals and purposes and vision of the soul
can lead to a breakdown in the fabric of the body.

4. The soul is the healer of the form.

Only when the healer truly contacts the soul
and works with it according to the soul’s laws and
purposes, and only when the soul convinces the
personality to be submissive to the soul’s plan, can
healing be brought about and its effects made
permanent. This statement can be understood as the
Grand Design. To properly heal the form requires
the person as soul-personality to really understand
esoteric teleology, the cause and purpose of our
existence, as described in this book.

5. A person’s imbalance is healed when the flow

of life energy is directed, unimpeded, to the
appropriate major energy center.
This refers to the practical aspect of esoteric
healing. All the many preparations and triangles
which lead the life energy to its precipitational
purpose must be understood and used for healing to
be effected. The seven endocrine glands are the
outer expression of the seven major etheric
centers. All healing work is the full utilization of
the subtle energies controlled by these major
centers. The physical result will always be via the
endocrine gland or glands of the center or centers
involved. Most of the triangles used in esoteric
healing include a major center that circulates the
healing force through the physical body via the
blood stream.

6. To release the imperfection, the healer must

use harmlessness.
For effective healing that is safe and
permanent, the will of the healer or any forcing
process, spiritual, mental or physical, must never
be used. Only that lofty quality of love may be
used. What is love? In healing it is the energy of
harmlessness. Stated in this way, using the word
“harmlessness” ensures that the healer should at no
time use force, or display methods, whether of
thought or action, that would endanger the patient.
Furthermore, we keep our hands off the patient at
all times during the healing. The hands remain in
the life-field surrounding the patient. Touching the
patient during the process of esoteric healing short-
circuits the love energy and renders it virtually
inoperative. The hands are only laid on a person
during specific ceremonial energy transferal.
Examples of this are at baptism, or when one is
made a priest or bishop or knighted, an energetic
elevation of personal status. Soul and personality
are more closely aligned. It must be emphasized
that this is an inner conferral; outer titles count for
very little in this work. Love is the governing
attitude of the healer, and while the healer uses this
great energy, no harm can be caused either to the
patient or to the healer. Law IX, from which this
statement is taken, is also a warning to those who
would unscrupulously employ agents or potentizing
forms that are not conducive to the free will of the
patient’s soul.

7. The word of the soul governs both life and

 death.
This statement from Law X refers to the free
will under which all human beings live. The
“word” of the soul is the real “name” of each
individual on the soul plane, so this law clarifies
the patient-healer relationship. The patient
responds with free will to the healer’s soul,
determining how the healing should be used. Will
it be to promote life in the world or to promote life
out of the world, which we call “death”? Death in
this respect would be regarded as a positive step
for the patient. The esoteric healer knows that there
is no death, that death does not exist, that death as
seen by the ordinary world is really consciousness
without the dense physical body, a new reality for
the individual. Patients often do not have this
attitude, so the healer must choose each word
carefully and handle delicately the patient’s
confrontation with this form of birth. The patient is
to be encouraged to look towards that inevitable
time not with dread but with calmness, faith and
expectation, helped a little if possible by some
esoteric knowledge.

If I were asked to say what is the major

task of all healing groups ... I would say it is to
prepare human beings for what we should
regard as the restorative aspect of death, and
thus give to that hitherto dreaded enemy of
mankind a new and happier significance. You
will find that if you work along these indicated
lines of thought, the entire theme of death will
constantly recur, and that the result of this will
be new attitudes to dying and the inculcation of
a happy expectancy where that inevitable and
most familiar event occurs. Healing groups must
be prepared to deal with this basic condition of
all living, and a major part of their work will
be the elucidating of the principle of death. The
healer, working from the level of the soul,
always uses intuitively the right methods and
triangles which are needed by the patient. When
the healer is properly trained in esoteric
healing, he or she can be completely confident
about this (Two Students, 1985).
 3.
OUR SEVEN ENERGY
BODIES

Esoteric healers must understand the function

and action of the subtle anatomy of the human
being. The subtle anatomy refers to the energies
and forces that underlie the physical body of
organs and systems. This ethereal template gives
rise to the cells and physiological interactions.
Esoteric healing is carried out within this arena.
In esoteric healing we work with three subtle
bodies in a patient because they are regarded as
the “form bodies,” the lowest expression of the
soul; and all disease is the result of (the form)
inhibiting the soul from expressing itself better
through the personality (as Law I states). To
reiterate, the three bodies or vehicles are:
1. The vital or etheric body, the force-body of our
physical body, giving our physical organism life
and movement.
2. The emotional or astral body, our feelings.
3. The mental body, our thoughts.

These are the so-called “auras” of man. They

make up our personality. (Sometimes we see that a
person has a radiant glow, a kind of “rude health.”
In that event we are actually detecting their “health
aura,” which lies closer to the physical body than
the etheric.)

About the bodies

Before elaborating on the bodies or cloaks of
the human, we should mention something
concerning the bodies of the healer. Every healer
needs to achieve purity or pure character. This
attribute is something more than just being good. It
deals with the matter aspect and has relation to the
hold or control of the form nature over the man.
Let’s view this from the realm of the “occult,”
another word for the world of causes. If one or
other of the three lower elementals (the physical,
the astral or the mental) is the controlling factor in
the life of a person, he or she is—by that very fact
—put into a position of danger and should take
steps to arrest that control prior to an attempt to
enter into the formless realm. The reason for this
will be apparent. Under the law governing matter,
the Law of Economy, the elemental life will attract
to itself similar lives, resulting in a dual danger.
Esoterically, these dangers are:
1. Matter with a synchronous vibration collecting
in the elemental form. This will tend to increase
the magnitude of the task confronting the soul and
sweep the lower self into increasing dominance.
The “lunar lords” will become increasingly
powerful, and the solar “Lord” or soul
correspondingly less effective.
2. The healer will be surrounded in time by
thoughtforms of a lower order (from the
 standpoint of the soul), and before penetration
can be made into the Arcana of Wisdom and
before the way into the Master’s world can be
found, the clouds of worthless and selfish
thoughtforms that have gathered around the
personality ego will have to be dispelled.

Unless the student of healing learns that

aspiration and self-discipline must proceed side by
side, it will be found that the spiritual energy
contacted serves to stimulate the latent seeds of
evil (fractors) in the personality, demonstrating
what the great Lord taught when he pictured the
man who swept his house, cast out seven devils
and eventually was in a worse condition than ever
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 5, p. 8).
Every coherent system has its varying types of
energy. Perfection, or the state of continuous
enlightenment, is achieved when the dominating
energy is the highest type of energy possible. If the
lower energy of the aggregate of the form-atoms
(the personality) becomes the controlling factor,
three things will take place:
1. The physical form itself will grow by accretion
and will become ever more potent, until the
dominant voice of its “lunar lords” will stifle all
other voices. The person could then be swept
back into inertia, blindness and bondage.
2. The person may be under the control of one of
their forms or, worse still, the captive of all
three.
3. All subhuman forms in their aggregate will
greatly hinder or even prevent the emancipation
of the Real Man.
Who or what are these lunar lords? They are
energies or lives that seek to control the lower
threefold personality, and which fall into three
categories:
a. The individual tiny lives, which we call the
atoms or cells of the body. These exist in three
groups and compose respectively the four types
of bodies: dense physical, etheric, astral and
mental.
b. The aggregate of these lives which constitute in
 themselves four types of elementals or separate,
coherent, though not self-conscious, existences.
These four lunar lords constitute what the
Ageless Wisdom teaching calls “the four sides of
the square.” They are the “lower quaternary,”
“the imprisoning cubes,” or the cross upon which
the inner spiritual person is to be “crucified.”
These four elementals have an intelligence all
their own, are upon an involutionary arc, are
following the law of their own being when they
tend to become powerful, and thereby fully
express that which is in them. Involutionary lives
have not reached the perfection of their lowest
body, that is, material beings whose goal is self-
consciousness. Man is self-conscious, thus on the
evolutionary wave.
c. A dominant controlling lunar lord whom we
term the “lower personality.” He or she (if the
personal pronoun can be used) is the sum-total of
the physical, astral, and mental elementals. The
“personality elemental” forces the “fiery
energies” of the body to feed the lower three
 centers. The etheric body is simply the vehicle
for prana or life, using the spleen center for that
purpose. DK tells us that the etheric body has a
unique and curious position, being simply the
vehicle for prana or life, and the center which it
uses exists in a category by itself—this center is
the spleen minor.

The experienced healer or adept can, however,

enter the world of form, contact it, work in it and
remain unaffected by it, because there is nothing
inside that responds to it. The healer sees through
the illusion to the reality behind. Knowing where
the self stands, nothing is found in the appeal and
the demand of these lunar lords as attractive. The
healer stands midway between the pairs of
opposites. In the realization of the nature of this
world of form, in a comprehension of the lives
which compose it, and in an ability to hear the
voice of the “formless One” above the strife of all
the lower voices, comes the opportunity for the
aspirant to escape from the dominance of matter.
 The understanding of the sounds of all beings
and the ability to speak the language of the soul is
the clue to the work (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 5, pp. 8–
10). The habit of purity relates the healer to Rule
Two of esoteric healing, which states that the
healer must attain that “dispelling radiance” which
shows itself in every person when the centers in
the head are linked.
One of the paradoxes of the spiritual life
concerns the vehicles or bodies of the human. Let
me just say a few general words about these three
bodies before speaking more specifically about
them.
We are not our physical body; we are not our
emotions and feelings; we are not our thoughts. We
have them and we use them; we observe them from
a higher place within ourselves. The personality,
composed of our body, emotions and thoughts, is
not who we really are. Moreover, the personality
as a whole or in its isolated parts can be violated,
which can be very hurtful so long as we identify
with these parts. But the soul is untouched. It
remains pure. Its individuality cannot be violated;
into the soul no one can enter. Here you are God.
Remember this, for yourself, and for your patients.
These bodies are interrelated. They
interpenetrate each other and the physical body. In
constant movement, they surround the physical and
go through it, approximating its shape or form.
When we feel peaceful, happy, angry, or
exhibit other emotional states, we are experiencing
aspects of the emotional body. But such feelings
will also involve our thinking and our willing (the
mental and vital bodies). Care is needed to
distinguish just what we are experiencing.
EXERCISE
For an hour during your daily activities try to
be aware of your whole subtle anatomy. Be aware
of your postures (sitting, lying, standing, moving,
etc.) and the emotional state you experience during
this time. Do your emotions fluctuate reactively,
alter slowly or remain fairly stable? See if you can
also be aware of some of your thought patterns and
ideas.
Learn to distinguish what your different bodies
are “saying.” You may want to keep a notebook in
your pocket to record your observations.

*****

Let us now begin our look at the subtle bodies

with a broad overview. And, as is the general
approach in esoteric studies, we start from above
and move downwards to the lower bodies.

The constitution of man

THE THREE PRINCIPLES
To understand the nature of the soul, try to
visualize humans as having subtle parts within:
three energies consisting of three bodies in each.
The three energies are Spirit, Soul and Body.
In each we see the qualities of will, love and
activity (active intelligence). Other names for these
are life, quality and appearance; or spiritual
purpose, consciousness (love-wisdom) and
formative expression.
Body
Desire for sentient existence and desire for
service to humanity produce physical manifestation
(Bailey, 1962, p. 760). Will-desire is the actual
cause of incarnation (p. 799). In the Body are the
three aspects which combine to make up the
personality. We will count from the lowest or last-
expressed body to the highest, making nine so-
called “bodies”:
9th. The physical and vital (etheric) body—
(will) Personal Action. There are seven subplanes
in this body: the three lowest are dense physical
(solid), liquid, and gas. The upper four are the
ethers which make up the etheric body.
8th. The emotional (or astral) body—(desire)
Personal Love. Also consisting of seven
subplanes.
7th. The intellectual (mind) body—(thinking)
Personal Ideas. This consists of four subplanes; the
upper three belong to the region of the soul.

CHART I
THE CONSTITUTION OF MAN
AtPA = Atmic Permanent Atom
BPA = Buddhic Permanent Atom
MPA = Mental Permanent Atom
MU = Mental Unit
APA = Astral Permanent Atom
PPA = Physical Permanent Atom

The Body Principle or Personality therefore

consists of eighteen subplanes, seven each for the
physical and emotional bodies and four for the
mental (concrete mind) body.
The distinction of consciousness (or individual
self-awareness) is the cohering energy which joins
or merges the above three (the Body) with the next
three (the Soul)[16]:
Soul
In the Soul Principle, there are three aspects:
6th. The abstract mind (or pure ideas) body—
Soul Activity. Here we find the three upper
subplanes of the mental plane. On this level we
find the Causal Body or Egoic Lotus or Soul in the
usual sense.
5th. The intuition (buddhic) body—Soul Love.
(Seven subplanes.)
4th. The soul will (atmic) body—Soul Will.
(Seven subplanes.)

The Soul Principle (also known as the

Spiritual Triad) has seventeen subplanes.
The distinction of higher initiation or spiritual
consciousness, which remains only latent at this
stage of our spiritual development, joins or merges
the above three (the Soul) with the three spiritual
dimensions:
Spirit
In the Spirit Principle, the Monad and the
divine bodies, containing the three divine aspects
of Will, Love, and Intelligence (Father, Son, and
Holy Spirit) are seed qualities. With divine
intention, we reach up to these when we align and
attune ourselves before opening the Healing
Triangle (see Chapter 6). These two levels consist
of seven subplanes each, totalling fourteen.
Therefore we find there are forty-nine levels of
consciousness in our world. This dimension
contains:
3rd. Divine intention—Active Intelligence. It
is the Atmic Plane; the level of the Holy Spirit; the
Lord of the Third Ray.
2nd. Divine compassion—Love-Wisdom. The
Monadic Plane; the level of the Son; the Lord of
the Second Ray.
1st. Divine purpose—Spiritual Will. This state
of divine consciousness is where the different
religions say we can meet “the Father” (or the
Father’s House). Other names include Siva,
Nirvana, Shambhala, and the Lord of the World
(Sanat Kumara); this is where the “Will of God is
known.” The Divine Plane; the level of the Father;
the Lord of the First Ray.
The Seven Bodies of Man
Reorganized, the above information can also
be listed as follows in a form that is more
commonly accepted. This is due to the “joining”
aspects as shown above:
1. The physical body (which includes the etheric
body)
2. The emotional body
3. The mind body (linking the intellect of the
personality and the abstract thoughts of the soul)
4. The intuitional body
5. The spiritual will body (linking the divine
intelligence of the Spirit, and the spiritual will of
the Soul)
6. The monadic body
7. The divine body (in Eastern philosophy called
the Anu).
THE SPIRIT OR LIFE PRINCIPLE
The spirit expresses itself in the soul, and the
soul expresses itself in the personality. This is
important to remember when healing. So you will
appreciate how the spiritual will of the soul
expresses itself as physical activity in the
personality; and how intuitional love of the soul
expresses itself as feeling and desire in the
personality. The mind stands central. It expresses
itself as concrete thinking in the personality, bound
by that distinctive note of consciousness and self-
awareness. The soul may be seen as the mediator
between the spirit and the form of man. In man the
soul is like an immense searchlight, its beams
turned in many directions and focussed on many
levels, making healing the body from the soul level
a real possibility. On its own level our self-
conscious soul is beautifully in rapport with the
soul of all things. Our soul is an integral part of the
universal Soul, and because of this our soul can
attempt awareness of the conscious purpose of
Deity. Our soul can intelligently cooperate with the
will of God, and thus work with the plan of
evolution.
THE SOUL AND PERSONALITY PRINCIPLES
The existence of soul is, of course, still
unproven, although it is regarded by many
scientists and philosophers as hypothetically
possible. Scientific instruments are not yet
sensitive enough to prove it as a fact. When proof
is found, which may be in the near future
(physicists are already discussing vibratory
aspects of matter and energy, suggesting a higher
dimension), the revelation will revolutionize our
whole social structure and life. Medicine will pass
into a new phase. All that the esoteric and spiritual
healers have been hinting at for years will be
externalized. One day, which is not all that far
away, we will have a government body pouring
funds into a research project to investigate the
possibility of the soul as a reality in man.
To the extent you come under soul impression,
and then soul control, and finally identification
with the soul, you will move towards the center of
fusion. As your love for humanity increases, and
your interest in yourself decreases, so will you
move towards that center of light and love where
those who have achieved this union stand in
spiritual being.
The soul is the mark of quality that each form
expresses: it distinguishes one mineral from
another, one plant species from another, one
species of animal from another, and makes one
human different from another in appearance, nature
or character.
An interesting esoteric link connects the
vegetable kingdom and the human kingdom: “It is
in the vegetable kingdom that we find one of the
first and temporary approximations between the
evolving human monad and the evolving deva
monad. The two parallel kingdoms touch in that
kingdom, contact again in the buddhic and merge in
the second or monadic plane” (Bailey, 1962, p.
589) You will also note that in general the closer
certain animals come to individualization (of soul
and body) the fewer in their genus and the more
independent they become (the herd becomes
smaller).
The various qualities, vibrations, colors, and
characteristics in all the kingdoms of nature, are
soul qualities manifesting in form. And we must
remember that it is the desire for sentient existence
and desire for service to humanity which produces
physical manifestation (p. 760). It is the quality of
will-desire which is the cause of incarnation (p.
799).
Now let us look at each of these bodies in
more detail.

The vital or etheric body

The etheric body, as indicated above, is the
cause, the template of the dense physical. (For
details of the physical body, consider consulting a
good anatomy and physiology book.)
The etheric part of our anatomy is known by
scientists as the L-force (life force) or bioplasmic
body or the bioenergetic body. To the various
philosophies or religions of the world it is known
as the body of Prana (Hindu). To the Chinese we
noted above that it is called Ch’i or Qi, to the
Japanese Ki, to the Greeks Pneuma. In the Bible it
is called the “golden bowl” or “chalice.” This type
of energy, like the physical body, is least conscious
to us because it is below the realm of waking
consciousness. The etheric body consists of
previously acquired characteristics that have
passed into the bodies of perfection called instinct
or body nature or natural intelligence. Today, we
far more readily live in our emotions and senses.
We respond to the physical body from the
emotional aspect. The vital body is completely
identified with the physical. In fact, they cannot
survive in this world without each other.
SOURCES OF ETHERIC ENERGY
Sources of energy for the etheric body include
the following:
i. At conception our parents give us etheric
qualities, our inherited vitality. From this energy
our physical strengths and weaknesses derive.
ii. Another part of the etheric energy is acquired
from the food we eat. Here we extract from
whatever we eat the life quality that keeps us
healthy. The most important source of this form
of vital force comes of course from fresh
vegetables and fruit. There are six types of food
vitality which we use every time we have a
meal:
a. The bitter tasting foods have the energy
function of draining and drying the physical
body and thus preventing the body from
becoming too wet and damp and emotionally
liable;
b. Acrid or pungent foods move and disperse
the energies around the body;
c. Sweet foods have the function of
harmonizing all the etheric energies—we will
find that this energy action originates in the
spleen center;
d. Sour foods are astringent and have the
function of holding the etheric energies in
their proper courses and activities, a process
controlled by the liver minor center;
e. Salty type foods sow the etheric energy of
purification or detoxification through the
organs, softening them, which is cleansing and
therefore softening to the organs of the
physical body. This is an important function
and relates to the blood and base center of the
 etheric body, because it involves a certain
determination and fixed purpose to undergo
such a practice, properly speaking;
f. And, finally, we have the so-called bland
foods, which leech out dampness and
heaviness in the etheric, especially via the
bladder.
iii. The third type of etheric energy enters the body
along with the air we breathe.
iv. And the fourth type is given to us directly by
the sun. This prana, is absorbed via the skin (we
think of it these days as providing our daily
vitamin D quota) and is especially affiliated with
two etheric centers, namely: the spleen center
and a center between the shoulder blades.

There are four distribution agents of life

energy in the physical organism, namely, the
etheric vehicle, the nervous system, the endocrine
system and the blood stream. Of these the etheric
body with its centers is primary.
These four distributary agents are directly
related to the whole physical expression in that
they are one system with a dualistic mode of
radiation.
1st Ether (upper positive force). The first Ray
energy, governed by Vulcan, causes the circulation
of etheric energy and also has a connection with
the lower receptive force of the fourth ether under
the moon, the splenic system, and is therefore
related to the fourth Ray.
2nd Ether (upper positive force). The second
Ray energy governed by Venus rules the nervous
system and links with the lower receptive force of
the fifth subplane of gases, especially the
respiratory system, and is connected to the fifth
Ray.
3rd Ether (upper positive force). The third Ray
energy governed by Saturn rules the endocrine
system and is linked to the lower receptive force in
the body via the sixth subplane of liquids,
especially the kidney system, and is connected to
the sixth Ray.
4th Ether (upper positive force). The fourth
Ray energy is linked to the first ether by Neptune
governing the circulatory or blood system, and
related to the seventh subplane of solids in the
bony system, and is connected to the seventh Ray.
Each of these links (upper and lower) can be
related to soul and personality.
FREEING OURSELVES FROM INHERITED TAINTS
The inherited vitality, that which is given us by
our parents and grandparents in a long line of
succession (back to “Adam”), is the controlling
influence behind all the etheric types of energy, all
except one, that is, the energy related to the breath
(the source of the respiratory system; fifth ray). DK
says that it is through the breath that we can free
ourselves from inherited taints. In esoteric healing
the healer can use the breath to perform certain
clearing functions in the patient, but we are to
guard against employing this method lest we make
the last condition worse than the first. Love must
be the basis for the use of breath, which is a will
faculty, hence the difficulty. My strong advice to
you regarding the use of the breath is: learn, first,
truly to love, for only then can you wield the breath
in healing. They are one.
DEATH
The etheric is the cause of all motion and
function in the physical body. All digestive
processes, nervous impulses, breathing, and the
beating of the heart are due to the action of the vital
forces galvanizing our organs and cells. When we
breathe our last, the etheric body withdraws from
the physical (the lung minor centers are the last to
let go of the physical body) and the latter falls limp
and motionless. Then, as the separation is finalized
and the life force of the vital body departs
permanently, the physical casing becomes stiff and
begins to decay.
THE FLOW OF LIFE-FORCE
When the etheric life-force flows round the
body harmoniously, we enjoy health. The Chinese
call this Chi or Qi, “balance.” When this Qi gets
“stuck” or is prevented from moving properly,
ailments begin to appear. Likewise, when the vital
forces do not “keep in their pathways” and so
begin to zoom around the body too quickly and
haphazardly, acute symptoms arise causing much
pain or distress. A person whose etheric energy is
congested might exhibit lethargy, cold hands and
feet, aching back, and a lack of appetite.
Conversely, the second type may show signs of
hyperactivity, highly strung emotions, high blood
pressure and insomnia. There are many
interactions between these two extremes of
contraction and relaxation, alertness and
drowsiness, acute and chronic. The question is,
what causes the etheric or Qi to flow in this way,
too quickly or too slowly? The answer does not lie
in the vital body itself, but rather in the emotional
and mental bodies.
Five types of pranic energy, forming one
closely knit unit, comprise the etheric sheath. They
form a fivefold channel (see Hopking, 1994),
energizing, galvanizing and controlling the entire
human organism. There is no part of the physical
body which this network of energies does not
underlie or “substand.” It is the true form or
substance both of the human being and of all forms
in existence. Where these lines of force cross and
recross, as they repeat in the microcosm of man the
involutionary and evolutionary arcs of the
macrocosm of the universe, there are formed five
areas up the spinal column and two in the head
where the energies are more concentrated and
potent than elsewhere. Thus you have the
appearance of the major centers. Throughout the
entire body, these crossings and recrossings occur,
and so the equipment of energy centers is brought
into being (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 2, p. 592). The
etheric movement is difficult to chart because its
movement is both out and in at the same time. For
instance, energy flows out of the hands and fingers;
in the same instant other energies are flowing in.
This subtle movement of energy occurs throughout
the organism; it is like the rhythm of inhalation and
exhalation happening simultaneously, a most
beautiful harmony to observe with the inner eyes.
THE CLOAK OF LIFE
The garment of life energy is secured to the
physical by seven “buttons.” The etheric body is
like a coat penetrating and infusing the physical. It
extends beyond the surface of the skin to a distance
of about 2-6 inches (5-30 cm). Visualize a never-
ending flow of forces. The “buttons” represent the
endocrine glands, which are the transformers of
etheric energy for the physical body. There are
seven major endocrine glands in our bodies,
condensations of the great vortices of the seven
major centers. The seven major centers are created
where the fivefold channels cross twenty-one
times. For example, the throat center is the etheric
counterpart of the thyroid gland and parathyroid
glands. This center controls, via the thyroid gland,
all the physiological activities which have been
discovered, from the metabolic rate to the creative
aspects of mind and speech. We will look at each
of the centers in depth in a later chapter, as they are
an important part of esoteric healing.
The seven glands with their major centers are:

THE LESSER CENTERS

There are many other lesser centers often
appearing quite unrelated to any particular gland or
organ. In the Chinese system of acupuncture, which
uses needles inserted into the flow of Qi, there are
points all over the body that “energize” the body
and which can be used by the needler to effect
certain changes in the body. Esoteric healers
recognize various points or minute centers, but
there is not yet agreement about how the Chinese
system compares to the system outlined in the
Alice Bailey books. Nor do we use the points in
the same way as an acupuncturist. According to
DK, via Alice Bailey, seven streams of energy
cross to make a minute point, just as the minor
centers are composed of fourteen and the major
centers twenty-one.
Here are some of the more important minor
and minute centers as they are related to certain
healing triangles and major centers. What follows
is a snapshot of the most significant minor centers.
 THE MINOR CENTERS

The two eye minors are usually controlled by

the head center, although you can note how other
centers dominate certain conditions (see The Eyes
Triangle, #59, Chapter 7).
The two ear minors are controlled by the
throat center for hearing, and the ajna center for
conditions of balance.
The alta major center is under the control of
the throat center; not a major center but more
important than a minor center.
The throat center also controls the larynx
minor, the jaw minors, the tongue minor, the
shoulder minors, the two elbow minors (with the
head center), the two hand minors, the breast bone
minor, the two lung minors (the respiratory
activity), and the diaphragm minute centers.
The heart center controls the vagus nerve
center, the two breast minors (although the sacral
is the main ruler of these two minors), the two lung
minors (the blood-air exchange), a point below the
heart, and the diaphragm minutes (with the throat
center).
The solar plexus center controls the stomach
minor and the liver minor. There is a vague
connection between the solar plexus center and the
spleen minor (actually a double-minor center), but
the latter is at the present time somewhat of an
independent center (cf. p. 87). The spleen minor
has stronger links with the sacral center due to the
third Ray, which rules them both, and the heart
center (concerning prana).
The sacral center controls the two double
gonad minors (linking the masculine and feminine
attributes in each person and making the major
center particularly powerful), the two breast
minors, the two feet minors.
The base center controls the two hip minors,
the two knee minors, a center below the solar
plexus center, minute centers at the ileocaecal
valve and the sigmoid flexure, and minute centers
on and near the kidneys.
 Thus, there are seven major vortices, forty-
nine minor centers, and hundreds of lesser or
minute centers in the etheric form.
In the case of a highly developed person, life
energy flows unimpeded and in the right direction
from these centers to the gland or organ in its
jurisdiction. In an undeveloped human being this
life energy flows impeded and imperfectly
directed. In the same way, a person is either sick
or well according to the state of the centers and
their precipitation, the glands. The centers are the
major agency upon the physical plane through
which the soul works (according to the point
reached under the evolutionary process), and the
glandular system is simply an effect—inevitable
and unavoidable—of the centers through which the
soul is working. Everyone’s conduct and behavior
upon the physical plane is conditioned, controlled
and determined by the nature of their glands, and
these are conditioned, controlled and determined
by the nature, the quality and livingness of the
centers. These in their turn are conditioned,
controlled and determined by the soul, in
increasing effectiveness as evolution proceeds. Of
course, prior to soul control, they are conditioned,
qualified and controlled by the astral body, and
later by the mind. Obviously, our goal in this
present cycle is to bring about this control, this
conditioning, and this determining process by the
soul (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, pp. 623–24). Thus, the
healer deals with one of the seven expressions of
prana, called the life principle, ignores the gland
(the effect), instead working directly with the
center (the cause) which controls the area under its
influence.
In all this the healer has to think clearly before
the desired results can be brought about.
How, technically, does the life force flow into
the human body? From the etheric body, as an
emanation of the person, it flows to the seven
centers. It then divides into two streams, one
stream (of consciousness) flows into the nadis, the
tiny threads of force which underlie the nerves, and
into the nerves themselves, and from there into the
endocrine system. The other stream (of life) flows
from the centers into the endocrine system directly
and into the blood stream, via the hormones. These
two streams affect consciousness and life in the
human being (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 628).
Esoteric healers always work from or with the life
stream (the central jewel of each center), which
then radiates out to the consciousness aspect
(symbolically, the petals of the lotus).
The esoteric healer need not acquire the detail
of the other physical systems nor engage in
intricacies of lesser interior anatomical and
physiological relationships. All we need to
remember is that the primary effect of the glands
and of their secretions is psychological, while also
having a powerful physical influence (p. 625).
THE ETHERIC ESOTERICALLY UNDERSTOOD
Readers who are new to this subject can skip
this section for now. Come back to it later. It can
wait.
If we accept that every cell in our body (all
sixty billion of them) is a life in itself, then we
must also accept that there are many more atoms in
the body, each embodying a life and a purpose in
themselves, each a life in its own right, just as
humans are lives, individual and weaving their
own destiny. They each have purpose; they each
have an elementary personality and soul. The
human etheric body is the combined souls of all the
billions and billions of atoms or cells in our body
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 1, p. 54). These individual
tiny lives exist in three groups and compose
respectively the four types of bodies: dense
physical, etheric, astral and mental. The aggregate
of these lives constitute in themselves four types of
elementals or separate, coherent, though not self-
conscious, existences. These are what the Ancient
Wisdom calls the four Lunar Lords, known
esoterically as the Imprisoning Cubes. Here is to
be found the cross upon which the inner spiritual
Man is to be crucified. These four elementals have
an intelligence all their own, are upon the
involutionary arc, and are following the law of
their own being when they tend to become
powerful, and thereby fully express that which is in
them. It is interesting to note that the dominant and
controlling Lunar Lord which is the sum-total of
the physical, astral, and mental elementals, and is
called by us “the Personality” feeds the lower
centers with fiery forces, and has nothing to do
with the etheric elemental. The Etheric Lord has an
unique and curious position, being simply the
vehicle for prana or life, and the center which it
uses (the Spleen Center) exists in a category by
itself (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 5, pp. 9–10).
From another angle we have to recognize that
the lower mind element is the basic factor in the
production of the etheric body. Whereas kama
(desire) is the prime factor in calling the dense
physical vehicle into being (Bailey, 1950a, pp.
144–45). But as we learn to understand the sounds
of all these elementals and to hear the voice of the
formless one (the Soul), and speak its language,
which leads to the final liberation and which will
in due time lead these lives themselves into the
realm of self-consciousness (Bailey, 1951–70, v.
5, p. 10), so we will accept the intricate
integration and interdependence of all these
entities during their evolutionary development.
At this point I would like to offer you (from the
Master DK) the suggested key phrases concerning
these four elementary Lords whom we are
responsible for. Which belongs to which, you ask?
The Master replies, “Knowing that you will
apprehend the implications and will seriously
consider the purport” of these hints.

1. In the ordered regulation of the life comes

eventual synthesis and the right control of time
with all that eventuates therefrom.
2. In the right elimination of that which is
secondary, and in a sense of rightly adjusted
proportion comes that accuracy and one-
pointedness which is the hallmark of the
occultist.
3. In the right aspiration at the appointed time
comes the necessary contact and the inspiration
 for the work that has to be done.
4. In the steady adherence to self-appointed rules
comes the gradual refining of the instrument and
the perfecting of the vehicles that will be—to the
Master—the medium of help among many little
ones (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 5, p. 11).

The etheric is the reflection of the soul, hence

its purity. (Note that disorders of the etheric
reception and distribution of prana, and of the web
itself, originate from outside our etheric itself, cf.
p. 187; also see Cosmic Fire, 1962, pp. 104–09.)
It is thus the energy through which we as healers
work. One of the other reasons for working through
the etheric is that there is no such thing as
consciousness upon these levels (p. 178). These
four levels simply constitute the lowest
correspondence to the four planes whereon the
Monad and the Spiritual Triad are active, and upon
those levels there is no such thing as consciousness
as we understand it. There is only a state of being
and of activity for which we have no adequate or
illustrative words. The four higher planes of our
solar system are the four cosmic etheric planes,
and one of the lines of development is to function
adequately in response to the life of the planetary
Logos upon those planes. This constitutes the main
field of unfoldment and of acquired wisdom for all
initiates above the third degree.
Let us end this little esoteric section with a
chart which encapsulates a lot of words and to
which the trainee healer can return time after time:

Ether Plane Initia- Karma Center Finger Center

tion
1 Divine 4th Personal Head Index Point
2 Monadic 3rd Mental Heart Middle Triangle
3 Atmic 2nd Astral Throat Ring Petals
4 Buddhic 1st Physical Base, Small Circle
Sacral
and
Solar
Plexus

The emotional body

 The emotional body, also called the astral or
desire body, we know all too well. Through the
astral body the soul is able to contact sensation
(Bailey, 1973, p. 141). Dualistic in its activity, the
emotional body is the see-saw of our sensations
and feelings. On the scales we can be weighed
down by sadness, grief, sorrow and depression,
and on another occasion the pan can be tipped in
the direction of joy, happiness, excitement, elation.
But what are scales if not for balancing? The
healing treatment endeavors to bring about a state
of peace and equilibrium in this complex system of
attraction and repulsion. The needle of the scales
must be brought to the vertical point, and the pans
on either side must remain poised and still. We
hear echoes of ancient texts: “Remain in the world
but not of it,” “Be still and know,” “He knows
peace who has forgotten desire” (Bhagavad Gita),
“There is no joy but calm” (Tennyson, 1842, p. 2)
—all recommending detachment, non-attachment,
and tranquillity as the basis of true happiness.
Balance makes for contentment.
A SEA OF TROUBLE
The astral body can be viewed as the source of
all our troubles. It is symbolized by water, the ebb
and flow of the tides, and by the waves of emotion.
The majority of illnesses have their root in
unbalanced emotions. Worry and stress, ambition
and greed, hatred and selfishness, resentment and
envy are the modern deadly “sins.” All of them
derive from an ignorance which thinks of nothing
but itself. We are surrounded by the offsprings of
ignorance every day of our lives. They are part of
our existence. What happens in our homes and
what happens in the world is the result of the
emotional struggle of the pairs of opposites. These
energies stream around us and around the world, at
one moment fiery, angry, jagged, sharp and
destructive. A moment later they are replaced by
generosity, love, gentleness, compassion and
support. A proverb says, “After the storm is calm.”
As Goethe once wrote, “On all the peaks lies
peace” (Goethe, 1780).
Our emotional body is strongest—most whole
—at the central point of balance between the two
extremes. Balance gives it beauty and radiance and
magnetism. The center is the transcendent point, the
apex of the triangle, the bridge into a new
dimension.

Upon the stream,

between the two extremes,
there floats the eye of vision.
A COAT OF MANY COLORS
How can healing help? Just as the etheric
body’s energy centers are connected to the etheric
spine via the different endocrine glands, so the
astral body is connected to the etheric body by
swirling “buttons” (the size of saucers). The body
of desire is colorful, like Joseph’s many-colored
coat. Energies of varying wavelengths are caught
in the whirlpools, to which they are attracted
magnetically. These centers act as transformers of
emotional energy, conveying it to the relevant
etheric center to be stepped down to the physical
layer for the physiological functioning of the body.
Thus the emotion of anger, say, towards one’s
spouse can cause sacral center problems such as
inflammation of the uterus or prostate. If the anger
is due to unexpressed personal fears and
inhibitions we may find ulcers in the stomach or
duodenum. These symptoms suggest what is going
on in the emotional body of the patient. Symptoms,
you might recall, express inhibited aspects of
consciousness. Of course, the emotional energies
are subtle and may take many years to manifest.
Esoteric healing displays its power by treating the
astral body as a whole to bring it into balance so
that it may service higher or more purposeful
energies. In other words, esoteric healing can aid
the expression of negative aspects of
consciousness before they damage the physical
body. Put simply, esoteric healing is preventive
medicine.
ASTRAL CENTERS
So let’s outline the centers of the emotional
body and their relation to specific emotional
polarities.
Center Balanced expression Astral Extremes
HEAD Desire for a spiritual Pernickety – Fantasy
purpose
AJNA Directs the energy of Over-vigilant –
desire Delusory
THROAT Desire to serve others Vanity – Servitude
HEART Unconditional and Self-absorption –
impersonal love Over-distanced
SOLAR Desire for pleasure Addiction –
PLEXUS Glamorization
SACRAL Desire to regenerate Perversion – Married
and protect to God
BASE Will to have Acquisitiveness –
Unearthly

The mental body

The outermost envelope of human energies is
the mental sheath or body. This is the body where
thinking takes form. Here the intellect governs, and
abstract ideas can become working ideals. Many
terms describe the mental body: rational,
intellectual, deductive, analytical, logical,
knowledgeable and even philosophical. By these
terms it is clear that we are talking about a mind
which thinks and concludes. Compared to the
warmth and embrace and closeness that the astral
body can exude, the mind can seem cold and
distant.
Like the etheric and astral bodies, the mental
vehicle has its main centers of force as well as its
secondary or minor centers. To reiterate, these
centers in the several bodies are connected and are
within each other. The only separation,
differentiated energy, or vibration that
distinguishes, say, the astral heart center from the
mental or etheric heart centers is the fact of the
energy itself.
In the world today there are comparatively few
persons who actually “live in their head,” whereas
the percentage of those who “think with their
emotions” is upwards of ninety percent. This might
account for the vast populations in India, Africa,
China and South America where education is
limited and mental stimulation practically
nonexistent. Even in the West we could say that the
majority of people, even though literate and
numerate, are more inclined to emotional living
than to intellectual pursuits.
THE MENTAL CENTERS
The mental centers and their major focus of
energy express themselves in the following way:

Head Center: philosophical thinking

Ajna Center: thoughts of personality, will, and
ambition
Throat Center: creative thought or deductive
reasoning
Heart Center: thoughts of compassion
Solar Plexus Center: mental desires
Sacral Center: thoughts about family affairs,
personal education
Base Center: mental drives leading to intellectual
achievements
 Let us review our brief introduction to the
anatomy of the personality, looking at it as a
whole.

The personality
The personality comprises the mental,
emotional and physical bodies. People assert
themselves through their personality. Depending on
where their consciousness is focused, they will be
either emotionally expressive, mentally
expressive, or both. One person may have as the
basic drive in life the emotional path, where
desires are expressed, along with fears, wants and
hopes, passions and pleasures, while engaging in
very little intellectual activity. Another person
might be more polarized in the mind, appearing
“cold” and over-rational. Such a person is
probably a scientist or an intellectual while having
very little time for feelings and desires. The person
can think things through clearly, and does not easily
get trapped in fears and phobias. But the person
might not communicate love well.
BALANCE
Balanced people are somewhere between
these two extremes. They have an intellectual bent
and a general knowledge of the world while also
having the ability to express themselves
emotionally in pleasures and through family bonds.
They regard extreme behavior as harmful and
damaging to individuals and to the overall health
of the wider community and planet. An emotional
extremist, however, gets caught up in psychic
practices or embroiled in phobias. Some people
have been forced into situations of emotional
instability due to circumstances and conditioning. I
am not condemning or judging them. In healing this
is never done; we try simply to listen, to look, and
to love. Every person is different. Everyone has
particular gifts and problems. Everyone is trying to
find something more meaningful, more fulfilling
and sustaining, whether it be in personal
relationships, in work, in the home, in the
environment, or in the inner life.
Now, we have had a brief tour of the several
bodies of the personality, noticing in a general way
how each expresses itself. You will find the word
“expressing” cropping up. What is expressing, or
rather who is being expressed through the mind, the
emotions, the vital and physical bodies? The soul.
The soul also has modes of expressing itself.
These are called the soul bodies.

The soul bodies

The other component of concrete thinking—the
wellspring of intellectual concepts, percepts and
deductions—is the abstract thinking faculty, the
realm of ideas and formless thoughts. This “upper”
part of the mental body is called abstract mind, or,
more usually, the soul. The soul is beyond
personality influence. Thought ceases. There are
no desires. The emotional loves and hates have
been left behind. In the realm of the soul there is a
sense of tranquillity and composure, a tranquillity
which is not passive and inert, but poised and
ready to act. What is this state and how can we get
into it? The soul is immersed in a sea of illusion,
hence it is necessary to interact with physical
reality, which means suffering resulting in wisdom
(Bailey, 1973). (The esoteric reason for this is
explained later, in Chapter 4.) In soul
consciousness, the essence of everything is
available; there is no longer concern with details;
the world is a world of realities, where deception
is not only impossible, but also unthinkable. As
souls we no longer deal with emotions, ideas, or
conceptions, but with the thing in itself (Leadbeater
[1925] quoted in Powell, 1978).
WHERE IS THE SOUL?
Personality problems and actions, joys and
sorrows, wishes, hopes, and ideals do not exist in
this “place.” The soul dimension is different
altogether, a place where there is no space/time,
and no polar opposites. The trouble is that since it
is so totally different, not many people know what
this place is, let alone how to get there! Popular
deluders and spiritual hoaxers are quick to sell
phony admission tickets. What we have to
remember, however, is that consciousness houses
all states from the lowest to the highest. We have
the capacity to witness them, to identify with them
and to develop them. Everything from the lowest to
the highest is moving, growing, evolving in
consciousness.
Through the processes of life and living,
growth is achieved. It is as though we have a
flowering plant within us representing the states of
consciousness we have won. Some people’s
“plant” is a tender shoot with only a few leaves on
it. Primitive people, they might be struggling to
survive, thinking mostly about finding food and
shelter. Other people’s “plant” might be much
larger, having branches growing in many
directions. These people have found the ability to
work and influence others, and to be of service to
their fellows, while getting their daily bread and
protecting their family. Then there is a person’s
“plant” which has become a strong, beautiful,
flowering tree with fruits sweet and abundant.
These are people who have developed a still
wider consciousness and who are working in more
profound dimensions. They can help humanity to
make changes that will be beneficial to its future.
These are the “saviours” of our planet. Of course,
there are many stages between these different
grades, but it illustrates how people grow in
consciousness. And the purpose of evolution is to
develop consciousness. In the human stage of
evolution the purpose is to evolve the causal body,
that is, to gain wisdom from experience
(Lansdowne, 1987). Again, this is not a
condemnation or judgment of the lower stages or of
any stage. It is simply an observation, a recognition
of the essential and necessary steps that must take
place on the road to heaven.
Heaven is the same as the soul. “The kingdom
of heaven is within you,” said Jesus. “Seek ye the
kingdom of heaven and all will be given unto you,”
he said also. Some people “take heaven by storm,”
meaning that by strict training, anyone can gain
higher consciousness. The soul is a state of mind
but not of thought.
The healer in esoteric healing is called to enter
the consciousness of the soul and from there to do
the work. This might at first seem to be an
impossible task. Thankfully it is not! Luckily, we
are in the position to enter the soul because the
soul is only one step further than we are at present.
It is the next state of achievement for humanity.
What’s more, the healer works in the patient’s soul
as it expresses itself via the etheric body. From
there we have easy access to the higher
consciousness of the patient. While the next step
for the mind (intellect) is the soul, the next goal of
science (and of the physical body) is the etheric
body.
Another important way to view the soul is as
the principle of sentiency. Underlying all outer
manifestation, pervading all forms, and constituting
the consciousness of God is the principle of
sentiency. The stages of sensitivity through this
soul principle mark the stages and kingdoms of the
world and of heaven. Simply owning sentiency
produces space, the environment. As soon as this
“ground” becomes qualitative, reactive to another,
the other, the not-self, we find matter (the mineral
kingdom). Later, as this develops (in time and
space), plants emerge in all their diversity; from
them evolve the animals; then come humans who
then advance into higher realms of experience,
known as aspirants, disciples, initiates, masters,
nirmanakayas, and gods. Esoterically, you will
understand, the most advanced began these life-
processes first, whereas the least advanced, which
we see today as stones and metals, atoms and
elements, began their evolutionary development
latest or most recently. They are our younger
brethren. This, of course, gives a new perspective
to Darwinism and neo-Darwinism.
THE SOUL IN THE WORLD
The human, the soul, has struggled through the
centuries, mastering life in a most remarkable way.
Now many of us no longer need to go out with our
spears or guns, spades and tractors to get our food.
A few do it for us. And we do other things for
them. We no longer have to cut down trees and
build fires to keep warm. A few do it for us. We no
longer have to build houses and make clothing. A
few do it for us. We no longer have to be on the
lookout all the time for bandits and thieves. A few
do it for us. And so on. When these groups of
“few” interact, we get a community, a nation, a
world—a world of human beings locked in
interdependence with the world around us. There’s
still a lot to do for our world. Improvements are
needed, greater understanding is needed, more
cooperation is needed, greater sharing is necessary
—before the goal can be achieved for which we
entered this sphere of suffering. We have a way to
go before these ideals are tangible. We are
struggling to mount the slopes of mind. At times
they are steep. But, more and more, man is moving
into these greater heights with a wider, more
inclusive view. And some are already mounting
higher. They are the pioneers. Some of these
pioneers are the esoteric healers.
A SOUL’S LADDER
The soul’s “garments” are the personality.
They are threefold: underclothes, a suit, and a coat
(physical-etheric body, emotional body, and mental
body). The soul works through these. The physical
is divided into visible form and the invisible (to
most people), vitality being the power which
enables the dense form to function. The soul body
is beyond personality consciousness, yet the
personality is the threefold expression of the soul.
So let’s look at the soul more closely.
The soul is also threefold. Each of the soul’s
bodies directly influences the personality bodies.
This is wonderful to know, for the personality is
like a ladder which comes down from heaven for
us to ascend!
The Soul’s Ladder (the Cosmic Egg)
 You see these interactive steps? We will start
from the higher mind.

The higher mind

The higher mind incorporates: the Soul, the
Causal Body and the Mental Permanent Atom. All
these terms must be explained and then
experienced by the esoteric healer.
AWAKENING THE SOUL
The higher mind links with the mental body via
the soul or what is called the antahkarana, the
bridge. These two aspects of the soul, its two basic
qualities, bring into being the human kingdom and
enable man to contact both the lower kingdoms in
nature and the higher spiritual realities. The first,
the quality of mind in its lower manifestation, is
owned potentially by every atom in every form in
every kingdom in nature. Such intelligence is a part
of the body’s nature, inherent and potential, and is
the real basis of brotherhood, of absolute unity, of
universal synthesis, and of divine coherence in
manifestation. The other, the higher aspect, is the
principle of self-awareness, and when combined
with the lower aspect produces the self-
consciousness of the human being (Bailey, 1951–
70, v. 1, p. 55).
There is a real and established connection
with the higher mind by the personality, but it is
unconscious at first. That is, we can live perfectly
reasonably without any “higher awareness.” But as
the consciousness unfolds and the personality gains
wider and profounder experience, both through
suffering and pain as well as through the wonder of
achievement and human interconnections, there
starts the process of questioning and “wakening up
to the spirit.” This opens up the person to a whole
new world of beauty and of causes. What was
before simply accepted and worked with, now is
questioned and subjected to rigorous tests and
trials. If physicists, for example, hadn’t questioned
and tested the boundaries of perception, we would
never have realized the theory of relativity or
quantum theory. The veil is being pierced which
separates the subtler levels of insight and
realization from the more “earthbound” emotions
and thoughts. At first these insights are few and far
between, but they come regularly enough to keep
the person searching, like the donkey after the
carrot. Sometimes this insight is so strong and so
totally different from one’s normal way of thinking
that the person can change completely from being
one kind of person to being, for example, very
religious, or rigidly vegetarian, or ambitiously
political. The ray of vision may, of course, work
the other way, making the person depressed,
insecure, and motiveless. Esoteric healing can help
much to alleviate these symptoms.
THE CAUSAL BODY AND SOUL BODY
The causal body, found in the higher mind, is
the part of the soul that absorbs all the good, the
pure, the true, the beautiful that is done in the
personality life. In so doing it leaves behind all the
dross, the unclean, the lies and unkindnesses, and
everything that goes against the law of love and
brotherliness and progress. Hence, when a baby is
born, it is innocent, pure, and untainted, for it is the
direct result of the causal body’s expression of the
last life.
The so-called permanent atoms are found
within the causal body. Each permanent atom is a
kind of policeman or guardian angel for each of the
temporary bodies. Thus we have a guardian angel
of the physical body—looking after (watching over
and keeping records of) all the good, true and
beautiful done in the physical life. There is a
guardian of the emotional body—watching and
recording the same in the emotional life. And there
is a permanent atom of the mental body, a being
who guards and files all the good, true and
beautiful done via the mind and intellect. These are
all held in the causal body for safekeeping and are
used during the formation of the new bodies each
time we come down to a new birth. So with every
new incarnation we can become more advanced
(or rather, more like our true self, the soul) than the
last life. This is the law of evolution, which is the
law leading to perfection and enlightenment. It is
clear that there will be deficiencies in each
permanent atom. Since we are not perfect and have
not developed each body perfectly (as shown in
our actions, words and thoughts), called the Path of
Initiation, the deficiencies in each permanent atom
(physical actions, emotional control, and mental
understanding) will come out as imperfections or
diseases, to make us aware of the area needing
development and incorporation into our
consciousness. Such is the thoughtfulness of life!
Notice the law of polarity at work governing
the work of the causal body. Our real design is to
pass beyond the controls of the opposites and
realize a world of non-distinction, a vision of
oneness, wholeness; a realization that all is in the
one and the one is in the all: Unity. This is the mark
of a high initiate, a mark leading away from the
world of effects and into the world of causes, a
mark which eventually brings about the destruction
of the causal body itself and signals the entry into a
new world of service not requiring any further
births on earth. However, until that time, we are
under the rule of causal polarity. This means that
whatever we do will be attracted to one or other of
the polarities, sometimes referred to as “good
karma” and “bad karma.” Whatever we sow, we
will reap.
Good karma is everything that is helpful,
beneficial, loving, selfless, up-building, or what
we say is good. Bad karma results from actions
that are counterproductive, selfish, destroying,
damaging, hurtful, malevolent, or what we term
“evil.” The “good” is gathered by the causal
body’s permanent atoms (according to whichever
body carried out the action, and usually a
combination of all of them); the bad or evil is
gathered in the opposite pole to the causal, waiting
until we have cleared the debt necessary to be
accepted into the higher register. Such debt is
termed “samsara” in Buddhism, meaning it is the
transient and ever-changing trap which binds us to
ever-repeated rebirths. These energies are then
used by the soul, working through the causal body,
to build another body for further refining in the
world. (Said in a more esoteric way, these
energies are then used by the soul, working through
the causal body, to build another body from the
planetary substance for further refining in this
world, leading eventually to restoration or
resurrection of the planetary life and the liberation
of the life called “human being.”) They act as
nuclei to attract the relevant “particles” of matter
(mental, astral or physical) from the highest aspect
of these bodies (governed by the permanent atom
of that body) to the lowest vibration (governed by
the polarity). (There is an occult hint here which I
do not wish to expand on, but it relates to the
whole question of eventual abandonment of the
need to incarnate.)
This helps us to know who we are, and why
we are the way we are in our different personality
bodies. The liberating principle, if we could but
put it into practice, is to balance and accept
ourselves as we are, to see ourselves as whole
(through our imperfection into which we were
born) and walk on, keeping to the fulcrum point,
the middle way, the present moment. Toward this
awareness the esoteric healer works. It is this that
resolves the causal polarity and obliterates
disease, each disease relating to a specific causal
polarity.... If you can’t understand any of this, don’t
worry, move on and read it again some other time.
Here are just a few of the marvelous qualities
to be found in the soul: love, inclusiveness, joy,
sharing, loneliness (or spiritual aloneness),
impersonality, detachment, freedom, serenity,
tranquillity, responsibility, wisdom, intuition, a
sense of the unfolding Plan for human evolution.

The intuitive soul

The intuitive part of the soul incorporates the
intuition, and the intuitional permanent atom.
Please refer to Chart I earlier in Chapter 3. The
intuition concerns unity and is the capacity of the
Self to contact other Selves. We no longer identify
with the former not-self (Bailey, 1962, p. 201). On
the intuitional plane we find our planetary Logos’s
centers or chakras, connected to the fourth ether of
man. The whole of the intuitive soul, being the
middle aspect of this upper or higher or spiritual
triad, is related via the soul in the higher mind to
the middle principle of the personality, which is
the emotional body. The spiritual triad consists of
the abstract mind, the intuition and the spiritual
will, called in this book the soul. Viewed from the
personality these phases of consciousness are
indeed spiritual, hence esoteric healing
incorporates spiritual healing while also involving
the monadic levels of being.

The spiritual soul

Little can be said of this level, for it lies ahead
on the Path for most of us. The spiritual soul
incorporates: the highest aspect of the spiritual
triad, the true purpose and will of the soul, and the
spiritual or atmic permanent atom. This exalted
part of man, an area of our consciousness which is
very different from the personality part, is related
via the soul-in-the-higher-mind to the lowest
aspect of the personality, the physical body. Only
in our highest ideals can we conceive of
consciousness in the spiritual triad. Healers who
have triadal consciousness and who can, via the
spiritual triad, exercise the potency of the will and
monadic life, will always be successful healers
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 547).
THE BRIDGE
Notice that all the communications between the
higher mind, intuition and spirit and the personality
are done via the soul aspect in the higher mind.
Thus the soul acts as a bridge between the spiritual
world and the world of the personality. Once the
bridge has been crossed, or can be crossed
backwards and forwards without fear of falling
off, so to say, then the specific dimensions of the
intuitional soul and spiritual soul open up to
experience. Until such time, those higher
dimensions are stepped down so that the soul in the
higher mind can experience them. In this respect
the soul acts like a transformer. (Refer to Chart I
and the diagram earlier in Chapter 3.)
The permanent atoms in the three soul bodies
are virtually unused and remain like unfertilized
seeds, pure and angelic, until such time as the
bodies of the spiritual triad begin to be used. Then
they will act exactly like the permanent atoms of
the personality bodies. It requires building yet
another bridge, which will be built only when the
first bridge between the personality and the soul is
no longer needed. How this bridge is built and
how we have to dig away the dirt, impediments
and debris is described in certain of the healing
triangles and elsewhere.

The monad
The subtle anatomy of the human being has
now been outlined. The life of the human being
first expresses itself via a spiritual triad that is
focussed in the soul, that is, in the consciousness of
the higher mind. This threefold body manifests on
earth as a personality in the form of a mind,
emotions, and a physical-and-vital body. The
monad is the source of light, not only to the human
family, but also to the planet acting as the receiver
of light from the threefold Sun. It is the lens through
which the light of the Solar Logos can flow to the
planetary Logos, preserving and holding steady in
that light the vision, the purpose, the will, and the
creative intention of the planetary Logos (Bailey,
1944, v. 2, p. 400). The monad is the real,
immortal part of man.The head is analogous to the
spirit aspect, which on the physical plane
corresponds to the two eyes (Bailey, 1951–70, v.
4, p. 165). In the soul the monad manifests as the
“Jewel in the Lotus,” and the life thread or the
sutratma, which is embodied in the heart center.
Further, the monad is the real individual identity
who is struggling to get to know herself so that she
can be of service to her fellows and to the planet
on which she has been assigned a specified task—
a task which is unique to each one of us, but one
that is compatible and ultimately cooperative with
those of all the others. This is the grand purpose
and plan for humanity (sixty billion human monads,
of whom only some eight percent are in incarnation
at any one time)—a purpose and plan we are only
just beginning to understand and comprehend. (For
more on this theme, see Appendix A at the end of
Chapter 8.) In time we will really know, and then
we will even more wholeheartedly throw
ourselves into the work. At present it is but dimly
visioned and we move on practically in the dark,
led and encouraged by a few who have traveled a
little further on the way and who know the terrain.
But at times we are misled by some who
misunderstood the indications, or who deliberately
misinform the gullible, or mistakenly acted on a
false notion of the ancient teaching.[17] We will
know about the Plan, as understood by those
Masters who have learned the lessons and
transmuted certain qualities, when we have related
the monad to the personality, a way called “the
Sushumna Path” (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 183).
All we know about this Plan at the present stage of
our evolutionary development is that we are to
develop and establish good will and right human
relations.
 4.
THE PURPOSE OF
DISEASE

The whole question of healing, whether it

involves taking a medicine, or having a
manipulation or receiving some form of
counseling, or in some other way, inevitably
requires someone to be the receiver, the patient,
the client, the case—the one who is “ill” and needs
help. On the other side is the therapist, or healer—
the doctor who tries to get the patient well.
Between the two sides there is an exchange of
energy. The transaction begins as soon as the
patient asks for help. Something further occurs
when medication is given. Some patients get well,
some do not, some respond quickly, others slowly,
some develop secondary problems, some change
their habits permanently, others do not or feel they
cannot, and so on. These are some of the many
aspects of any form of medication or therapy.
Again, we are dealing with energy: energy
absorption—energy rejection, energy referral—
energy deferral, energy reflection—energy
deflection, energy invocation—energy evocation.
A tablet or a mixture of herbs is but a mental
pattern, picture or symbol, a specific energy
combination formulated to suit a particular patient
with a particular set of symptoms. If this is
imperfectly conceived, the remedy won’t work
properly. Should there be a good resonance
between the two, however, the person will get
better. A healer is working in the same way, but the
“tablet” we offer is unpackaged, acting directly in
some subtle body or sub-plane of the personality
consciousness on the cause that is blocking or
hindering higher (soul) energy from expressing
itself. Acting on this causative level is the ideal
“time-release,” for the healing energy then has to
filter down to the physical body. The effectiveness
of the healing depends on the readiness of the
patient to express more of who the real self is. And
since this readiness is frequently inadequate or
weak, the symptoms usually persist and the patient
(forced by the symptoms to face this weakness)
returns week after week for further treatments.

Results in the present

In medicine of whatever form, from surgery to
esoteric healing, we are dealing with the patient’s
past. Put simply, all illness and disease is the
result of the individual’s past. Confronting this
reality is like gazing up at the stars at night. Every
twinkling light that is reaching your eyes is at least
four years old, and in the case of some stars,
thousands of years old. The light you are seeing
left its source thousands of years ago; the reality is
not there! Similarly, the patient we greet is not the
real person, not the source of their expressed light.
But in healing we go up to meet the star itself, the
source, the soul, the patient’s true self.
From the simple physical level, there is a
cause and an effect. For instance, when a person
does not eat a balanced diet, the result will be
digestive disturbances. Any form of abuse will
lead eventually to illness. But some diseases defy
people’s understanding. “He was such an
outstanding athlete, ate properly, worked hard,
cared. You couldn’t have met a nicer person and
one in better health. Why then did he suddenly have
kidney failure?” In esoteric healing we are
permitted in some measure to know the meaning, to
get the answers.

Causes of illness
The esoteric healer recognizes that there is to
be found in one or more of his bodies—physical,
emotional and mental—the cause of an illness.
Generally speaking, physical diseases are of
ancient origin, whereas mental illnesses are the
most recent. The idea is that illness “descends”
from subtle levels down into the physical, like silt
in a stream. By the time it reaches the physical, the
“point of friction” is usually old, rather well
established, and the person’s consciousness has
been conditioned to believe it is unable to express
the higher counterpart of this kind of energy in the
present life. Normally, the energy is inherited at
least from a past incarnation. This idea is not new.
It is well known that stress
or anxiety, for example, is a precursor of irritable
bowel syndrome,
colitis, gastric ulcer, headaches, stiff neck and
shoulders. Illness from a certain angle is nothing
but an imbalance of energy flow from one body to
the next due to the misuse of force by individuals
or by groups in some earlier life or in this (Bailey,
1951–70, v. 4, p. 112). Such imbalance can result
in physiological changes, psychological
disturbances or mental imbalance. Simply put,
these are the areas where balance or harmony must
be restored for healing or cure to be effected. This
is what every therapist or doctor recognizes,
whether consciously or unconsciously. So our first
task is to understand the source of disease.

We can blame no one for the illness we have

We cannot even blame ourselves (that is, the
self of this incarnation). This is not easy to accept,
especially when it is recollected how parents may
have fed their children, abused them, or injured
them emotionally by restriction or anger, or
mentally tormented them through subtle means. The
best that can be done is to acknowledge the
injustice and realize that it was due to the
individual who is meant to learn something from it
for the future. As you sow, so you reap.
This principle (as hard and as cruel as it
sounds) includes all illnesses met with, whether
they come to us from outside, as it were, by
bacterial or viral invasion of our bodies (which
then causes the body to erupt and react and which
can then become chronic and go on for years), or
come from within, lodged in one or other of the
subtle bodies and seemingly impossible to grasp or
extract or extinguish. In whatever circumstance the
illness shows itself to you, the illness belongs to
you. It is yours. You have caused it to come to you.
After all, the symptoms of disease are those
aspects of your consciousness not being expressed
by you. They are qualities being inhibited and
repressed.
We may not understand the set of
circumstances which led you to this outcome but
knowledge of the reason is not necessary to
acknowledge a reality. For some reason, you chose
your parents, you chose the country and place of
your birth, you chose the environment in which you
grew up, you chose the influences that steered you
into different activities, and finally you chose the
illness that you have. And are we not all ill in one
form or another? Through these various
circumstances we are learning to gather
experiences for a fuller expression of our soul life.
We choose these things so that we can learn
something about ourselves which we could not
have learned in any other way.
More than this, and this is the Ancient
Wisdom’s wonderful explanation of the problem of
disease, the illnesses we experience have nothing
to do with us in reality; we are actually permitting
the faults of the planetary life to be transformed
through our conscious handling of the symptoms.
We are doing it as an act of love for the healing of
the planet. Let me try to explain.
Every one of the human family (sixty billion of
us, including souls not incarnated in a physical
body) is handling an aspect of this Being’s tragic
betrayal. When this great Life went astray in a
cosmic sense, which is beyond our present
spiritual comprehension, its whole organism
collapsed in a kind of coma-like paralysis (more
fully explained in Appendix at the end of Chapter
8). Understanding this should help us deal with
disease and illness with greater acceptance and
intelligence. As a hierarchy or collective, before
time began, we chose together to sacrifice our
monadic consciousness, our oneness and harmony
with the Divine for the purposes of Another, an
Unknown Brother who had in some way
misconstrued the Plan. Like a brother, we went
over to offer our assistance. To cross this cosmic
barrier meant a complete forsaking of everything
we had and were. For this reason, humanity as a
whole is esoterically called both the Lords of
Sacrifice and the Lords of Love. To save this
planetary Initiate, the human hierarchy (including
and involving all kingdoms) had to enter and
identify with the body, the atomic structure, of this
dis-eased Being. We can see by this that it is only
by taking matter into ourselves (and we do this by
“getting into earthly bodies”), matter which has
been “both tainted by origin and tainted by
alienation” (as explained in an ancient text) that we
are actually able to spiritualize it. Such a sacrifice
takes pain and suffering, endured in love and
knowledge of the truth. In this way we will
“restore the Plan on Earth, and seal the door where
evil dwells.” The pain and suffering which we
experience by having waking consciousness in the
body of flesh (let alone in a diseased state
mentally, emotionally or physically) is traumatic
and distressing to the spirit or monadic self.
Indeed, most people can only endure it for sixteen
hours a day before our higher self must be returned
to itself (in unconsciousness), for that is its
sacrifice, which we call sleep. Pain in itself is the
guardian of the form and the protector of substance;
it warns of danger; it indicates certain definite
stages in the evolutionary process; it is related to
the principle whereby the soul identifies itself with
substance. When the identification ceases, pain and
disease and also death lose their hold and the man
stands free, because disease and death are
qualities inherent in form, as it has become for this
poor, lost, deranged Lord.
Esoteric views of the nature of disease and its
cure are not widely known, even by long-standing
esoteric students. They need not be regarded as
true, but hypothetically possible; and until we
know, let us simply acknowledge that it may be so.
The sacrifice of the solar angels brought the
fourth or human kingdom into being. The “returning
nirvanis” (as they are called in esoteric literature),
with deliberation and full understanding, took
human bodies in order to raise those lower forms
of life nearer to the goal. These were and are
ourselves. The “Lords of Knowledge and
Compassion and of Ceaseless Persevering
Devotion” (another name for us as a group) chose
to die in order that lesser lives might live, and this
sacrifice has made possible the evolution of the
indwelling consciousness of Deity. This
consciousness, having worked its way through the
subhuman kingdoms in nature, needed the activity
of the solar angels to make further progress
possible. Herein lies
a. Our service to the Being of Life, through
sacrifice and death;
b. Our service to other souls, through deliberate
self-sacrificing purpose;
c. Our service to other forms of life in other
kingdoms.
 Taking a body is occultly considered to be
death. But we are the angels who “chose to die,
and in dying, lived.” Through this sacrifice, matter
is lifted up into a higher state. This is the mystery
hinted at in the world Scriptures, the secret of the
ages. It fills the pages of The Secret Doctrine by
H. B. Blavatsky and the books by Alice Bailey. We
cannot arrive at the realization of that supreme
sacrifice that we made with deliberation in the
early dawn of time (cf. Bailey, 1951–70, v. 2, p.
92).

Disease or illness is an opportunity

The pure Monad, the true Self, has taken fallen
substance as his/her body. This substance is matter
practically devoid of light. The Monad tries to
express its pure light through this substance,
however it is fractured, ruptured, distorted,
disturbed. These dis-eased symptoms of substance
are called FRACTORS. Everything, be it in
thought, feeling or action, that does not sparkle
with the pure gentle light of love, happiness and
the simplicity of goodness is a fractor of the real
you. Throughout life we work to remove or
transform these fractors. In esoteric healing such
fractoral removal means life transformation and a
greater expression of health on all levels.
We have chosen everything that has happened
to us up till now, the present, and if we are ill, we
accept this as a fractor self-induced. We now can
turn and face the future. “This is what I am now,
but what am I to be in the time to come?” The
future is fashioned by how we deal with our
present state (we are predestined eventually to
work with spiritual law). All healing methods are
about working with energy and about trying to alter
the vibratory rate of the flow of energies in the
body. We can respond positively to the disease and
gain a greater awareness. Or we can be passive
and unconscious of the presented opportunity.
Our Life can feel threatened, tested by stress,
illness or disease. How will we handle the
challenge? Will we give in to the disease’s
transforming powers and opportunity, which have
arisen as a result of the pure inner monadic light
having been “fractored” by the planetary substance
we have taken on as a body, and die (and this stage
is frequently necessary—some people will resist
this with all their might, prolonging the fight, and
holding the door closed despite the inevitability of
the illness to end in death, but again this is
necessary for them to experience). If, however, the
disease is shaken off, the person is transformed
and returns to life a different person. We go
through something of our own past, fight it by
means of our present consciousness, and overcome
it. A door is opened and we meet a new set of
possibilities. That which was resisted and feared
is restored to self-consciousness and the person
becomes a little more whole. (See Appendix A at
the end of Chapter 8 for a full disclosure of our
origin and our esoteric purpose.)

The immune system

 Disease usually appears to come from “out
there” and less so from within. But recently there
has been much talk of the breakdown of the
immune system being the cause of all illness. Of
course, in our understanding of the subtler causes
of disease, that is not really quite accurate. The
immune system breakdown is itself the result of
some other cause. Looking at it from an energy
level, we can say that the immune system, as the
first line of defense, resists change. From the angle
of energy descending through the subtle vehicles,
the system acts as the last gateway, while also
contributing positively to change. Simply put, when
disease approaches, there is within us a barrier
and a buffer which will:
a. Resist and defeat.
b. Resist and be changed.
c. Resist and be defeated.

In the first instance (resist and defeat), the

immune system is well equipped. It probably has
met the invader before and quickly routs it. In
healthy people this happens all the time. It means
we can do the changing and developing of
consciousness on a deeper level. But when there is
a need to develop the kind of consciousness which
cannot be done by the mind alone, then the immune
system breaks down, and with the aid of outside
help (medications of whatever sort), the defenses
(immunoglobulins) are strengthened and the illness
is defeated (resist and be changed). With its defeat
comes added strength to the immune system, which
can be summoned again if needed. In the third case
(resist and be defeated), the body says, “This time
I cannot move on in life without the process of
dying and death.” This is a difficult decision for
some people to take, especially younger ones, and
sometimes it will be drawn out, often very
painfully, over a number of years.

Resist and be changed

Let us proceed to the second category, “to
resist and be changed.” How esoteric healing
affects disease actually includes all three forms of
change, but appears to be more applicable to the
second insofar as it involves the flow of daily life.
The first change is not noticed, the last change ends
life. Disease is the result of the past. Now we have
to move one step closer to understanding it:
disease is the past. When we get ill, we are
meeting with some aspect of our past that we
cannot accept, and which now is confronting us.
This is what is called a “fractor”—an aspect
within the substance of ourselves with which we
are now better equipped to deal. You often hear ill
people calling out, “Why me?” and “Why now?”
Part of the answer is, any part of the past which
was not resolved is held in the body (mental,
emotional or physical) to be worked out later.
Let’s explain further. Earlier we noted that
when humans express the good, the true, and the
beautiful, we are exhibiting the only aspects of our
lives that have any lasting effect. Whatever else
transpires during our little lives is of no real
consequence. Yet nothing is really lost. What we
are is only an expression of a whole host of
memories. When we are born, we are innocent—
that is the revelation of our causal body and its
permanent atoms. As we grow, things that were
faced in the past, but were not turned into good,
have to be faced again. But because they belong to
the past and should have been overcome then, their
return is often much more urgent. They demand
resolution and change now. This is disease. We
face the past, we face our past, we face ourselves.
Moreover, disease is not simply a fight with past
failures, it is actually a release. Until we have
faced disease (and even death), we will be bound
or held by the ropes of earlier opportunities that
have turned into present restriction. These ties
have to be cut, or be unraveled and thrown off. So,
from disease we gain greater freedom, which will
result in greater achievement and fulfillment.
Through this process of transmuting the past, we
help the purification and restoration of the life of
the planet earth.
 5.
OUR MAJOR LIFE
CENTERS

Dealing with the phantoms, apparitions,

chimeras or illusions of the past in the form of
present illness alters energies in our other bodies
and centers. Healers must be aware of the qualities
and influences of the major etheric centers.
Balancing the energies in a center is one thing, but
working with the centers of energy as vortices in a
finely tuned circuit is quite another process.
Esoteric healing entails (i) pouring energy into the
center that governs the troubled area of the
physical body, stimulating the center higher than
the one controlling the particular area and, (ii) by
intensification of the higher center, reducing the
vitality of the lower. These two ways of using
energy and thought are the two fundamental
methods of directing energy to diseased areas
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 2, p. 284). These in turn are
related to the two major predisposing causes of
physical trouble arising within the physical
organism, namely, the understimulation or the
overstimulation of the centers (p. 283).
The incoming energy is transmuted within the
center into forces, that is, the primary energy is
differentiated into secondary energies. The rate of
transmutation, the strength of the resultant
aggregation of forces, and the subsequent radiatory
activity (causing the dense physical body to be
conditioned) are dependent upon the extent of the
unfoldment of the particular center involved and
upon its awakened or unawakened state. The
outgoing forces from a center play upon the
“nadis,” which are the etheric counterpart of the
entire intricate network of nerves constituting the
nervous system. This network of nadis affects
people according to its life pattern, which is
governed by the personality ray (Bailey, 1951–70,
v. 4, pp. 195–96).
Although a deeper description of the rays and
the centers must await a later book, let’s take a
brief look here. (For more about the rays, see
Chapter 10.) I need to say something briefly about
the rays and the centers although I do not want it to
sound too technical or complicated, but it is
something to be aware of in your future work as
esoteric healing practitioners. What I want to say
is this: One ray rules one center at any particular
period in a person’s life. However, the center will
differ depending upon which stage we are on the
evolutionary ladder. For example, in an average
person (a person not on the Path), Ray Three rules
the sacral center, but it rules the throat center of the
disciple and the ajna center of the initiate (after the
third initiation) (p. 121). For simplicity, according
to the science of esoteric healing, the following is
the general standard:

Ray One rules the head center.

 Ray Two rules the heart center.
Ray Three rules the sacral center.
Ray Four rules the base center.
Ray Five rules the throat center.
Ray Six rules the solar plexus center.
Ray Seven rules the ajna center.

Ray Three also rules the spleen center as well

as the alta major center, and Ray Six rules the
vagus nerve center. For those who would go on to
utilize the details of this information as
practitioners of Esoteric Healing, I will tabulate
the rulerships according to the three stages of
evolutionary development: average person,
disciple, and initiate.

Average Disciple Initiate

Person
Ray I Heart Base Head
Ray II Solar Plexus Head Heart
Ray III Sacral Throat Ajna
Ray IV Throat Sacral Base
Ray V Ajna Solar Plexus Throat
Ray VI Head Heart Solar
Plexus
Ray VII Base Ajna Sacral

These each form powerful triangles that could

be used to heal and would be especially useful in
the individual where any one center has a problem,
providing the healer is able to discern the patient’s
place on the Path. Remember the esoteric principle
of empowering the higher and reducing the vitality
of the lower.
Now, for the sake of clarity, let us see how this
looks from the angle of the centers, working from
average person, disciple, initiate:

Average Disciple Initiate

Person
Head Center— VI II Uranus I Pluto
Rays Neptune (Heart of
Sun)
Ajna Center— V Venus VII Uranus III Saturn
Rays
Throat Center— IV III Saturn V Venus
Rays Mercury
Heart Center— I Vulcan VI II Jupiter
Rays Neptune
Solar Plexus II Sun V Venus VI
Center—Rays Mars/Neptune
Sacral Center— III Earth IV Moon VII Uranus
Rays (Saturn)
Base Center— VII Pluto I Pluto IV Pluto
Rays

Let’s also look at the details of the stages on

the Path in the sequence of the rays to the centers:

Average Disciple Initiate

Person
Rays Centers Centers Centers
I Heart Base Head
II Solar Plexus Head Heart
III Sacral Throat Ajna
IV Throat Sacral Base
V Ajna Solar Plexus Throat
VI Head Heart Solar
Plexus
VII Base Ajna Sacral

EXERCISE
1. If you are gaining sensitivity and you are
unsure which ray governs each center, align, attune
with your higher self, and then connect with each
of the seven rays as you hold each center—a
response will be forthcoming. You must remain
completely objective and detached as to the result.
Get your results confirmed by another esoteric
healer if necessary.
2. You can also use this method to find out
your Ray Chart (the ray of your soul, personality,
mental body, emotional body and physical body)
saving you much time and effort in reading and
being confused by the intricacy of the subject.
After proper preparation (alignment and attunement
with your soul) esoterically place one hand into
your soul energy and scan each ray from one
through seven to get a response. You will know
which has the greatest response. You can also use
this method to find out your sub-rays. But mind,
you always keep objective and detached; work on
yourself as if on a stranger.
It is the condition of the centers which
produces, basically, all the difficulties, permitting
entrance to infections and germs which might not
otherwise cause trouble (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p.
207). These rays and centers are related to the two
major psychological types, for according to the
temperament so will be the types of disease, and
the temperament is dependent upon the ray quality;
these types are the extroverts and the introverts (p.
66). The problem today is that more and more
people are working with the spiritual, aspiring to
be seers, and too little with practical down-to-
earth living offering a service to the community in
which they live. Such aspiration tends to stimulate
the subtle organization of energies, which may
cause mental derangement, delusions,
hallucinations, and sometimes insanity. Certain
nervous complaints—affecting at times the
muscular equipment, causing twitches and jerking
—can be traced back to overstimulation of one
center or other. To help such aspiring patients,
teach them methods of divorcing themselves
temporarily from the source of this mystical or
spiritual potency. Or show them how to deflect the
forces pouring into and through the various centers
to those centers which can more safely handle
them, thus producing a more even distribution of
energy. We should also teach them how to use such
forces effectively in outer service.
The whole problem of how to respond to
energy is not an easy one, due to two events
happening in the world today. First, the coming in
of the Aquarian, Seventh Ray energies, and the
passing out of the Piscean, Sixth Ray influence.
Second, the movement towards the extroversion or
externalization of the great energies to which the
mass consciousness responds; and the movement
towards the introversion or the “turning inwards”
of the intelligent consciousness of those who are
awakening (entering the Path, or being accepted
into initiation). So when dealing with the centers
we are to be aware that the problem of the average
person is connected with the solar plexus center;
and the problem of the disciple, the advanced
aspirant, and the initiate of the lower degrees is
connected with the creative center, the throat
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 2, pp. 513–22).

What is an etheric center?

Etheric centers or chakras, as noted above, are
points where the lines of force composing the
etheric body cross each other, thus forming
vortices of energy. Where many lines of force
cross (symbolically twenty-one), a major center is
to be found. Where fewer lines of force cross
(symbolically fourteen and seven), we find minor
and minute centers respectively. There are seven
major centers with three other centers regarded as
of major importance (making ten centers), forty-
nine minor centers (twenty-one of which are more
important) and hundreds of lesser or minute
centers.
A center is fourfold in structure. Symbolically,
it is seen as a point, a triangle, petals and a circle.
The point is the so-called jewel of the center, the
life expression, where the monad can touch the
personality. The triangle indicates the link with the
spiritual triad, the achievement gained in the soul,
the rays of monad/soul/personality, that is, the true
spiritual achievement in the integrative
development between the higher self and lower
self. The petals are the expression of
consciousness. And the circle indicates the aura
and personality achievement in the particular
center. One half of the center, the outer half
(therefore one half of the lotus petals), is brought
into increased activity upon the probationary path;
the other half begins its intensified vibratory
activity upon the path of discipleship. But the
intensification of the center of the lotus (though the
One Life controls both soul and body) only takes
place when the two later techniques (of
transference of energy, see later on in this chapter)
of fusion and duality are carried successfully
forward (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 2, p. 385; cf. p. 106).
The understanding of force, of force
transmission, and of the effects of liberated force
upon the higher planes is the secret of occult
knowledge. Force or energy flows in from the soul.
It works through the etheric centers and produces
results on the physical, emotional, and mental
planes, varying according to the age of the soul. As
yet, through lack of alignment, this egoic force
does not reach the physical brain as fully as it later
will, but it does reach the centers in astral
vehicles, accounting for much of that lack of
emotional control so common in the world today.
Eventually, after many, many lives of learning
through the equipment of the personality to serve as
a soul, and after we have fulfilled the training
requirements on the Path, the centers will become
globes of radiant fire with the spokes of the wheel
merging and blending into a “fire that burneth up
the whole.” As an ancient text states:

The secret of the Fire lies hid in the second

letter of the Sacred Word (AUM). The mystery
of life is concealed within the heart. When the
lower point vibrates, when the Sacred Triangle
glows, when the point, the middle center, and
the apex likewise burn, then the two triangles—
the greater and the lesser—merge with one
flame which burneth up the whole.
The fire within the lesser fire findeth its
progress much impelled when the circle of the
moving and the unmoving, of the lesser wheel
within the greater wheel that moveth not in
Time, findeth a twofold outlet; it then shineth
with the glory of the twofold One and of His
sixfold brother. Fohat rusheth through space. He
searcheth for his complement. The breath of the
unmoving one, and the fire of the One Who
seeth the whole from the beginning rush to meet
 each other, and the unmoving becomes the
sphere of activity (Bailey, 1962, pp. 172–73).

The healer has to think clearly before bringing

about the desired results, but the energy poured
into the patient’s vehicle is not mental energy, but
one of the seven[18] forms of pranic or life energy.
This travels along the line of force or the
channel which relates and links all the centers and
connects those centers with the glands (Bailey,
1951–70, v. 4, p. 627). Therefore, we see energy
flowing from the centers into the denser channels
called nadis which underlie the nervous system as
a whole (the consciousness stream), and via the
endocrine glands into the blood stream via
hormones (the life stream). But remember the
healer only works with the life aspect (not the
consciousness aspect), endeavoring to work
through the very heart of the center where the point
of life is to be found. From this point, life rays out
into the petals of the center (the consciousness
stream), which thus adjusts and aligns the patient
towards greater receptivity to their solar angel, the
higher self, the soul. Clearly, therefore, and this is
worth repeating, disease is to be found in the
activity or the non-activity of the centers (since the
centers govern the correct functioning of the entire
organism), producing both physiological and
psychological effects. The importance of the
endocrine glands cannot be overestimated. They
are a miniature replica of the septenary constitution
of the universe and are the medium of expression
and the instrument of contact for the seven ray
forces. The Master DK confirms that the medicine
and the healing methods of the future civilization
will be built around this still unrecognized truth (p.
140).
In all our work as esoteric healers and as
servers in the world of causes for the betterment of
humanity, we must remember that we are working
with the science of energies (called the science of
occultism) and that this will eventually lead us to
what is called the science of laya yoga or the
esoteric science of the force centers (Bailey,
1951–70, v. 3, p. 515). This book is an outgrowth
of the science of energies. With this understanding
we are not to take lightly what we therapeutically
discover in these areas when we are working with
these energies. This chakra sensitivity to threefold
balancing is far more advanced than what is
popularly termed “energy work.” So we are called
on to respect the human energy fields we enter:
they are intricate, delicate and intimate, deeply
personal and karmically sensitive.
We will now briefly review each center,
starting from the lowest and rising to the highest.
Unless otherwise indicated, all of the major
centers are in the etheric vehicle outside the dense
physical body.

Base center
Average person—Ray VII; Disciple—Ray I;
Initiate—Ray IV. Pluto is the planet whose
influence governs all the stages of this center’s
development.
 Its Sanskrit name is Muladhara. The fires of
the animal plane are centralized in the base center.
These fires are saturated at a spot that stands in
relation to the physical body as the physical sun to
the solar system (Bailey, 1962, p. 55). The base
center is found near the coccyx of the spine, about
two to six inches outside of the dense physical
body in the etheric spine. It is found on the fourth
ether of every plane (p. 817). This center attracts
the energy of personality-will into activity when
purpose is focussed through the head center. The
base chakra is strongly influenced by the law of
attraction, or rather the law of acquisition on the
different levels.
Just as we can acquire possessions in the
physical world, we can do the same in our subtle
bodies. Where there’s attraction, there’s repulsion.
The base governs elimination, emotional, mental,
and spiritual. This center drives the adrenal
glands, found like hats on top of the kidneys. The
base center, by controlling the adrenals, causes the
hormone adrenaline to be injected directly into the
blood stream. Adrenaline fuels the basic drive to
human activity, most noticeable whenever there is
an emergency wherein the “fight or flight”
mechanism is set in motion. The ancient instinct of
fear and self-preservation anchors the personality
in the current incarnation. Look at a simple
physiology textbook to find out the way adrenaline
is utilized in the body, and also the problems it
causes when there is too little or too much being
passed into the blood. In esoteric healing it is not
particularly necessary to know this physiology,
although it may be a help to understanding the
physical mechanism of the base center. The base
center governs the legs (e.g., specifically the knees
to flee with), as well as the spine, for through the
base center we depend on our uprightness, the way
we carry ourselves, the way we walk and stand
and sit. In your client’s postures you can be guided
as to how their base center is functioning. Spinal
problems always have a base center involvement;
in fact, the base center governs the whole skeletal
system. Wherever bones are diseased or a
problem, the base center will be implicated. The
base center controls the kidneys as well, and rules
the bones, the muscles, the skin, the hair, sinews—
the scaffolding of the body.
Biologically, the adrenal glands are double in
origin: the medulla, of nervous tissue origin; and
the cortex, from primitive kidney origin. The
adrenal function reflects this double origin. The
medulla is in charge of helping the activity of the
sympathetic nervous system, while the cortex is
involved in the regulation of the metabolism,
mainly through the glucose and sodium balance.
The base center has a special relation to the spleen
center (see below, in the Spleen Triangle of Force)
(Bailey, 1962, p. 55). The smell sense is
controlled by the base center. The base center also
is the harbor of our unconscious fears and instincts
for survival as well as for success and
achievement (ambition). Over-activation of the
base center can cause stress changes in the body,
which may include high blood pressure and have
related kidney involvement. The elemental being of
the physical body (one of the three lunar Lords)—
that is, the essential materiality of the dense body
—is in the base center (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 2, p.
304).
The base center is a four-petalled lotus, a
powerful symbol linked to the Mother of the
World, the Earth, the Cross, the Square, and the
fourth (human) kingdom of nature. The “kundalini”
energy sleeps in the base center. This chakra
comes into its true functioning activity when two
major fusions have been effected: that of the
fusions of the three bodies into one coordinated
personality, and when soul and body are at-oned
(p. 435). At the first initiation or expansion of
consciousness, man consciously connects with the
will of his intelligence and he discovers the light
of his true nature (Bailey, 1979, p. 106). Ray I, the
fifth initiation of Revelation, and the base center
are all connected (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 5, p. 340).
The purpose of the base center is to give order
to the person, to arrange the person’s life so that
there is a reason for living and a right to life.
Neatness, tidiness, punctuality, clarity of purpose
and direction are some of its positive and balanced
qualities. But this neatness can also become over-
disciplined. Unbalanced energy flow through the
base center can result in inability to change,
insecurity, in a driving ambition without thought of
others, aggression, and manipulative activities. Or
the exact opposite of these can occur when the
energy flow is not getting through, demonstrating as
inertia (spinelessness, no will to think or do), lack
of ambition or motivation, carelessness, coldness,
laziness.

Sacral center
Average person—Ray III; Disciple—Ray IV;
Initiate—Ray VII. Uranus is the governing
influence assigned by the Master DK, but
esoterically this center is governed by the Moon
(linked to Saturn); it is also strongly governed by
Earth in the early stages.
The sacral center is found a little further up the
spine, outside the juncture of the lumbar and sacral
vertebrae. The eight-petalled sacral center controls
the gonad glands (testes and ovaries, with their
hormones testosterone, estrogen and progesterone)
and the whole reproductive system, including the
breasts. Any physical problem in these areas
implies sacral involvement. Sacral energies
govern also all the fluids of the body, including
blood, lymph, semen, amniotic fluid, mucus, and
urine, which relates the center to the kidneys as
well. This center, along with the base, governs the
legs (specifically the hips and feet). It is the center
of birth, on all levels and from many angles (e.g., it
has a strong influence over rebirth, new birth, new
beginnings, the first initiation, and death—the birth
into a new dimension, and so on). Neoplasm
(cancer) is the result of rapid rebirth of tissue cells
—all cancers are due to misappropriated sex
energy. The sacral energy is mainly to do with self-
perpetuation, so it has a powerful attractive or
magnetic quality towards its complementary
opposite. Simply stated, it is the sacral center
which sends out bleeps to the opposite sex. And
since this is the center which, as it were, brings
two people together for regenerative purposes, we
can see how it has a particular relation to the vital
etheric body. Sacral energy gives a person vitality
and attractiveness.
This center also concerns everything to do
with family connections, inheritance, ancestors,
that is, protectiveness, the sexual lusts and instincts
(really the urge towards unity and the innate desire
for the mystical marriage), fears, resentments,
bonds, loves, hates, and all familial difficulties.
The sacral center is the origin also of the sense of
superiority or inferiority.
This center also governs personal education
and family responsibility, a greater sense of
impersonality leading to the sense of group life.
Once the sacral is correctly led up to the throat
center, the creative process is transformed into
sound thoughts and pure speech.
Clearly, the sacral is a creative center. Anyone
having attended a human birth stands agog at the
magic and miracle of its technique, conflict and
complexity, organization and sheer marvel. This
may well reflect the nature of the mental body’s
elemental being which is related to the sacral
center (later to be transferred to the throat center)
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 2, p. 304). Its relation to the
throat center connects it to the “True.” The failure
of the personality to respond, and its inability to
express the True (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 569), is
to be seen as the failed alignment between these
two centers. Be true to yourself, using the fulcrum
of harmlessness.
The esoteric nature of this center involves two
important foundations. The first, which goes back
into the night of time, involves separatism,
symbolized in the story of Eve being born from the
“rib” of Adam—the separation of the sexes (the
sacral was the dominant center in old Lemuria,
eighteen million years ago). Lemuria was a land
mass now covered by the Indian Ocean. All
separation, division, polarity and opposition is
said to have underlying sacral influences. The lack
of confidence found in many people who are not
able to express themselves as who they truly are is
due to this center’s lack of creative harmony with
the throat center. The second attribute of the sacral
center is its capacity to regenerate or “build.”
These building energies are etheric, controlled by
beings called the lunar lords.
This center, therefore, can be brought into
healing circuits when, for instance, vertebral discs
have collapsed, or when joint capsules have been
worn, resulting in osteoarthritis. One of the key
esoteric methods for bringing the etheric building
energy in is to employ the patient’s mental body’s
sacral center, for it is here that the patient will
learn how to integrate the sacral and throat centers
with due personal responsibility and a greater
sense of self-education regarding the patient’s
relationship between family, friends, food, and the
environment.
The sacral center has a particular relation to
the etheric body as a whole. The etheric (its four
subplanes) are the lowest correspondence to the
four planes whereon the monad and the Spiritual
Triad are active, and just as on those levels there
is no such thing as consciousness as we know it, in
the etheric we do not have “consciousness,” but
rather a state of being and of activity. In this sphere
we are called upon to function adequately in
response to the life of the soul (on higher levels, to
the life of the planetary Logos) (Bailey, 1951–70,
v. 5, p. 178). This throws new light on the strength
and use of the sacral center. A hint as to how we
can respond is given us by the expressions of the
plant kingdom in relation to the deva kingdom.

Spleen center
This is a third ray center peculiarly influenced
by Sun and Earth energies.
The spleen center is not one of the seven major
centers, but its importance warrants some
description. Its central force field is at the back of
the etheric body, close to and connected to the
physical spleen itself, to the left of the navel. The
etheric spleen center is not controlled in any way
from the etheric spinal column as are the other
major centers. The spleen center is a double minor
center, i.e., one center superimposed on the other.
These two vortices have six petals each, making it
a twelve-petalled lotus, linking it to the other
twelve-petalled lotuses (heart, heart-in-the head,
egoic or soul lotus, planetary heart, etc.) but giving
it a massive twenty-eightfold energy structure
(more powerful even than the major centers), as
opposed to the usual fourteenfold energy structure
of other minor centers. (Recall that minor centers
are formed by fourteen energy crossings over one
point.) It is via the spleen that the negative or
receptive life of matter and the living energy of the
positive etheric body are brought together, and then
a “spark,” as it is called, is made between the
physical plane and the inner living bodies of man
(through the medium of the etheric body) (Bailey,
1951–70, v. 4, p. 335). It is a center of the third ray
of matter, which was particularly dominant during
the ancient civilization of Lemuria. This is the
center most involved when there is too much or too
little energy in the personality life, when the
person feels depleted or highly strung. The spleen
center assimilates the energy or nervous force
often referred to as planetary prana, which is
distinctive from the individualized life force. The
incoming prana rises to the heart center and
connects with the individualized life stream. There
is a very important energy circuit that comes off
this center called the Spleen Triangle of Force, and
that has a powerful reflection in the head called the
Immortality Triangle. The spleen center which
governs the working of the body, i.e., the amount of
life-force available in the body, just as the liver
center, a minor center close to the liver, governs
how the body works, i.e., how smoothly or
erratically the organs function.
Prana varies in vibration and quality according
to the receiving entity. You can begin to see how
different centers are related to others and how the
whole begins to be revealed as a system of
coordinates. The spleen center is frequently called
upon in esoteric healing to help replenish deficient
energy in an area which is dis-eased. Probably
over 90% of patients at this time suffer from
depletion of this energy, so one can appreciate that
getting this center functioning and its energy
circulating is primary in a healing treatment. The
spleen center is connected to many electrical
circuits within the body. From a higher angle, the
astral spleen vitalizes the emotions, and the mental
aspect of the spleen vitalizes thoughtforms by
means of will (Bailey, 1950a, p. 72).
Esoterically, the spleen center is directly
connected with the antahkarana (a bridge from the
personality consciousness to the soul). This
connection goes from the spleen center to the
physical permanent atom (first ether) to the astral
permanent atom (on the first subplane of the astral
plane), to the mental unit (upper limit of the
personality, the fourth subplane of the mental
body), to the jewel of the lotus or Soul, through the
manasic permanent atom (first subplane of the
mind), to the Spiritual Triad itself. This makes the
spleen very special, a center which stands apart, a
center highly advanced to the extent that its
physical expression is virtually transmuted already
into its etheric counterpart.
Certain natural healers who have no specific
spiritual or esoteric training and who often don’t
even have a particular spiritual orientation are
able to heal using the energy flowing from this
center. They usually have no knowledge of how or
why they have this healing ability. The healing
force is a strong current of vitality from the planet
being transformed by the splenic center and
moving out to the patient. Such healers are working
only with the spleen center and not with any of the
major centers. However, their results can be as
effective as an esoteric healing treatment, though
the results are usually temporary. Such healers, and
all healers working with faith or without
knowledge, are, as my colleague Janina Waloszek
once said, like lay people turning on the light
compared to an electrician turning it on—the result
is the same but the latter knows how it happened!
The days of the former type of healers, I believe,
are numbered. The point is, disease is a defective
circuit and, without inner knowledge of the
esoteric anatomy and the esoteric techniques of
healing, the former types of healing will have very
limited value, or none at all.
The spleen center is also linked with the
pituitary gland (see the Immortality Triangle), a
clue as to its place in the head centers. Its energy is
not transferred to any particular center (as for
instance the solar plexus energies go to the heart
center and the sacral energies go to the throat). The
splenic energy is consciously diffused to all the
centers. When its correspondence in the head
center is activated, it becomes an agent of occult
healing; through it, the healer, by an act of will,
absorbs the prana and vitality from the ethers and
then breathes it out again upon the patient to be
healed by an act of compassionate healing (cf.
Bailey, 1962, p. 859). This is exactly what the
esoteric healer does after performing the various
vitality triangles, described later.
 To keep the spleen center in good condition
(since few people have the faculty of stimulating it
through the esoteric use of the word OM), absorb
pranic energy from the sun (through sunlight, sun-
ripened foods, fruit, nuts and cereals, fresh air
from forests and coasts, and sleeping with a
window open at night), as well as move the
emotional body by high aspiration, keep open to
the downflow of force from the causal and
intuitional levels, and keep the mental life intense,
vibrant, and animated by a powerful will. In this
way, the spleen will progress and be in a healthy
condition (Bailey, 1950a, p. 71). Where this is not
the case, the person will experience devitalization,
a feeling of congestion, depression, physical
heaviness, inertia, fuzzy thoughts, and the
paradoxical tiredness with sleeplessness. This may
be the result of congested, burnt or punctured webs
(cf. Bailey, 1962, p. 104; 1951–70, v. 4, pp. 74–
75). One way of helping this condition is the use of
the Two Triangles of Force (#25).
Solar plexus center
Average person—Ray II; Disciple—Ray V;
Initiate—Ray VI. The Sun is the first influence
over the solar plexus; later it changes to Venus and
Mars/Neptune.
The solar plexus center, located a little above
the sacral center, directs energy moving inwards
from the back through the spine (at the junction of
the thoracic and lumbar vertebrae) to activate the
endocrine part of the pancreas, the islets of
Langerhans, producing insulin. It is primarily a
center for transferring energies upwards to the
higher centers. As it does this, certain elements
with it can lock onto certain ideas, thoughtforms
and processes, resulting in the problem of glamor.
Some of the problems associated with the transfer
include moodiness, worry, tension, agitated
excitement, stress, temper, irritation, selfishness,
fervor, obsession, lower psychism, hallucinations,
nervous disorders, violence, fanaticism, and
insanity. All of these can be said to be
psychological cleavages, both deep-seated and
superficial. In their effort to control the astral
body, aspirants often resort to a process of direct
inhibition and suppression, resulting in the solar
plexus becoming a “great reservoir of drastically
retained energy” (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 239).
This causes many problems, even cancer, in the
pancreas, stomach, liver, gall bladder, or
intestines. What is required, rather, is the
transmutation of the emotions into aspiration,
altruistic devotion, as well as love and directed
control.
The solar plexus center dominates the whole
of the digestive system, so any problems or
illnesses located in the stomach or intestines
(including the pancreas, liver and gall bladder)
will implicate the solar plexus center. We all know
that “crunch” in the solar plexus region when we
feel angry or upset; solar plexus energy governs the
emotional body. It gives us animal instincts and
rules personal desires. It can often easily be
augmented by other people’s emotionalism so that
we feel engulfed and driven forward on a wave of
mindless sentiment, noticeable, for example, in
groups of people demonstrating for a “cause.” The
center quickly reacts without thought. This can be
good (it can save a child in danger, for instance) or
bad, so that the person in a blind fury does things
they later regret.
Solar plexus energy can be overwhelming. It
requires strength, control, and the development of
rationality to bring this powerful center into
permanent balance. For many this is not easy. For
others it feels as if the very basis of their life is
pulled from under them; they live on and live for
their emotions. Their feelings result in deep
personal fears, antipathies, and the “seven deadly
sins” (pride, envy, gluttony, lust, anger,
greed/covetousness, sloth). When the heart center
is in balance and in control, the nature of the solar
plexus center is revealed. This kind of person is
fun-loving, genuinely concerned about others, easy
to talk to without fear of offending, seldom gets too
embroiled in other people’s affairs, and so on.
 The solar plexus center is a great receiving
center in preparation for transferring energy from
below the diaphragm to the centers above where
the effects of personality are not so important. The
elemental being of the astral body expresses its life
through the solar plexus center, whose energies are
later transferred to the heart center. The words “to
dare” give the clue to the subordination and
reorientation of the personality via the solar
plexus, the main center for this transmutative work
(Bailey, 1979, p. 278). Such a person is
developing the seven virtues (humility, kindness,
abstinence/temperance, chastity, patience,
liberality, diligence).

Heart center
Average person—Ray I; Disciple—Ray VI;
Initiate—Ray II. Vulcan is the initial influence over
the heart, with Neptune and Jupiter coming in later.
The feeling consciousness of the soul is
focussed through the heart center. This center
anchors the life stream from the monad.
Esoterically, the heart of the foetus thrills with life
between the third and fourth month after conception
(Bailey, 1962, p. 684). This center is located just
below and between the etheric shoulder blades,
passing into the body between the fourth and fifth
thoracic vertebrae. Its energy flows from the
second subplane of each plane and from the love
petals of the causal lotus (p. 817), to that
somewhat inactive (or misunderstood) gland,
above the heart, called the thymus gland, producing
the hormone thymosin. (Thymosin alpha-1 is a
synthetic hormone used for hepatitis B, cancer and
AIDS.) The thymus is particularly active during
childhood, indicating two things: first, that the
heart center is open during babyhood (to eighteen
months it breaks down mother’s milk) and
throughout the stages of growing up (from two to
twelve years it helps develop the sex glands,
working with the sacral center)—open to
instruction about compassion and true love;
second, so that the parents can gently train the child
into the ways of decency, politeness, respect and
love; this is the heart’s need for right discipline.
During puberty the thymus determines the
height of the individual, while the ajna’s growth
hormone is via the pituitary gland. The heart center
is open because at this stage the solar plexus center
is virtually closed (it starts to open at around seven
years old), and the heart center influences on the
solar plexus will determine how it might react in
adult life. Otherwise, controlling the solar plexus
will be that much more difficult to attain. The
reversal of openness between these two centers
takes place at puberty. From that time the thymus
gland begins to atrophy rapidly. It then takes
spiritual effort, and, if instinctual compassion has
not been built in by the parents, intellectual
understanding to reactivate the heart center.
Loneliness and depression are closely associated
with the loss of this gland.
The heart center, whose twelve petals link it
with the heart center of the planet, which is the
planetary hierarchy or fifth kingdom, governs the
heart and the circulatory system. It is also closely
connected to the lungs and respiration as well as to
the spleen. The heart center also governs the
immune system and the lymphatic glands of the
body, for where there is love, no harm can come.
Love is the coherent force which makes all things
whole (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 356). Hate, which
is opposite to love, results in self-destruction,
hence the autoimmune diseases. The heart center is
the controller of spiritual work, group activity and
interaction. It is the organ of fusion and
inclusiveness (while the head center is the organ of
synthesis). Stress can unbalance the heart center,
causing blood pressure imbalances, insomnia, and
problems like petit mal or grande mal. Also, greed
and overconcern or protection of one’s so-called
“rights” can unbalance the heart center.
Immunodeficiency and autoimmune diseases can be
helped via the heart center. Impersonal
relationships and the sense of inclusiveness affect
this center’s activity (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p.
159). The heart starts functioning after the second
initiation, where one ceases to think solely as an
individual and in addition becomes attuned to
group consciousness. It then acts as a distribution
center of hierarchical energy via the soul. In this
connection the heart is the exit at death for
aspirants and for men and women of goodwill (p.
472). This center is linked closely with the ajna or
brow center, and, as the heart center becomes fully
alive, so the ajna’s gland—the pituitary body—
enters into activity.
The vitality which comes from the etheric
body works through the blood. This wavelike
rhythm throbs through the body using the heart as
an external “valve” and “conducer”; the pumping
action does not actually exist; the heart appears to
pump but actually it is simply the result of the
rhythmical action of the vital force on the blood
stream as a whole. For it is the interaction of the
heart, the blood stream and the nervous system that
controls the assimilation of prana, or life energy,
into the spleen from the etheric body. In fact the
cardiovascular system is so closely connected to
the etheric or vital body that it is practically
impossible to distinguish them. Those who are
more mentally polarized in their lives and those
who are on a spiritual path that involves
intelligence and reason (without emotion and
devotional feelings) are often prone to heart
complaints (not chronic cardiac failure, however),
neural illnesses and autonomic nerve difficulties
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 2, p. 536). People who are
governed by laws and rituals and repetition in their
lives have problems and diseases of the blood
stream. It is interesting to note that the heart center
and heart organ are governed by the ray of love
(the second ray), and that the circulatory system is
governed by the ray of ritual and magic (the
seventh ray), the two primary rays of healing
among the seven (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 2, p. 622;
also, Bailey, 1944, v. 1, p. 641). (More on this
center, see Chapter 7.)

Vagus nerve center

 The ray influences over this center are:
Average person—Ray III; Disciple—Ray VI;
Initiate—Ray II. Planetary rulers are Earth, Mars
and the Sun (the pranic aspect).
The vagus nerve center, while not one of the
seven major centers, is in some systems
considered to be among the most important. This
center can be said to be the most advanced of the
minor centers, not so much in its vibratory status
(for in this case the alta major center in the head is
greater, nor yet in its highest development, for here
the spleen center is greater), but in the sense of its
purpose, action and usefulness. It has fourteen
petals. Do you see its connection with the spleen
center? The vagus nerve center reigns supreme for
those who are entering the path of the spirit, those
people who have determined that they want to
develop along the lines that evolution has laid
down or predetermined. For the aspiring disciple,
one still lacking in complete soul control and
monadic direction (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 122),
this center begins to have a major influence on life.
It is a call, finally, to group service (heart). This
center is not found in the etheric spine, like the
major centers, but is further inside the etheric
body, near the thymus gland (p. 73). The healer can
locate it between the shoulder blades, with its
precipitation just above the heart and thymus gland,
and on the vagus nerve, the tenth cranial nerve.
There is a plexus of nerves above the heart and
below the aorta; this is the externalized vagus
nerve center. The physical nerve travels down
from the brain to the heart and lungs, then to the
digestive organs.
The vagus nerve, having its origin in the
medulla, is also connected with the alta major
center. It is largely autonomic in its functioning,
though it does transmit back some sensory
information from the mouth and pharynx. Almost
all of the information from the medulla concerning
essential body functioning is sent along this nerve.
For the disciple not under direct monadic control,
it is the major pathway for information filtering
down through the head centers. The spine takes up
this function after the third initiation. The branches
of the vagus nerve terminate in the heart, lungs,
stomach, liver, mouth, tongue, larynx, pharynx,
pancreas and pass down through the splenic
flexure in the large intestine. It seems plausible that
the alta major center uses the vagus nerve to
regulate immune response, since the latter is
connected with the heart center and is subservient
to it (being related to its pranic function).
Like the spleen, the vagus nerve center is
currently the main center for the reception of prana,
and forms a radiant etheric triangle (see, below,
the Pranic Triangle), which is the originating
impulse for pranic circulation in the body (Bailey,
1962, p. 98). There is an important triangle
connected with this center, with growth and
expanding consciousness, called the Kundalini
Triangle, discussed later. The energy points of this
triangle do not actually involve the vagus nerve
center, but the triangle as a whole affects the vagus
nerve center, activating it and helping the person to
aspire towards soul control. The energy points are:
the head center, the heart center and the base center
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 335).
There are three interconnecting regulators
which control or fail to control the physical body:
i. the etheric body through the seven major centers
and the minor centers;
ii. the endocrine system through the seven major
glands;
iii. the nervous system, and particularly the vagus
nerve with its effect on the heart and the blood
stream.

Here we are specifically interested in the third

of these regulators, remembering its connections
with the etheric or vital body and with the
endocrine or hormonal system. When this center
rhythmically flows, bringing about harmony and
balance, the nervous system will work efficiently
and effectively for the person. But as soon as this
center becomes overstimulated, or defective in its
handling of the energy arriving at its crossroads,
all kinds of illnesses and deficiencies associated
with the nerves begin to show symptoms in the
physical body, for instance, in the muscles. Such
illnesses are particularly linked with those who
have begun the spiritual journey of life. Frequently
a person “new born” or “reborn” becomes
fanatical or obsessed, but if this trend is redressed
so that they become more reasonable and less
blinded, the tide can be turned. Otherwise, there is
a likelihood of physical nervous problems in the
future.

Throat center
Average person—Ray IV; Disciple—Ray III;
Initiate—Ray V. Mercury has the initial influence,
then the planet Saturn has a long hold over the
throat center; the advanced influence is by Venus.
This center is the highest in the etheric spine. It
is silvery blue and inverted in the early stages,
with its sixteen petals reaching over the shoulders
and down to the two lungs. As the life of
discipleship proceeds, certain of the petals rise to
sound in the two ears, in the medulla and in the
carotid of the alta major center (Bailey, 1951–70,
v. 4, p. 155). The energy attracted to this center
flows in from the back through the spinal column
between the seventh cervical and the first thoracic
vertebrae, and vitalizes the physical body via the
thyroid gland and parathyroid glands in the neck.
Apart from having a direct influence over the
whole respiratory tract, this center governs the
entire digestive system from mouth to anus (p. 44).
The creative consciousness of the indwelling soul
is focussed in the throat center (Bailey, 1951–70,
v. 2, p. 304). Hyperthyroidism (producing an
overactive metabolism) occurs when the throat
center is prematurely awakened (p. 536) or due to
high stress. Overstress is the cause of the “burn-
out” of the thyroid—resulting in hypothyroidism,
and dependency on thyroxin or herbal medicine.
When working with the digestive system, we
usually hold the throat center when working on any
areas down to the stomach (to the cardiac
sphincter) but not including it; after this point the
solar plexus center is usually held simultaneously.
In an act of criticism, or if someone has real hatred
for another, this negative energy is absorbed by the
throat center and flows like a river of nails into the
solar plexus center where the first symptoms of
gastrointestinal disease will manifest (Bailey,
1951–70, v. 4, p. 39). Criticism is a virulent
poison, especially when voiced—it actually hurts,
even damages, the one criticized (even more than
the one who is criticizing, hence the danger,
karmically). However, for the one who is detached
and full of love, the attack can be nullified. But DK
says, “Where there is any physical weakness or
limitation, there will be found the localization of
the projected poison” (his italics) (Bailey, 1951–
70, v. 2, p. 617). Voiced or silent, criticism can
seriously distort the throat center and affect other
centers in its insidious contagiousness. It must be
rooted out before group work is to be undertaken.
Gall stones are a definite indication of criticism.
The greatest influence of the throat center is
over the lungs and respiratory system along with
the ears and the vocal apparatus. The creative or
destructive weaving of sound is controlled by the
throat center. In this act, it is closely connected
with the heart center, for the throat center governs
the actual air intake, the act of respiration; and the
heart center controls the point of absorption of
oxygen into the blood and release of carbon
dioxide to the lungs, the so-called blood-air
exchange. Asthma, bronchitis, respiratory diseases
—all are related to throat center malfunctions. To
correct the problem, the afflicted person needs to
be honest in their thinking, speaking and actions.
And since the throat will become the clearing
house for transferring energy of the lower centers
into the head center as we advance in spiritual life,
we need to take extra care of our thoughts and
words (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 2, pp. 515, 553).
The throat center has some connection with
another important body system, the lymphatic
system, even though the latter is governed by the
heart center. The throat center influences the
shoulders, arms and hands. Just as the sacral center
functions to create physical life through
regeneration, so the throat center, the sacral’s
higher correspondence, is activated by higher
creativity and controls the adaptability of thought
and ideas. When our thoughts and desires become
rigid and unclear, causing congestion in the throat
center, arthritis can build up. Rheumatism comes
about due to one’s inability to live up to the highest
goal and the inability of the soul to produce an
expression of “the true”; such a person is always
conscious of the unattainable and of the urge to
betterment (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, pp. 567–68).
Faulty calcium levels in the parathyroids cause
arthritis. This gives us a connection between
menopause and osteoporosis, and the need for
HRT (hormone replacement therapy). In your
healing work see if you can make a link among the
thyroid, the parathyroids, the pineal, and the
pituitary (or the triangle of throat center, head
center, and ajna).
Astral instability, another problem of the throat
center, occurs when higher creativity is not
properly channeled from the sacral center, leading
to perversion of the sex function, what DK
describes as “ancient evil predisposing habits”
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 63). Here we find the
condition, homosexuality, and its connection to
Lemuria. Such persons may well have been
mystics in a past life who had learned sexual
control and had touched the heights of spiritual
contact, but the throat center was not developed
sufficiently to arrest the energy, whereupon it
passed straight down to the sacral center becoming
recoiled (retro-vibrational) sexual activity (cf.
Bailey, 1951–70, v. 2, p. 538). Hence the real need
for right thought and right speech. The throat center
is the genuine guardian of our health, the sentry on
the bridge between the head and body.
The throat center promotes self-awareness by
directing our lives towards the helping and lifting
of our fellow humans, via understanding,
cooperation and constructiveness. These processes
are initiated by communication; the right use of the
voice can lead to momentous changes, which will
benefit the whole. Politicians and educators are
both strongly influenced by this center, and,
interestingly, the throat center governs the whole
field of science (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 1, p. 208).
But whether directly or indirectly, we all have this
center playing a major role in our lives, for sound
is the throat center’s expressive sense.

Alta major center

Ray III is this important head center’s
influence, linked to the karmic aspect of Saturn.
The alta major center, unlike the vagus nerve
center, functions as a major center, but it is one of
the 49 minor centers for the average person. The
throat center connects with it at the moment when
the antahkarana is begun to be built. You will find
this center at the back of the head, the knob at the
very top of the back of the neck, indicating its
place of entry into the head. The physical gland it
creates is the carotid body, found on either side of
the upper part of the neck; it monitors oxygen
content in the blood, and controls respiration. In
anatomy books you will find it pictured where the
common carotid arteries divide as they enter the
brain. The carotid body, and hence the alta major
center, are obviously under the influence of one of
the seven major centers, in this case, the throat
center (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, pp. 155–56). In fact,
DK describes the alta major center as the physical
center whose higher center is the throat. The alta
major center is also described as a nerve center at
the top of the spine where the cranium and the
spine make approximate contact. When this
congery of nerves is fully developed, it forms a
center of communication between the vital energy
of the spinal column (the kundalini fire) and the
energy of the two head centers, namely, the center
at the top of the head and the brow or ajna center. It
is the physical correspondence to the antahkarana,
[19]
which is found on higher levels (Bailey, 1962,
pp. 961–62).
The alta major center has a unique position:
first, because of its position in the head triangle
and, second, due to its powerful link with the
cerebellum, the medulla oblongata and the spine.
The cerebellum in the hind-brain controls the
voluntary muscles and movement (linking it to the
base center). The medulla oblongata contains the
critical regions that govern breathing, heart rate
and blood pressure (connections with the throat
and heart center). This center’s development leads
to an acquired and conscious control of one’s
dharma or soul work on earth, a realization of what
one is to do in life as opposed to being tossed
about like a leaf in the wind (a reference to the
creative thread of pingala). It therefore has
powerful connections with ancient memory (the
“chit” of satchitananda, which occurs when the
three head centers function together to give this
enlightening experience) in many forms, and also
has a major influence over the memories held in
the cortex. When functioning, the alta major center
has the power to bring down intuitive vision into
consciousness. This center can be said to be the
healer’s conscious link with the higher mind, for
through the alta major center our higher
intelligence is activated through thought. And
energy follows thought. Through the alta major
center the spiritual will of the head center is
balanced, well symbolized by the horizontal poise
found between the left and right eyes. (In fact, from
the esoteric angle the eyes actually distribute these
energies.)
To hold this center, you will find that it has a
dual input (due to the two carotid bodies at the
bifurcation of the common carotid arteries on
either side of the neck) and a single outlet. With
thumb and forefinger of one hand enter the ingoing
stream at the back of the head, and with the other
hand’s index finger placed about eight inches (20
cms) from the front of the head (near the hairline of
the mid-forehead), meet the outstreaming force. In
this way you can bring this center into a balanced
rhythm.
The alta major is the center particularly
related to sleep and to the working out of past
experiences in sleep. Dreams are derived from this
center. There is a special exercise done at night to
help develop this aspect of the alta. It is called the
Ruckshau, or backward look over the day. Just
before you go to sleep at night, sit for a while and
review the day you have just had, backwards. In
sequence, you are witnessing the results or effects
of the causes first, then the originating influence
second. Observe, see how it was dealt with, and
be aware that you are in the harness. How you
respond determines the result. By learning from
these experiences we can actually shorten our time
in the astral world (kamaloca) after death. Another
aid to rapid evolution is to go to sleep with our
consciousness gently focussed in the ajna center.

Ajna center
Average person—Ray V; Disciple—Ray VII;
Initiate—Ray III. To begin with, Venus directs the
ways of ajna; then Uranus organizes her; finally
Saturn is met. Mercury (with its positive
directional activity) and Moon (with its link to
astrality and illusory visions) can also be found as
potent influences of the Ajna Center.
Located outside the area between the
eyebrows, the ajna center is often referred to as the
third eye, but the third eye only opens when the alta
major center, head center and the ajna are in
synchronous vibration. The energy of the ajna is
twofold, flowing in at the front (it is the only major
center that has its inflow from the front of the
body) and out at the top of the head on the midline
just behind the crown center. Its twofoldness is due
to its integrative function. The gland this center
precipitates into is the pituitary body in the brain,
an organ having two lobes (anterior and posterior)
held together by a stalk. Called the master gland or
the conducting gland, the pituitary controls all the
others in the body, like the conductor of an
orchestra. It is the seat of personality power
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 2, p. 553). In this connection
would it seem remarkable to you that the pituitary
gland commands a total of nine hormones? The
ajna also has strong links with the hypothalamus,
which governs the autonomic system. It is closely
related to the two eyes and to all frontal areas of
the head, including the nose (although not the sense
of smell, which is ruled by the base center).
Ajna is ruled by the monadic plane (Bailey,
1950b, p. 167). It is an organ of idealism, which in
a strange way characterizes the fifth ray. Ajna at
once controls the expression of the personality and
“grounds” and distributes the spiritual energy of
the soul. The ajna only begins to function usefully
when a person has begun to grow spiritually and
has built a certain amount of love and selfless
service into his or her life. When the ajna is active,
it has a twofold flow, inwards and outwards. The
outward flow enables a healer to have inner vision
and perception concerning the patient’s underlying
condition and then to creatively work to correct it.
Remember, the healer seeks by the power of the
soul, working on the higher levels of the mental
plane and through the etheric head center, to
stimulate the point of soul life in the etheric body
of the patient, which is attracted, if possible, to a
fuller inflow of soul energy of the patient into the
head center, in order that the life thread may carry
a fuller supply of life to the patient’s heart (Bailey,
1951–70, v. 4, p. 541). Generally this correction
will involve motivating the spiritual side of the
patient towards practical expression. The inward
flow of the ajna is utilized when the healer is
balancing the centers (see Chapter 6).
Linked to the alta major center, the ajna center
controls the cerebellum (which controls muscular
action, coordination of movement and balance) and
the central nervous system. DK says there is a
close physiological relation between the
parathyroid glands and the pituitary body (p. 155),
which is yet to be discovered by physiologists.
Just as the gland consists of two lobes and a
“stalk” joining them, so the ajna center has three
sections:
i. The upper ajna (relating to the anterior pituitary
gland with its seven hormones) governing all the
centers in the body, their endocrine glands and
the expression of these through the circulatory
 system and heart. With this part we express
imagination and have the power to visualize
(Bailey, 1930, p. 141).
ii. The middle ajna (analogous to the pituitary’s
stalk), which has five points related to the five
major centers up the spine. We are told that the
ajna blends and fuses five types of energy
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 1, p. 290). In diagnosis we
make a particular connection to the middle ajna
(see Chapter 7).
iii. The lower ajna (the posterior pituitary gland
with its two hormones), governing the whole of
the central nervous system with a special
relation to the alta major center and throat center.
Through the posterior pituitary the reasoning
mind has its seat (Bailey, 1930, p. 141), and
through it we express desire in its highest form
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 149).

To effect certain results in healing, we can

direct our attention via the hand held at the front of
the head to one or other of these three parts. When
the ajna is out of balance, problems may occur in
the ears (cochlea, not ear drum; in other words,
balance not hearing), eyes, sinuses (a secondary
problem to throat center problems), or lower brain
area. Or difficulties can ensue in areas in the body
governed by other centers, for instance,
gynecological problems. Wrong control of ajna
energy leads to serious eye trouble, aural
difficulties, neuritis, headache, migraine, nerve
difficulties in the body, pituitary body difficulties,
psychological trouble and physical trouble (Bailey,
1951–70, v. 2, p. 535). Overstimulation of the
ajna, by focussing the lower energies into it, may
result in the egomaniac, a monster (in the extreme,
like Hitler), epilepsy, eyesight problems or even
blindness (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 176). The ajna
is the most important center in magnetic healing. Its
powerful energy is always transferred to the
etheric body of the patient via the hand minor
centers of the healer.
There are many subtle correspondences
relating to the ajna. For example, the ajna registers
and focuses the intention to create. It embodies the
idea lying behind the act of creativity. The organ of
creativity itself, however, is the throat center. The
two lobes of the pituitary gland (the “wings” of the
ajna center) correspond to imagination and desire
in their two highest forms. It is the organ of
idealism, therefore closely related both to the heart
and to the solar plexus (here you may notice a hint
regarding the Lower Clearing Triangle, described
later). Ajna fuses the creative energies of the throat
and the sublimated energies of desire or true love
of the heart. In the work of the higher healer,
working out the divine purpose according to the
Inner Plan, the ajna center becomes the directing
agent or the distributor of the blended energies of
the Divine Man (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 581).

Head center
Average person—Ray VI; Disciple—Ray II;
Initiate—Ray I. Neptune is the first influence,
followed by the Heart of the Sun (linked to a strong
Uranian impression); Vulcan is the last planetary
governor (supported earlier by Pluto).
Above the top of the head, a fiery display
makes all the other centers pale by comparison.
From the heart of this many petalled lotus issues a
flame of fire having the basic hue of a person’s
soul ray. This flame mounts upward and attracts
downward a sheet of electric light, which is the
downflow from the spirit on the highest plane
(Bailey, 1962, p. 170). The head center, often
referred to as the crown center, was regarded as
the “seat of the soul” by the ancients. The mental
consciousness of the indwelling soul is focussed in
the head center (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 2, p. 304),
which itself is controlled by the logoic plane
(Bailey, 1950b, p. 167). The crown center controls
the will and destiny of the soul in incarnation,
directs all the other centers and links one to one’s
higher self. It is developed chiefly through
meditation. Its outflow at the top of the head
emanates in two streams, due to the two aspects of
the etheric center (the outer circle of hundreds of
“petals,” plus the heart of the head center
consisting of twelve petals or energy outflow).
This center is also known symbolically as the
thousand-petalled lotus flower. The energy of this
center flows in from the top of the head via the
fontanel and precipitates in the pineal gland in the
brain, producing melatonin.
Not much is known about the pineal gland’s
function. It appears to be almost nonfunctional in
humans (although very active in some animals, for
instance, in one class of ancient lizard still
surviving in New Zealand, the Tuatara, which is
said to live to an age of over 300 years). Through
the hormone melatonin, however, it has an
influence over the diurnal rhythm (or circadian
biorhythms) of our lives. Melatonin is now
available for insomnia, as an anti-depression
supplement and a counteractive to jet lag. The fact
that melatonin is available (like the other centers’
hormones) suggests humanity’s development and
influence on the head center has begun. The gland
is affected by light, possibly because it has a
pigment similar to that in the retina of the eye. Like
the thymus gland above the heart, the pineal gland
is more active in childhood, becoming atrophied in
the adult. So it is considered to have a connection
with the earth as an energy being and with the will
to remain alive, the will to be.
The usefulness of the head center only
becomes apparent when the person has had wide
experience and has developed a certain degree of
wisdom, discrimination and spiritual integrity. The
head center anchors the consciousness stream from
the causal lotus on the soul level. There are, under
or within the range of the highest head center,
seven head centers, which are synthesized after the
fourth initiation. I believe the sites of the seven
head centers (not including the three major centers
which we know to be pineal, pituitary, and carotid)
are as follows: head center = upper brain (cortex);
ajna = lower brain; throat center = medulla; heart
center = third ventricle; solar plexus =
hypothalamus; sacral center = thalamus; base
center = cerebellum.
 The head center governs the cerebrum (the
main part of the thinking brain matter) and the right
eye (although this is not always the case, see later).
Awakened prematurely, the head center can cause
(in advanced humanity) inflammation of the brain,
brain tumors, and insanity (also schizophrenia—
caused by an over-active alta major center
whereby it impinges and interferes with the normal
consciousness with the past or illusory states
[hearing voices]; or due to the web in the head
being partly punctured). In the average person
energy can pour through the head center to one of
the five centers in the body where the
consciousness is focused and there cause
problems. If this center should be overstimulated,
epilepsy, headaches, migraines and growths in the
brain tissue could form, or certain neuroses
become apparent. Underactivity of the crown
center will be seen as diminished consciousness,
poor memory, and fuzzy thinking.
Some students want to work with the centers in
the head or with the crown’s petal energies. While
this is possible, it is usually useless due to the
head center’s undeveloped state. The head center
only comes into conscious function when the
kundalini fires have risen significantly, and the
person is highly developed spiritually, morally and
philosophically. The head center represented in the
seven planes of consciousness is literally mere
buds in the majority. Students often confuse
working with the soul with working with the head
center. Our work with the soul is our work with all
the seven centers and their relevant triangles for
that person—a much more beneficial service.

Upward pointing triangle:

HdC = soul focuses its mental consciousness
HtC = soul focuses its feeling consciousness
ThC = soul focuses its creativity
Downward pointing triangle:
BC = Elemental of physical body
SPC = Elemental of astral
SC = Elemental of mind

Summary
The major vital centers in the body control and
influence the entire body of systems and organs:
The Base Center—the bony system especially
the spine, as well as the kidney system; also the
musculature; locomotor system.
The Sacral Center—the reproductive system
and organs.
The Solar Plexus Center—the intestinal system
including the liver, gall bladder, stomach,
pancreas, and the nervous system; digestive
system.
The Heart Center—the cardiovascular system
and circulation, the immune system, the lymphatic
system and spleen, and the vagus nerve.
 The Throat Center—the respiratory system, the
alimentary canal, and the metabolic system.
The Ajna Center—the endocrine system,
integrating all the systems; and also the nervous
system.
The Head Center—the central nervous system,
and brain and mentality.
SHARING
“Only through a sane and worldwide grasp
of the New Age principle of sharing will human
ills be cured; only by the right distribution of
energy will the ills of the physical body of
individual man also be cured. This is a
fundamental (I would say the fundamental
principle) of all spiritual healing. In the last
analysis also this presupposes an eventual and
scientific recognition of the etheric body of the
planet, and consequently of man.” —Djwhal
Khul
 6.
THE ART OF
ADMINISTERING
ESOTERIC HEALING

Why should we opt to use esoteric healing

rather than say flower remedies, homeopathy,
psychotherapy, naturopathy, orthodox medicine or
any other form of treatment? Esoteric healing can
bring healing to all seven of our bodies of
consciousness. It can be used alongside all other
therapies, orthodox and complimentary. Now let us
see what esoteric healing is, what it claims to do,
and how we are to dispense it therapeutically.
So far we have been laying down some ground
rules so that we can begin to work with this form
of medical treatment. Now we need to review its
pharmacology (or pneumapharmacology)—how it
works in the body.

How does esoteric healing work?

From a scientific point of view, when a drug is
taken (and this includes all kinds of medication
taken into the body), there are constituents that
reorganize the working of the body. The body’s
response to illness is increased so that the illness
can be “thrown off.” (Of course, we know how
most chemical drugs suppress the symptoms of
illness rather than bring about wellness.)
Everything that is imposed on the body changes it
according to the laws of the body, to good or bad
effect. Esoteric healing is no different. Drugs or
herbs or homeopathic potencies, acupuncture,
manipulations or massage—all these work on the
physical body, reverberating upwards towards the
subtle bodies of the etheric, astral and mental.
These methods start their action in the realm of
effects and cure by reorganizing cellular function
first, or calming the emotional body. Other
therapies, such as psychotherapy, counseling,
hypnosis, and so on, which work more on the
emotional body, effect change by showing the
patient how to relax and think differently and more
widely. Esoteric healing also imposes a different
rhythm on the body, but, and this may distinguish it
from all other therapies (even other forms of
spiritual healing methods), not from the personality
levels at all. Its new rhythm comes from the
vibratory status of the soul. Soul to soul. The
healer’s soul influences the patient’s, then the
patient imposes on her own body the soul purposes
for her body and life. This is how esoteric healing
achieves its healing. For healers to help, of course,
requires training and technique.
There are kinds of spiritual healing in which
the healer simply tunes into the client or into God
or Christ, and allows the reorganizing energies to
flow down, called “channeling.” In esoteric
healing, we also make our alignment with God, the
Source of Life, and Christ, the Second Aspect,
Love (the state of cosmic consciousness, that sees
the oneness and loves all beings without
distinction), but then we train our own conscious,
active intelligence and employ it in the work of
healing. We do this in line with the teachings of the
Ageless Wisdom. In other words, our work with
the Christ is not denominational; esoteric healers
do not need to belong to a church. The Ageless
Wisdom includes all the great Masters who have
founded religions and notes the relevance of these
systems for the purposes of emergence—the
emergence of the soul and the emergence of the
next Master, the coming Christ or Messiah or
Maitreya or Imam or Bodhisattva (see Hopking,
1994). Humanity as a whole, with all its religions
and departments of life in our wonderful
civilization, is working together (however
inscrutably) for the same divine Plan.
As stated above, healers work with the life
principle, not with some vague energy which is set
in motion by the power of thought or by the potency
of love. The energy poured into the patient’s
vehicle is not mental energy, but one of the seven
forms of pranic or life energies. The perfect healer
works through the closed and sealed point within
the center or chakra (the very heart of the center)
which then affects the petals (the consciousness
aspect) (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, pp. 627-28). The
patient is, as a whole, a center! The healer heals
from the center of this center, which is the patient’s
heart center—the life principle. Out of this center
radiates consciousness. In this way change is
wrought. Shall we see how this is brought about
esoterically, using a flow chart?
Alignment
The first task, then, is for the healer to align the
soul with that of the patient and with a high
spiritual source.
A little more must be said about the alignment,
as seen in a wider context. A spiritual person is
recognized as both a successful worker in the
world and an occult student. Such a person reaches
the conclusion that behind all the many causes with
which one has been engaged is a CAUSE. This
causal unity then becomes the goal of the search,
which is eventually demonstrated in life as
continuity of consciousness. To attain this
awareness such a person must gain access to the
nature of the soul, the medium through which the
spirit ever works. And to do that, we must learn to
function as the soul, detached from the world.
When this is mastered, that person becomes “a
conscious part of that soul that permeates and
pervades all that is in manifestation.” We must try
to link ourselves in consciousness with the soul as
it expresses itself in the etheric body. There is a
very magnetic mantram that can be of assistance in
linking with the soul, called the Soul Mantram,
from the book The Rainbow Bridge, by two
students of the “blue books” by Alice Bailey with
Djwhal Khul, published by Rainbow Bridge
Productions. The Rainbow Bridge book
recommends that “no work should be undertaken
until this mantram has been said” and “after the
invocation has been said, the Soul Star will obey
thought and move within the vehicles and the
electromagnetic field.... It is a most powerful,
versatile, and useful instrument of White Magic. It
will not respond to anything else.” Accordingly,
without prejudice, I recommend that this mantram
may be said during the phase of alignment before
an esoteric healing treatment:

The Soul Mantram

I am the Soul.
 I am the Light Divine.
I am Love.
I am Will.
I am Fixed Design.

This mantram is adapted from that given by

DK which he says was “taken from a very ancient
disciples’ manual.” The full version is as follows:
“I am the Soul. And also love I am. Above all else
I am both will and fixed design. My will is now to
lift the lower self into the light divine. This light I
am. Therefore, I must descend to where the lower
self awaits my coming. That which desires to lift
and that which cries aloud for lifting are now at-
one. Such is my will” (Bailey, 1944, v. 2, p. 123).
Why so much emphasis on the etheric? And
why does esoteric healing put such emphasis on
this relationship of the soul to the etheric body? Let
us build on what we have said above about the
soul and about the etheric.
The etheric body in the human being:
a. Is the symbol of the soul in that it has within it
 seven focal points of energy. The soul is
influenced by seven ray energies. Each one
influences one etheric center.
b. Is the physical correspondence to the inner light
body, which we call the soul body or causal
body. It is called the “golden bowl” in the Bible.
c. Is a body of light.
d. Has a rate of vibration that always synchronizes
with the development of the soul.
e. Is a coherent force, linking and connecting
every part of the body structure.
f. Is the microcosmic “web of life,” for it
underlies every part of the physical structure.
g. Carries the life principle throughout the body.
h. Enables the soul to be en rapport with the
environment.
i. Produces eventually, through life and
consciousness, a radiant activity so that each
human being can distribute light and attractive
energy to others in the human kingdom.
j. Is indivisible, coherent and unified, symbolizing
the unity and homogeneity of Life or Energy.
 There are no separated organisms in the etheric
vehicle. It is simply a body of freely flowing
force.
k. Links the purely physical with the purely subtle,
just as the soul links the three worlds of the
personality—that is, the physical, emotional and
mental—to the higher planes in the solar system.
l. Symbolized by a five-pointed star.[20]

Knowing that the soul expresses itself through

the etheric body should give us hope and
encouragement when we start to align with the
soul. Alignment produces a downflow of life from
the life within, which results in sound vehicles. It
is only as the personality becomes merged in the
soul, and when the polarization shifts from the
lower to the higher, that the work of the soul
healing the form becomes possible. The more the
consciousness is stabilized in the soul, the less
will disease affect one, for such polarization will
act like an instant transmuter. Karma will quickly
and safely be worked out.
Disease appears where there is a lack of
alignment between the factor of life (the soul) and
the factor of form (the personality). There is a
definite need to exert the will when we begin the
work of alignment, for, says the Tibetan Master
DK, “the real work of the soul is accomplished
only when there is alignment of the threefold
personality with the soul and its stabilization there.
This is done by an effort of the will.” One result is
an unimpeded funnel to the brain. Put another way,
the lower self is in chordal tune with the soul. This
does not, however, make the soul any more aware
of or interested in the personality’s disposition and
little ideas. But the soul is conscious of the
limitations within the personality nature and of the
barriers opposed to the inflow of soul energy. The
details of the person’s life and thought and feelings
are of no interest to the soul. The soul is occupied
with recognizing hierarchical planning, with
registering world need, and with responding (very
faintly at first) to monadic flow. The soul always
works in terms of the group and of the whole.
Such “attitudes” of the soul, when brought into
alignment with the personality of the patient, can
produce changes in their vocation. Soul guidance
is a result of meditation, discipline and service,
and when a direct channel of communication is set
up from soul to brain via the mind, the condition is
true divine guidance. But caution is needed. Such
guidance can be distorted and misinterpreted if the
mind is not developed, the character not purified,
and the person not free from personality control.
How easily can unimportant people and beginners
interpret calls and messages they hear or receive
as coming from some high and elevated source
(devas, angels, Masters, high disciples, initiates),
but they are in all probability hearing that which
emanates from their own subconscious or from
their own souls (Bailey, 1944; 1950a; 1957; 1962;
1951–70, v. 2 & v. 4).

How to start healing esoterically

You can well imagine that, in view of the
complexities of people, their diverse personalities,
their arrangement of etheric centers, their problems
in the past, their relationships toward themselves,
toward others and the world, and so on, that
esoteric healers can and do enter intricate and
sensitive etheric webs. To gain this entry usually
requires a long training and personal guidance (a
minimum of three years is recommended by DK).
Longer might be needed for those who have not
meditated or who have difficulty relating to the
subtle anatomy of energies and forces. As in any
other of the healing professions, students learn
scientific facts and theories regarding health and
disease. This is followed by training in the
techniques involved in their healing method (use of
drugs, manipulations, etc.) and in what happens to
the body of the patient when the different
therapeutic agents are used. How to approach
patients, how to diagnose, how to prescribe, what
therapeutics to avoid when certain conditions
present themselves, what to do in emergencies, in
acute cases, in chronic cases, what to do if there
are adverse reactions to the treatment given,
treatment for the dying, and so on—all these are
also addressed in training one in the science and
art of esoteric healing. But as in any other therapy,
no one needs to go to the doctor for everything. We
change our diet for a time, we take an aspirin, we
make an herb tea, we ask our partners to massage
us, we seek the advice of a friend, and so on. So
there are simple home techniques that can be used
and applied by anyone, either to oneself or to
another.
Esoteric healing as presented here can be used
for this simple home use. This book is a simple,
practical handbook for anyone, while also
indicating the deeper aspects, the more specialized
applications. These latter techniques may seem
difficult at first and will more than likely
necessitate attending classes and a practicing
clinic.

Radiatory healing technique

The first thing a beginner might prefer to learn,
therefore, is radiatory healing by itself. It is an
advanced form of healing because one of its
prerequisites is that you be in touch with your soul,
but it is simpler to learn and far more easily
mastered than magnetic healing. This means that
you may be a beginner in the healing art but
proficient in meditation and soul contact. Then,
later, you may want to progress to the more
advanced methods of magnetic healing that this
book teaches. For those of you who want
experience of esoteric healing using radiatory
healing first, here is an outline of the form.

1. Having made your alignment with your soul, by

an act of will link up as a soul with the souls of
your group members.
2. Now permit this contact with the soul to descend
so that you also link with their minds and their
emotional nature. Remember that energy follows
thought, and the linking process is inevitable
when you use your imagination with intention.
Having done this, you can function as a group.
There is no further need to be conscious of the
group—it has been established. You now work
as a group.
3. Now build or open the triangle of healing: send
a line of white light from your soul, to your
brain, to your heart center. Focus all these
energies in the head, radiating out to the aura
(yours and the patient’s), picturing yourself as a
radiant center of energy or a point of vivid light.
 It is this light that will be projected upon the
patient through your ajna center.
4. Now say the Group Mantram: “With purity of
motive, inspired by a loving heart, we offer
ourselves for this work of healing. This offer we
make as a group and to the one we seek to heal.”
As you sound this mantram, visualize the linking
process going on, linking you to your group, and
the group to the patient. This activity is done
through your ajna center.
5. Now direct your thought to the one who has
come to you for healing. Link up with the patient,
so that the patient becomes a reality in your
consciousness and close to you.
6. Now recall the difficulty, ailment, or inharmony,
about which the patient has come to you; bring it
to mind, then dismiss it. Now simply concentrate
upon the love force you are going to work with.
7. Feel a deep love pouring into you. Know that
this is light substance which you can and will
manipulate.
8. Now send it out as a stream of radiant light from
 the ajna through your hands which are held about
six inches (15 cm) in front of your eyes, palms
turned outward. The stream of radiant light is
thus directed onto the patient. As you visualize it
pouring out and sense the patient receiving it, say
the Radiatory Mantram aloud, slowly and
deliberately, in a low voice, seeing only a
concentrated radiating love pour to the patient:
“May the love of the One Soul, focussed in this
group, radiate upon you, my brother/sister, and
permeate every part of your body—healing,
soothing, strengthening, and dissipating all that
hinders service and good health.”
9. Now withdraw your energies from the aura of
the patient, leaving the person free, without
dependence on you, and walking the way of their
own plan and purpose. Silently give thanks for
this opportunity to serve.
10. After a little time, ground the patient into the
physical vehicle and restore their ordinary
consciousness, by gently placing your hands on
their shoulders to indicate the healing is over.
11. After the healing, the Master DK emphasizes
“the urgent necessity for complete silence and
reticence (his italics) in relation to all healing
work. Never let it be known by anyone that you
are working in this manner, and never mention to
anyone the names of those you are seeking to aid.
Do not discuss the patient under treatment even
among yourselves.” He goes on to say, “if this
basic rule of silence is not kept, it will indicate
that you are not yet ready for this work and
should discontinue it.” He further explains, “This
injunction is far more important than you can
realize; for speech and discussion not only tend
to deflect and dissipate force, but violate a
fundamental rule which all healers are trained to
keep.”

More about the advanced use of radiatory

healing can be found in Alice Bailey’s Esoteric
Healing (1951–70, v. 4, pp. 103 ff. and 653–58).
The true healer who is experienced in these
methods employs both forms, radiatory and
magnetic healing, with equal facility and
interchangeably as required (see Chapter 7).

Training in a clinic
It is the purpose of this book to offer
preliminary training so that readers who have no
esoteric knowledge can gain entry into the
fascinating and rewarding world of esoteric
healing. Much depends on the reader studying and
following up all this information, on experimenting
and on linking up with other esoteric healing
practitioners. When you have used these principles
again and again, their value will be recognized and
a new reality of causative healing opened up. You
will be able to watch what happens to the body of
the patient when the different therapeutic agents
(triangle circuits and center balancing) are used,
and become aware as to what to apply next time,
and so on, just like a doctor would when
dispensing medicines. With practice, and
especially if you attend a recognized and
established esoteric healing clinic, you will learn
how to speak to patients and to deal with those
who come for your aid. What questions to ask are
dealt with below. How to diagnose in esoteric
healing must not be confused with a “labeling
system.” It is best to avoid telling anyone what you
think of their condition, as the human mind is apt to
exacerbate the condition by focussing on it. How to
prescribe different triangles for treatment is best
learned by repeatedly reviewing the triangles and
practicing them on yourself or on willing “guinea
pigs.” What circuits to avoid when certain
conditions present themselves is best learned at a
training clinic (beginners should not work on
pregnant women, for instance). What to do in
emergencies will be discovered the more familiar
you become with the circuits and with the routine
of esoteric healing. Sometimes the disease seems
to create further problems as a result of the
treatment, sometimes called the “healing crisis.”
Treatment for the dying needs special care, and you
need to be well experienced for that work.
How to balance the centers
To balance the centers is the very heart and
purpose of the healing process. Where there is no
balance, i.e., where the inflow and outflow through
the centers is unequal, there can be no effective
way of bringing the patient to an understanding of
the illness, nor of changing the inward self and so
bringing about healing. In esoteric healing it is
always the patient who heals him or herself; the
healer is but a reflector, a mirror, and an ideal, all
in one. The healer is not—and this must be made
clear—a reflector of himself or herself, but of the
patient, i.e., within their soul interaction, the healer
acts as a reflector to the patient of the patient’s true
purpose and nature, thereby causing change to
become possible from that level. This makes for
permanence. Healing has many nuances: it doesn’t
always result in physical healing. The physical
body has laws which it must follow, and if these
laws have been broken to the extent of becoming
irreparable, then, it is clear, healing can only take
place on a higher or more subtle level. The
physical body is the least important in the sense
that it is the automaton of the higher vehicles. The
physical body is “not a principle,” as the Ageless
Wisdom tells us. The physical body has reached
perfection in evolutionary terms and so all it needs
to do is release any karmic imperfections. The new
principle or goal of divine evolution “has entirely
to do with consciousness.”
To set the stage, let us first discuss some
important components to healing through balancing
the centers and through creating triangles: the
hands, visualization and the breath.
SOME EXERCISES
1. To learn to balance the centers: First,
practice by putting your hands nearly together
without touching. Keep your eyes closed.
Gradually, very slowly, move them apart. See if
you can detect any feeling between the hands or in
the hands. Where? Then, when they are quite far
apart, move them inwards towards each other
again, very slowly, stopping to notice changes of
feeling, if any. Do this exercise a few times. Then
try detecting different energy radiating from, say,
your elbow and your knee, your hands and your
feet, your left foot and your right foot, the different
parts of your body, chest, abdomen and so on, and
finally feel your head. You can also use your
fingers as pointers of energy: point a finger at the
palm of your other hand, moving it up the arm and
down to the fingers, then change hands. Learn
simply to feel by observation and detection. You
might register feeling in your hands as heat or
coldness, as heaviness, thickness, or in your brow
center. Simply observe, observe, observe.
2. Another exercise to increase sensitivity:
Hold your hands out in front of you. Using your
brow center like a finger, point at one hand then the
other, moving along the fingers and elsewhere, as
you did when pointing with your finger. Notice the
energy feeling. Do all these exercises thoughtfully
and slowly and meditatively (in esoteric healing
impatience is one of the worst hindrances to
success), trying to assess their difference or
similarity.
3. An exercise to experience your bodily
organs: Sit comfortably in a meditative position
and focus on an organ of your choosing, say, your
liver. Be aware of its position, its bulk, its
function, its relationships with the stomach,
intestine, diaphragm. Notice your own feelings as
you scan these different aspects of the organ. Use
the same sequence with other organs—stomach,
pancreas, intestine, kidneys, bladder, uterus (or
prostate), spinal cord, heart, lungs, brain,
ventricles, nerves, blood vessels, lymph glands,
the ductless glands, ears, touch, eyes, taste, smell,
and so on. Keep notes to help you clarify your
thoughts and feelings as you do this every day.
Images can be actual or symbolic; they can be seen
as if from outside, or you can get inside them
(microscopic vision); simply allow them to speak
via your intuition, but do not allow yourself to get
caught up with these pictures, losing your original
focus. In esoteric healing we are not interested in
psychic phenomena; this is worse than valueless
and is a hindrance to healing. Keep detached and
practice, practice, practice.
Over the weeks, cover the whole body by
powering up your perceptions, visualization, and
intuitive feelings. Repeat these exercises often. Be
aware of their etheric quality, their astral quality,
their mental quality; try even to go to their soul
quality and higher. Even when one is said to be
advanced, there is a place for such regular
exercise. Do we want to be expert healers or just
lukewarm channels? Any effort is repaid a
thousandfold.

The hands in healing

Now that you have experienced how the
energy can be directed, magnified, withheld, fired,
charged, softened, absorbed, etc., by the use of the
hands, we should again consider these amazing
organs of creative (and destructive) energy
manipulation.
 I remember during my early monastic years,
when I was being prepared to enter the novitiate
from my period of postulency, I was put into
“contemplative silence” for seven days. One of the
assignments the Novice Master asked me to do
was an active meditation on the use of my hands
during each day. This meditation left a lasting
impression on me, and I realized that the hands are
almost alive of themselves, giving to and taking
from each other, talking to one another, supporting,
acknowledging, serving one another. They seemed
to me to be the perfect pair, a couple with whom
you couldn’t find fault, a marriage and bondage of
love and beauty! During that week I also came to
realize their power. The hands wielded the
creative will just as the legs and feet controlled the
animal will. The hand could offer the tribute of
recognition, the gentleness of affection or the
assault of hatred. The hands contain very powerful
energy centers. My religious experience reminded
me of my weeping heart when considering the nails
through the hands of Christ on the cross.
Alice Bailey quotes a lovely passage which
the Tibetan Master passed on to her (remember,
please, that the word “man” here refers to
humanity, male and female.):

When the right hand of the man of matter

grasps the flower of life and plucks it for
himself, the left hand remains in emptiness.
When the right hand of the man of matter grasps
the golden lotus of the soul, the left hand
descends seeking the flower of life, though he
seeks it not for selfish ends. When the right hand
holds the golden lotus firm and the left hand
 grasps the flower of life, man finds himself to
be the seven-leaved plant which flowers on
earth and flowers before the Throne of God.
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 1, p. 61)

When we shake hands, vitality or nerve force

passes across from the meeting hands into the
bodies of the individuals. A sensitive person can
tell a lot by a handshake. An aware disciple can
consciously encourage the soul of another just
through shaking hands. Many of us have heard
about the Masonic secret grips whereby one
Mason may know another and know him as a
brother, whether he meets him in the dark or in the
light, and it also informs him how far he has
progressed in the Craft. So also in healing, behind
the outer forms of hand movements and finger
flexions, there can be found an inner action, a
movement initiated by higher mind. The use of the
fingers as they are connected to the ethers and the
subtle bodies has already been described in an
earlier chapter. The hand responds to these
according to the trained will of the skilled
operator. “The healer must seek to link his soul, his
heart, his brain and his hands. Thus can he pour the
vital healing force upon the patient,” says Rule
Five of Esoteric Healing as it describes how we
prepare ourselves for magnetic work.
Most centers in the body rely upon glands or
organs or joints for the precipitation of subtle
energy. The hands, however, rely on certain forms
of molecular substance within which are
conserved, and from which are expelled, streams
of magnetic energy that are subject to the will of
the healer. Usually unconsciously to the healer, this
molecular substance of the corpuscles expands or
contracts, unconsciously to those concerned, and
so flashing their message of consent or denial to
the brain. See how this connects with the Healing
Triangle. The healing hands can also grasp at
forces that are spiritual or rather more subtle than
the gross physical, which are then transmitted to
the brain, then relayed to the heart center and to the
intuition for interpretation. In this way we can heal
bodily and emotional ills, and even manipulate
mental matter and currents. So we learn that just as
the personality is the soul’s instrument for
expression, so the hands are a major means
whereby the individual distributes energy and
expresses intention. An ancient saying speaks of
the means by which creative energy of the third
aspect of divinity is made manifest:

Seek to cooperate with the creative

process, and learn to work with the eyes open,
the voice proclaiming and the hands conferring.

This speaks of the open inner eyes, the

discriminative voice of thought and instruction.
Another text has this to say:

The hand of man evokes a miraculous fire

from space. You know that from a single touch
flashes out a flame that does not burn.

Again, a different source says the following:

 Only the hands that have let slip all within
the three worlds are free to carry the ultimate
blessing to struggling humanity.

Phases of vital flow

To understand how to balance a center we
must realize that there is throughout the body a
constant circulation of vital energy. This movement
has a flow that is fresh (directed into the body) and
“spent” (or directed out of the body). These are
likewise the two phases of circulation in and out of
a center. A third phase is the actual circulation of
the energy within the body. Furthermore, the
condition of the centers reveals the state of
evolution of their possessor.
Each of the centers themselves can be
understood as to be in one of the five basic states
according to the development of the individual.
These correspond with the five races, planes and
stages of consciousness:
1. Closed, still and shut, and yet with signs of life,
silent and full of deep inertia. (Lemurian Race.
Atmic Plane. Mineral Kingdom.)
2. Opening, unsealed, and faintly tinged with color;
the life pulsates. (Atlantean Race. Buddhic
Plane. Plant Kingdom.)
3. Quickened, alive, alert in two directions; the
two small doors are open wide. (Aryan Race.
Mental Plane. Animal Kingdom.)
4. Radiant and reaching forth with vibrant note to
all related centers. (The Sixth Race. Astral
Plane. Humanity.)
5. Blended they are and each with each works
rhythmically. The vital force flows through from
all the planes. The world stands wide open. (The
Seventh Race. Physical plane. The Hierarchy of
Masters.)[21] (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 81).

The simplest method to balance a center as an

initial stage to healing requires the healer to bring
the center’s inflow and outflow into balance, so
that the inflow equals the outflow. Sometimes this
imbalance is so noticeable as to immobilize the
hands or one hand. The energy feels stuck, or feels
as though it is being drawn through thick mud or
molasses. Or the opposite may occur, where one
feels as though there is a vacuum, offering
absolutely no resistance. The hands as it were slip
and slide. The incoming energy is pure, clean,
fresh, new, like a breath of fresh air being drawn
in, and the outflowing energy is devitalized, like
our outbreath. But like our breathing, only a
balanced flow in and out makes for health. In the
subtle bodies, however, this flow is much more
sensitive to change, like a finely tuned barometer.

Visualization
Visualization is a gateway and the secret to all
true meditation work. Visualization is the use of the
directing activity of the mind and the faculty of the
creative imagination, which is the highest level of
the astral nature and the counterpart of the intuition
(buddhi). For just as discrimination is to the mind,
so imagination is to the feeling nature. The image-
making faculty is the result of the five senses plus
the integrating sixth sense, the mind. In astrology,
Mars governs the five senses, with its fire and
energetic will, inaugurates the thoughtforms, while
the ascendant integrates the imagery with a specific
and impersonal purpose in view.
The exercises described above are the
foundation to a creative imagination. This is
because visualization is based largely on the sense
of touch. In the tabulations in Chapter 7 concerning
the senses, note you will find that, when the sense
of touch passes through the buddhic body or
consciousness, it becomes true healing. This is the
beautiful reality: when we touch another from
within the buddhic field (the realm of pure reason
or spiritual intuition), we perform healing. Nothing
could be said more simply! This is certainly a most
profound definition of healing, and it is the method
of esoteric healing.
What happens when we creatively utilize the
power of visualization? As you work with
visualization, you will note more and more an
emphasis on the sense of quality. Here you will
experience the astral-buddhic approach towards
the work at hand—a feeling, but a feeling directed
by the discriminative or selective aspect of the
mind, an experience of an interior process of a
quality, or what might be called a sense of the
patient’s karma. This results in an identification
with the realization of the problem and symptom, a
vision of the purpose—what I call “spiritual
prognosis.” The final activity of this process is the
projection of the realized quality: a very powerful
but extremely delicate activity which actually
RESOLVES THE PAST. We do this using the tools
of esoteric healing, notably the many esoteric
triangles within the human bodies or grades of
consciousness. These particularly involve the
whole system of chakras.
It is not difficult to understand in this
description of visualization how that “energy
follows thought.” This is one of the greatest of the
esoteric laws. From it hangs the whole structure of
esoteric healing. Once visualization is recognized
and experienced as an internal process, then we
have taken the first step towards the direction of
energy. When you begin to practice visualizing
pictures, you should do so within the head center,
between the ajna and crown centers. Here you
acquire the facility to see in a higher or more
subtle way. It is here also that you should focus
when you intend to work with a specific triangle in
a patient. In this way you gather energy, focus this
energy under the power of intention, and then
project it or distribute it (often by means of a
pictorial process or as a symbol) in the intended
direction—to particular centers and in the
appropriate sequence.
There is no haste or rush during such
treatments. As healers-to-be we must make these
disciplines habitual, practicing them slowly,
regularly and gradually. Remember what happened
when you first tried to swim? You sank! But with
perseverance and effort it became effortless and
rewarding. Some exercises on how to visualize
can be found below.
You will, I am sure, feel, as you read these
words, the power and overwhelming Presence of
this technique. One of the most influential teachers
of healing this century said of it, “this constitutes
one of the major healing techniques of the future”
(Bailey, 1944, v. 1, p. 91). By correct visualization
we have the superstructure for ascertaining the
truth or falsity of all that comes to our awareness,
and, what is more, what to do about it from the
angle of the soul. We can make the future a present
reality.

Breathing techniques[22]
The average person breathes about 1000 times
per hour. Forcing the power of the breath is
dangerous, both for yourself and the one you are
trying to heal. Breath is related to the will,
whereas healing is done through love. Hence the
conflict and the difficulty. More potent than any
pranayama technique available from a touring yogi
is the development of an even, rhythmic breathing
cycle. When you have balance and rhythm in your
breath, you will have power in your words, and
your thoughts will take on a new vitality and
creativity.
Visualization is strongly related to the natural
inflow and outflow of breath, uncontrolled yet
even and profoundly rhythmical. Only with a
focused mind can the breath play a part in healing.
Try the following safe exercise given by the
Master DK in Letters on Occult Meditation:
Withdraw the consciousness onto the mental plane
at some point within the brain, then sound the
Sacred Word (OM) gently three times. Picture the
breath sent forth as a clarifying expurgating force
that in its progress onward sweeps away the
thoughtforms circulating in the mental ovoid. At the
close realize that the mental body is free and clear
of thoughtforms (Bailey, 1950a, p. 96).

Balancing the centers

 There are two ways to balance the centers.
The most common way is to have the patient sit in
an upright chair while you, the healer, hold your
hands on either side of their body. This method is
fine to start with. You can then progress to the
more advanced method. The other, more advanced
method, which I prefer, believing it to be more in
keeping with the esoteric teachings, is to sit or
stand behind the patient (who is seated in an
upright chair) with your hands outstretched in line
with the center to be balanced. (If the patient is
lying on a couch the healer stands to their side. If
the patient is dying, the healer stands behind the
head.)
To do the work of balancing you should be
aligned and attuned and have already opened the
Triangle of Healing. This will be described in the
next chapter. For now, simply practice the
technique on a friend without being attuned, so that
no energies are actually being transmitted. You are
able, nevertheless, to begin working with the
energies of another person. This is an important
safeguard for both yourself and your friend: no
energies are being exchanged, and you can practice
in complete confidence that nothing will happen.
SYNCHRONIZING TRIANGLE
To balance a center, the healer works with the
Synchronizing Triangle as described in Rule Three
of Esoteric Healing:

Let the healer concentrate the needed

energy within the needed center. Let that center
correspond to the center which has need. Let the
two synchronize and together augment force.
Thus shall the waiting form be balanced in its
work. Thus shall the two and the one, under
right direction, heal (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p.
534).

As the healer, you first align with your soul (a

stage described in the next chapter), and then direct
this spiritual energy from the head center via the
ajna center to that center in yourself which
corresponds to the patient’s center that is going to
be balanced (cf. Chapter 7, B. Diagnosis). The
soul linkage is a major protective measure for the
healer to prevent your center from becoming
overstimulated as it connects with the patient’s
corresponding center. Practice this many times
before you align with the soul as it is connected in
higher triangles (see below) and before opening
the Healing Triangle.
Having drawn this energy down from your soul
(via the head center and ajna) to the center which
corresponds to the patient’s center, hold the two
centers steady against each other. Here the healer
uses both hands: one hand in the energy inflow and
the other hand in the energy outflow.
Two other techniques may also be used with
this triangle according to the intelligent intuition of
the healer. Move slowly and with due caution even
at the expense of being ineffectual and
unsuccessful. One technique, called the expulsive
technique, is used if the patient’s center is
overactive. To bring it back into balance the healer
can expel the excess energy. As healer, increase
the energy in your corresponding center to make it
highly magnetic. You then draw off the excess
overstimulating energy from the patient’s center
and the excess is transmuted in your (the healer’s)
head center and soul.
Synchronizing Triangle
 The other technique, called the stimulating
technique, is used when the healer finds the
patient’s center exhausted and devitalized,
contracted and weak. You, the healer, can
empower the patient’s center from your own
corresponding center by sending a ray of your own
energy. In this way the patient’s center is amplified
and strengthened.
Let us summarize these three techniques of the
Synchronizing Triangle:
1. The Balancing Technique. The safest method.
Hold the two centers steady against each other,
to bring about a balance in the patient’s center.
The use of magnetic and radiatory healing
together.
2. The Expulsive Technique. When the patient’s
center is overactive, you, the healer, empower
your own center to strongly magnetize (draw out,
draw back) energy from the patient’s
corresponding (overactive) center. This is using
radiatory healing only. The hands are not needed.
Balance of the center is then restored.
3. The Stimulating Technique. When the patient’s
center is underactive, as the healer, send a
 powerful ray of your own energy from your own
center into the corresponding (underactive)
center in the patient. This uses magnetic healing
only. The hands are used to control the movement
and lead to a balance (see Chapter 7, B.
Diagnosis).

The whole aim of using these techniques, as is

the purpose of all medical methods, is to bring the
body into renewed or restored balance or
homeostasis. In esoteric healing our intention is for
etheric balance, on an ever higher scale. Of course,
it is not a balance which is restoring a past
integration, but a balance which has moved the
patient on to a new integrity or larger whole. A
karmic problem is released and resolved thereby;
the secret is unveiled.
Such balance is easier to achieve in persons
who are on the spiritual path, since they have
already started the process of developing their
seven major centers. It is less easy to bring into
balance the centers of a person who is not
spiritually oriented, as the major centers are still
dormant (the minor centers are more active). Such
a person may well be better advised to consult a
practitioner in the orthodox or complementary
medical field for quicker results. However, the
Triangle for Undeveloped Persons (Bailey, 1951–
70, v. 4, p. 430) may be used in conjunction with
the Synchronizing Triangle to help the absorption
of higher energy. To do this, hold the soul of the
patient, directing the energy to the head center, then
down to the solar plexus center—or perhaps you
might prefer to use the Triangle for the Majority
which may be used safely for the majority of
people who are not on a spiritual path, and which
involves the ajna center, the solar plexus center,
and the sacral center—and then do the balancing
technique with the Synchronizing Triangle. This
may assist the balancing work of any particular
center which is badly out of rhythm.
The method for arriving at which center in the
patient is in greatest need requiring the
Synchronizing Triangle technique shall be fully
described in Chapter 7.

Practicing with the major centers

Begin a practice balance session by starting
with the solar plexus center, which is the most
active in humanity at this time and therefore easier
for the healer to detect. Close your eyes and
visualize energy streaming in through your one
hand (at the back), through the solar plexus center,
and out and through the hand at the front. If you
wish, you can start balancing by holding each
center from behind the patient only.
In all the centers the energy always moves
from the etheric and entering the back of the body
through the center to the endocrine gland (except
for the ajna, and head of course). This is because
five major centers are situated outside the spinal
column in the vital etheric body about 2-6 inches
(5-10 cms) away from the spine (linked to the
endocrine glands which they vitalize).[23]
As you “hold” the inflow and outflow of the
solar plexus center, see if you can feel any
difference in actual flow: is the movement of
inflow too fast or too slow? Is there congestion? If
so, what form is it taking? How does it feel at the
outflow of the center? Is it coming out in a weak
stream? Or is it pouring out too quickly? Does
there appear an irregular throb? Do you detect heat
or cold? In which subtle body is the cause of the
problem? Is it in the etheric solar plexus center, or
is it in the astral solar plexus center or in the
mental solar plexus center? What sort of desire or
emotion is out of balance? Are you getting any
sensation in your hands? How do you interpret that
sensation? Does a picture, image or symbol arise
in your mind? If so, hold this and, as you scan the
center, observe what happens to the image you’re
holding. You can then visualize the picture or
image or symbol changing for the better,
improving, unfolding into ever greater beauty.
Allow it to move towards perfection, for this is the
way visualization works. As the image changes for
the better, improves, this has a corresponding
effect on the center (or triangle) being worked on.
Never allow the image to get out of control or get
negative in any way. You are in control; always
work towards the positive, the good, the beautiful,
the true.
Listen to your intuition as you become more
and more sensitive to the subtle changes going on
within the flow. Don’t worry about not detecting a
lot at first; it takes practice. As you think about the
energy in this way, let your hands respond to the
flow, very gently directing it towards balance and
harmony and towards right radiatory resonance, or
if you’re using imagery and visualization, towards
greater and greater perfection.
Your hands will move to bring this about, and
when it does you will know at once that balance
has been achieved. Movements of the hands or
fingers might feel huge and exaggerated when you
are in a meditative state, but they are usually
minute and hardly detectable by anyone watching.
Anyone using showy movements which are large
and elaborate is not healing but pretending to heal,
and pretending to be important. When indicated,
hold the center in this perfect state according to the
visualized image. Then you can move on to the next
center (or triangle).

My first encounter
On a personal note, I remember that, when I
first started to study esoteric healing, I went to
“Brenda’s Clinic” (run by Brenda Johnston, who
founded the International Health Research Network
for the dissemination of the use of esoteric healing.
This Network, a registered charity in England, is
now known as the International Network of
Esoteric Healing.) I had hardly arrived when I was
placed on a chair to “watch and feel the energies”!
This was a remarkable first experience of their
methods, for I saw beams of light coming out of the
healers’ hands and fingers and going into the
patient; it looked as if the patient were attached by
strings or threads or rays of light to the healers. I
couldn’t feel much myself except some sort of
vague, profound movement on deeper, almost
unconscious levels. Later, when I was learning
some of the techniques, I felt as though I was the
most insensitive student alive. I felt nothing at all,
and in the early days I questioned the value of this
form of esoteric healing. And yet, when Brenda
was teaching me, she would demonstrate, for
instance, by moving her hands over my legs at a
distance of some three or four feet and point out
that there was trouble in my left leg (I had broken it
in a motorcycle accident a few years before) and
in my right knee area (I had a series of dislocations
from playing rugby and an operation there when I
was at school). She did not say, “Aha! You had
dislocation trouble in your right knee ... mmm, yes,
that was when you were about 16 years old and I
can see you lying in pain on a rugby field, and ...
mmm, yes, you had an operation on it a year later!”
That is for the psychics to see and enjoy. As
indicated above, this work is not in the least
related to psychism. We are interested only in the
energy on soul levels as it streams to its mirror, the
etheric body. Any psychic activity is simply
ignored as an inconvenient interference. Anyway, I
suppose I must have felt enough to persevere, for I
joined the clinic at Brenda’s (with Ann Higgins
and Helen Frankland; Brenda had retired from
healing by that time, although she did come in to do
some work with us occasionally) and worked there
for two years. The clinic was a very good training
ground, for we were able to discuss the different
aspects of healing and also encourage one another
on this untraveled path. We all had to drive long
distances to attend this clinic. I remain in close
contact with both Helen and Ann, even though we
all run our own clinics now. We also all teach
esoteric healing, each giving upward of three
courses a year both in England and in other
countries.
But as you see from this little detour, nothing
comes very easily or very quickly; it is only with
regular practice and study that we can succeed
(and this can be said for anything). In this work,
we like to add one other requirement to the two
above, that of meditation. So we have: practice
(service), study, and meditation, each relying on
the others for complete success.

Balancing the other major centers

Once you have practiced on the solar plexus
center, you have the basis for balancing all the
centers up the spine. The order is as follows: solar
plexus center, base center, sacral center, heart
center, and throat center. Practice on each, moving
from center to center up the body. Before working
on the head centers (alta major, ajna and head
center), I strongly recommend that you balance the
five centers up the spine until you are well
acquainted with their different energies, and until
you feel confident about this part of healing. It is
very important to get this right, for it stands as the
foundation of all future treatment on the subtle
bodies. Through this sort of initial practice you
will encounter your own doubts and insights; it
will enable you to build up or empower your own
healing forces for the future. Then you may go on to
balance the alta major center and the head center,
and finally the ajna center.

The ajna center

Start with this center when doing the balancing

for real on a patient. The energy of the ajna center
is drawn in from the front, which is different from
the other centers where the energy comes in from
the back. This flow moves in through the brow and
then exits just behind the crown center at the top of
the head. Start by feeling the ajna on yourself: cup
your right hand and place it in the energy stream a
few inches in front of your brow. (When speaking
of exits of energy, two things are being referred to:
first, the exit of energy from the etheric center to
the gland, and second, the exit from the gland both
into the blood stream and associated organs and
systems, and also from these back out into the
etheric body as spent energy.)
Then using the index finger of your left hand
raise your left hand above the top of your head.
With your eyes closed, find the outstreaming ajna
energy—it is often quite a “thin” stream of energy,
hence we usually use the index finger to pick it up.
When found, bring it into balance in much the same
way as you have done when practicing with the
solar plexus, base, sacral and other centers up the
spine.
The ajna center governs the whole system of
centers and actually has little inputs or centers in
the brow itself (associated with the stalk of the
pituitary gland) which relate to the different major
centers on the spine. But don’t worry about these at
this stage; simply bring the whole center into a nice
state of integration, being aware that this is the
master center and influences all the other centers.
When this center is in balance, all the other centers
will be found to balance much more easily and
more quickly.
Once you feel confident about this and the
other centers, you may work on a friend to balance
their major centers of energy—a wonderful
experience for both of you, even if the outcome is
unexpected. For, even though it may be relaxing, it
is not a method for relaxation. The energy of the
patient will be changed or charged, and this is not
always acceptable or desirable insofar as the
patient can see with the “eyes” of the personality.
Often the soul has other plans!
So please practice on friends and on yourself
as often as possible and be prepared to be called
crazy or eccentric. Anything unknown, new, or
different will earn this label. Try to be discreet and
don’t impose your newfound joy on your friends or
family to make them feel used or uncomfortable! At
this stage you may ask them if you may practice on
them (I am afraid later this liberty is taken from
you and you have to wait to be asked to give
healing). So go on undeterred; the rewards are
great. Or, if you can, get in touch with a clinic near
you.[24]
Here is an exercise that will help with your
diagnosis skills (see Chapter 7, B. Diagnosis); it
was given by Master DK to “intensify the activity
of the ajna center.” It will also help to produce
new vision and personal integration. He calls this
an exercise, not a meditation.

1. Achieve quiet. Relax. Raise the consciousness

to the ajna center.
2. Sound the OM, visualizing the integration of the
personality with the soul. Link the ajna with the
head center.
3. Pause.
a. Take a long breath, drawing the energy from
the throat center.
b. Repeat the breathing, drawing the energy
from the heart center, holding these two
withdrawn energies imaginatively in the ajna
 center.
c. Repeat the process in connection with the
solar plexus.
d. Repeat the process in connection with the
sacral center.
e. Recognizing then that four types of energy
have been centered in the ajna, take another
long breath and draw the energy of the base
center to the ajna focus.
f. Now consciously endeavor to hold all the
energies there.
4. Now dedicate the energies of the personality
(which express themselves through these five
centers and the ajna, making six centers in all)
and breathe them back again—by an act of the
will—into the centers to which they belong. Do
not do this sequentially and piecemeal but as one
dynamic out-breathing; see these energies
traveling down the spine to their respective
resting places, carrying new life, pure
stimulation and dynamic will to each and every
center.
5. Now, as the soul informing the body, sound the
OM.

You can follow this exercise with your daily

meditation. It is an exercise that needs regular use
to be effective (Bailey, 1944, v. 2, p. 604).

Balancing and visualization

While you are working on the centers, train
yourself to visualize, to see the energy flow. (This
does not employ lower psychic vision. Remember
that in esoteric healing, psychic senses are actually
more a hindrance than a help, so don’t use them.)
What we want is a creative use of the higher
imagination. Here are some exercises in
visualization:
i. Imagine a flow of water, pure white; see it
flowing through your hands as you hold them
about 18 inches (45 cm) apart.
ii. Now imagine a stream of air, clear but visible,
moving in one direction through your hands.
iii. Now imagine the vital force, the etheric
energy, as pure energy streaming through your
hands.

In each of these exercises move your hands

slowly in and then out to feel the different action of
the hands on the stream of imagined force. Notice
the changes that this action causes, both between
your hands and in your hands, and also in your
consciousness. Practice this at any time of day
when you have a spare minute. It is a refreshing
activity and can make for renewing a sagging
concentration. Then, when you have become well-
acquainted with the process, you can practice on a
friend, with their consent, of course. And if your
friend is interested, allow the roles to be reversed.
It is good to be both a giver and a receiver, helping
you to be more aware of the energies you are
dealing with.

Transmittable force
 Visualization is such that it is transmittable.
That is to say, the limitations put on the physical
world do not apply here. Through visualization the
practice of healing can be done from a distance.
Hence we have what is called absent healing, or,
more appropriately, distant healing. My advice is
that we use this form only when we are thoroughly
versed in the art and technique of healing, and that
we have done many years of work on patients that
are present physically. The reason for this is that
we need a sound foundation on the body first,
where the patient’s consciousness is close to us. In
this way we can avoid mistakes and confusion. But
what we can do is practice on a person who is
present but on whose body you don’t actually
work. Let me explain. The patient sits in the center
and the healer sits on the side but does not actually
work in the patient’s aura. Again, I would suggest
you do this only after a lot of practice on patients
who are physically present. Doing this will
prepare you for healing from a distance. To repeat,
distant healing should at first be used when a
patient is there with you but on whose body you do
not work. You will probably find this is easier if
you practice in an organized esoteric healing
clinic. Here is the technique:

Distant healing
Sit in an upright chair. Make your alignment,
activate the Higher Triangle, and open the Healing
Triangle and other triangles as usual when about to
heal (see the description of this process in the next
chapter). Now, since there is no actual patient
physically present, imagine the person is there in
front of you.
Remember, you have already achieved rapport
with your patient on the soul level through the
alignment and attunement, so the linking channels
are already in place. This imagined presence is as
real as if the person were present in his or her
dense physical body—that’s how strong the
imagination makes it. In actual fact, the only thing
that separates is what we call space and distance,
whereas in meditation and in the activity of
creative thought we enter the zone of timelessness.
Where there is no time, the separation which
distance or space causes no longer exists. Instead,
all becomes immediately present. This is the nature
of telepathic rapport; it is as if you are actually
speaking to or possibly inside the person you are
communicating with. Such a sense of identification
can only be brought about after one has first
acquired self-identification: a recognition and
realization of one’s “isness” and “beingness,”
based on the eternity and immortality of spirit.
With this in mind, do the healing as if the
patient were there. It will surprise you how easy it
is, and how effective it is. All it requires is a mind
that is able to concentrate fairly well and the
ability to stay aware of what you are doing at any
given moment. Of course, we all will wander into
other realms of thought, or into what we are to do
after the healing is over, and so on. This is normal
for beginners. If this happens, simply draw the
mind back without any concern or irritation to its
work. Gradually, in time, these deviations will
occur less and less often. If you accept your own
weakness, then you can build on your strengths. But
if you get upset and cross with your weaknesses,
you are actually strengthening them instead, while
making your strengths more fragile. Deviating
thoughts are as harmless as they are futile in the
healing work, so the sooner you simply drop them
—or turn them off or mentally say to them, “I will
attend to you later,” i.e., acknowledging them, but
not following their lure—the sooner your focus
will become clear and defined. Be interested in
what you are doing to the patient. This will help to
hold your thoughts on the process of healing.
The next chapter deals with the healing
technique with a patient present. In absent healing
or distant healing (although, as we have seen,
distance does not actually exist in thought on soul
level), we work with exactly the same process, all
within the creative and vivid imagination,
visualizing the energies bringing the entire
organism into right balance and relationship with
itself.

Appointments
Now we will turn to describe the actual
processes involved in esoteric healing. The
background knowledge essential for applying
esoteric healing has been described. Now we can
move into the practical use of esoteric healing.
Before accepting your first appointment of a
patient, we assume you have worked and practiced
regularly at all these preliminary exercises leading
up to your first consultation by a patient. We’re
going to be very practical and professional.
An esoteric healer’s rule is that we will never
use this form of healing unless asked by the patient,
or the patient’s parents if the patient is a child, or
the patient’s family or close friend if the patient is
critically ill or unconscious. This rule never
wavers, for it is through the voice that the patient’s
soul expresses itself and has the intention to change
and be healed. It is normally best to have the
patient present when you do the first healing,
which establishes a close thread of energy between
you and the patient that can be recalled if the
patient is unable to see you personally on
subsequent visits due to distance or for other
inevitable reasons. Then you may heal via
visualization and telepathy,[25] called “absent
healing” or “distant healing.”
THE FIRST APPOINTMENT
The first appointment should be assigned one
hour. You will not actually be healing for an hour,
but you do need time to talk a little to the patient
beforehand. Allow the patient to verbalize their
symptoms and needs. The healing will take
something between fifteen to thirty minutes (no
longer for first appointments) and then, if you can,
encourage the patient to rest silently in an
adjoining room for ten to fifteen minutes, to
“absorb the treatment” and so be ready for the
outside demands again.
PAYMENT
 “The worker deserves his pay,” says a Master.
A marked donation bowl may be left in the waiting
room so that the patient can, out of freedom, and
without embarrassment, leave an “energy”
exchange for the healing group. Money should
always be regarded in terms of energy, and
someone giving money for the healing should be
seen to be exchanging energy, for “he who gives,
receives, to give again.” Such an aphorism should
be thought about, as it has far-reaching
implications. The spiritual server, says DK, seeks
nothing for the self, save that which may equip for
the work to be done. I know healers who accept
“gifts” instead of money as payment, for example,
a homemade loaf of bread, a couple of jars of
homemade marmalade, a bag of homegrown
greens, and so on. Esoteric healers are
professional like other medical practitioners. They
have undergone a long training and the work is
often demanding and tiring. They deserve to be
repaid for this. But they should not expect anything.
The healing is not for money (it is not for sale), as
it is actually a healing energy “exchange.”
Where the healer works in a dedicated clinic,
it is often more comfortable to patients and more
professional to have a “recommended donation” as
a guideline.

Preparation of the patient

ASKING FOR HEALING
Let’s explore more deeply the issue of asking
for healing, as it is important for the healer to
understand. The patient who seeks your help comes
to you out of individual need and freedom. This
point is one of the most difficult for beginners to
understand. There can be no “Let me do some
healing on you” to someone who has not asked for
it. The healer must wait until those who require
healing make an appointment. This is that so-called
magnetic quality where the healer “attracts those
who can be helped.” At first it is very tempting for
the new healer to want to go out and demonstrate
their skill, to show esoteric healing off, to test the
methods on people who have real problems. But in
this form of medicine, which is entirely based on
the higher form of energy and on a deeper
understanding of the human being, it is imperative
that the initiative for the establishment of the
healing energy between the healer and the patient
be instigated by the patient. It must be the patient’s
will to invoke aid from the healer. The healing
flow of energy is then evoked, being drawn by the
patient from the healer. This would not be the case
if the healer were to suggest to a person, “Would
you like me to give you some healing?” or “I can
see you could benefit from esoteric healing; may I
do this for you?” As stated earlier, the imposition
of higher, more radiatory, energies for the act of
healing can only be transferred from a position of
passivity and receptivity from the angle of the
patient, whereas if the healer asks to heal someone,
this imposition is made from the will. It is a subtle
form of forcing the patient into acquiescence. Such
manipulation can have dangerous, even disastrous,
long-term effects, not only for the patient but for
the healer as well.
As with all rules there are always exceptions.
The exception relating to this rule refers to those
who do not have the capacity to ask for healing,
viz., babies and children, and also those in a
comatose state, and others who cannot rationally
seek your help, but who are, according to your own
intuition, calling out to you for healing. Those who
seek your help via friends or other people must not
be given healing by you until they make the effort
to ask you themselves. Those who write to you
asking for healing but who cannot get to you, you
may treat by using “distant healing.” Afterward
both of you have an obligation towards each other
to regularly keep in touch by letter, telephone, or e-
mail. It is useless and a waste of time and spiritual
energy sending out healing to someone who is not
aware of the fact, not interested, or who is already
better! For this reason, generally, it is best to see
the patient on the first occasion at least, even if the
later appointments are given absently, where the
healer works with the patient at a distance. Again,
it is best that the patient comes to see you for
healing every week, or every fortnight, or monthly
according to your estimation of the patient’s need.
Keep an appointment book for this purpose.
SITTING OR LYING
To return to the discussion of appointments, on
arrival the patient should get into a comfortable
position which can be maintained for 20-30
minutes. (During later appointments, the person
might have to remain stationary for even longer.)
The patient might like to sit on a chair or lie on a
couch. Either position is fine for doing esoteric
healing, and each position has its own advantages.
Usually the lying position is used only when the
patient is too ill to sit or is not able to. In that
event, the patient is asked to lie on one side, so that
the chakras can more easily be reached by the
healer. If the patient is sitting, however, an upright
chair with a hollow back is best. Avoid lounge
chairs where the posture of the patient is rounded
and slouched. Of course, sitting on the more
recently designed chair where the knees are on a
cross bar and the feet are tucked under is excellent;
so is sitting cross-legged on the floor.
QUESTIONING THE PATIENT
Put the person at ease and ask a few questions
about the problem with which the patient is
suffering. A few details should be recorded in note
form for future reference on the patient’s filing
card (don’t forget their name, address and
telephone number and, if possible, exact date,
location and time of birth).
The questions may be made to access certain
information useful to the work of healing you are to
perform. For instance, questions may be geared
towards finding out what is the major influence of
the person’s personality as a whole at this time
(find out what their major interest is, what
literature is studied, what is the favorite pursuit).
DK suggests the following questions:
What are the ordinary topics of conversation
the person engages in?
 Which body is the problem originating in? Is it
physical, emotional or mental?
Which area in the body is the problem most
closely related to? Which center governs the area
of greatest need?
What is the major quality which the person’s
soul is expressing; what selfless service is the
patient doing, if any?
What do you feel is the predominant color of
the patient’s emotional body?
Is the patient subject to sudden turmoils that
throw the entire emotional body into disorder?
Does the patient show symptoms of
devitalization or of congestion? Is there a lack of
energy, does the person always feel tired, feel the
cold, etc., or the opposite?

In relation to the condition of the patient, be

aware of the following:
1. The symptoms of the disease and their
particular nature.
2. Its location.
3. The primary center involved and its condition.
4. The acute or chronic nature of the difficulty, that
is, is it recent or long term.
5. The psychological condition of the patient.
6. The danger of death or not.
7. The rays of the patient (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p.
702).

As you can see, the esoteric healer should

either have some direct scientific knowledge or
else be developing the faculty of inner vision that
sees the trouble wherever it may be, allowing the
healer eventually to clairvoyantly view the entire
frame and organs, and thus locate instantaneously
any trouble (Bailey, 1950a, pp. 243–44). Try to
keep these questions short and to the point and
don’t be drawn away by emotional responses; the
patient has come to you as a spiritual healer, not as
a psychologist or dietitian. Sometimes, it is true,
we need to be flexible and allow some of the
congestion to be released through words, but you
need to keep a tight rein over this lest it become
insipid. Be aware of what you want to know and
why (and how it will influence your healing
approach) and try to draw it out. This takes
practiced skill. Keep notes on all your findings,
both before the healing (the consultation stage) and
after the healing (the treatment stage). Obviously, a
healer’s work is wonderfully rewarding to both
parties, so keep your attitude positive and joyful as
well as earnest and sincere.

Duality
It may be useful at this point, to understand the
patient’s two sides, their duality. There is a will of
the personality and there is a will of the soul.
These are not necessarily opposing but they are
usually different. The simplest way to come to
grips with them in a person is to realize that the
personality is born under the sun sign, say,
Aquarius, and the soul is born under the rising sign
(or ascendant) say, Leo. An astrologer will be
required to give this information based on the
person’s date, time and place of birth. By
reviewing the indications for each sign and relating
them to the present problem of the patient, the true
will of the soul may emerge a little more clearly.
Of course, this is not essential to know at first, but
as the healer becomes more attuned with this art,
this may help in the work. Any good basic book on
astrology will give you the necessary
information[26]; the person is to aspire to the rising
sign’s positive indications in their personality life,
i.e., replace or unify that which is in the
personality.
After all, esoteric healers do regard their work
as being scientific, that is, a knowledge and
method which is ascertained by observation and
experiment, systematized and brought under
general principles, producing knowledge and skill.
But as we are dealing with the “esoteric,” what we
are doing is not yet able to be proven as factual.
The esoteric relates to knowledge which is beyond
the five physical senses at this point in evolution;
later, in years to come, the esoteric eventually
becomes “exoteric” and hence provable by
scientific instruments which before were not
invented or sensitive enough. This has happened
right down the ages. There will always be two
types of scientific knowledge, one spiritual and the
other sensual; how else could man advance?

Confidentiality
The healer, after doing the preliminary
attunement and balancing of the centers (as
described earlier), will allow the information in
the centers and triangles to be reflected up into his
or her consciousness via the hands or ajna center;
and through the established link with the group of
healers and the patient the healer will be
consciously informed as to what to treat. This, of
course, takes practice and more practice.
And to preserve the force we have created and
projected onto the patient (or yourself in self-
healing), the esoteric healer is requested not to talk
about what is found, what is done, and what is
thought. Talking about the healing is seriously
detrimental to its potency. Talking about the healing
in any form dissipates the energy of the healing.
For the keeping of records (which is important) the
healer has a card index system noting down only
what has been essential to that healing.
To summarize, amongst other things relating to
your practice, the following should be mentioned
to the patient before you begin the work of healing,
somewhat as follows:
1. “Be receptive to your higher soul energies.”
2. “You need to be aware that healing changes may
not be immediately noticeable to you; nor will
they necessarily occur in the way you expect.”
3. “We are working on all levels of consciousness
so as to bring about a closer alignment with your
true self, your soul. The better the alignment is,
the more sound will be the healing.”
4. “Confidentiality is assured.”
5. “We would ask you not to speak to anyone about
what you experience in the healing (at least for a
few days) so you can absorb the treatment. This
 is because talking about it can dissipate the
energy.”
6. “There is no standard fee but there is a donation
bowl in the waiting room.”
7. “You have a choice to lie down on the couch or
sit on a chair.”
8. “The healing is done in silence and we do not
touch you until the end.”
9. “When the healing is finished, I will place my
hands on your shoulders.”

Have a glass of water and some tissues on the

side; sometimes they are needed. We do this work
in silence and without distractions (music and
incense are not required).

Allocating the work to be done

After the consultation the healer will begin the
healing. But if there are a few of you as healers, or
if there are students-in-training attending, the
patient is best returned to the waiting room for the
short time of allocating the work to be done; don’t
do this in front of the patient. If there is a group of
you who are to give the healing (a group, the
number is not restricted, has the valuable asset of
being more impersonal, so that there is less chance
for, “I am doing the healing,” and more chance for,
“We are doing the healing”), this is the time to
decide who is going to do what. Normally, at each
healing consultation a leader is chosen, and he or
she then designates what each person should do
during the healing session. When the group
members become proficient, this becomes a simple
matter and won’t take long. But, at the beginning, it
may require quite a lengthy outlining of what each
member is to do. Until all the members or student
practitioners are completely at ease with the
procedure, the healer(s) who are more
knowledgeable should be the leaders. Here is an
example which will illustrate what to do. Say there
are three of you to do a healing on someone who
has a personality emphasis which is highly
intellectual but whose emotions feel starved of
expression. There are twitches in the body and
there appears to be wasting in some of the muscles.
You deduce from the initial interview that the main
center involved is the throat center with secondary
involvement in the solar plexus center and sacral
center. The soul seems to have a decidedly
scientific bent. This suggests, because it has
become too strong, that you need to balance this
tendency with the heart center. So one of the
healing group is asked to work on the sacral
system, and the second healer is asked to work
with the solar plexus system. The leader works
with the throat system because the leader will
always take the highest center involved. Within
these simple instructions there is enough work to
occupy at least 20-30 minutes.
It is interesting to note that at the first healing
each triangle will take a lot longer to balance than
at subsequent visits, so don’t be surprised to work
on only two or three triangles at first. People who
are healthy (and advanced) will permit a lot more
triangles to be done. Of course, it is imperative
that the members of the healing group understand
each other and love each other so that there is
perfect harmony. The strength and power of a
group is the synergy or combined action which
makes it greater than the sum of the individual
parts. If, however, you are working alone, you will
take these systems and work correctively on them
one at a time, usually beginning at the solar plexus
center.
Having allocated the work to be done, the
healers will sit briefly in meditation, align
themselves as a group, and then sound the OM
three times, to focus and concentrate the higher
energies for the group. The patient is then recalled
into the treatment-room and sits down in the center.
The healers take up their positions: the leader
standing on the right side of the patient; the other
healers stand a comfortable distance behind the
patient (if there are four or more healers in the
group, some must stand to the front of the patient,
so a circle is formed) (see p. Chapter 7, Beginning
the act of healing).
 7.
HOW TO USE THE
TRIANGLE CIRCUITS OF
ESOTERIC HEALING

When all the preliminaries outlined in the last

chapter are understood, the actual practice of
esoteric healing can begin. But before we move
into this the most practical section of the book, I
want to mention a few things about the use of
triangles. The art of esoteric healing is connecting
with the right triangle at the right time.

Understanding the use of triangles

The most frequent questions I get asked at
courses or lectures on esoteric healing are: Why
triangles? How do triangles work in the body? Is it
important which direction they flow?
These questions are important and they need to
be clarified. In answering them I ask you to stretch
your minds; better still, I appeal to your esoteric
sense, something the lower mind can be baffled by!
First, we must realize that the understanding of
triangle circuits as patterns forming the foundation
of our bodies is just another way of looking at the
body. Already we know about the Western medical
view, consisting of cells, glands, natural bacteria,
and various systems (cardiovascular, respiratory,
hepatic, glandular). Many of us are also aware of
the traditional Chinese approach comprised of the
five organ theory, meridians, Chi or life force,
acupuncture points, etc. Another perspective is the
Ayurvedic model involving three types of energy.
And there are other approaches to the
understanding of the human organism and why it
gets ill. The esoteric approach respects all these
versions and offers its own explanation known as
the Science of Triangles. The ancient wisdom
reveals that the triangle is the basic building block
upon which not only the human being is built, but
also the whole universe as well. This has recently
been confirmed by physics—the triangles are
known as quarks. For we are the microcosm of the
macrocosmic whole.
This simply means that the human being is a
replica in miniature of the Grand Man of the
Heavens, or of the Living Totality of Existence, the
Great Architect of the Universe, to use other
names. This is a new idea for Western science, and
it will be some time before it is recognized. But
signs of this new approach are already showing in
some of the more profound (or abstract) sciences,
e.g., in physics and in the Anthropic Principle, in
which there is a theoretical proposal that there may
be seven dimensional planes in our universe.
DK says, “In the study of the science of
triangles, the student must bear in mind that there is
always a point of the triangle which—in a
particular crisis or ‘event of consciousness’—is
the emanating, dynamic, conditioning energy.
During the cycles ... in which it thus controls, the
other two points express receptivity and are
regarded esoterically as embodying forces. Every
triangle is, therefore, the expression of one
fundamental energy and of two secondary forces”
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 3, p. 460).
Now, it is clear both in my studies of this
subject and in my practice of esoteric healing that
the triangle works in two possible ways. Which
way it works will be the one chosen by the soul of
the patient. We are not to force one particular
method onto the patient. The two methods are as
follows:
1. The first method of triangular activity is
somewhat two-dimensional. It involves sequential
flow from point to point to point, i.e., from the first
center to the second or middle center, to the third
in ordered sequences laid down by the Tibetan.
This form of directional movement usually takes
place first before the second method described
below. It is the way triangle circuits work in
average people, in aspirants and in most disciples.
A few touches of the second method may be felt in
the life of these people, experienced in the form of
conversions and in so-called little kundalini
experiences, a pushing back of the ring-pass-not, a
widening of consciousness.
2. In the second method, the triangle stands as
a whole, the points of the triangle working together
at the same time. This method has the triangle
functioning “dimensionally” and not linearly. Here
the power being released into the triangle pours
through the threefold nature of the patient affecting
the monad, the soul and the personality together at
the same time. This is a very powerful form of
healing. Changes and spiritual development will
be secure and permanent. A deeper alignment will
be established in the human being (patient). Of
course, we are talking about one particular circuit
being held by the healer. But if this triangle were
the one especially needing help, the reverberation
through all other circuits would occur and the
patient would feel an immediate shift. The burden
would lift. The person would feel more able to
face and overcome the problem presented. In each
case we work with visualization and the creative
imagination.
So let us review how triangles utilize energy
from an esoteric perspective:
A. There is the major conditioning energy,
producing manifestation: This is the monadic
expression, symbolized as the point in the middle
of the triangle. It is the emanating center of the
triangle, being the dynamic and positive aspect of
the triangle being held. On the most occult scale
this energy can be traced back to the Eye of the
Father (Siva) carrying the light of the constellation
of the Great Bear.
B. Next there is the qualifying energy,
producing consciousness. This is the soul
expression. It is the receptive force center of the
three points. It acts as the evocative expression of
the initial impelling energy, synthesizing the two
forces, the emanating and the responsive or
negative forces (A and C), producing the
motivating secondary energy. This, on an occult
scale, comes from the Eye of the Son, carrying the
light from the star, Sirius.
C. Then there is the responsive point of
negative energy mainly responsive to the second
point of the triangle (B), producing “a source of
violent interplay between the two points of the
base line” (B and C), causing an expression of
force and tangibility. This is the Eye of the Mother,
carrying the light from the Pleiades.
DK goes on to say, “When the experience
undergone in Virgo is consummated in Pisces and
the tests of Scorpio have led to illumination in
Taurus, then the effects of these four energies will
be to make man the true triangle, expressing the
three divine aspects as they come from the three
major conditioning constellations: the Great Bear,
the Pleiades and Sirius” (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 3, p.
481).
The astrological symbols for Virgo and
Scorpio are triple in nature, the only two which
are. Grasp the meaning of this and you will be
ready to work with the new astrology and the
significance of this abstruse science of triangles (p.
480).
Much thought needs to be given to this
information and it would repay you to discuss it in
your study group. Such knowledge greatly
potentizes healing.
Contemplate the interesting succession of
triangles that are to be found in the body and the
way they must be linked by the progression of the
fire before that fire can perfectly vivify them, and
thence pass on to other transmutations ... bearing
always in mind that according to the ray so will
proceed the geometric rising of the fire, and
according to the ray so will the points be touched
in ordered sequence (Bailey, 1962, p. 169). For,
once the fire has free passage along any triangle, it
flames continuously (p. 170).
We are told that when we reach our goal, each
triangle is a radiant path of fire, and each center a
wheel of living fiery force rotating at terrific
speed. Each center at this stage not only rotates in
a specific direction, but literally turns upon itself,
forming a living, flaming iridescent globe of pure
fire, and holding within it a certain geometrical
shape, yet withal vibrating so rapidly that the eye
can scarcely follow it (p. 170).
It must be remembered that the inner web of
light which is called the etheric body of the planet
is essentially a web of triangles and, when the
evolutionary process is completed, it will have
been organized (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 3, p. 479).
At the end of our evolutionary Path the
following occurs:

The secret of the Fire lies hid in the second

letter of the Sacred Word. The mystery of life is
concealed within the heart. When the lower
point vibrates, when the Sacred Triangle glows,
when the point, the middle center, and the apex
likewise burn, then the two triangles—the
greater and the lesser—merge with one flame
which burneth up the whole. The fire within the
lesser fire findeth its progress much impelled
when the circle of the moving and the unmoving,
 of the lesser wheel within the greater wheel that
moveth not in Time, findeth a twofold outlet; it
then shineth with the glory of the twofold One
and of His sixfold brother. Fohat rusheth
through space. He searcheth for his
complement. The breath of the unmoving one,
and the fire of the One Who seeth the whole
from the beginning rush to meet each other, and
the unmoving becomes the sphere of activity”
(Bailey, 1962, pp. 172–73).

With this introductory perspective of how

triangles function and evolve we can appreciate
the potentiality of each triangle we work with in
esoteric healing.

Beginning the act of healing (see photo #1 in

Appendix B and also Chapter 6, The First
Appointment)
Bring the patient in to be seated in the center of
the circle of healers[27] (or simply in the center of
the room). Have the leader come over to the
patient and gently lay hands on his or her
shoulders, saying something like, “We are now
ready to start the healing. Are you comfortable?
Please feel completely at ease; we do not touch
your body at all, except at the end of the healing
when I will put my hands here (indicate the
patient’s shoulders or at the back of the neck
between the shoulder blades) to let you know that
the healing is finished. Now, please, place your
hands on your thighs and both feet uncrossed on the
floor; gently close your eyes.” Closing the eyes is
important but not essential for the patient. It helps
to cut out irrelevant material imagery surrounding
the person. It is at this stage the healers also close
their eyes as they stand in their positions. The
leader (usually) stands at the right of the patient (if
sitting) or at the head of the bed (if lying down);
the other healers will position themselves either at
the back of the patient or towards the front, in a
circle.
There are five phases to the work of esoteric
healing, summarized as follows:
A. Alignment and attunement
B. Diagnosis
a. The Aura
b. The 5 Centers in the Ajna
C. Vitalization of the bodies of the patient
D. Esoteric healing treatment
a. Synchronization Triangle
b. b) Balancing the Centers and Triangles
E. Closing and sealing the Healing Triangle.

A. Alignment and attunement

1. ALIGNMENT
The first and crucial stage when working with
healing energies is for you as the healer to move
away from the personality, from the personal
reactions which one has, towards the more
spiritual energies that are the source of all that is.
The description might seem long, but with practice
the process should take only a few seconds to do.
To achieve spiritual alignment, each healer first
gets in balance physically. Then become aware of
the physical energies (the etheric or vital body),
feel them empowered and radiating around you as
pure white light; see these energies linked to the
emotional body, the cloak of many colors and
modes (moods). Let all these expressions become
one balanced, loving response. Link this with your
mental body as a clear, focussed, receptive
sensitivity.
The mental body must be stilled by focussing
on the work being done. This enables higher
sensibility to be achieved from soul level. Now
integrate the whole of your threefold personality by
visualizing the three bodies as functioning
perfectly together. Then raise your consciousness
to the abstract mind, and here link in with your
threefold soul, that is, intelligent activity,
unconditional love, and dynamic spiritual purpose.
See yourself as living and working according to
the plan of divinity. You have now aligned
yourself. It is worth noting that meditation is a
technique of the mind which eventually produces
correct, unimpeded relationship, which is another
name for alignment (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 620).
2. HIGHER TRIANGLE
Next, you are required to build the first
triangle of light, by connecting with the soul of the
group of healers. Link up telepathically with each
of them on the soul level. Link up also with the
wider group of healers throughout the world (for
you will be working as a representative of this
spiritual or rather esoteric organization, just as you
would if you belonged to an institute or society of
practitioners or professionals on the physical
plane). Link in with the soul of the patient and with
the source of all power and life and love (the
Supreme Being; you may also like to link in with
the Christ, the Buddha, and the group of Masters, at
this point). Thus you have your first great and
highest triangle of energy:
a. The soul of the group of healers (yourself, the
group with whom you are working and the wider
organism of healers);
b. The soul of the patient;
c. The source of all love, power and life
(divinity).

Visualize this triangle of energy and light

strengthening you as a group on this spiritual level
of consciousness so that you may heal according to
the will of the soul of the patient. At this point you
may want to say together the group mantram—
either aloud (softly) or silently:
“With purity of motive, inspired by a loving
heart, we offer ourselves for this work of healing.
This offer we make as a group and to the one we
seek to heal” (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 103).
This mantram is very powerful. Remember, it
is not the sounding of the words alone that brings
about the desired end, but also the mental
concentration that visualizes the results to be
attained (Bailey, 1950a, p. 189). Another mantram
that can be sounded at this point is the Mantram of
Unification (see Chapter 15).
3. OPENING THE TRIANGLE OF HEALING
 Now draw down the energy from the Higher
Triangles to open the Triangle of Healing. To do
this, the group visualizes the flow of energy from
the Higher Triangle to the group’s heart center and
then to the etheric brain that has been integrated by
the group.
The opened Triangle of Healing:
a. The healer’s soul or the soul of the group of
healers (connected to the Higher Triangle);
b. The heart center of the group (or to your heart
center, if you are healing alone);
c. The etheric brain of the group (or to yourself if
you are healing alone) (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p.
648).

This is a very special triangle, for down and

around it flows the soul energy for healing the
patient on the etheric level, which is the source of
the vitalizing of the physical body.
This is an open triangle, which means that the
flow of energy from the brain does not return to the
soul. [The return of energy to the soul is done at the
end of the healing work, however, to close or seal
the Healing Triangle, and so cut off any further
(conscious or unconscious) energy transfer to the
patient (see the illustration).] During the healing
the triangle is open so that energy can be
transferred to the patient (via the hands of the
healer), according to the will of the patient’s soul.
At the stage of opening the Triangle of Healing
(technically called Opening the Magnetic Healing
Triangle), more advanced healers (those who have
been trained in esoteric healing) will also open the
Radiatory Triangle consisting of the soul, brain,
heart center, and auric emanation, connecting you
to the patient. Note the direction of flow compared
to that of the Magnetic Healing Triangle (For more
information about Radiatory Healing, see Chapter
6, Radiatory healing technique).
Having these triangles “installed” or “booted
up” enables you to move from magnetic to
radiatory healing at will. The Activating Triangles
(see 5. Activating Triangles later in this chapter)
were specially given to us by the Master DK for
this very purpose.
ATTUNEMENT WITH THE GOVERNING RAY ENERGIES[28]
Leave this section out of your alignment
procedure if you know only a little about the ray
teachings. But if you are a healer who has
immersed yourself in the teachings of the rays—
and we must remind ourselves that DK wrote his
book Esoteric Healing as the fourth volume of a
set of five called A Treatise on the Seven Rays—
then it is at this point that you will make your Ray
Attunement. The objective before the initiate is to
have every center in the etheric body responsive to
the ray energy of the soul and to have all the other
seven ray energies subsidiary to it (Bailey, 1951–
70, v. 4, p. 138). We must remember that the soul
ray of the average aspirant is seldom in control to
such an extent that it can bring adequate
illumination and ray potency; until it is in control,
these ray methods and techniques, determining the
use and direction of the ray energies, are useless
(p. 693). It is possible to determine whether the
general trend of the healer is along the line of love
or of the will, and then to act accordingly. The
problem here is whether the relation between
healer and patient will be from personality to
personality, from soul to soul, or from personality
to soul and vice versa (p. 702). Remember, the
second ray deals largely with the soul’s activity
through all the centers and primarily the heart
center (p. 130).
To heal using the rays, the healer should form
the following triangles prior to the conscious act of
healing (see the following diagram):
1. The Greater Triangle. Here connect with your
soul, and your soul ray. Then connect with either
your mental or your astral vehicle (whichever is
on the ray line of 2 - 4 - 6). Now, by an act of the
will, relate the soul energy, via the desired
vehicle, to the heart center (sometimes the solar
plexus center). This is the triangle which affects
the healer as a transmitting agent.
2. The Lesser Triangle. Now build the second
triangle. Focus on the center of reception of soul
energies, viz., the head center, then using the
creative imagination, connect with the ajna
center, and hold the energy there. Then gather
into this ajna center the energy of that center in
your etheric body which is related to your soul
ray. This is the triangle which produces the effect
upon the patient and through which you, the
healer on the physical plane, work.
3. Now with deliberation, link the two triangles.
When completed, you are ready to heal.
 Practice this attunement on yourself first.
Always work with love and through the second
subray of the soul ray if you are not a second ray
soul.
4. PROTECTING TRIANGLE
After opening the Healing Triangle, another is
“superimposed” on it. It is the Protecting Triangle.
For this circuit, direct the flow of love from your
heart center to your (brain and) head center and
then out to the patient. (If you are a more advanced
esoteric healer, start this triangle from the heart-in-
the-head center and continue as described.) This
triangle has the effect of protecting you from taking
on any of the symptoms of the patient (Bailey,
1951–70, v. 4, p. 556). It is particularly necessary
to install this triangle when you first begin to
practice the art of esoteric healing, and to make it a
habit every time you begin the healing service, for,
at these early stages, one is vulnerable to the
glamor of curing others. This glamor sets up a
vortex of negative flow towards the healer, causing
the symptoms (but not the disease itself) to occur in
the healer while still remaining in the patient. In
fact, this happened to me soon after qualifying as
an herbal practitioner. I so wanted to help a patient
who had consulted me with acute extensive
nervous eczema that for a week I had to endure
both the itchiness and the inflammation of the skin,
a disturbing experience. At that time I didn’t know
of the above transference protection triangle. I am
glad to say it has never happened again. Sometimes
one can get the symptoms without any physical
effects. So as you light up this triangle, visualize a
steady flow of the positive energy of love pouring
out towards the patient. This will insulate you from
the disease, but not from the patient.
Danger is a very real factor in esoteric
healing, for we are dealing with energies not yet
manifested, energies that are moving towards
manifestation, with deep and subtle causes. And
just as a doctor must know what effect a
prescribed drug will have on the patient, we as
esoteric healers have the responsibility to know
what will happen to the energies we set in motion.
I give warnings of danger not because I want to
scare you or to make this form of medicine
something mysterious or even exciting, but simply
to protect you and to make you aware of effects
which can come about. With deep inner love
behind all of our work, we can rest assured no
danger or harm can approach us (Bailey, 1951–70,
v. 4, p. 555).
 This Protecting Triangle may also be used to
shelter the other triangles you use in the healing.
There are often thoughtforms which hang over
organs and around subtle circuits. These so-called
entities can be very strong and highly magnetic,
causing the patient to be vulnerable in similar
circumstances at different times, perpetuating a
condition or a fear or a set of symptoms, either
continuously or cyclically. The Protecting Triangle
can be used to ward off such imposing
thoughtforms by pouring the energy of love (from
your heart center [hold with your ajna] and head
center [hold with your left hand]) into the triangle
on which you are working (hold with your right
hand).
5. ACTIVATING TRIANGLES
 The next stage in our preparation to heal
involves a sequence of three important triangles.
They bring the directing flow of energy from your
ajna under control for proper supervision and
guidance via your hands. This series of triangles
also links the two forms of healing, magnetic and
radiatory, in one activity (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p.
578). First visualize your triple soul energy of
spiritual will (atma), intuitive love (buddhi) and
higher intelligence (manas) as being “placed” on
the Head Triangle (head center, alta major center
and ajna center), then allow these energies to flow
into the glands which are the physical expression
of each of these centers, that is the pineal gland, the
carotid gland and the pituitary gland, so that they
become “vitalized” and receptive. Finally see
these glands as radiating and directing their
energies via the three inner “eyes of direction”
(right eye, left eye and the eye in the middle of the
forehead, the ajna center), taking their focus
specifically through the ajna center (pp. 581–82).
(Note the very interesting and significant
connection with the Glamor Triangle). The ajna is
used as the directing agent for a force called
“dispelling radiance,” which is particularly useful
for drawing away or dispelling aggravating
symptoms associated with a karmic condition, for
example, fear, emotional imbalance and those
psychological difficulties that enhance the problem
facing the patient[29] (p. 581–82). But here into this
alignment process we are drawing down the three
high soul energies via the ajna for use in healing.
6. TRIANGLE OF TRANSFER (see photo #2 in
Appendix B)
In the brain the healer now visualizes the
patient as whole, healthy and happy. Then focus
your attention in your ajna center and create
another triangle between this center and your two
hands. This is the Triangle of Transfer, which takes
the energy built up along the three connecting
triangles and places it at the disposal of the two
hands as directed by the ajna center. At this point,
and not before, you are ready for healing.
The Triangle of Transfer is composed of the
ajna center and the minor centers in the palms of
the hands (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 648). These
two minor centers of force in the hands have a
particular connection with the throat center (of
selfless service) and with the ajna, the directing
agent of all energy in healing.
At this juncture the healers are standing around
the patient with arms bent, their hands at about
shoulder level, their palms facing the patient. The
forces are now all in place, ready for the act of
healing transfer (according to the will of the
patient’s soul).
SUMMARY OF PROCEDURE FOR ALIGNMENT AND
ATTUNEMENT
This is a summary of what a healer must do
before entering the etheric field of the patient in
order to heal:
1. Align your threefold personality with your soul
2. Create the Higher Triangle
3. Recite the group mantram
4. Open the Radiatory Healing Triangle
5. Open the Magnetic Healing Triangle
6. Build the Ray Attunement Triangles (if
indicated)
7. Activate the Protecting Triangle
8. Construct the three Activating Triangles
9. Make the Triangle of Transfer

B. Diagnosis (see photo #3 in Appendix B)

As with any medical system, before the
practitioner can offer treatment, a proper process
of diagnosis must be performed. A physician will
ask all sorts of questions of the patient concerning
the problem presented, the past medical history,
and a number of physical examinations may be
required to confirm or determine a diagnosis. In
Esoteric Healing we do the same, but all in the
energy field. First, we observe the aura of the
patient, then we examine the ajna so as to discover
the center of greatest need in the patient.
a. ENTRY INTO THE AURIC ENERGY FIELD[30]
After the Triangle of Transfer is completed, the
healer is standing with the hands lifted. The hands
are now turned towards the patient, and the healer
becomes aware of the whole auric energy field of
the patient—the emanation of body, soul and spirit.
Then gently and slowly you push your hands
through the energy barrier and into the auric field.
Here you feel the whole patient as an integrated
individual and get an initial impression of the
condition of the patient’s energy and needs. This
can be in the form of an image, symbol, picture, or
in energetic terms (graduated strength and
weakness of the energy). This is done while
standing some distance (about a meter) behind the
patient.
b. THE FIVE CENTERS IN THE AJNA (see practical
exercise in Chapter 6 under The ajna center)
The healer now moves round to the side of the
patient, usually the right, but whatever seems
appropriate or comfortable. Place one hand at the
outflow of ajna energy (back of the top of the
head), and then from a distance (keeping well
away from the forehead) bring the other hand in
towards the patient’s ajna. Become aware of the
impression you receive. Compare it to the
impression you got from the aura. The former will
be an impression of the integration of the
personality bodies, giving important information
for the treatment.
First assess the ajna itself. The ajna center is
at the patient’s brow. This center is the leader,
director, or the conductor of the orchestra of
centers all over the body. The energy passing
through this center is attracted inwards from the
front and passes through the pituitary gland in the
head and then comes out at the top of the head a
little behind the crown center. Remembering what
we have learned about this center, we begin to
assess its balance and integration. This means we
hold the right hand in front of the brow and the left
hand in line with the top of the head. We assess the
energy moving from one hand to the other. This
will inform you of the relative integration of the
soul and personality of the patient. By this we will
have some knowledge of the patient’s stage on the
Path (useful for certain activities and triangles).
Sensing the balance of the ajna center brings into
awareness all the other major centers before we
assess their balance individually.
Now the time comes for each center in the
patient’s ajna to be held and assessed as to their
balance. Here, still maintaining our objectivity, we
“diagnose” the state of the personality of the
patient via the centers as they are reflected in the
ajna linked with the stalk of the pituitary (see
Chapter 5, Ajna center). Now bring your hand
closer to the brow and form a line with your
fingers and thumb. Thus holding your five fingers
of the right hand in the ajna energy field, connect
each finger to one center (see photo #3 in
Appendix B) (cf. Bailey, 1951–70, v. 1, p. 290):
Thumb on the throat center.
Index or forefinger on the heart center.
Middle finger on solar plexus center.
Ring finger on the sacral center.
Little finger on the base center

Now being aware of the energy connection of

each center and the linking center in the body (via
the ajna), we sense which of the five centers has
“greatest need.” You don’t “do” anything at this
point, as the patient has not been properly prepared
for healing yet. Once the center “of greatest need”
has been established (diagnosed) (revealed itself),
we know three things:
a. Where the source of trouble lies—the center of
greatest need.
b. The center which must first be balanced using
 the synchronizing triangle.
c. Whether the center is overactive or underactive.
This preliminary diagnostic information will,
in the fourth step, Phase D, of the treatment, be a
springboard into the real, causative healing in the
depths of subtle energy on the different levels of
the subtle bodies linking and restoring damaged
energy lines between the centers and systems.
Remember, through the various centers of the body
—especially the seven major centers—will come
the power to heal the corresponding physical
center, and as the centers are vitalized certain
physical effects will be demonstrable, and in
specific forms that work on and through the centers
will come results that may throw light on this
obscure matter of healing through the subtle bodies
(Bailey, 1950a, pp. 161–62).
The leader (usually, but sometimes all healers
present) will then also assess the balance of the
alta major center and the head (crown) center.
Now gently withdraw the hands out of the aura
of the ajna center. Hold the information you have
acquired clearly in mind for later use (see a, The
Synchronizing Triangle later in this chapter). Now
move round to the back of the patient so that the
preparation of the energy body of the patient can be
done so that the healing treatment can commence
(Stage C).
We now realign ourselves with the original
Higher Triangle whose three “points” are the
source of love, power and life—the soul of the
group of healers—the patient’s soul. We are ready
to move into the different electrical circuits and
triangles of the patient’s subtle body.
For this work the healer sits behind the patient
(make sure a chair has been positioned in
readiness). Most of the healing work is usually
done from the back of the patient because the major
centers are found outside the back of the body in
the etheric spine.

C. Vitalization of the bodies of the patient—The

vitality triangles (see photo #4 in Appendix B)
 The four triangles that follow are placed in
order of their use in the healing. These so-called
“energy triangles” must be done at every healing
session as they “empower” the patient with prana
which is the healing force drawn on during the
healing session. If we try to do any healing before
doing these triangles, we are making demands on
the body’s own energy reserves which may not be
adequately available and could deplete the patient
instead making him or her more vulnerable.
1. THE PRANIC TRIANGLE
The Pranic Triangle starts the whole process
of healing; it is the primary circuit for absorbing
prana, the life essence of the beings who are using
the planets and the sun as their bodies of
manifestation. Solar pranic energy enters the body
not only via the spleen but also via the minor
center above the heart center (Bailey, 1979, p.
433). The Master DK is very specific regarding
the activity of this circuit. He says we should be
consciously aware that prana circulates three times
round this triangle before entering the spleen
(Bailey, 1962, p. 123). He goes on to say that these
centers should be pictured as whirling vortices
with a closely woven threefold channel passing
from each center to the other. The energy finds its
point of departure for the entire system at the
further side of the spleen to that at which the prana
entered. The vital fluid circulates through and
between these three centers three times before it
finally passes out from them to the periphery of its
little system. The final circulation carries the
prana, via the fine interlacing channels, to every
part of the body, which becomes entirely
impregnated by these emanations. The energies
find their way out of the etheric system by means of
surface radiation and as emanative human prana
(pp. 99–100). This is due to the three centers of
this triangle being minor centers—thus they
primarily affect the etheric body. This prana has a
triple effect in the body:
a. It preserves bodily health, protecting the patient
from any deterioration during the demanding
 healing activity.
b. It constructs and builds in the body what is
needed to replace the daily wear and tear.
c. It is the medium whereby one person comes into
physical touch with another, known as physical
magnetism (Bailey, 1962, p. 857).
 The Pranic Triangle is the first of four
vitalizing triangles for the movement of vital force
(life energy derived from the monad) around and
through the body. The Pranic Triangle stimulates
vital force (prana) to move from above to below.
That is, by holding this triangle we help the
circulating energy to become more balanced
between the centers above the diaphragm and those
below the diaphragm, which can also signify a
greater harmony between the higher and lower self,
between the spiritual and the material. Without
doubt, this triangle, once lit, glows continuously,
providing the patient with renewed energy and
with increasing awareness as to purpose and
direction. With its interconnecting triple channel
this circuit forms a kind of separate circulatory
system (Bailey, 1962, p. 98). We start the triangle
above the diaphragm, at the vagus nerve center
(which is governed by the heart center) between
the shoulder blades, tracing the link with a minor
center below the heart and near the diaphragm, and
finally to the spleen minor center (p. 162, cf. also
p. 135).
We will be able to understand how this
triangle holds in balance the two sides of our
nature, especially as we ascend the spiritual path
and have to blend the higher with the lower or
material self.
Prana is nervous force controlled by the mind
from the brain itself. Prana brings into activity the
sense organs, whether those of the most base
people or of the most sensitive of persons who
have raised their consciousness and widened their
sense response to areas way beyond that of
ordinary and average humanity. In each case this
triangle of energy will help to relate the highest
aspects to the outer and expressive part of the
personality, linking rhythmically with the universal
life stream of the soul centered in the heart. Prana
is the planetary force which keeps us alive. We
take it in through the air we breathe, the food we
eat and sunlight, and at night through sleep. It
comes to us via rays of harmony connected to the
planet as a giant body; these rays will help us to
integrate more consciously with the natural law of
the earth so that the conflicts of our personal
aspiration (towards a spiritual expression) are
brought into equilibrium. Prana pervades all our
bodies, from the physical right up to the most
subtle and, according to the evolutionary
development of the patient, will be their capacity
to receive and utilize this energy. From the lowest
point of view, the contact healer, through the laying
on of hands, concentrates this energy (physical
prana) and is thus able to heal “miraculously” and
“instantaneously.” Unfortunately, such healing does
not last nor does it relate the higher aspects of the
patient to the causes of their problem, but rather
stimulates the natural processes of the physical
body in cooperation with nature. Such healing
does, however, have a definite usefulness for the
personality of the patient. During esoteric healing,
though, we never touch the patient, and so do not
utilize this type of healing force by itself.
The pranic triangle in the body is peculiarly
connected with two other triangles of which the
healer ought to be aware. They have to do with the
rising kundalini fire and so they act rather like
channels in the subtle apparatus. The first circuit is
in the head: the head center, the ajna center and the
alta major center. The second is at the base of the
spine (the secondary Kundalini Triangle),
consisting of a point at the bottom of the spinal
column and the two major sex organs in the male
and female (Bailey, 1962, pp. 135, 137, 169;
1951–70, v. 3, p. 301). I refer you to the Kundalini
Triangle for information as to how to handle
possible premature raising of this energy.
2. SPLEEN TRIANGLE OF FORCE
This is the next triangle we do for vitalizing
the body. It is a great triangle of force concerned
with matter, with substance, form-building,
creation, vitality and with persistence in form
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 177). The spleen
assimilates the vital energy given off by the planet
in two ways.
 First, it absorbs the sun’s vital force,
transferring it to the vagus nerve center where it is
utilized via the circulation (see the Pranic Triangle
above), and second, it takes from the food we eat
that living vitality still in the food and sends it to
the heart for use in the body’s organs. Also in the
spleen, the negative life of matter and the living
energy of the positive etheric body are brought
together, and then a “spark,” as it is called, is made
between the inner living bodies (through the
medium of the etheric body) and the physical plane
(p. 335). The spleen center (a minor center) is
actually two minor centers superimposed on the
spleen itself (p. 73). The Spleen Triangle of Force
adds potency to this function of transferring energy
and it permits a greater flow of energy into the
body for the purposes described.
New healers should practice with the Spleen
Triangle first. Here, healers draw the energy out
from the solar plexus center to the double minor
above the spleen and then direct the force to the
etheric organ of the spleen itself. The action of this
triangle is to prepare the spleen for the releasing of
energy into the Spleen Triangle of Force, which is
the first and perhaps the most important force
triangle used to “ground” the patient for the
reception of the creative and will-evoking healing
energies. Experienced healers may go straight into
the Spleen Triangle of Force.
 The Spleen Triangle of Force consists of:
spleen minor center (the organ of physical vitality
coming from the sun), sacral center (the
predisposing agent towards physical generation)
and base center (the life-giving principle, the will-
to-live, to all parts of the human frame (Bailey,
1951–70, v. 4, p. 177), and the Fires of Matter,
connected to kundalini) (Bailey, 1962, pp. 136–
37). Hold the major activating center of any
triangle with your ajna center. Simply focus your
attention, via your ajna center, on the major center
involved in the triangle, in this case the spleen
center. Then hold the sacral center with the left
hand placed slightly below and to the right of the
spleen. Position the right hand under the left to
hold the base center. Merely doing this triangle
circuit makes the patient’s life more constructive
(p. 137).
Once you have perfected this triangle in your
mind and in your practice, you may perform the
Triangle of Immortality (which is dependent on the
Spleen Triangle of Force for its action) at the
beginning of each session.
3. IMMORTALITY TRIANGLE
Pituitary Body (Spleen Center)
Throat Center (Sacral Center)
Pineal gland (Base Center)

This triangle is a reflection of the Spleen

Triangle of Force on a higher level and cannot be
activated without the latter’s relation. The Triangle
of Immortality consists of the throat center, the
pituitary body, and the pineal gland (the Fire of
Mind or manasic triangle) (Bailey, 1962, p. 137;
1951–70, v. 5, p. 671). When these two triangles
are related by the healer, it becomes the
magnificent clue to the instinct of self-preservation
(which governs the relation of spirit and matter, of
life and form), to the survival of the subtle bodies
after death and to the principle of immortality,
which is seated in the soul and functions when
self-preservation and survival no longer hold sway
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, pp. 177–78). These are
important qualities of a soul striving for spiritual
attainment. The Immortality Triangle is a grand
way to begin a healing treatment, and one of the
primary methods in the battle to transmute the
miasm of tuberculosis (more about this in Chapter
8). We create this triangle by connecting i) spleen
to pituitary, ii) sacral to throat center, iii) and base
to pineal (higher life energies—higher
creative/reconstructive forces—higher deathless
qualities of consciousness, the state of Being).
4. LOWER PRANA TRIANGLE
 The last stage of energizing the patient’s body
involves the use of the Lower Prana Triangle, a
circuit related to the energies running up the spine.
The three points are the spleen minor center, the
base center and the throat center (linking the alta
major center and the head centers). Move your
hands and ajna to the spleen minor center on the
left; then, while keeping your ajna on the spleen
minor center, move your two hands down to the
base center, getting the stream of vitality moving at
the same time. Next, with one hand draw the
energy up the spine through the major centers in the
etheric spine right up to the throat and alta major
centers. Remember how the Spleen Triangle
worked to generate primary energy for the use of
the “engine room” of the body? Now we redirect
this prana or chi into the spine and up to the throat
and medulla oblongata, governed by the alta major
center, covering all the spinal nerves, to energize
the whole body of centers (major, minor and
minute). This energizing triangle is also important
to do before working on the spine. DK says that,
when the spinal column is duly adjusted and
aligned, and when the spleen is freed from
congestion and is in a healthy condition, there will
be little trouble in the dense physical body (Bailey,
1962, p. 57).
 The energizing circuits are complete. The
patient has been properly prepared and is now
ready for healing. The healer can now safely enter
the arena of karmic help for the patient who has
sought his or her aid.

D. Esoteric healing treatment—Triangles used

in esoteric healing: Options for each treatment
a. THE SYNCHRONIZING TRIANGLE (see photo #5 in
Appendix B)
The first triangle we always do after
completing the four vitalization triangles is the
Synchronizing Triangle. The healer recalls the
center “of greatest need” discovered or diagnosed
when assessing the patient’s ajna as described
earlier (cf. b. The Five Centers in the Ajna). That
center is then balanced using the synchronizing
triangle. Follow the method of doing the
synchronizing triangle as described in Chapter 6,
Synchronizing Triangle, selecting one of the three
techniques appropriate for the healing of your
patient’s center of greatest need.
b. BALANCING THE CENTERS AND TRIANGLES
Now we are ready to choose which additional
circuits might be called for. What follows are a
number of triangles placed in order of the system
of the body to which they are linked. It is for the
esoteric healing practitioner to select by
knowledge and intuition the appropriate triangles
required by the patient, determined by the center of
greatest need. What’s more, each triangle selected
may be treated from any of the seven levels of
conciousness in the patient, according to the
indications given to the healing practitioner by the
soul of the patient. Each sitting will then be unique,
since the treatment or healing will be “tailor
made” for that specific person at that particular
time in their life. It is highly unlikely that such a
sequence would ever be repeated in the same
manner.

The digestive system

5. LIVER TRIANGLE OF FORCE

The liver as we know is an organ of digestion,

storing glucose and neutralizing toxins that enter
the blood stream. One of the major functions of the
liver is to supply the body with glucose, a
principal source of energy in the body, especially
the brain. All the blood from the spleen (and
stomach and intestine) passes to the liver, where it
is digested to form bile, which is stored in the gall
bladder. This triangle on the etheric level helps
these functions to be more efficiently carried out
by absorbing and harmoniously distributing the
energy required by the body.
Beginners should practice with the Liver
Triangle, which is to be regarded as introductory
to the Liver Triangle of Force. Using the former we
draw the energy out from the solar plexus center to
the minor center close to the liver and then connect
with the etheric organ of the liver itself. This can
set the energy flowing and is useful to newcomers
of healing. Experienced healers may perform the
Liver Triangle of Force itself. This triangle, which
consists of the solar plexus center (which we know
to be related to the pancreas and the Islets of
Langerhans), the stomach minor center (this is, in
fact, a secondary externalization of the solar plexus
center), and the liver minor center. This triangle
stretches over the right side of the body. All the
three dense materialized organs (pancreas,
stomach and liver) are fed and nurtured by the
forces and energies of the solar plexus center.
Djwhal Khul says about this: “I have here given a
very important fact to those who are interested in
the study of medicine from the esoteric angle;
rightly appreciated, it will lead to an understanding
of the healing art. Control of the solar plexus
center, and the right reception and release of the
energies focussed in that center, would bring about
a major purification, an intensive strengthening and
a vital protection of the three vital organs to be
found in that area of the human physical
mechanism” (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, pp. 173–74).
The Liver Triangle of Force can be adapted to
include the gall bladder when indications show it
needs work (gall stones or inflammation), which
may simply mean that the patient has hard
decisions to make, or cannot decide what to do
next. People who are critical of themselves and of
others cannot easily make decisions. In this case,
hold the solar plexus center, liver minor center and
gall bladder center (or the etheric organ—as on the
gall bladder is a minute center, not a minor center,
not difficult to find when you apply the principle of
energy follows thought). When the patient is
displaying biliousness, the healer uses this triangle
to balance the attractive desires being held by the
patient, for this condition is frequently an
indication that there is too much desire for things
one likes and a suppression of things one cannot
cope with emotionally or control adequately.
6. STOMACH TRIANGLE
The stomach is the foremost organ of
digestion; it breaks down food intake in
preparation for absorption and excretion in the
intestines. This Stomach Triangle is very much
linked with the Spleen Triangle of Force, in that it
helps the etheric body extract more efficiently the
pure vital fluids from the food consumed, allowing
them to be utilized by the heart and in the
circulation. On a higher level this triangle affords
protection against the solar plexus picking up too
much negativity in the environment (the solar
plexus’ link with the heart center will help in its
transmutation). The Stomach Triangle is also
important in its absorptive capacity; in its
vitalization the less pure vital energy is directed
downward to the large intestine. Here again
energies are separated, and from the impure the
more pure is absorbed for use around the lower
regions of digestion where absolute purity is not
essential. The outer activity of this process is the
reabsorption of the liquids and electrolytes from
the colon. The Stomach Triangle governs all of
these functions and is useful especially for those
suffering from digestive diseases. For this triangle
we hold the solar plexus center (hold with your
ajna center), the stomach minor center (related to
the hormone gastrin and found slightly to the left),
and the etheric stomach organ or point.
 Both the Stomach Triangle and the Liver
Triangle of Force can be used to address stomach
trouble, since both triangles are governed by the
solar plexus center. Difficulties in this center often
lead to emotional imbalance, frequently due to
worry, anxieties and temper. Prolonged irritation
will cause disturbances in both the stomach and
liver areas (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 38; in this
connection see the Triangle for Imperil, #10).
Where the patient complains of acidity, the healer
should work from the emotional levels of the
Stomach Triangle, bringing into balance the
criticism, personal dislikes and hatreds which
have brought about a superiority complex in the
patient. The soul cannot tolerate negative attitudes
regarding other people and so “withdraws” (which
simply means it is prevented from expressing itself
in love and goodwill to all), resulting in digestive
problems.
The stomach is the great symbol of desire in
the body, so when working with this triangle, it is
important to recognize that we all must desire. But
it must be balanced with the heart energy of
compassion and selfless love. Desire governs
attraction and repulsion, sympathy and antipathy,
love and hate. (Listen to children talking about
food, who often say, “I love that” and “I hate
that”!) Where the reception and release of desire
energy is not being properly governed (for
instance, feelings are suppressed and emotions are
inhibited), stomach or intestine cancer or diabetes
can result. In the healing of these diseases the
healer can hold the Synchronizing Triangle
(seeChapter 6) as well as the Stomach Triangle
(see also Chapter 8 on cancer):
Synchronizing Triangle (for the solar plexus
and stomach)
a. Head center of the healer
b. Solar plexus of the healer
c. Solar plexus of the patient via their emotional
body.

The best way to energize this form of cleansing

triangle is to balance the two energies between the
solar plexus centers (of healer and patient) by
silently sounding a mantramic sound through the
interchange of energy (the safest and most effective
mantram sound is OM, sounded as in “home”).
Other techniques can be employed when the healer
is much more proficient in the art of esoteric
healing. One is “stimulating,” which works on
emotional energy that has become practically
dormant, thereby causing a tremendous build-up of
emotional force leading to stomach or intestinal
disease or cancer. The other technique is
“expulsive.” This works on emotional desire
energy, which has no resistance and rushes through
the center with little or no control. Both techniques
require the healer to draw off the energy or
magnetize it using the hands at the solar plexus
center level. The energy is then transmuted by the
healer, and the patient is left feeling purified and in
a lot more control of himself or herself (Bailey,
1951–70, v. 4, pp. 542, 602). Using this technique
one can appreciate the importance of setting in
motion that Protecting Triangle against transference
(of the disease symptoms), described above when
speaking about the opening of the Healing Triangle
(#3). For safety, if you are a novice healer, do not
attempt the stimulating or expulsive techniques.
Use only the balancing technique. During all this
work hold the ajna focussed, keep relaxed and
calm, being receptive to soul intuition (i.e., soul
tuition or instruction), working solely with the
energy of love (see p. Chapter 6, Breathing
techniques). Remember always that it is the soul of
the patient that heals its form, which is the person
on earth.
If there are problems which are specific to the
subtle energy bodies, here are two triangles which
can be used, the Astral Preparation Triangle and
the Mental Congestion Triangle (see #7 and #8).
7. ASTRAL PREPARATION TRIANGLE
 If the source of the stomachic trouble lies
specifically in the emotional (or astral) body, as it
often does when dealing with this area, the healing
practitioner can use the Astral Preparation
Triangle. The healer focuses as a soul in the head
center, directs the needed energy, and controls the
patient’s emotional nature via the healer’s
correctly oriented solar plexus center. The triangle,
then, is head center of the healer, solar plexus
center of the healer, astral body of the patient. In
this way the center in the patient’s body, owing to
its emotionalism, is brought under control, causing
it to be reorganized as a center for reception of the
healing energies emanating from the patient’s soul
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, pp. 554–55).
8. MENTAL CONGESTION TRIANGLE
The mental Congestion Triangle is used when
a mental type of person is having difficulties due to
energies coming down from the soul to the head (or
other centers above the diaphragm). In this case it
is important to instruct the patient to collaborate by
directing their own energy downwards to below
the diaphragm. The triangle involves the head
center of the healer, the head center of the patient
and one or other of the centers below the
diaphragm of the patient (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p.
554).
9. GIT TRIANGLES
The grand triangle for the whole digestive
system is the throat center, solar plexus center and
the solar plexus minor center (controlled by the
base center). If the patient has digestive problems
and if there is a clear indication that the
gastrointestinal tract (GIT) is the major area where
the energies are not flowing properly, then the
healer should hold the throat center and solar
plexus center while checking and clearing certain
major points along the tract where congested force
can occur. These are:
a. The swallowing reflex (for dysphagia) in the
throat.
b. The esophagus, where stenosis or stricture can
occur due to inflammation, growths, enlarged
thyroid or aneurysm.
c. The stomach function for gastritis, peptic ulcer,
or dyspepsia (indigestion). For these conditions
esoteric healing asks to work on mental levels
only, but we must expect results which are purely
physical. Where there is stomach or abdominal
cancer, we could say that it is due to an effort to
control the astral body, resulting in direct
 inhibition and suppression of the solar plexus
center. (Other stomach problems are usually due
to temper, worry, and prolonged irritation, as we
noted above.)
d. The pyloric sphincter, where the stomach joins
the duodenum. This may be constricted or over-
relaxed causing digestive upsets.
e. The whole of the intestine in case there are the
beginnings of inflammation (enteritis) which can
lead to other even more serious illnesses.
Acidity often arises from a person being too
critical, with violent dislikes and a superiority
complex.
f. The ileo-caecal valve and appendix. This is
where the small intestine enters the large
intestine.
g. The three flexures (or folds) of the large
intestine, viz., the hepatic flexure in the area of
the liver, the splenic flexure in the region of the
spleen, and the sigmoid flexure near the rectum.
Here or along the course of the ascending,
transverse or descending colon can manifest
 those common astral conditions, such as irritable
bowel syndrome, colitis, ulcerative colitis,
Crohn’s disease, and diverticulitis.
h. The rectum and anal canal, for conditions such
as hemorrhoids (use Force Triangles).

10. THE TRIANGLE FOR IMPERIL

The effort to free yourself as well as your

patients from irritation or from what is called
“imperil” is particularly essential for the advance
towards right service and right human
relationships. Irritation and irritability are
exceedingly prevalent during these days of nervous
tension and stress. It most definitely jeopardizes
progress and retards the steps of anyone who is the
least interested in growing in consciousness and
love. And, for those who are working in a spiritual
group, it can produce “dangerous group tension” if
present in any of the members, which can interfere
with the free play of the power and light which the
group is supposed to use, even when the other
group members remain an emanating source.
Irritation definitely generates a poison that locates
itself in the region of the stomach and of the solar
plexus. Irritation is a “disease,” if I might use that
word, of the solar plexus center, and it is definitely
contagious to an almost alarming extent. So, you as
healers should watch yourselves with care and
remember that just insofar as you can live in the
head and in the heart, you will end the disease of
imperil and aid in the transference of the forces of
the solar plexus into the heart center. The triangle
for this transference vibrates from the solar plexus
center to head center to heart center (Bailey, 1973,
pp. 151–52). This triangle can be used also on
anyone demonstrating stomach and intestinal
problems as well as on any patient whose voice
reveals the poison of irritation. It can be used to
facilitate group healing and integration.
11. THE PSL TRIANGLE
 This triangle, governed by the solar plexus
center, involves the stomach as the main secondary
externalization of the solar plexus center and the
liver on the right of it, and the pancreas to the left.
You will note that this triangle is similar to the
Liver Triangle of Force, which uses the energy
centers of the organs, whereas the PSL Triangle
uses the etheric organs themselves. This triangle is
governed by the solar plexus center but there is no
need to hold that major center as these three organs
are nourished and stimulated by it. However, this
triangle is only done after three other activities
have been performed: the solar plexus center has
been balanced, the Liver Triangle of Force has
been activated, and the Stomach Triangle has been
magnetized. In this way the solar plexus center is
under control and the energies focussed in that
center are being received and released in the most
balanced way. This process or sequence leads to a
major purification, an intensive strengthening and a
vital protection of the three vital organs. It is used
to lift the lower energies of base and sacral centers
to the solar plexus center. This triangle can
reenergize the whole of the etheric body so that the
incoming energy from the emotional life of the
patient is immediately distributed rightly to the
three organs, relieving the sort of pressure on the
solar plexus center and pancreas that would cause
so many problems. Splitting the astral energy three
ways (through this triangle) has the remarkable
effect of keeping the person’s emotional life under
control. It is a mental control even when the mind
is undeveloped, making this triangle unique. For it
is well known that most of the illnesses of mankind
have their origin in the emotional body (also called
the astral body).
When the astral energy is not being properly
distributed, many physical symptoms can surface,
for instance, bloating, indigestion, gastric ulcer,
duodenal ulcer, Crohn’s disease, diverticulitis,
irritable bowel syndrome, and prolapse. This
triangle, after the others have been done in
preparation, is useful for these conditions, lifting
the energies and protecting the organs for the future
due to correctly circulating and sharing (or
dispersing) the incoming solar plexus energies
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 174).
12. DIABETES TRIANGLE
 Diabetes is said to arise as a result of a violent
suppression of desire through the wrong inner
desires. The Diabetes Triangle, which should be
used for all types of diabetic symptoms, consists of
solar plexus center, stomach minor center, and the
base center. This circuit will help the patient orient
their desires toward aspiration and to a higher
form of satisfaction more true to the soul.
13. LOWER CLEARING TRIANGLE
 The Lower Clearing Triangle involves the
solar plexus center, the heart center and the ajna
center. Its effect and purpose can lead the patient
towards a stronger identification with some
particular service in the world. But it is not done
for a solo performance but for a work in
cooperation with others who have the same
inclination. This triangle helps lead to an increased
sensitivity to group consciousness.
Triangle of Spiritual Facilitation

There are two forms of this triangle. One is for

the average person just aspiring to the path of
group consciousness (solar plexus center—heart
center—ajna center), and the other, called the
Triangle of Spiritual Facilitation, is for the
advanced student of service to humanity. The latter
triangle causes a downflow of energy from the ajna
to the heart center, leading eventually to the heart-
in-the-head center, as a result of the action of the
first triangle, and of an advanced development of
the solar plexus center (the ajna of the healer holds
both the solar plexus center and the heart-in-the-
head center). This latter triangle compounds and
strengthens the disciple’s mental approach and
dedication to their chosen and known path of
service in the world.
14. RESPONSIVE TRIANGLE
 Having done the Lower Clearing Triangle
(#13) and visualized the soul linking in with its
own specific purpose on earth with others, form
another triangle to evoke response to service.
Redirect soul energy downwards from the ajna to
the heart center (i.e., soul of patient, ajna center
and heart center), causing the heart’s vibrational
status to respond with more love to its chosen path
of service. This triangle is called the Responsive
Triangle, i.e., responsive to soul purpose. This
important set of triangles (viz., the Lower Clearing
Triangle, the Triangle of Spiritual Facilitation and
the Responsive Triangle) is receiving much notice
from other groups who are working in this way for
the advancement of humanity, especially that group
which is called the Hierarchy of Masters. Their
interest suggests these triangles are for the quite
advanced, and they are only really applicable to
those who are on the spiritual path and who are
having trouble with their health. The solar plexus
center of these individuals should already have
come under a great deal of control as higher
development has begun (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p.
170).
Another simpler set of triangles, called the
Triangles of Stability and Right Group Relation,
can help a person achieve integration, a sense of
stability, and a feeling of being more grounded.
These can be used for anyone, at whatever stage of
consciousness:
a) solar plexus center, heart center, throat
center, and
b) solar plexus center, sacral center, base
center (p. 171).
These circuits resolve the problem of
separateness, important for healing and for the
process of spiritual and personal growth.
15. TRIANGLE FOR DISPELLING ASTRAL GLAMOR
 This is a useful triangle for groups struggling
with the fogs and glamors of the astral or
emotional plane: from the soul direct the energy to
the astral body, then down to the solar plexus
center, then to the heart center (Bailey, 1973, p.
143). New groups, or new members joining an
established group, tend to bring with them
impractical ideas. This can sweep the group into a
confused state as it tries to sort and sift the input.
The importance of the group to enter into inner
alignment and then together permit this triangle to
act on the group as a whole cannot be emphasized
too much. It will help the group and its new
members to refocus according to love, not desire
or selfish glamor. The leaders or older group
members should be aware of this problem and
know of this triangle’s use in dealing with it.
16. CONSCIOUSNESS STREAM TRIANGLE

This is another triangle which is very useful,

both to help resolve glamor and also to help the
healer find the patient’s place on the ladder of
evolution: the points are head center, astral body,
solar plexus center (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 54).

The base center and the spine

This area involves the Base Center, the spine,
and the kidney (or renal) system (see chart,
Tabulation Relating the Centers to the Subtle
Bodies, later in this chapter). Before entering this
system I should like to draw your attention to the
esoteric healer’s approach to the nervous system,
since its entry into the body is via the spinal canal.
This involves what are called the Nadis. (Please
refer to the section on the nervous system later in
this chapter).
17. THE BASIC TRIANGLE
 Since every healing session begins with a
sequence of four energizing triangles (see C.
Vitalization of the bodies of the patient—The
vitality triangles, earlier in this chapter), including
the Lower Prana Triangle (#4), preparation has
been made to work in the spine area. Before going
into the spine proper, however, activate the Basic
Triangle, which will circulate the energies on a
causative level for use when clearing begins on the
spine itself. This triangle is also related to the Fear
Triangle, dealing with the fears and phobias,
shocks and “shilly shallying” (lack of purpose and
direction in life) of the will-to-live. The Basic
Triangle is the key to getting the base note of the
body vibrating, a motion and sound which is slow
and intense. The three points comprise the base
center, and the two etheric points on the adrenal
glands just above the two kidneys on either side of
the body.
When dealing with kidney problems or with
bladder diseases, it is best to work on each side of
the body, holding the base center, the adrenal gland
(left or right) and the kidney (left or right). To
work with the ureters, bladder or urethra, hold the
base center, the adrenals, and the organ (ureters,
bladder or urethra) as an etheric or vital force.
Always we are working to get a balance between
the three points in the triangle, bringing the
balancing points in harmony with the rest of the
body, and according to the will of the patient’s
soul.
18. THE SPINAL TRIANGLES
In preparation for work on the spine we should
first activate that special circuit which is related to
the energies running up the spine. It is called the
Lower Prana Triangle. We met with this triangle
when we energized the patient’s body prior to the
healing work. The three points are the spleen
minor center, the base center and the throat center
(linking the alta major center). Move your hands
and ajna to the spleen minor center on the left, then
keeping your ajna on the spleen minor center, move
your two hands down to the base center, getting the
stream of vitality moving at the same time, then
with one hand draw the energy up the spine through
the major centers on the spine right up to the
throat/alta major center. Remember how the Spleen
Triangle worked to generate primary energy for the
use of the “engine room” of the body? Now we
redirect this prana or life force into the spine and
up to the throat and medulla oblongata governed by
the alta major center, covering all the spinal
nerves. This energizing triangle is important to do
before working on the spine so that there is an
abundance of lighted force available when one
goes into the spine to balance it. The esoteric
healer has been informed that when the spinal
column is duly adjusted and aligned, and when the
spleen is freed from congestion and in a healthy
condition, there will be little trouble in the dense
physical body.
The spine is a great resource area. The spinal
column is the physical symbol of that essential
alignment which is the immediate goal of directed
relationships carried forward in consciousness by
the spiritual man and brought about as a result of
right meditation (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, pp. 202–
3). Through it pass all the nerves to the body. It is
in fact a reflection of the brain just as the body is a
reflection of the head. We have already seen how
the five major centers are found related to the
different sections of the spine (the esoteric view
reveals that they are right within the spine in a
different dimension to space and time which might
make us think a little differently of the spine and its
cord). As noted above, esoteric healing is not
particularly interested in the details of anatomy and
physiology (although these details should be
surveyed by and can reveal much to the intuitive
healer), it is far more interested in general areas
and how they relate to more subtle causes.
The etheric cord is primarily intended to be
the channel through which the energizing of the
centers and distribution of energy to the
surrounding areas of the body is carried forward
by the intelligent, integrated personality, acting
under the conscious direction of the soul. But there
are many inhibitions, blockages, unawakened
areas, deficiency of vitality, lack of free flow and
consequent lack of development with the “whole
man,” or else there is too much stimulation, a too
rapid vibratory activity, a premature awakening of
the centers leading to overactivity. These
conditions can lead to nervous problems,
psychological difficulty and disease in some form
or another (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 201–2).
Therefore a chart is included below as a reference
guide of the nerves from the spine and the areas
they govern and the conditions they may cause if
pressure or damage is caused. The chart can be a
useful tool to the new esoteric healer facing
specific conditions involving the spine.
 CHART II
THE NERVES

The spine is governed by the base center and

is also related to the alta major center (at the top of
the spine), which governs the spinal cord. When
approaching the spinal area, one must do so very
carefully; do not “jump in.” There must be no
sudden or harsh movements. The need for finesse
applies to the whole of esoteric healing, more so
when working on the spine. Low back pain is one
of the most common complaints of patients due to
severe stresses in daily living—lifting, twisting,
walking, running, stretching, etc. Such a delicately
balanced and sensitive structure as the spine
deserves its possessor’s consideration. Should a
patient come to you for help, recommend exercises
that keep the back supple, such as swimming,
walking, yoga and massage. The patient may need
to lie on their back, so have a couch ready, and be
prepared to work above the front of the patient,
visualizing the back. If she has no problem sitting,
then work from the back of the patient.

But whatever the condition, a primary

treatment of the healer is to hold the Spinal
Triangle: hold the base center with your ajna, the
alta major center with your left hand and the whole
spinal column (vertebrae and cord) with your right
hand. Gently energize it and in visualization feel it
coming into balance by clearing energetic
congestion and blockages.
Remember when working on the spine to
recall the base center’s influence. For instance, the
patient may have low back pain or a slipped disc
due to deep unresolved fears or repressed anger
and resentment which need to be cleared from the
emotional level. This may call for a further triangle
to be made between the healer and the patient
similar to that which we did on the solar plexus
center where we “draw off” the energy stuck and
congesting the flow through the center
(Synchronizing Triangle). But instead of using the
solar plexus center we synchronize with the base
center: the healer’s head center, the healer’s base
center and the patient’s base center. The base
energy of the patient is then magnetized towards
the healer’s base center and transmuted in the
healer’s head center. You will need to know the
condition of the center to use this technique. Please
read about the dangers involved and the protective
measures to be taken when using this particular
type of healing triangle (see Chapter Six,
Synchronizing Triangle).
Remember also what I said about that initial
Protecting Triangle, where we visualize a
continuous stream of love flowing to the patient.
With deep inner love behind all our work we can
rest assured no danger or harm can approach us, or
the patient.
Six triangles can be used in relation to the
spine and any particular problem found there.
Obviously, not all of them will be relevant to a
particular patient, for they refer to different
conditions.

a. Base center—alta major center—spinal point

needing help. This will help release trapped
nerves. On the emotional level the person feels
like a prisoner, trapped by their own illusions
and fears.
b. Base center—spine—spinal area. This is for
 inherited (congenital) conditions, including fused
spinal vertebrae, displacements or
malformations. The healer is encouraged to work
in the astral part of this triangle, for such a
person feels the need to be somewhere else, is of
two minds, and often has a sense of being stuck,
and has a fear relating to these emotions.
c. Base center—throat center—spinal point
needing help. Do this triangle to check whether
arthritis is beginning to settle in the vertebral
joint affected. If it is indicated, hold the triangle
to cool the condition and balance and restore the
energies of the area (Johnston, 1983). This
person often is found to be creatively bound by
their life’s conditions, causing irritablity and
resentfulness. Their will to be of use to the
world is hampered by so-called “personal
responsibilities” that do not really exist.
d. Base center—heart center—spinal point
needing help. Used mainly for the spinal muscles
which may become over-contracted or over-
relaxed or a combination of these (a so-called
 spasm) in a particular area. More blood and
more circulating vital energy is gathered at the
area for use to restore healing. This triangle is
often used in relation to the other triangles for
this effect. Visualize the will-to-love streaming
round this circuit; the person usually wants to
help mankind in some way but is unable to
motivate the spirit of selflessness (again, fear is
the constraint).
e. Base center—sacral center—spinal point
needing help. The sacral center is the generator
of life force and creative building energies, so
we use this center where we find an eroded
spinal disc, or where trauma has caused injury.
This circuit is also often used after the use of the
above triangles to consolidate the building and
repairing work needed for healing. This triangle
also has other indications: you will usually find
a relationship problem involved here, and most
frequently it is in the family. Help the energy to
flow more openly and freely. (Often the hips are
tight, so after the healing suggest yoga exercises
 to loosen them). The will to express themselves
sexually is often inhibited, causing this triangle
to indicate poor flow.
f. Base center—spleen minor center—spinal point
needing help. This is another triangle which is
usefully employed in relation to other triangles
on the spine to draw in an extra supply of prana
or vital force to help smooth the way to healing.
It acts like a balm to the area (Johnston, 1983).

When doing these triangles we always work

from the causative area in the subtle bodies,
allowing our intuition, which is the higher
correspondence to the sense of touch, to direct our
thoughts and actions, as we impose by love a new
vibration and flow in the patient. This new
vibration may not result in physical healing but
may simply help a patient to see through the
illusion of their disease and to live with it with
head held high. Remember, the work of esoteric
healing is multidimensional and is entirely
controlled by the patient’s own soul.
 At this point I should like to illustrate how
things can go radically wrong should a person, by
the power of self-will or through an
overdevelopment of the mental side of their
character, acquire the power to blend the three
energies as they lay slumbering in the base center,
driving them forward and upward. Such a person
stands in danger of obsession (loosening of the
physico-etheric connection) (Bailey, 1951–70, v.
4, p. 80; see also 1962, p. 127 & 1951–70, v. 2, p.
458), insanity,[31] physical death or dire disease in
some part of the body. The person is also at risk of
an overdevelopment of the sex impulse through the
driving of the sacral force upwards in an uneven
manner, or in forcing its radiation to undesirable
centers. The reason for this is that the matter of
such a person’s body is not pure enough to stand
the uniting flames. The channel up the spine is
usually still clogged and blocked, and therefore
acts as a barrier, turning the flame backwards and
downwards. The flame (being united by the power
of personality mind-will and not being
accompanied by a simultaneous downflow from
the plane of spirit) permits the entrance, through
the burning etheric, of undesirable and extraneous
forces, currents, and even entities. These can
wreck and tear and ruin what is left of the etheric
vehicle, the brain tissue and even the dense
physical body itself. The unwary person, being
unaware of their soul quality (or ray), and
therefore of the proper geometrical form or
triangle for the correct method of circulation from
center to center, will drive the fire in unlawful
progression and thus burn up tissue. This will
result at least (if nothing worse) in a setting back
for several lives of the clock of their progress, for
much time will have to be spent in rebuilding what
was destroyed, and with recapitulating on right
lines all the work to be done (Bailey, 1962, p.
126). These are the sorts of forces one is working
with in the base center. For such a person suffering
from the above-mentioned premature “burning,”
triangles using the base center, especially the
Threads Triangle (#60), can be very helpful.
19. TRIANGLE FOR ADDICTIONS OR OBSESSIONS

To cure obsession, there must be a

development of the first Aspect, goodwill, says the
Master (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 108; see also p.
80 & 1962, p. 127). The Triangle for Addictions
or Obsessions consists of the base center, the
sacral center and the throat center. The base center
controls repetitive actions which can result in
misdirected will. For example, autism could be a
discipleship problem (abuse) of a former life (note
that ray one governs the base center in the path of
discipleship, see Chapter 5). The sacral center
involves building, transforming, personal abuse.
This center is also connected to plants (e.g.,
tobacco, pot, hashish, alcohol) and to opiates. The
throat center directs this twisted energy upward
and outward towards selfless service for humanity,
the acceptable and intelligent “obsession and
addiction,” the “magnificent obsession.”
20. FEAR TRIANGLE
 The source of nearly all fear is based on the
fear of death. Fear = death = transformation. Fear
is in reality the Dweller on the Threshold (Bailey,
1951–70, v. 4, p. 443), which is the sum-total of
the personality fears. Fear and death form the
Great Illusion. The Fear Triangle is very useful in
all circumstances where the patient is in a state of
unknowing. It can be used after someone has been
diagnosed as having a terminal condition, or after
accidents, or for children in distress, in fact,
whenever there is fear or shock involved. The
triangle may also be applicable for those with
deep unknown fears that are hindering them from
making decisions, or from taking steps to change
their conditions or circumstances. The circuit
involves the base center and two minute points
closely associated with the interior of the kidneys
(the “belly” of the kidneys where the input and
output of the vessels and tubes can be found).
21. FEAR TRANSFORMATION TRIANGLE
 Having done the Fear Triangle, use the Fear
Transformation Triangle to transmute the energies
for the purposes of greater personality control and
direction. This direction is achieved by
transforming these subconscious energies through
the solar plexus center of glamor and desire, right
up to the ajna center which takes its personality
direction from the Soul. Where the personality is
being misinformed and misdirected (perhaps
they’re in the wrong social group), it is taking
instruction from the solar plexus center (the animal
brain). Use of the Fear Transformation Triangle
will help to bring the individual back to a right
relation to the Soul and to the planet and its
kingdoms. This important triangle circuit goes from
base center to solar plexus center to the ajna (see
Bailey, 1951–70, v. 2, p. 529). The Glamor
Triangle could then follow.
22. FIRST AND SECOND INITIATION TRIANGLES
There are two triangles involving the base
center that can be used to help aspirants on the Path
to greater stability and focus in their service of the
Plan. I have put them together, but in reality they
are worlds apart! To attain the second initiation
after entering the first door may take many
incarnations of work and training. However, in the
service of esoteric healing, healers meet with
people of all degrees, perhaps even those working
for their higher initiations, although this is rare for
beginners in this work. First-degree initiates are
those who have just entered the Stream; they have
just tasted the sweet wine of spiritual wisdom. It is
the birth of the Christos in the cave of the heart.
Such people always assume they know it all and
want everyone else to be as clever as they! This
first stage marks the beginning of a totally new life
and mode of living; it marks the commencement of
a new manner of thinking and of conscious
perception (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 5, p. 667). The
triangle for them to hold (or have held by the
healer) is base center, solar plexus center and heart
center (Bailey, 1962, p. 167). It is this triangle that
is recommended to be held as the energy of the
sacral center begins its slow ascent to the throat
center (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 5, p. 678). What First-
degree initiates have to understand are the
following: beginnings; right discipline;
relationship; sex magic. They are learning to work
with the seventh ray.
Those who are working to control and
transform their emotional natures are those of the
second degree, symbolized in Christian teachings
by the baptism. Transmuting desire to aspiration is
a particularly difficult stage to master for most, and
it may take several lives to gain complete control.
The triangle recommended for these workers is
base center, heart center and throat center (Bailey,
1962, p. 169). The circuit will stabilize their solar
plexus center and harness the power of the sixth
ray under which they will be influenced. These
disciples should meditate on dedication, glamor
and devotion (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 5, p. 340).
23. THIRD INITIATION TRIANGLE
This triangle is placed here for ease of
comparison only; it belongs actually in the sections
on the upper centers. It is used only with someone
who has advanced mental and personality
attributes who consults you regarding signs of
problems in these areas. For it is at the third
initiation that the person has a major triangle of
energy comprising the heart center, the throat
center and the seven head centers taken as one
center. Such a student is working within the fifth
ray, with the ajna center being the major focus of
attention. The co-workers should come to an
understanding of integration, direction, science.
Such a person is gaining freedom from the ancient
authority of the threefold, integrated personality as
a whole (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 5, p. 686).

The reproductive system

Now we consider the triangles associated with
the reproductive or building system. This is the
area where work the building devas or lunar lords,
they who hear color and see sound.
O Thou, Who givest sustenance to the
universe
From whom all things proceed
To whom all things return
Unveil to us the face of the true spiritual
Sun
Hidden by a disc of golden Light
That we may know the truth
And do our whole duty
As we journey to Thy sacred Feet.

This prayer, the Gayatri, is said to be the

oldest invocation known. Its reference to the
sacred Feet, links it to the sacral center of creative
activity.
24. SACRAL TRIANGLE
In this center, creative life force is circulated,
awaiting use. As we noted above, this triangle is
useful for more than the reproductive system. We
saw how this sacral force was utilized in one of
the spinal triangles (#19).
 In the same way, wherever in the body we
want to draw in the building energies (devas) to
establish some particular healing action having to
do with the vital and physical body, the healer can
call the sacral energy to help. Of course, its
greatest usefulness is associated with the
reproductive system, for that is its area of
expression. The triangle consists of the sacral
center (which the healer holds with their ajna), and
the two minor centers on the gonadic glands (the
two ovaries or the two testes), which the healer
holds with the two hands. The form of the triangle
is different for males than for females: in men the
triangle has its apex pointing up, the opposite
occurs in the triangle in women. Notice that this is
one of the very few triangles which is different
according to whether the patient is male or female.
This difference is of importance only for the
person further along the spiritual path, when the
two sides of the sacral force (positive and
negative, masculine and feminine) are required to
drive certain other energies forward and upward.
Where these glands have been removed, which is
more usual in women than in men—for instance in
hysterectomies—the etheric organ remains. (This
goes for any organ removal. The only time the
etheric organ does not exist is when the person has
been born without the physical counterpart, as in
the case of unilateral kidneys.)
The work of the healer is to bring these sacral
energies into balance. Generally speaking, the
sacral triangle is very active because it governs the
preservation of life and health in the physical body.
Changes as to the strength and mobility of the
circuit occurs as a result of over-use of the sexual
function, or when sex is put to use where it was not
intended, or when there is sexual suppression or
neglect. Such changes are wide-ranging and may
demand from the healer a great deal of patience
and spiritual work. To help with difficult or
perverse energy forms (especially where negative
spirals are found in the sacral center itself), I
recommend the use of the pastel shade of the color
orange to be directed in visualization around the
circuit. Another action in these circumstances is to
tune into the throat center to draw the higher
creative energy into the Sacral Triangle. To do this
the healer “opens out the sacral energy” by forming
triangles with the hip minors, knee minors (linking
simultaneously with the base center), and finally
with the feet minor centers. Do this opening up
slowly and notice how the energy changes as it
gets into the legs of the patient.
Energy travels from a center in gentle spiral
movements round and through the nadis and
meridians. Where there are sexual identification
difficulties, there is often a reversal of this flow by
the time it gets into the feet of the opened up sacral
circuit, still downwards but in a different
direction. Such a subtle switch of flow can be felt
strongly or weakly, according to the karma of the
person.
The whole work on the sacral center and these
triangles is the most sensitive activity in the entire
sequence of esoteric healing. Just as the base
center establishes for the person what he does by
revealing what he is, so the sacral center
establishes who he is (the sacral expresses itself
through the physical form). There is a subtle and
important difference between the two triangles,
sacral to the testes minors and sacral to the ovaries
minors. These two triangles are possibly the most
important in the whole of esoteric healing. The
healer will have to come back to them time after
time to help them towards complete expression.
They are subject to the most persuasive of illusions
and delusions, and the healer on the subtle levels
of these triangles will need to help the new
rhythms to be imposed. These two triangles are in
fact the personality of the person (either male or
female), governed by the solar plexus center. When
the three centers with their related circuits of
energy are in harmony within and between
themselves, then the higher circuits begin to
function and become active in the life of the
person. The Sacral Triangle works on the problem
of personal relationships, on sexual fears, family
relations, and personal tastes (see also #59).
Wherever there are disorders or diseases in the
reproductive system, the healer can work on the
area by holding the sacral center, the gonad glands
(together as one), and the point of trouble, e.g.,
ovarian tumor or prostatic enlargement. For a more
specific approach to prostate problems, you may
hold the Prostate Triangle consisting of the sacral
center, the gonad glands as an etheric energy, and
the prostate minute center.
25. THE TWO TRIANGLES OF FORCE (see photo #6 in
Appendix B)

These are probably the most important

triangles to do in relation to damaged webs and
violated etheric threads. Such conditions call for a
combination of two triangles that must be held in
mind and linked at the same time. The healer
superimposes the upper triangle on the lower.
Standing to the right of the patient, the healer first
connects with the upper triangle by holding three
minor centers with the right hand, thumb and two
fingers at the front of the patient (no major center is
directly involved). The centers are a minor etheric
point just below the thyroid gland (and thus
connected to the throat center) called the
breastbone minor center (held with the thumb), and
the two minor centers near the breasts (held with
the index and middle fingers).
Once the trio of lines is flowing and steady,
raise your left hand to the back of the patient to
connect with the lower force triangle. Here hold
the sacral center with the middle finger, the solar
plexus minor center with the thumb (this minor
center, despite its name, is closely related to the
base center), and the base center (Bailey, 1951–70,
v. 4, p. 73) with the index finger. You will find this
very easy to perform even though it sounds
complex. Now feel the lines of force connecting
with each other right through the etheric body of
the patient.
We use this triangle (the two circuits as one,
connected through the body) whenever there has
been trauma, be it a physical accident, an
emotional upheaval or a mental shock. The upper
triangle gathers and directs the energy downwards
in a kind of involutionary spiral, while the lower
triangle receives the energies and consolidates
them in the personality. These energies are youth
forces. (This is due to the major connection with
the sacral center as it is linked to the throat center
—bringing about constant creative regeneration.
Hence God is called the Eternal Youth.) The linked
triangles bring about stability and regained
reasonableness. These words are used because,
from the esoteric understanding of this condition,
the etheric body has, due to the trauma, been
punctured or displaced, usually somewhere
between the lower centers, requiring the
involutionary (consolidating or healing) energy of
the minor centers to be utilized by the lower
triangle of force (with its major centers) to enable
mending to occur.
All the centers have “webs,” or etheric discs,
separating them one from the other. These webs act
as transformers, either to upgrade ascending energy
or to lower the vibratory activity of descending
energy. These webs are the basic necessities for a
balanced and harmonious life. On the path of
spiritual development these webs are gradually
and naturally destroyed; they become less
functional as the person begins to handle force and
energy more consciously. Higher energy acting on
the web purifies the etheric form and cleanses it
from “dross.” Eventually, after the two fires of
matter and mind begin to blend (which should be a
natural, slow and gradual process), the web itself
is destroyed. By the time the third initiation is
reached, the individual can maintain continuity of
consciousness. Breaking down the webs can even
be resisted for certain specific ends by trained
individuals, according to the Master DK (Bailey,
1962, p. 184). But if there is a sudden shock, for
instance, in a motor accident, or the death of a
loved one or even sudden financial ruin, a person
may not be able to contain the rampaging energy
surge, and a hole is blasted through one of the
etheric webs. This opens the person out to a very
strange world, a world full of phobias and
misinterpretation. The person might suffer a
nervous breakdown, or a temporary loss of
personal control, or a state of panic and fear.
For supportive and more specific help with the
webs, use the Threads Triangle (see #68). If there
is fear, link in with the Fear Transformation
Triangle described above (#21).
Technically and from the spiritual angle, the
web naturally “burns away” when the person can
sense and see the fourth ether. The webs are found
midway between the third and second etheric
subplanes (counting from below upward). After the
webs disintegrate, the person merges with their
astral vehicle. Viewed another way, the webs exist
on each plane. They are broken down as the
initiate develops—from the angle of spirit and of
service—to establish that awareness called
“continuity of consciousness,” another
understanding of the much misunderstood term
“kundalini.”
Build up the upper Triangle of Force and then
the lower, and then link them as one to set in
motion the “healing” of the webs. Once torn,
however, these webs are never properly healed—
their “scar tissue” is very thin and the person will
always suffer from aftereffects. (This is never told
to the patient, of course. Negative thoughtforms on
an already torn web system could worsen the
condition; hold the triangles and heal, according to
the wisdom of the patient’s soul.) On the other
hand, the one sure way of healing, whereby
aftereffects are no longer troublesome, is via a
spiritual path whereon the webs are gradually
broken down anyway and the person begins to
handle the inflow of energy (physical, emotional or
mental) consciously, without the need of these
transforming units. It is really towards this end that
healing tends, and in this sense such deep shocks
can eventually be healed. It may take many years of
attending a healing clinic, and even more years of
individual spiritual effort and struggle for balance
during this transition.
One feature of major importance is that the two
triangles of force, when brought into synchronicity
with each other, control the twenty-one minor
centers and hundreds of minute centers of the body,
bringing them into relation with the major centers
via the sacral center.
By treating these two triangles in a patient, you
will help to draw healing force into the etheric and
physical bodies, carrying with it energies that are
building materials for the rehabilitation and
restoration of a patient’s diseased organs. They are
helpful for prolapsed organs and for menopause.
The triangles are also particularly effective on one
who is seriously ill but still has plenty of vitality.
You can sense they want to live and they have
plenty of fight in them to throw off the problem.
Such patients are often young, but you can consider
using this triangle for the older patient as well.
Assess their trouble and be guided by your
intelligent intuition.
Sometimes with the aid of these Triangles of
Force, the required energy is supplied to a patient
for the resolution of their problem. Otherwise it
can be a force to help a patient ease into an “aware
acceptance” of their condition and its inevitable
consequences.
An elementary circuit called the Shock
Triangle is sometimes employed for lesser
problems involving trauma and shock. The triangle
involves the solar plexus minor center (just below
the solar plexus center), a minute point on the
ileocaecal valve (between the small and large
intestines, near the appendix), and the sigmoid
flexure of the colon. This triangle has something in
common with the “hara” (belly) so often referred
to in Oriental systems of medicine and in the
martial arts.
Another triangle very useful to hold the
physical body in coherency is the Life Stream
Triangle discussed under “The heart and
circulatory system” later in this chapter (head
center-heart center-spleen minor). The stream of
pranic energy vitalizes the individual atoms and
cells of the physical body.
26. TRIANGLE FOR SEXUAL PROBLEMS

This triangle is used for sexual inhibition or

suppression, to balance and bring right control, and
make the disciple creative in the worldly sense and
of use to humanity: head center, throat center,
sacral center (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 215; see
also v. 2, p. 528).

27. FERTILITY TRIANGLES

a) These triangles are useful for the patient
who has consulted you for help with fertility—
medical diagnosis having found there is nothing
wrong physiologically, the patient or the couple
who has not used contraception for a year, or, at
worst, the male has a low sperm count. The healing
work undergoes a number of stages, involving up
to six weekly sessions or longer. This series of
triangles are called the Fertility Triangles.

Sacral triangles
 1. Stage of Will

The first stage is to work on the sacral

triangles, relating them as one to the adrenal (yes,
adrenal) glands of both mother and father and to
the reproductive organs of the male and of the
female. In other words, there are two triangles
related as one. This is the stage of will. Here, the
mother-to-be need only be present, although having
both persons in the session is preferable.
 2. Stage of Blending

For the second stage, have the couple present

for the healing. The task of this phase is to relate
this triangle to the subtle world of formative force
or creative building, the so-called vital or etheric
planes. For there is a need and a desire by the
couple which is stopped or resisted at this plane.
Put more esoterically and from a spiritual
standpoint, the incoming child has been brought
down to the place where conception can take
place, but there is a block on the subtle etheric
plane preventing the consummation. There is a
relationship problem on subtle levels. It is at this
point that the healer brings to consciousness the
two partners, that is, the couple with the problem,
and on the subtle level holds an esoteric triangle:
the two sacral centers (of husband and wife) and
the one incoming force which is the door to
conception on the physical plane, an etheric point
or “aperture” through which the child, the
incarnating soul, will enter into physical
incarnation. At this stage we do not link with the
child. This stage is continued for a number of
sessions. It is called the stage of blending.
 3. Form-Building (Incoming Soul only)

The third stage results from the previous work

and brings into activity another circuit called a
Form-building Triangle: spleen center, sacral
center and base center. The triangle of this stage
involves the incoming soul only.
The fourth and fifth stages are only used when
the healer considers the second and third stages to
be related and completed.

4. Resolving
 This fourth stage concerns the souls of the
three involved: father, mother, child (incoming
soul). Since it links and works with the souls of the
three individuals, there is a flow of “accepting
energy” resolving the blocks and helping each of
the three to take responsibility for the future
relationships.

5. Incoming Soul only (when Mental Unit is re-

energized and the etheric body of the incarnating
soul is vitalized.
 Start of the fifth stage: Now the healer may
connect with a triangle within the reincarnating
ego. It is done when the two most vital moments in
the work of this earth-seeking human are achieved
—the very time when the mental unit is re-
energized into cyclic activity, and when the etheric
body of the incoming soul is vitalized. The fifth
stage triangle’s points are: the center at the base of
the spine or base center, the splenic center, and a
certain point within the physical brain (Bailey,
1962, pp. 181, 788). Throughout this work the ajna
of the healer must control the progress and
direction of the results. The results are never the
same, so the healer is to assume nothing, but one
thing is certain, there will be a greater
understanding between the would-be parents. The
healer can see that this is quite advanced work, but
from the angle of esoteric healing, all work is
advanced, for it all involves the future and the
expressed intention of the soul governed entirely
by the will-to-love.
b) In relation to fertility, more advanced
healers could use the Sixth Ray Technique (see
Chapter 10; Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 711).
c) Another set of triangles to consider, if the
healing group feels they are indicated: (i) From the
sacral center open the triangle from the adrenals to
the male gonads to the female gonads. (ii) Then
link the sacral center, via the adrenal glands (as
one) to the gonads (male and female, as one), to the
base center (explained earlier). These latter
triangles are recommended only after the first
sequence has been completed. They definitely
materialize the fertility forces of men and women.
d) The Triangle for the Majority, using the
ajna, solar plexus and sacral centers, is another
triangle applicable to infertility. As its name
implies, it is a triangle which governs the majority
of mankind. It is to be used to balance those of the
human family who have been selected to
regenerate the race. Because this triangle is
activated when regeneration occurs, it is essential
for use when a couple has come to you for the
healing of their infertility problem.
 It is clear that the power and strength of the
sacral center is wide and varied, and frequently
extremely difficult to handle. The sacral is very
active, so the healer must be ready to return to it
often to relate it to the other work being done for
the patient. For this is the creative and productive
“virgin” of the body—a powerful and useful force
when correctly applied by the higher centers.
28. TRIANGLE OF ENERGY

The sacral center is a necessary evocation

between that which is high and that which is low,
and between that which is sounded forth from the
center in the throat and that which replies to a
deeply sounded note. To connect these areas we do
the Triangle of Energy consisting of: the egoic
lotus, the throat center and the sacral center. The
circuit produces a subsidiary triangle of force: the
throat center, the sacral center and the physical
body (symbolized by the organs of reproduction)
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 3, p. 428). This double
triangle (or you can make it into a tetrahedron) can
be used as much for helping to resolve relationship
problems as for sexual potency or sexual
identification difficulties.
29. TRIANGLE OF THE PRACTICAL MYSTIC

This triangle is for the person who is a

developing humanitarian, aspiring to be a practical
mystic and to be an occultist in the highest sense of
the word. Sacral center, throat center, ajna center
are the points of this triangle.
30. TRIANGLE FOR CREATIVE ENERGY DISTRIBUTION
This triangle could have been called the
triangle for the third ray centers in man (a hint for
those who have some knowledge). Include the
sacral center (creative thread of the personality)
with the throat center (consciousness thread of the
soul), and the ajna center (life thread or sutratma of
the monad) (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 153). Are
you aware how this triangle is connected to the
activity of creative energy distribution? When you
do this triangle, you will observe it has a different
emphasis compared to the Triangle of the Practical
Mystic, even though the points are the same.
Energy follows thought is the key.
31. TRIANGLE OF YOGA
This is an unusual and advanced triangle for
experienced esoteric healers, having an important
relation to sex on a higher level. For the three
points, connect the buddhic body with the astral
body and with the monad. Through the circuit,
visualize the search for balance, aspiration
towards harmony, union and yoga, and a longing
for union with God (Bailey, 1962, p. 669). The
triangle is used for disciples seeking a deeper
meaning in their lives.

Above the diaphragm

This represents symbolically a step up in
consciousness. Below the diaphragm is the
metabolic area of instinct and of personality, will
and purpose; above the diaphragm is a more
sensitive area (signified by the protective cage of
the ribs) where there is more imagination and
feeling—a sensitivity to more conscious (and thus,
controllable) rhythms and cycles. To experience
this transition upward, we could tune into the heart
center to feel this higher energy.

The heart and circulatory system

 The heart of the body is where the person’s
innermost feelings are hidden and protected. We
can enter only with love. The heart center in the
etheric manifests in the thymus gland (via its
hormone thymosin), a little above the heart. The
function of the thymus is little known, symbolizing
mankind’s own undeveloped heart center. But it is
known that the thymus changes its function several
times in our life. In babyhood its function is to help
break down mother’s milk for assimilation. From
eighteen months to puberty it is involved in the
development of the sex glands, thereby working
with the sacral center. At puberty another change
occurs when thymosin influences the height of an
individual (working with the ajna center, which
controls the output of human growth hormone). At
this time the thymus also acts as a balance between
the higher and lower instincts, hence discipline is
essential for correct development (connection with
the vagus nerve center). The heart center also
governs the lymphatic system, aided by a
metabolic influence (thyroxine) of the throat center.
 From the esoteric standpoint there are three
causes of heart disease:
1. Overuse of the life energy.
2. The opening of the heart center, which puts a
strain on the heart organ.
3. The premature lifting of the solar plexus energy
to the heart (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 238).

Another esoteric cause of heart problems has

to do with the incoming seventh ray. People on that
ray are more susceptible to the difficulties and
diseases incident to the blood stream than are any
other ray types (p. 128).
The heart center anchors the life stream
(sutratma) using the Life Stream Triangle (head
center, heart center, spleen minor) (p. 428), which
rhythmically conveys life force around the body
(from the monad through various transformers).
This stream controls the pumping action of the
heart and the circulation of the blood, feeding
every cell of the body. The heart is not a pump, as
has been pointed out by other esotericists (notably
Rudolf Steiner), but rather an effect, manifesting
the rhythmical pulse of universal energy pounding
into our system from a higher power source. With
this rhythm cranio-sacral osteopaths work.
Consciousness is governed by the heart center,
which conforms with the Chinese understanding of
this “organ.” Esotericists are aware that the heart
referred to is in the head center. The central whorl
of energies within the thousand petalled lotus in the
head is the heart, using the Consciousness Stream
Triangle (see #16) (head center, astral body, solar
plexus center) (p. 429). An opened heart center
gives a sense of the whole, or hylozoism, which
avers that all is alive and aware. A thriving heart
chakra also conveys impersonality, healing,
humility, responsibility, goodwill, tolerance,
compassion. Distrust is a major key to the blocking
of heart energy.
When working with the circulatory system or
with specific triangles concerned with distributing
heart energy, it is a wise preliminary to circulate
etheric energy in five directions:
a. Head, neck and arms.
b. The hepatic (liver) system (note: anemias are
due to excess energy through the liver).
c. The digestive system (which connects with the
liver before returning to the heart).
d. The kidneys.
e. The rest of the trunk including the body and
legs.

What follows is a brief description of the

process. Hold your ajna on the patient’s heart
center. (a) Start the energy moving from the left
ventricle of the heart, then draw the energy up to
the neck, arms, head and brain. Next, move the
depleted energy, traveling within the “blue” blood,
to the right atrium in the heart, then down to the
right ventricle. Draw it up to the “revitalizing”
system (the lungs), releasing the heavy and taking
on the light, then come down into the left atrium.
(b) From the left ventricle again, along with the
prana and meridian force, visualize the energy
flowing to the next circulatory part (the liver
system), and so on with (c), (d), and (e). This
method definitely gets the vital force to every part
of the patient’s body and is useful for those with
circulatory problems, including varicose veins and
varicose ulcers.
32. HEART TRIANGLE

Where the patient is showing signs of coldness

and a lack of love and compassion, we can use this
triangle. It has other effects of a more physical
nature as well. These include improving the
cardiac circulation, varicose veins, insomnia, and
conditions which concern the quality of the blood.
This triangle vitalizes the energy in the blood and,
as a result, works on cleansing it for more efficient
use by the patient. The heart is the center of
radioactivity; when this center is opened and
active, the power of love that streams from it will
affect all who come in contact with that person;
people will feel the dynamic radiance of loving
understanding pouring out from such a person. This
center and the associated triangle expresses the
intuitional qualities in the person, not, mind you,
the psychic aspects of lower, more selfish love. To
bring in this energy requires clear focus on the part
of the healer—focus, that is, from the soul level, so
that the response of the patient will be from the
same source. The healer holds the heart center and
the two lung minor centers (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4,
pp. 460–61). This has the effect of opening out the
life force of the person, an opening out which will
evoke a great deal of change in their life, probably
including a deliberate and determined effort to
work consciously in a group, which itself is
selflessly and altruistically attuned. One energy
that will be brought in by this triangle is what is
called “harmlessness.” It has a particular
affiliation to the etheric channels of the body,
clearing them and purifying the centers as a result,
thus permitting entrance of those higher intuitional
energies. Set in motion, this triangle immediately
begins to activate the energies which will counter
the causes of disease. Since it works from above to
below, conditions such as thromboses and high
cholesterol in the blood are reduced by degrees,
making the process of change safe for the person.
In esoteric healing, inasmuch as we are tuned in to
the source of all love and to the soul of the patient,
all the work is done by the patient, in relation to
the soul of the healer. (One of the paradoxes of
esotericism is that in manifestation each individual
has a soul, but in its own nature that soul is a group
entity connected to every other soul, forming one
Oversoul.) So the progress of the disease and its
cure is entirely under the control of the patient.
This encourages humility in the healer and healing
group, and responsibility in the patient. It does not
mean that the healer is irresponsible or is without
responsibility. The healer has been asked to help
the patient; she is from that moment responsible
regarding her words and her actions, and
especially her thoughts concerning the patient, for
all three are conditioning factors. Esoteric healing,
we recall, is an act of directing the energy of love
from soul to soul, using the intelligent mind.
33. TRIANGLES AT DEATH
a. An interesting alternative deployment of the
Heart Triangle is its use at the time of death. For
this application it can be combined with:
b. The Desire Triangle (soul—astral body—solar
plexus center);
c. The Withdrawing Triangle (soul—head center
—ajna);
d. The Triangle for the Dying (spleen minor—lung
minors—heart center);
e. The Triangles of Force (see #25);
f. The Immortality Triangle (see #3);
g. The Samadhi Triangles (see #39);
h. (for the more advanced healer) the First and
Fourth Ray Techniques of esoteric healing,
discussed later.

The triangles can also be used more

specifically to work with those who have died, to
help them through later phases of the excarnation
process, as the soul passes through its various
sheaths to its monadic self.
34. IMMUNE TRIANGLES
Since the rampage worldwide of AIDS
(Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome), the
importance of the immune system has been brought
home to us. Its strength protects us from infection,
and its weakness opens us up to all kinds of
diseases, illnesses and allergies. Even the common
cold is due to a breakdown in our defenses,
leading to an invasion by a “cold” virus. There are
three triangles covering the whole immune system,
involving the skin and mucous membrane bacteria,
all the body fluids (blood, urine, digestive juices,
tears, sweat, which all carry substances poisonous
to most bacteria), as well as the phagocytes
throughout the body, particularly in the blood
(called white blood cells).
 The first triangle of heart center, spleen minor
center and bone marrow point (in the thigh bone)
stimulates the production of white blood cells,
building up specific chemical antidotes to infection
called antibodies.
 A second triangle, from heart center, to thymus
point and spleen minor, activates the immune
system. From the esoteric standpoint, there is no
greater protection against any kind of infection in
any part of the body (physical, emotional and
mental) than the power of love. This is not the
emotional side of love, but rather the
unconditional, selfless aspect. It is the “disarming
love,” for it completely negates all the past, putting
it right so that there are no regrets, no resentments,
no dislikes, no residual mistrust. All the anomalies
of life are understood, really understood, as being
part of the Universal Plan. It is the love “unto
death,” not of the personal kind, but of a kind that
gives with no thought of return; the love that sees
the oneness of all things and is able to say, “so be
it.” It is a love which accepts, identifies with, an
altruistic activist and creative server, and is at the
same time self-aware. With true love we become
totally immune to all disease; we are totally given
up to the present moment. It is this ideal state
which we in the West refer to as “Christ
consciousness,” and in the East is called
“Buddhahood.” Of course, this is the ultimate state
of love for a human, and in healing we must seek
this ultimate. Love is the true protection; with love
we have true immunity.
 For the more advanced disciple, you can use a
different version of the Immune Triangle, one
formed by the linking of the heart center (connected
with the thymus gland and with the T-cells,
governing the lymphatics and the lymphocytes), to
the spleen minor center (which plays a significant
role in the immune system) to that representative of
the whole system of protection on all levels, called
the heart-in-the-head center—the central lotus
within the head (crown) center, the point where
true Being and Love are made conscious. Around
this circuit the healer sends spiritual love as
understood by the soul, the true self of the patient.
Visualize the whole system of immunity, that is, of
mental health and balance, emotional control, and
physical vitality, flowing through this third triangle
to the heart-in-the-head center.
35. LYMPHATIC TRIANGLE
 At the physical level the Lymphatic Triangle
helps clear and vitalize a congested and
overworked system, the lymphs. Notice that the
lymphatics have an unexpected drainage system.
The right lymphatic duct, just under the right
clavicle (collar bone), drains all the lymph from
the right brain, the right breast and the right arm.
The thoracic duct on the left, however, just under
the left clavicle, drains the whole of the remainder
of the body. All the lymphatic fluid from these two
ducts drains into the innominate veins. The
lymphatics are important to the circulatory system
inasmuch as they drain all the wastes from the cells
and destroy any cells that are threatening the
integrity of the body. This triangle is energized by
holding the heart center simultaneously with the
minute etheric points on the two lymphatic
drainage ducts. Visualize the whole system as
being cleared and vitalized. This triangle has an
obvious connection to the Immune Triangle, so in a
group healing they should be done by the same
person, who would see them as acting together.
It is of interest to note how DK links as one the
endocrine and the lymphatic systems in the way
they are conditioned by the etheric body, indicating
that the lymphatic system is extremely important.
This suggests the twofoldness of the etheric body,
the endocrine system being the active, positive,
masculine expression, while the lymphatic system
is the passive, receptive, feminine aspect. He says:
“The human body is an aggregate of energy units
[and] in the vital body (thus conditioning the
endocrine and lymphatic systems) are certain focal
points through which energy pours into the physical
body, producing an impression and a stimulation
upon the atoms of the body and thus having a
powerful effect upon the entire nervous system
which it underlies in all parts” (Bailey, 1951–70,
v. 2, p. 533).
36. ALLERGY TRIANGLE

Allergies are due to immunodeficiencies, so

the Immune Triangles (see #34) are called for. A
further triangle can be used as an adjunct: the
vagus nerve center with the two minute points on
the etheric adrenal glands.
37. BLOOD PRESSURE TRIANGLES

The first triangle has two uses: to balance and

normalize blood pressure whether it is high or
low; and to correct the causes of the rise or fall. So
the healer, as in all these triangles, is required to
seek within the subtle levels of the patient’s being
for the real trouble, and so allow the soul energy to
flow. Remember, the basic law governing all
illness and disease is an “inhibited soul life.” For
health the soul’s life needs to perfectly express
itself through the threefold personality of physical
body, emotions and the thinking mind. Since high
blood pressure is so often caused by stress in life,
the healer seeks to balance the emotional effects
coursing through the circulatory system. This
general tonic triangle consists of heart center, ajna
center (upper ajna, relating to the circulation), and
spleen minor center. It bears repeating that none of
these triangles is to be used simply
symptomatically, i.e., by themselves, but in the
course of healing they may be used as an adjunct to
the other healing work. And the healer should
remain “tuned in” to the soul and to the Higher
Triangle (which is the source of all energy, life,
love and power—the group of healers on the soul
plane—and the patient’s soul), for no work of a
lasting nature can be accomplished without this
link.
 There is another triangle the healer can use for
controlling high blood pressure: alta major center,
vagus nerve center, and base center in its relation
to the kidneys (as a single vital organ). This
triangle has a more specific application for blood
pressure problems, and should be linked with the
first triangle for blood pressure described above.
The blood stream is the instrument of the life force
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 79). Where this life
force becomes overstimulated due to pressures and
demands the person can’t handle, the heart cannot
contract and relax properly, resulting in
hypertension, the medical term for high blood
pressure. If high blood pressure is an inherited
condition, work on this triangle within the causal
body.
38. KUNDALINI TRIANGLE
Listen to what Djwhal Khul has to say about
the real kundalini occultly understood in his book,
A Treatise on Cosmic Fire, p. 139: “Only when the
fire has circled unimpeded up another channel is
the complete merging with the fire of manas
effected, and only when it progresses
geometrically up all the three—with simultaneous
action and at uniform vibration—is the true
kundalini fire fully aroused, and therefore able to
perform its work of cleansing through the burning
of the confining web and of the separating
particles. When this is accomplished the threefold
channel becomes one channel. Hence the danger.”
“Kundalini Triangle” is an unfortunate name
because of the connotations of “raising the
kundalini” and so on, but it is an accurate one just
the same, for it is just at this time in a person’s life
that the primary energy which underlies existence
begins to stir. The triangle intends to balance and
hold the rising energy on course and so preserve
the person from any mishaps in these early and
tender days of spiritual growth. It should be
observed in connection with this triangle that there
is another triangle using the same three energy
centers but which is called by another name, viz.
the Triangle of Being (#52) where we will become
what we truly are (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 47).
This triangle revolves around the head center (not
the vagus nerve center), enabling the healer to
focus the patient on what the patient is now and
will become in the future (p. 47).
 This triangle originates from the vagus nerve
center, even though that is not one of its three
points. The vagus nerve center, found between the
shoulder blades—a little above the heart center
and the thymus gland—begins to vibrate and
radiate as soon as the person starts to show an
active and practical interest in working for the
spiritual plan. Another name for this triangle could
well be the Triangle of Aspiration, because all
aspirants, i.e., those aspiring after the word of the
spirit, set this circuit in motion. Here the directing
force of the person’s soul streams through the head
center and brain to the vagus nerve center, affecting
the rest of the body and personality. The bodies of
the personality—physical, emotional and mental—
begin the process of getting more closely focused,
or fused, by the soul. The experience often takes
the person by surprise, and can lead to relationship
difficulties both with themself and with those
closely connected with them. Changes will result.
The vagus nerve center affects the heart, with all
that that implies. A second major center with
which the vagus has powerful links is the base
center, for when the soul begins its upward
journey, a journey of purification and focused
vision, the will is always involved. The will of the
soul and the will of the personality are brought into
increasing contact. Sometimes there is a clash,
sometimes a cause for joy. The will of the soul
works through the head center, and the will of the
personality manifests through the base center. Thus,
when the head center, the heart center and the base
center have come into a preliminary alignment, the
vagus nerve center begins to radiate and become
dynamic.
The vagus nerve center, thus stimulated, causes
the astral body and the nervous system to respond
to the incoming energies—the so-called “call of
the soul” to initiate the preliminary activities of
spiritual growth. The doors that were closed to the
person focused in the personality now swing open:
entry is permitted. This triangle of centers—head,
heart and base—with their effect on the vagus
nerve center must be balanced during this green
period. You might recall (the Kindalini Uprisings
Triangle) that the spleen center is involved in the
rising of kundalini fire in so far as the pranic fire
(from the spleen) and the fire of matter (from the
base center) rise together from the base center to
meet the fire of mind (Bailey, 1962, p. 139) in the
head center. The specific period where “kundalini
awakes” refers to that period where the “point at
the center” (the initiate’s Life Essence) becomes
vibrant, potent and active: its forces can then
penetrate throughout the entire spinal area until the
highest head center is reached. This, however,
would not be possible had there not been three
earlier “uprisings of the latent force of will.”
These uprisings serve to clear the passage up the
spine, penetrating and destroying the etheric web
which separates each center and the area it
controls from the next above (Bailey, 1951–70, v.
2, p. 530) (more about the webs, see #25). Nurture
and correct growth depend on balanced attitudes
and wide vision along with a goal-oriented aim.
The Kundalini Triangle is an important one to
balance when it is clear that such an occurrence
has started, or if it is evident that such an
experience is on the verge of occurring. The
purpose of this triangle is not to “raise” the
kundalini, but to balance the circulating energies so
that damage (to the webs) or unstable development
can be avoided. Obviously, we use this triangle to
reintroduce rhythm and stability where these
qualities are evidently lacking in the life of the
patient seeking our help (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p.
335).
Along with these two triangles, a third can be
used (forming the Kundalini Tetrahedron) to
support and strengthen the rising kundalini, called
the Threads Triangle. For the latter, first hold the
base center, bringing it into as great a balance as
possible, and while continuing to hold it, activate
the triangle of the solar plexus center, the heart
center and the head center. For a full explanation of
this triangle please see #68.
39. SAMADHI TRIANGLES
 This pair of triangles, fused as one, is usually
done for the person who is dying, but it can also
have a useful application for advanced disciples
on the Path. The heart center has a close rapport
with the spleen center and with the solar plexus.
But once this primary triangle has been formed
(heart center—spleen minor center—solar plexus
center) you are asked to merge this with a
secondary triangle (head center—base center—
spleen minor center). Link the head center to the
logoic plane, the base center to the physical/etheric
plane and the solar plexus center to the center of
the causal body. The result is communication,
distribution, control and withdrawal, bringing
about higher consciousness (samadhi) or death
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 2, p. 66).

The respiratory system

40. DIAPHRAGM TRIANGLE

This circuit employs the vagus nerve center

and two centers on either side of the body, near the
diaphragm. We use this triangle for the person who
is seeking the truth in some form, who exhibits
development along some line of spiritual work.
For only at this time do the two centers above the
diaphragm awaken and begin to vibrate and to
circulate energy. Disciples at this stage are prone
to heart and nerve difficulties. Frequently, such
people, due to their yearning aspirations, become
subject to over-stimulation, putting their centers
into a state of imbalance, resulting in mental and
cardiac problems. The Diaphragm Triangle can
also be used to help restore the proper rhythm of
breathing for such problems as asthma, bronchitis,
and pleurisy (cf. Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p.137).
Consider using this triangle with those employing
the alta major center (breathing is controlled here)
and with the Respiratory Triangle, the Purpose
Triangle, and certain other triangles described
below.
41. SERVICE TRIANGLES
This is a combination of three triangles which
“open out” the throat center. They facilitate service
and creativity in life (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p.
151). Where a patient reports being blocked in the
area of creativity and turns their focus inward, and
where you hear faltering speech, and notice
shoulders stiff and set, this patient could well be
heading for arthritic attacks. The throat is governed
by the planet Saturn, deliverer of lessons and
challenges. Those who know of the adverse use of
this energy can more easily understand the
problems associated with the throat center and the
importance of this series of triangles. They use the
throat center as the major center and then open out
to the minor points connected with the shoulder
joints, then out again to the centers at the elbows,
and then out yet again to the minor centers in the
hands (p. 72). The healer will feel the energy of
this set of triangles being gradually let outward to
the hands of activity and creativity. For this it is
best to move to the front of the sitting patient so
that you can draw the energy outward in a flow.
Where the energy appears to be particularly
resistent and blocked, often the case with those
who are already chronic arthritics (those who have
had arthritis for a long time and who have swollen
painful joints), it would be useful to bring into
more specific activity the Protecting Triangle that
you established when opening the healing
treatment.
Beyond their value in coping with arthritic
conditions, the Service Triangles are helpful for
people with creative blocks in their lives. On more
subtle levels patients may be finding that life is not
turning out as they had imagined, but they don’t
know how to change it, or even what to do. All
their ideas and aspirations are gone, or seem to be
locked in by other forces, obligations and
responsibilities. There seems to be no way out.
Menopause, both for men and women, has this
quality, although the sort of feeling being described
may come well before or after menopause itself.
You can see how this series of triangles is related
to the sacral center and to the Feet Triangle. The
creative, generative force of the sacral center must
be raised to the creative, service-oriented center of
the throat. Of course, this has nothing to do with
abandoning one’s sex life. Expression through
sexual activity continues, which is healthy and
right. But if the sexual urge has gone or cannot be
expressed for some reason, then what is needed is
a transmutation of some part of the sacral energy to
the throat center for use in a creative way on a
different scale. The sacral center is never
transmuted to a state of atrophy! In fact, all the
lower centers involved in transmutation to their
higher correspondences are never abandoned.
Their usefulness continues. The only thing that
changes is that one’s conscious emphasis of that
quality and expression becomes more sensitive.
For instance, instead of being driven by desires
and personal loves and hates (solar plexus energy),
one gradually becomes aware of the heart center
and expresses more selfless, unconditional
attitudes.
42. PARATHYROID TRIANGLE
 This triangle is not often used in healing
physical conditions, since parathormone deficiency
is very rare, but it has an important and more
spiritual application. The circuit combines the
throat center with the minute points on the two
pairs of etheric parathyroid glands on either side
of the neck. The thyroid gland (the manifested
physical part of the throat center) backs up the
parathyroid glands by balancing the action of the
parathyroids. The action of the Parathyroid
Triangle is to regulate the flow and production of
parathormone, the parathyroid hormone, which
affects bones, kidneys and small intestine insofar
as the concentration of calcium in the body is
concerned, mainly via the blood. From the esoteric
standpoint, this triangle has value for persons who
have a nervous tendency and muscular control
difficulties, and also a sense of failure or
inadequacy on the physical plane of life. Through
this triangle a patient’s sense of worth can be
restored. Whenever there are symptoms of
osteoporosis, teeth damage, kidney stones or bone
fragility, this triangle may be found deficient,
needing balance.
43. RESPIRATORY TRIANGLE

The throat center governs the only two

processes which involve taking the external world
into ourselves. In the first and more important
instance, it is done through the breath, symbolized
for us at birth when the first thing a newborn child
does is draw in the air of our planet (and cry!).
The second internalizing of the outside world and
transforming activity looked after by the throat
center is the whole ingestion and excretion of food.
This second process is greatly dominated by the
solar plexus center during life (under the triangles:
throat center, solar plexus center, and either the
stomach minor or the liver minor). So the
Respiratory Triangle has fundamental importance.
It is a circuit which is activated from birth, the first
cry indicating its rotation around the points. The
energy is circulated from the throat center to the
two lung minor centers. Respiration problems can
afflict people on the first ray of will or power
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 132). This should come
as no surprise since the will aspect manifests
through the organs of respiration (p. 106). The
Master DK recommends that people who have lung
or respiratory problems should “ponder the
relation and distinction between the breath and the
sound” (p. 132). One is related to time and
astrology and the other to space and the rays.
We use this triangle when patients complain of
lung congestion, for the condition is due to
inhibited desire. The symptoms suggest that this
circuit is having difficulty performing its
instinctual function, breathing is difficult, there
may be shortness of breath, or asthma, and a thick
persistent cough. From the esoteric angle this
triangle works as a pure transformer. The lungs are
organs that draw in the vital etheric “fluid”
embodying air. In fact, the lungs originally were
built by the life substance or lives living in the air
of our world. So these organs function by using the
substance out of which they are made. It may be of
interest that there are five lobes to the lungs (two
on the left and three on the right), which may hint at
the ancient wisdom’s reference to the five pranas.
[32]
The lungs are also connected to the blood and
to the heart. To cover the exchange of air between
the lungs and the blood capillaries, the two major
centers—throat and heart centers—are also
brought in, with the lung minor center held on both
sides to make two triangles on either side of the
chest. These triangles, also called the Lungs
Triangles, are used to assist the air’s vital force to
enter the body and energize (oxygenate) the blood.
While the healer holds these two circuits, become
aware of the energy of love and purpose
circulating through the patient’s life stream.
 For the person who treads the spiritual path,
the respiratory activity as a whole, including the
process of inhalation and exhalation, is governed
by the heart center, rather than the throat center (as
is the case with those who have not entered that
path) (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 130). The organs
of respiration, however, are still under the throat
center’s control. Thus for particular people having
respiratory problems, these two centers must be
held, one for the process and one for the physical
organs, along with the point in the respiratory
system which is causing the trouble.
The only factor which makes the breath
effective is the thought, the intent, and the purpose
which lie behind it. The healer, when using the
breath, knows how energy follows thought. Only
when there is an alliance between breathing and
thinking are results possible. But the healer also
remembers that the healing should be according to
the will of the patient’s soul. For only the directed
will, using the organized rhythmic breath of the
patient as its agent, can control the centers and
produce an ordered purpose in life (see Bailey,
1973, p. 256).
44. TRIANGLE OF PURPOSE

For this advanced circuit, the healer can use

the breath by first linking in with the Triangle of
Purpose, connecting the brain (as the receptor of
thought), the mind (the agent of the will), and the
will aspect of the soul itself (Sacrifice Petals of
the Causal Body). This abstract triangle gathers the
patient’s soul purpose, which the healer can
conceive of as a clear thoughtform even though it
may be totally unconscious. Remember, it is the
healer’s soul that is doing the work. With this
circuit activated, the patient’s life can be
conditioned upon the vital levels, which in turn
will eventually condition the physical plane life.
We can now see how two important triangles can
be linked and activated, the Respiratory Triangle
and the Triangle of Purpose.
45. SINUS TRIANGLE

The sinuses are governed by the throat center.

From the angle of esoteric anatomy, we know that
the senses built the sense organs. From primordial
times the sensitivity to light, for example, enabled
the organ of the eye to be built by the etheric
workers called “lunar lords” and “elementals” of
our body. In the same way, the sinuses are the
result of two activities from past times: firstly, the
activity of sound reverberating from the organ of
speech, and secondly, the movement of air from
outside into our lungs, which required warming up.
Both of these primary functions caused the
hollowing out of the sinuses. It is evident that this
work came after the formation of the sound-making
organ and of breathing, which may be the reason
why these functions are not as efficient as other,
more ancient organs. To help clear the sinuses, use
the following triangle: throat center, solar plexus
center, sinus points. The solar plexus is
recommended because, more often than not, the
person’s habits need correcting (good wholesome
diet, regular exercise, more intake of fluids). The
fact that the person cannot smell or taste does not
primarily involve the sense triangles governing
smell and taste. More likely it is the astral or
emotional force working through the throat as it
plays upon the secondary center under it, the solar
plexus. So on a higher level the Sinus Triangle can
be used for regulating our habits and for
strengthening our belief in ourselves; the circuit
empowers speech and frees our flow in life.
46. SOUND TRIANGLE
This consists of the throat center, the ear
minors and the vocal apparatus minute. It is used
for all conditions of the voice and involves the
different levels. It is used for speakers, singers,
and speech maladjustment syndromes—a useful
triangle to help to control speech (in this
connection it could be profitably used with the
Fear Triangle and the Triangle for Imperil). For the
hearing triangle, see #56.

The nervous system

The student is asked to be especially focussed
when working esoterically on the nerves, for the
nervous system is nothing short of the manifestation
of consciousness itself. Recall that the nerves are
an expression of the etheric body as it concentrates
its energy in the seven transforming centers or
chakras, which then project its etheric force
(embodied energy) into vital and unseen vessels or
channels called nadis. Just as the etheric body is a
mechanism of energy supply, the vital aspect of the
whole outer form, and as the meridians of Chinese
medicine are the vital aspect of the blood stream,
so the nadis are the vital “jacket” of the entire
nervous system. It is as though the nadis are the life
or spirit of the nerves, the soul through which we
gain consciousness and self-awareness. The more
we meditate, study and serve other humans, the
more our centers develop, resulting in a
corresponding upgrade of development of our
nadis, and vice versa. This is telling, for the less
the nadis are in evidence or the more they are left
in their slumbering state, the more likely the nerves
(and consequently the endocrine glands) can
become overactive, exhausted or express
themselves in undesirable ways. Of course, this is
primarily due to the state of the centers of the
individual. Hence, disease is an obvious outcome
of an unbalanced, uncontrolled energy system.
When healing, healers are called on to focus their
attention upon the reality and upon the factors of
primary spiritual importance (beauty, truth,
goodness). Then the unfolding of the energies in the
head, the spinal energies and the centers, plus the
awakening of the basic center and its consequent
fusion with the higher energies, will be an
automatic and perfectly safe happening, says DK.
The nadis are channels for prana (vyana)
reaching the nervous system, so the closer these
channels can be brought towards the nerves and
plexi, the greater chance there will be for healing
and for throwing off the disease, the memories of
the past and of the inherited thoughtforms, all of
which can affect our senses and our sensitivity.
The senses are a direct line of energy input from
the nadis; therefore the more we act upon our
centers through MSS (meditation, study and
service), the more delicate will be our outer
response apparatus. The impact of sound, contact
(or trauma), sights, tastes and smells will be deep,
to say the least. Nadis can be controlled as well as
built by the mind; the brain is the outer symbol of
the nadic network. DK informs us that the first two
nadis to be loosened from the physical body before
death are the eye nadis. Diseases and difficulties
of the nervous system primarily affect second and
sixth ray disciples (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 130).
Problems or “dis-eases” of the nerves include
the following: Parkinson’s, epilepsy, neuritis,
neuralgia, sciatica, multiple sclerosis, meningitis,
encephalitis, brain tumors, tics, hiccups, headaches
of all kinds, stroke, muscular dystrophy, and ME
(chronic fatigue syndrome). DK lists the diseases
of the mind as: diseases of the brain, disorders of
the solar plexus, astral domination, premature
clairvoyance and clairaudience, obsession,
absence of mind, soullessness (p. 342). He then
lists the diseases of the mystics: brain disease,
mental imbalance, heart disease, neurotic
tendencies (p. 342). Other problems are
devitalization, delusion, delirium, and detachment
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 2, pp. 598–606).
So we can enter this field of triangles
connected to the nerves and nadis with a sense of
anticipation—that, as we link these esoteric
triangles, we are helping the fusion of two systems
and thereby empowering the spiritual soul. Here
we come face to face with the energy of
consciousness in the patient.
47. TRIANGLE FOR THE NERVES
 The ajna center, the alta major center and the
vagus nerve center are the three points of this
important triangle that coordinates the nervous
system, linking it closely with the Head Triangle.
Through the Triangle for the Nerves, the messages
and impressions coming from the soul to the head
centers and to the Head Triangle can be transmitted
to the personality, viewed as a thinking brain and
an acting body. The Nerves Triangle will be used
for all diseases or problems concerned with the
nerves. When holding the ajna, you will find it
useful to link in with the lower portion of this
threefold center. To reiterate, the upper ajna is
connected with the blood and circulation, the
middle portion or stem of the ajna connects with
the major centers up the spine, and the lower ajna,
as mentioned, is a vitalizing aspect of the nervous
system. The ajna is linked with the hypothalamus
(sympathetic and parasympathetic nervous system;
their integration indicates personality control).
Epilepsy is said to be a result of an overstimulated
ajna center (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 176). The
alta major is specifically connected with the
sympathetic nervous system, linked with memories
“driving forward from the past.” The vagus nerve
center is specifically linked to the parasympathetic
nervous system, leading to the first initiation. As
you work with this triangle, visualize the whole
nervous system vibrating with abundant energy and
functioning perfectly. Should there be any part of
the nervous system that has been damaged or is
malfunctioning, hold the triangle like a tetrahedron
(having a triangular base), focussing its apex
directly above the area in need. To do this, hold
your hands in a triangle (index fingers and thumbs
touching), palms facing down above the area,
visualizing the downpouring energy from the soul,
and, according to the soul’s will, to the nerves of
the area. To increase the potency, the healer often
opens and closes the eyes rapidly but consciously,
directing the energy as the eyes focus through the
hand triangle to the area. Energy actually passes
through the eyes and contacts the pineal gland,
according to Soviet scientists (see Hopking, 1990).
Such a practice can be incorporated in most of the
triangles mentioned above. But due to its potency
and because it involves the will, this amplification
technique should only be utilized when the healer
is definitely immersed in the love aspect of the
soul.

48. CRANIO-SACRAL TRIANGLE

 Another triangle connected to nerves and to
thought involves the ajna, the alta major center and
the sacral center. Here the cranio-sacral energies
link, controlled by the ajna. Interestingly, the
cerebrospinal fluid has a base rhythm of 16-18
pulsations per minute, just like the breath. The
Cranio-Sacral Triangle can be used to re-establish
right rhythm overall, achieve relaxation, release
distorted or unwanted thoughtforms (often through
visions, dreams, or vivid visualizations), and heal
relationship problems.
49. MIGRAINE TRIANGLE

Migraines come in many forms, sometimes

expressing as acute debilitating headaches.
Sometimes they are creeping, numbing,
disorienting. In every case they are disengaging,
i.e., seriously affecting the etheric body. Those
who are subject to migraines can be said to have
too powerful an etheric body, which
overstimulates the etheric centers. Frequently it is
a result of fifth ray force (note that ray five rules
initiates in the throat center, cf. Chapter 5)
emerging in the person’s ray make-up, causing a
poor or absent relationship between the energy
around the pineal gland and that around the
pituitary body (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, pp. 87, 302).
There is therefore a strong need for this triangle,
formed by the throat center (the mental center
under the fifth ray), the pituitary and the pineal
glands. Link the circuit with the Immortality
Triangle as it is built up using the Spleen Triangle
of Force. Reestablishing the connection between
the pituitary and the pineal glands should cure the
problem (according to the will of the soul).
50. CREATIVE FUSION TRIANGLE
 The ajna is an organ of idealism; since it is
also closely related to the sixth ray, has a peculiar
link to the third ray and to the third aspect of
divinity as well as to the second ray and the
second aspect, its function is one of fusion,
anchoring and expressing. Exactly how the
integrated personality should be! So the triangle
involves the throat center (the ajna fuses these
creative throat energies), the heart center (the ajna
fuses the sublimated energies of desire with true
love of the heart), and the ajna center itself. Since
most patients are at the stage of seeking personality
integration, this can be a good triangle with which
to conclude a healing session.
51. THE HEAD TRIANGLE

The Tibetan Master tells us that the head center

as a whole consists of 1068 petals (96 in the ajna,
12 in the heart of the crown and 960 subsidiary
petals of the highest head center), forming 356
triplicities (Bailey, 1962, p. 168). This makes the
head center more complex than an electronic
computer board! We are not told how many petals
are in the alta major center, probably because it is
so intimately related to the throat center and its
development. When working with the major
centers of the head, we notice they make one of the
most subtle triangles in the system of esoteric
healing. And, since most people rarely live in the
head, preferring to think via the solar plexus
center, we mostly do this circuit in a dimension far
from the physical and vital bodies, in the hope that
we will at least be impressing patients with
healing energies they’ll reap perhaps in the distant
future. This triangle, signifying the connection
between the three aspects of man—body, soul and
spirit—as well as their unity, consists of the head
center, the ajna center and the alta major center
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, pp. 578, 581; see photo #7
in Appendix B). It is a triangle of force, a triangle
of light, of living fire. When this triangle is
rotating, the disciple is then soul-controlled and
governed by the Law of Magnetic Impulse (Bailey,
1951–70, v. 2, p. 117). This Law governs
relationships between souls in the soul world. It is
also the law which relates the soul of a group to
the soul of other groups. The symbol of this law is
two balls of fire and a triangle (pp. 109–117).
Stand facing the right side of the patient. Hold
your ajna on the head center of the patient, place
your right hand in front of the forehead to hold the
ajna, and use your left hand to hold the alta major
center at the back of the head. See how this feels.
If, however, it feels uncomfortable, try other ways
of holding this circuit. The head center is a symbol
of the spirit, ajna of soul, and the alta major of the
body. By holding and balancing these points, the
person’s life might well precipitate before our
eyes, first as a spiritual life image, then as a
personality, and lastly as an integrated expression
of the spirit on physical levels. Round these
centers much light can be poured. Furthermore, we
can create this triangle as a higher expression of
the centers of head, heart and throat. The head
symbolizes the consciousness and the awareness of
will and of thought before they are expressed. The
heart center (here related to the ajna) is the
prototype of love and brotherliness, of selflessness
and a real sense of the livingness in humankind and
in all things. And the throat center (the alta major
point of the Head Triangle), which fuses with the
alta major center in the latter stages of spiritual
advancement, symbolizes the strength of creative
thought and activity in bringing about greater unity,
sharing, cooperation and beauty in the world.
52. TRIANGLE OF BEING (see photo #8 in Appendix
B)
 At this stage of human evolution, little can be
said of this triangle, which is associated with the
Head Triangle. It is a circuit important to do even
if the person being healed doesn’t feel able to
respond to its far-distant vibration. In fact very few
people will have this triangle even remotely
vibrating. But its energies lie in the future for all of
us, a triangle which will express us as we are
essentially. It expresses that we will become that
which we really are (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 47).
For this reason we light it up from a soul level so
that the lower energies can be allowed to begin to
respond to the soul intention. It is a triangle of
triadal radiation, like a spiritual satellite focussed
on the primary “dish” of the body. It consists of the
head center, the heart center, and the base center.
As you work with this triangle, you will be able to
see how these three energy points are fundamental
to our life on earth and that they have a unique
connection and relationship for a life of complete
fulfillment and control and service to the planet
and man.
Notice that this triangle has exactly the same
trio of centers as the Kundalini Triangle (#38)
while having different effects. To be sure, from one
level their effects could be seen as complementary,
even identical in essence. The Triangle of Being,
however, is not associated with the vagus nerve
center as is the Kundalini Triangle. The former
circuit stands alone, by itself and isolated; it leans
on no one and nothing; it is ready for a greater
phase while not wanting it or resisting it. It is truly
a triangle of becoming (which has not yet arrived).
This triangle can be allowed to superimpose
itself on that very active triangle which governs the
majority of people today, called the Triangle for
the Majority: ajna center, solar plexus center and
sacral center (see #63; Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p.
38). In this way the patient will aspire towards
soul control, and if the patient is ready or at the
relevant stage, the Kundalini Triangle may also be
activated at the same time.
 Another circuit, which has become popularly
connected to the Triangle of Being, is called the
Triangle of Becoming. This is also done towards
the end of the healing work and helps the energies
of the patient to focus forward to what the person
eventually will become. The triangle consists of
base center, head center, and ajna. This powerful
axis of energies between base and head centers is
focussed in the ajna for right direction and eventual
fulfillment.
53. TRIANGLE OF THE WHITE MAGICIAN

The Brother of Light always works through the

inherent force of the second aspect, Love. Only
after the third initiation does she work increasingly
with the spiritual will energy, the first aspect. “He
impresses the lower substances, and manipulates
the lesser, building lives with the vibration of love
and the attractive coherency of the Son, and
through wisdom the forms are built.” In this way
she learns to work from the heart and therefore to
manipulate that energy which streams from the
“Heart of the Sun,” until, when she becomes a
Buddha, she can dispense somewhat the force
emanating from the “Spiritual Sun.” Therefore, the
heart center in the brother of the right-hand path is
the transmitting agency for the building force, and
the triangle she uses in this work is: the center in
the head which corresponds to the heart, the heart
center between the shoulder blades, and the throat
center (Bailey, 1962, p. 986). The white magician
works always in cooperation with others, and is
under the direction of certain group leaders. The
basic conditions for entry upon the path of white
magic are: pure motive (comprehension of the
nature of man, devotion to the cause of humanity),
clean body (abstinence, right continence, clean
living, vegetarian diet, self-control) and high
aspiration (altruism, love of mankind, negation of
lower desire). DK says that whoever seeks to
work consciously with the forces of manifestation,
and who would endeavor to control the energies of
all that is seen, “needs the strong protection of
purity” (p. 993).

We are informed as to the triangle with which

the brothers of the left-hand path work (those
individuals, ignorantly blinded by personal power,
who are working against the evolutionary purpose
and the children of the Light): the center in the head
corresponding to the throat center, the throat center,
the base center (p. 986), called the Triangle of
Matter. Such persons manipulate the forces of
matter only (the third aspect). They achieve their
ends through the method of pranic stimulation or of
pranic devitalization. Their methods are
specifically and spectacularly physical. The Dark
Forces are intensely individualistic, often using
inferior cooperators, who work blindly and
unconsciously. About this, the healer on the side of
evolution, the Path of Return, ought to be aware. To
keep this triangle of matter in proper balance, the
advancing healing practitioner may link it with the
Triangle of the White Magician and then to the
Triangle of Being (#52), or the Triangle of Purpose
(#44). This will focus the right purpose to our
triangles of matter.
54. SYNCHRONIZING TRIANGLE
 This triangle has been indicated in various
places before (viz., in the section on balancing the
centers [Chapter 6] and in relation to the Stomach
Triangle and Service Triangles) without much
detail. To do it, the healer must focus the
consciousness in the head center, then re-tune the
attention on his or her own “eye of direction” (the
ajna center) before turning it onto the center in
themself corresponding to the needed center of the
patient. In this way the healer’s center evokes
response from the center in the patient. The healer
now endeavors to balance the inflow of energy
coming from the patient, and which is immediately
transmuted in the head center. This has great
benefit to the patient who has a center which
manifests continuous imbalance despite other
efforts to correct it. It is a technique that needs a
certain amount of concentration and practice,
preferably on oneself, before using it on a patient.
It will release congestions and blocks in the
patient’s center, sometimes bringing about almost
immediate relief. The diagram of this triangle is in
Chapter 6, Synchronizing Triangle.
55. GENERAL HEALING TRIANGLES
Another method available to esoteric healing
practitioners is the use of the General Healing
Triangles. Just as the Radiatory Triangle and
method is a specific form of healing for more
advanced or more spiritually developed patients,
so the General Healing Triangles are more
specifically used for the drawing down of a much
hindered (“inhibited”) soul life into the etheric
body. We can do this in the following way:
(a) Establish a triangle of light between your
soul, the patient’s soul and your own etheric body.
(b) Next link your head center with the
patient’s head center and heart center. When this
triangle is functioning smoothly and a measure of
response is coming from the head center of the
patient, then by an act of the will and the use of an
invocative mantram (OM, or by intuition),
(c) Seek to implement this increased flow of
life, from the head center via the heart to the
diseased area, using the center which controls that
area of the physical body, whichever this may be.
Do this with great gentleness and care (Bailey,
1951–70, v. 4, pp. 541–43).

And let us recall what the Tibetan says in

connection with this, “The magnetic aura around
the head is that which is truly sensitive to the
highest impressions [telepathy] and is the point of
entry to the head center” (Bailey, 1950b, p. 117).

The senses
We now turn to the triangles for the senses,
remembering that the senses are the gateways to
higher consciousness, since they operate on
multiple levels in the energy field. We are a sense
body, and everything we do is but a mode or an
adaptation of our senses on one or other level.
These triangles are more to do with raising
consciousness than curing disease.
Here are five triangles related to the senses
described in the order of their evolutionary
development.
56. HEARING TRIANGLE

Obedience for the disciple is not enforced, it

is contingent upon hearing. The process of learning
by hearing is always slow and is one of the
qualities or aspects of the stage of orientation
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 681). We must learn to
respond to the inner Sound through the sense of
hearing and its higher correspondences (p. 689).
The Hearing Triangle, related to the fourth ray
technique of healing (p. 709), involves the throat
center, and the two ear minor centers. (In some
texts you may find it referred to as the Ears
Triangle.) If one ear is in particular need, then hold
the throat center, the ear minor involved, and the
tympanic membrane or auditory nerve in etheric
matter. Using the Hearing Triangle we can expand
the capacity of hearing to an ever widening field of
sensitivity.
The mind is called our sixth sense, bringing all
our senses together and controlling them; it is our
common sense. Making our senses more and more
acute widens our perceptions and deepens our
insights and our awareness. There is only a certain
limit perceptible by the senses, whether it is of
color, sound, taste or other. Then the range of
perception stops, or appears to stop. However,
higher than sight is clairvoyance. A wider range of
hearing ability is called clairaudience. Our senses
may well be as infinite as the Universe. So holding
the Hearing Triangle may involve the hearing or
balance faculties of the physical body, but we can
also use this triangle to help a person become more
aware of the opportunities that may and do present
themselves to us on a regular basis. It is also a
triangle to bring the patient more in touch with the
inner voice, true sound and expression. Through
this triangle we can work to clear the false noise
surrounding and distracting the patient, whether it
be in the emotional plane or in the mental life.

Where the patient has balance problems for

instance, motion sickness, vertigo or dizziness, or
Meniere’s syndrome, the Balance Triangle is used.
We hold the ajna center, the ear minor center and
the cochlea in the ear (as an etheric organ). Do this
triangle on each side of the head. Physical
imbalance is a signal that there is a more subtle
problem needing help which is affecting the brain
and consequently the cochlea. It is for the healing
practitioner to discover the deeper cause and
facilitate its resolution.
57. TOUCH TRIANGLE
 This triangle is under the control of the solar
plexus center in the average person and of the heart
center in the patient who is endeavoring to live a
spiritual life. The other two apexes of this triangle
are the two minor centers in the palms of the hands.
These represent the skin as a whole. This triangle
can be used for gross physical problems such as
skin cancer (see also Chapter 8 on cancer) and
psoriasis (or more specifically a triangle with
Heart Center-Base Center-Sacral Center), through
to the more subtle problems of frigidity and
inability to respond, including problems of contact
and relationship, shyness, embarrassment and
guilt-complexes. In fact, this triangle overlords all
healing done in whatever form, since Touch on the
highest level governs healing as a whole. On the
spiritual level, touch is selfless service, divine
healing—something beyond most of us at this
stage. But we do try to heal from the buddhic or
intuitional level of consciousness; this is what is
meant by esoteric healing. All those in the medical
profession work with the sense of touch and all
work (mostly unconsciously or instinctively) with
an aspect of psychometry. It is the ability to touch
patients and understand what treatment or
medication they need, called “according to
discretion” in the code of ethics. So, through the
balancing and deepening of this triangle’s
parameters, patients can understand themselves
better as an influential force touching those they
meet, and as they impact the environment. Those
who are active on behalf of the environment often
have this triangle in strong vibrancy.

I know, O Lord of Life and Love, about the

need.
Touch my heart anew with love
That I, too, may love and give.

Called the Noontime Recollection, this

mantram, used throughout the world, may take on a
new meaning and value in this context.
58. THIRD SEED GROUP TRIANGLE
 Another triangle of particular value to hold if
your patient is connected to the health profession,
or if you wish to strengthen your connection with
the energy overlording all the healing arts and
sciences, is the one related to the Third Seed
Group of Magnetic Healers. This group of
individuals works intelligently as souls with the
vital forces of the etheric body. The triangle
involves the head center, the heart center and the
ajna center (Bailey, 1944, v. 1, p. 41). This
triangle is extremely important to work on
whenever groups get together, particularly at times
of national and international conferences. Consider
the implications of these three centers as they are
connected within the framework of the greater
group of world health. The head center as the
recipient of soul information regarding the work of
healing and medicine; the heart center as the
pivotal point from and to which radiates love
between practitioner and patient; and the ajna
center which is the precise focalizing attribute of
every trained medical professional of whatever
discipline. The purpose of this triangle is to
facilitate the work of transmutation of substance
according to the understanding of the cosmic Plan.
The medical department (the third “Seed Group”)
is at the forefront of this activity.
59. EYES TRIANGLE OR SIGHT TRIANGLE (see photo #9
in Appendix B)
Learning by sight is connected with the Path of
Discipleship. These students have heard the Word
and are developing the spiritual correspondence of
sight. They are susceptible to the vision (Bailey,
1951–70, v. 4, p. 681).
The eyes are governed by the head center, so
the healer may hold the head center and the two
eye minor centers as a triangle, which will
circulate energy and help the eyes in a general
way. Moreover, use this triangle to help a patient
“see their way through life,” clearing away the
mists and fogs hampering their vision. Worry and
irritation literally prevent true vision. They shut
out the view, and in this condition, no matter who
the person is, his associates or colleagues are
hindered (p. 70). Why is this? “As long as the eye
of the person (who is representative of the
Creator) is upon that which is created, just so long
does it persist, for vitality or energy follows the
line of the eye. Just as long as the ‘eye’ is directed
to the created form, the current of force will be
transmitted to it, and the more one-pointed the man
may be, the more this energy will be centralized
and effective. Ineffectiveness of people is due to
the fact that their interests are not centralized but
very diffuse, and no one thing engrosses their
attention ... therefore no thought they think ever
assumes a proper form, or is ever duly
energized.... It accounts for much of the diseased
condition of the human family at this time” (Bailey,
1962, pp. 974, 975). As you can see, this is a
triangle to do with the general vision of one’s life
and purpose. It helps a person to have more clarity
about a situation and about which way to turn. The
circuit concerns the more subtle aspects of
perception and “seeing.”
For specific eye problems, there are four other
possible triangles to activate, depending on
whether or not the patient is on a spiritual path. A
person not yet on an inward spiritual journey has
two triangles to be lighted. These are: for the right
eye—the head center, the right eye minor center,
and the optic nerve of that eye (in etheric matter);
for the left eye, hold the ajna center, the left eye
minor center and the left optic nerve (in etheric
matter). The ajna governs vision (Bailey, 1951–70,
v. 4, p. 44). The right eye here will be looking
through the emotional window and the left eye will
be looking through the intellectual window.

If the patient is aspiring to a spiritual way of

life, the right eye triangle should then consist of the
ajna center, the right eye minor and the optic nerve
minute point. For the left eye, hold the throat center
(linked to the alta major center), the left eye minor
and the optic nerve minute point. The right eye, in
this case, is beginning to see intuitively, rather than
emotionally, and the left eye is beginning to see
things more from an abstract understanding than
from the intellectual.
There may be specific problems related to the
eye or eyes either on the physical level or on the
more subtle levels of a person’s aura. It is up to the
healer to test out each level to discover the cause.
Seeing is actually performed through the window
of the third ether. If there is etheric “dust” in the
vital body, usually as a result of a malfunctioning
or unbalanced Liver Triangle, then it would be
necessary to bring these two triangles—Liver and
Eye—into some kind of coordination in order to
circulate the energies and clear the “dust.” If,
however, the problem with sight is more an
emotional one, then it would be necessary to link
in with the centers on the emotional level so that
the glamors or emotional distractions could be
cleared from view and clear vision restored.
Likewise, if mental illusion is creating
thoughtforms inhibiting the patient’s vision, the
healer needs to tune into this level to activate the
triangles. Look at the chart about the senses and try
to use it creatively, using your intuition while you
work.

Right Buddhic Vision Father Light of the

Eye Wisdom constellation of
the Great Bear
Left Mind, Sight Son Light of the
Eye Common constellation
Sense Sirius
Shiva All- Directs Mother Light of the
Eye Seeing will constellation
and Pleiades
purpose (Bailey, 1951–
of Deity 70, v. 3, p. 429)
 Patients who are little evolved do not employ
the third eye for the stimulating of their
thoughtforms. Such people stimulate their
thoughtforms by using solar plexus energy, which
works in two directions, either via the sexual
organs, or through the physical eyes. The negative
circuit of this triangle causes the individual to see
everyone just as sex objects. These three points—
sex organs, solar plexus center and the eyes—form
a triangle of force which can greatly aid the one
seeking your help. As you become proficient, you
can link this triangle with those more specifically
connected with more evolved vision.

Work is similar with patients of greater

evolutionary development. For instance, in the
aspirant and in the intellectual, the Eyes Triangle
may need to go from the solar plexus center to the
throat center to the eye minors. Notice that this is
the result of the sublimation of energy from the
centers of the little evolved, viz., from the sex
organs (sacral center), to the throat center.

And in the person already living a life

dedicated to spiritual service, the so-called
disciple, the triangle of energy will have the heart
for its lowest point (instead of the solar plexus),
and the third eye will begin to do its work, though
imperfectly, while the throat center forms the third
point (Bailey, 1962, p. 975).
Let us summarize the three triangles to awaken
higher sight:
1. For average people: Solar plexus center, sex
organs, eyes.
2. Aspirant: Solar plexus center, throat center, eye
minor(s).
3. Disciple: Heart center, ajna center, throat center.
60. DISSIPATING TRIANGLES
In connection with the eyes, there are three
other triangles well worth learning and putting into
practice. They are called the Dissipating Triangles,
for they rid the patient of mental and emotional
hindrances, which darken and weaken our powers
of discrimination and implicit soul purpose. Note
the reference to dissipation in the Radiatory
Mantram, viz., “... and dissipate all that hinders
service and good health.” Remember also that the
problem of “transference,” about which I spoke in
the section on opening the healing triangles (the
Protecting Triangle, #4), where a healer takes on
or even takes over the condition of disease or
discomfort, not in fact but symptomatically, of the
patient, incapacitating them as a healer, is a glamor
and an illusion in the healer (due to wrong
identification), and desire (misdirected will) to
bring relief (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 555). To
relieve this situation, these triangles can be of
great value.
As a further deepening of your work with these
three triangles, consider the following tabulation:
Hindrance Effect Ray Counter- Inspiring Being
active Being of
Energy Integr
tion
Illusion Separateness I Synthesis Avatar of Christ
Synthesis Silent
Glamor Distortion II Love Spirit of Watch
Peace
Maya Materialism III Creative Lord
Knowledge/ Buddha
Intelligence
 Further connections with the dissipating
triangles:
i. Illusion (head center - right eye - ajna) (to clear
illusions from the mental body), then connect
with sacral center - throat center - Soul to
transform the mental body to be an expression of
the soul-mind.
ii. Glamor (right eye - left eye - ajna) to clear
glamors from the astral body, then connect with
solar plexus center - heart center - Buddhic body
to transform astral into the buddhic body so that
the astral is an expression of buddhi love and
intuition and feeling.
iii. Maya (the tetrahedral whole - by connecting
head center - left eye - ajna) to transform the
matter/substance of the physical to be an
expression of the atmic body so the physical on
earth is directed by the will of the soul (spiritual
triad).
a. Triangle for Dissipating Illusion
 The first, the Triangle for Dissipating Illusion,
can dispel the illusions of the mind. Its points are
the head center, the ajna center and the right eye
minor center. Through this eye the highest activity
of the personality can be directed upon the
physical plane. It is this complete circuit which
protects us from illusion. Should energy get
“stuck” anywhere along the circuit, mental
illusions occur. Thus we can, when this triangle is
flowing, see things as they are and not just as they
appear.[33]
b. Triangle for Dissipating Glamor

The second triangle, the Triangle for

Dissipating Glamor (linked to the last Activating
Triangle, #5, with all that that implies), can
disperse glamor, namely, those emotional desires
and aspirations, hopes and fears, persuasions and
allurements which have nothing to do with reality,
a charming force which weakens the mind (and
often empties the purse!). Use the ajna center and
the left and right eyes in triangle form to dissipate
the glamor of the emotional plane of desire and
false attraction. Let this triangle sit like a torch on
the forehead, enabling the patient to see through
superficiality and glittering innuendoes which have
allured (and injured) them. Then, connect this
glamor triangle with another that will help the
process of dissipation by building higher and
stronger threads of spiritual association, viz.,
awakening the love petals of the soul body and
lifting the patient out of the astral body into the
body of pure reason on the buddhic or intuitional
plane. The latter circuit, engaging the throat center,
the solar plexus center and the heart center, is
called the Triangle of the Second Thread.
Do these triangles of illusion and glamor one
after the other, and then allow them to stand in the
etheric light of the person, for it is “when these
two triangles are under control and are beginning
to function properly that the seven centers in the
etheric body are brought under clear direction”
(Bailey, 1973, p. 252).
c. Triangle for Dissipating Maya
 With the formation of the Triangle for
Dissipating Maya we establish a tetrahedral form
of dynamic transformational power. It must be built
and experienced to understand. It is composed of
four points and four triangles:
i. The base: head center and the two eye minors
(the main triangle that governs the eyes and
seeing on all levels).
ii. Illusion: head center, ajna center and right eye
minor.
iii. Glamor: ajna center and two eye minors.
iv. Maya: head center, ajna center and left eye
minor.

This last triangle involves the physical and

etheric vehicles and their embodied energy blocks
and debris. These deeply embedded energy wastes
are the etheric toxins which severely damage the
energy circulation, inveigling the will more
intensely into materiality. It takes a serious student
to lift their boots out of this trench. Release
involves something more than just meditation
(which stimulates the love petals of the causal
lotus); it also involves the building of the rainbow
bridge, called, in esotericism, the antahkarana.
Here, the student or patient (and are we not all
both, or at least the latter?) must work in mental
matter to bridge the energies from the etheric body
to the atmic plane (the spiritual dimension of
divine will), necessitating a link with another
triangle, viz., the throat center (the creative center
of building), the heart center and the spleen center,
called the Triangle of the Third Thread. Only in
this way can maya be finally overcome; the result
will be the fourth initiation, a crucifixion of the
whole of one’s personality achievements. This sort
of advanced work on the part of the esoteric healer
will presuppose the use of ray words of power,
according to the soul request of the patient. The
healer wishing to pursue this spiritual activity is
asked to study the two books by Alice Bailey
concerned with the antahkarana, Education in the
New Age and The Rays and the Initiations.
Summary of Treatment
First Thread: throat c + ajna + head c – Illusion
– sacral c + throat c + higher mind
Second Thread: throat c + spleen + heart –
Glamor – solar plexus – heart c + buddhic
body
Third Thread: throat c + heart + spleen – Maya
– base c + head c + atmic body
These triangles will take a lot of practice to
perfect, but the effort will be repaid a
thousandfold. I consider the senses, particularly the
eyes, the ears and the skin (touch) as primary areas
to address in a healing. But they should only be
worked with after a lot of balancing has been done
on the other many triangles.
61. TASTE TRIANGLE

From the esoteric angle the taste and smell

triangles are not as developed as the other three
and are regarded as coming under the directorship
of the touch sense. And symbolic of this, medical
science tells us that taste is only fully developed
after we have reached forty years old. Taste is
governed by the solar plexus center (assisted by
the spleen center). When we say a person has good
or bad “taste,” we are referring to their judgment
and discriminative capabilities. It is in this way
that we work with the taste sense. If the patient has
physical problems with tasting, however, or has
tongue ulcers, or if there is nervous deviation of
the tongue due to a stroke or accident, then we can
employ the Taste Triangle to try and balance the
escaping energy. The triangle consists of holding
the solar plexus center along with the spleen center
and linking the third point of the triangle with the
tongue minute center (where the four cranial
nerves, the fifth, seventh, ninth and tenth find
expression). (A variation of this circuit: solar
plexus center, point at the taste area in the brain,
called the parietal opercular-insular area of the
cerebral cortex, in the lateral margin of the
postcentral gyrus in the sylvian fissure, and the
tongue point. Knowing energy follows thought, as
you think of this point in the brain, you immediately
connect with it.) This triangle helps a patient to be
more creative in the imagination and less caught up
in impractical imaginings and dreams. And on the
mental level, the intellect can be helped to sharpen
its wits and be more discriminative in its use of
thought and commitment, i.e., to avoid being taken
in simply by “taste,” but rather by what is truly
valuable.
62. SMELL TRIANGLE
 The last and least developed of the senses is
the faculty of smell. It is governed by the base
center, by an energy point in the nose (the olfactory
nerve—the first cranial nerve ending in the nose)
and by the ajna center (for the ajna center rules the
nose and vision) (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 44). (A
variation of this triangle: the base center, the point
in the brain [the medial and lateral olfactory
areas], and the point in the nose [the olfactory
nerve].) We often say, “he followed his nose,” or
“I smell a rat,” or “he has a nose for it.” All these
suggest direction and focus, or some sort of
idealism, realization or discernment. Frequently,
however, our sense of direction is poor, and our
ability to know the difference between the true and
the false is equally weak. This triangle helps us to
rise to the greater powers of knowledge and to the
recognition of truth.

TABULATION RELATING THE SENSES TO THE

SUBTLE BODIES (Bailey, 1962)
Sense Physical Emotional Mental Intuitional
(Astral) (Manasic) (Buddhic)
Hearing Hearing Clairaudience Clear sound Compre-
hension
Touch Touch Psychometry Planetary Healing
Psychometry
Sight Sight Clairvoyance Pure seeing Divine
Vision
Taste Taste Imagination Discrimination Intuition
Smell Smell Emotional Spiritual Idealism
Idealism Discernment

TABULATION RELATING THE SENSES TO OTHER

FACTORS IN HEALING
Sense Cranial Body Main Lower Higher
Nerve Center Aspect Aspect
Hearing 8 Physical Throat Sound Divine
Response
Touch 6, 10 Emotional Solar Contact Understan
Plexus
or
Heart
Sight 2 Mental Head Perspective Vision
Taste 5, 7, 9, Buddhic Solar Discernment Intuition
10 Plexus
Smell 1 Atmic Base Emotional Spiritual
Idealism Discernm

TABULATION OF THE EXPERIENCE OF THE

SENSES
SENSE PHYSICAL ASTRAL MENTAL BUDDHIC
HEARING I hear I I listen (I I
sympathize hear clearly) comprehen
TOUCH I touch I feel I feel I balance
touched (I (heal)
feel
exposed)
SIGHT I see I witness I know I see as I am
seen
TASTE I taste I imagine I I discover
discriminate
SMELL I smell I sense the I discern the I experienc
ideal Path the ideal

MANTRIC AFFIRMATIONS OF THE SENSES

Through hearing I listen and comprehend that I am That.

Through touch I feel and heal: I serve the One.
Through seeing I know, and see as I am seen—reality is.
Through taste I can discriminate and discover the Perfect.
Through smell I sense the ideal and know I have all
knowledge.

To see charts “A Wider Tabulation for the

Senses” and “Tabulation Relating the Centers to
the Subtle Bodies,” go to:
http://bluedolphinpublishing.com/Charts.html

Useful triangles in more advanced esoteric

healing
63. TRIANGLE FOR THE MAJORITY
The ajna center, solar plexus center, and sacral
center form a triangle which governs the majority
of mankind (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 47). It is to
be used to balance those of the human family who
have been selected to regenerate the race, i.e., any
couple whose karma permits them to have
offspring (see the illustration of this triangle with
the Triangle of Being, #52). Therefore, this triangle
is essential for use when a couple has come to you
for the healing of their infertility problem. It should
be included whenever the Fertility Triangles (#27)
are used.
64. TRIANGLE FOR AVERAGE HUMANITY
Average humanity is largely emotional. The
triangle controlling them is: the soul, the head
center, and the solar plexus center (Bailey, 1951–
70, v. 4, p. 430). It may be used for all human
beings who are ruled by their emotions as a means
to help them connect more with their soul impulse.
65. TRIANGLE FOR IMBECILES AND ANIMALS
A triangle for those who are mindless, senile
and imbecilic can be used, called the Triangle for
Imbeciles and Animals. Some groups of human
beings still live a low-grade emotional life. They
are not yet, as such, individuals, or rather,
individualized. They still belong to the region of
the soul, living in the realm of sexual desires, and
they have not properly “descended” fully into the
body, to take hold of their own centers in the body.
Such people are rather like animals, although
animals are governed by a different triangle which
may also be used by the healer when helping or
comforting animals: animal group soul, solar
plexus center and spleen minor center (Bailey,
1951–70, v. 4, p. 430). To this latter triangle
people return when unable to hold onto their center
of consciousness. They have, as it were, lost their
minds and have become insane or imbecilic, or
completely senile. Unlike animals, however, the
group soul to which they are connected is to the
soul of the human race as a whole.
The head center, the heart center and the base
center is that which will govern when we become
what we really are (p. 47). This is the Triangle of
Being, which I have already spoken about. It is a
good triangle to do alongside any of the above
three triangles (Majority, Average Humanity, and
Imbeciles and Animals) as it grounds them in what
they really are and will be.
66. TRIANGLE OF SPIRITUAL FACILITATION
Two triangles are connected with the solar
plexus center, which facilitate a stimulus to the
heart center to enable one to become aware of the
purposes and plans of the spiritual personnel
working for and directing the spiritual progress of
humanity. These two triangles are particularly
important for those with this awareness but who
are ill with heart problems, circulatory
insufficiency, or nervous illnesses.
To set up this circuit of energy, focus your
attention on the solar plexus center using your ajna
and two hands as you stand behind the patient.
Now, keeping your ajna on the solar plexus center,
move your two hands to the heart center, and then,
holding one hand on that center, move the other to
the ajna of the patient (this you will recognize as
the Lower Clearing Triangle which is used with
so-called “average” people, those who are on the
verge of the Spiritual Path). The final thing to do is
to hold the heart-center-in-the-head with your ajna
(so your ajna is now holding two centers, the solar
plexus center and the heart-in-the-head-center of
the patient). The heart-in-the-head-center is simply
the heart center as found in the head center, for the
head center is the unifying center of all the centers
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 170). So the triangle
consists of the solar plexus center and the heart-in-
the-head-center (held as one point by the ajna), the
ajna center and the heart center. Note that the flow
of this triangle goes from ajna to heart to heart-in-
the-head. It is a circuit for more advanced patients.
(See an illustration of this triangle with the Lower
Clearing Triangle, #13.)
67. TRIANGLE AIDING SELF-CONSCIOUSNESS
This triangle has more of a planetary use, but it
can still be applied to an individual. After all,
individuals make up humanity! The triangle has
connections on a grand scale, a scale beyond most
of our mental capabilities. Its cosmic origin means
it will help mankind awaken, for its own
protection, to its responsibility to the environment.
For instance, the plight of humanity as a result of
the industrial misuse of chemicals with the
resultant ozone depletion has led to urgent
consultations and conferences on an international
scale. These have steered governments to form
such organizations as the International Panel of
Climate Change and the International Geosphere-
Biosphere Programme. The ozone “hole” is
nothing but the result of ignorance and
irresponsibility. Industrialists claim that they did
not know of these effects. Then there are those
destructive emissions that come from burning
forests; from power stations and exhaust fumes;
from fire extinguishers, microchip degreasers and
so on. All are taking their toll. To stop all this is
essential but virtually impossible. To stop it would
not even mean a permanent cure. There are
constant dangers to the environment due to the
thoughtless actions, selfish desires and short-term
gains of man. To cure such mental inertia and
emotional greed, we must work on the inner planes
of consciousness so that we can attain an
awareness of a greater purpose and plan for the
world of nature of which we are a dependent part.
There is a need for the awakening of self-
consciousness, or soul-consciousness (also known
as Christ-consciousness). To help in this
awakening we may be inspired during the healing
session to hold a triangle that has cosmic origins.
From the inner nature of certain constellations or
stars, an energy flows to the earth and to people as
individuals and as members of the human race.
This energy is that of self-consciousness.
Using this triangle is advanced esoteric
healing, but I think it is appropriate to introduce it
in this book. (The healing of the future will be
more related to the esoteric aspects of life, which
means that advanced healing deals more with the
higher causes of conditions.)
 The Triangle Aiding Self-Consciousness
consists of the throat center, the ajna center and the
heart center. These points relate to the planets of
Saturn, Mercury and the Sun, which are in turn
related to Sirius, the Great Bear and the Pleiades
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 3). And if the healer can hold
these nine sources of energy flow, directing the
stream right down to the individual, the power of
more spiritual, planetary and unseen healing is
performed. This triple triangle can also be done as
an act of world service for mankind as a whole.
68. THREADS TRIANGLE
The Threads Triangle is very useful for
patients in spiritual emergency. It is used for those
souls who have suddenly tasted the sweet wine of
God and immediately want the whole heavenly vat!
Their awakened vision is certain, their sincerity
unquestionable, their urgency immense, but their
methods can be menacing, malicious and self-
destructive. They want Truth and will stop at
nothing. The result can be an implosion, seriously
rupturing their etheric web, with a consequent loss
of energy and with telltale symptoms. In extreme
cases, they might display erratic behavior—strong
spiritual fervor then black depression and inertia,
inspired creativity and selflessness followed by
listlessness, lack of confidence and self-denial,
and so on, always a high spiritual ideal coupled
with material torment. This triangle, consisting of
holding the base center first and then holding the
triangle of the solar plexus center, heart center, and
head center, is especially useful as a protection
against the premature raising of kundalini (Bailey,
1951–70, v. 4, p. 181–87), which is the endeavor
to incorporate energies into the etheric body which
have not yet undergone proper or adequate
development and transformation. Premature raising
of the fire always results in burning; the web is
either scorched, left “threadbare” or irreparably
damaged. Compare the use of this triangle to the
Kundalini Triangle itself. Note how this triangle is
more advanced than the Kundalini Triangle.
Once this initial triangle is brought into active
radiance and balance, you should connect with the
Threads Triangle and the Dissipating Triangles.
This involves the three energies of the kundalini as
they flow down (but not as they flow up, for that is
under the soul’s direction); and the three
fundamental anchoring points for the spirit in the
body, the threads themselves, via the Threads
Triangle.
These three threads triangles are part of the
building of the creative thread itself, hence the use
of the throat center in each case. The creative
thread is triple in form (Bailey, 1954, p. 147). This
is what you do when the Threads Triangle is being
held (this describes how each center in the
Threads Triangle is connected to the threefold
channel in the etheric spine. It is not a description
of how to connect with the first, second and third
creative thread):
a. While holding the head center, link in with the
central energy of sushumna as it connects with
the base center, and with the consciousness
thread which is anchored in the head.
b. From the heart center, transfer to the ajna center
and, as you do so, link in with the nadic energy
of ida and with the life thread which is anchored
in the heart center.
c. From the solar plexus center, transfer to the alta
major center (at the back of the head) and link in
with the energy of pingala and the creative thread
which is anchored in the throat center.
 With these various triangles here mentioned,
which link with the primary nadis up the spine and
also the three major centers in the head, you can
also enter three other circuits to which I referred
earlier, the Triangle of the First Thread, the
Triangle of the Second Thread, and the Triangle of
the Third Thread (see #60). These are the
transforming force circuits of the creative thread
itself (pingala). They form the first stage of the
antahkarana, gathering each of the three major
nadis (or threads) themselves. They have their own
varying benefits both for the patient and for
humanity (note the Eyes Triangle, #59).
 The Threads Triangle is also a very important
triangle in relation to those who are living an
ordered spiritual life so as to control the process
of awakening the centers. It gives protection and
facilitates correct opening of the centers as the
three major energies begin their rise up the etheric
spine.
In my seminars on the reappearance of the
World Teacher, I have found this triangle to be of
particular benefit and potency for the group as it
works together to open a channel for the coming of
the Christ. I usually get the group to do it near the
end of the workshop. This protects and orders the
group kundalini in relation to the channel which
humanity has to the fifth Kingdom.

E. Closing and sealing the healing triangle

Most healings take about twenty to thirty
minutes to do, so it is obvious that you will not be
required to do all the triangle circuits listed here.
The healer is directed to work with different
triangles by his or her active and intuitive
intelligence. Some triangles may need to be
worked on and balanced at subsequent visits. Keep
a clock clearly visible in your treatment room,
because in this work, just as in meditation, time
seems to stand still. At first you will need to
glance at the clock to keep within the time limit.
Use this awareness of time to help you maintain
your therapeutic awareness and sense of
discipline. Guard against all dreaming and drifting
in consciousness in esoteric healing. Train yourself
to be alert and mentally active and aware of subtle
impressions (diagnosis) and appropriate
therapeutic response right through the healing
treatment. At first this is difficult, for the mind
loves an excuse to meander in and out of will-o’-
the-wisp thoughts and feelings and perhaps tries to
get some exciting psychic phenomena to boast
about. Do your best to avoid these experiences and
to maintain clear and conscious mental activity.

Balancing the pairs of centers

 On completing the last triangle of your healing
treatment, move back to the right side of the
patient. Put your hands into the energy inflow and
outflow of the ajna center, and bring it into a
renewed balance in response to your work in and
around the patient. Then balance three pairs of
centers against each other to bring all the centers
into integrated functioning. They lie above and
below the diaphragm. In a healing this is the final
act. It symbolizes the great fact of the transference
of energy, when the lower centers will be in direct
communication with their higher counterparts. The
solar plexus center (for the average person) and
the throat center (for the aspirant and disciple) will
act as important transferring centers, one for the
lower centers and the other for all the spinal
centers into the head. Furthermore, each of the
lower three centers will be directly linked by a
specific nadi to its higher center. If you are healing
in a group, the leader will balance these pairs in
the etheric field in the head, while the other healers
work on the major centers up the etheric spine.
HEAD–BASE
The first pair we take is the head center and
base center. To do this correctly, the energy of the
center at the base of the spine (the organ of the
personal will) must be raised and carried up the
spinal column to the head center, via the ajna
center (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 2, p. 523). Put your
right hand about six inches (15 cms) above the
patient’s head, palm downwards, and your left
hand a little way out from the base of the spine.
According to Law IV of esoteric healing, the good
controls us via the head center, and “friction” or
disharmony (dis-ease) is due to the inactivity of the
base center (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, pp. 568–69,
593). These two centers control the will, soul will,
and personality will, hence the conflict in many
people. Using the creative imagination, visualize
the energy flowing right through the base center
around the body and, via the ajna center, through
your hand at the head center and down again to
your hand at the base center. Visualize the flow to
be clear and smooth. In esoteric healing we work
with white light; should any other color present
itself (the white light has sacrificed itself for your
information and instruction), do not resist it or
become infatuated by it; let it flow until the white
light returns by listening to its diagnostic and
therapeutic guidance. When these two centers feel
harmonious and rhythmical, gently withdraw your
hands and take them to the next pair of major
centers.
HEART–SOLAR PLEXUS
The heart center and the solar plexus center
are the next pair to be balanced. Remember that the
solar plexus center is the most active of all the
centers, thus we must be careful to properly
balance this center with the heart center. Hold your
right hand in front of the chest (holding the outflow
of heart energy) and the left hand at the back about
half way down toward the waist, to hold the inflow
of solar plexus energy. The heart expresses love
and true beauty, which is distorted by the desires
and passions of the solar plexus. As indicated
above, visualize the energy circulating through the
two centers becoming balanced and in harmony,
taking on a beautiful form. The energy of the solar
plexus, that is, the organ of self-conscious personal
desire, must be raised to the heart and there
transmuted into group service (Bailey, 1951–70, v.
2, p. 523). When you are ready, gently withdraw
the hands and move them to the last pair of centers.
THROAT–SACRAL
The throat center and the sacral center are last
because they are the creative, building expressions
in life. Place your right hand in front of the throat
(here you are holding its outflow of energy) and
your left hand at the sacral center near the lower
part of the spine. This pair is important to balance
and integrate because these centers are esoterically
concerned with one’s relationship to Truth. The
soul is endeavoring to bring about a creative
interplay between these centers via the personality
of the individual. This creative interplay is what is
necessary, the True, for the person to express in
this incarnation. Visualizing the flow as described
above, see the flow moving round in a circle
through these centers, integrating and refining their
relationship.

To see a chart depicting the balancing of the

pairs of centers, go to:
http://bluedolphinpublishing.com/Charts.html#Balan
Problems of a secondary nature result from the
disharmony of the energy between these major
centers above and below the diaphragm. This may
even affect the ajna center (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4,
p. 593). When the upper centers (above the
diaphragm) have an interplay, and when the lower
centers impact each other, or when the
transmutation process from the lower centers to the
upper centers is involved, this is an expression of
radiation. When the upper centers impact energy on
those below the diaphragm, we see demonstrated
the potency of magnetism. This could be an
important point for those technically-minded
esoteric healing practitioners.
 Put simply, so that we can take advantage of
the information the Master Djwhal Khul has so
painstakingly given us, if the patient is not on the
path of conscious spiritual development, then
balance these centers from below up, viz., from
base center to head center, solar plexus center to
heart center and sacral center to throat center. Such
a patient will respond more to radiatory healing
and be aspiring towards the soul (unconsciously).
If, however, there is sufficient evidence that the
patient is consciously working for further spiritual
advancement, then you may draw the energy down,
from the soul contact, via the upper centers to those
below, that is, head center to base center, heart
center to solar plexus center and throat center to
sacral center.
Let us continue with the closing procedure.
Return to the ajna center to balance it again,
for the last time. Then visualize the patient in a
bubble of light. See this pure, radiant, white light
surrounding the patient and, as you do so, take your
hands down to your sides, and, visualizing the light
around the feet, move your hands upward, sealing
and protecting the energies all round the aura and
body of the patient (see photo #10 in Appendix B).
This sealing and protecting activity is not to isolate
the patient from outside forces, but rather to
strengthen their discriminative faculties and so
help the mind from being led astray. Healing with
white light can help the person be more responsive
and responsible to the forces and energies from
both inner and outer levels of being and to
opportunities and relationships. The bubble of light
will begin to act like a divine filter, rejecting the
waste and auric toxins and unnecessary
encumbrances, yet accepting helpful, enhancing
and elevating influences and contacts.
When your hands reach the top of the head,
hold them in a triangle, palms down with thumbs
and forefingers touching (see illustration with
#47). Visualize the light of divine purpose, divine
love and divine activity (and at the very heart of
the triangle visualize the Life Principle or Thread
streaming from the highest levels [from the original
Cosmic Universe, cf. Chapter 8, Appendix A, B.
Commentary, #8ff] into every center, cell and
atom) flowing through the head center. This is a
conscious use of the Radiatory Triangle and
radiatory method of healing (soul–brain–heart
center, and then out to the whole aura of the
patient). Then you may silently, or in a soft
whispering voice, sound the Radiatory Mantram.
Notice how this mantram is linked to the
dissipation of the three primary glamors (illusion,
glamor and maya).
“May the love of the One Soul, focussed in this
group, radiate upon you, my brother, and permeate
every part of your body—healing, soothing,
strengthening, and dissipating all that hinders
service and good health” (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p.
105).
Now sound the Sacred Word, OM, three times
silently or together softly with the other healers.
The first integrates the mind of the patient, the
second integrates their emotions and higher
intuition and the third integrates their etheric body
and spiritual will.
Now withdraw your hands, palms together, to
your heart. By an act of spiritual will via your ajna
center, seal the magnetic Healing Triangle (see
photo #11 in Appendix B). The healing force is
literally “turned off” and redirected; it is no longer
available (p. 651). Remember this was opened for
healing, soon after your attunement with the patient
right at the beginning of the treatment. It was a two-
sided triangle, from the soul of the healer to the
heart center to the brain, but not back to the soul.
Within this open triangle we performed the service
of esoteric healing. Now, at the completion of the
healing, you turn off the energy flow by definitely
visualizing the triangle circuit as flowing from the
ajna center and the brain directly back to the soul
(Soul–Heart Center–Brain (Ajna)–Soul).
If you had opened the Radiatory Healing
Triangle at the beginning of the healing, now is the
time to close it. You do this in the following way.
The healer “shuts off” soul contact and reassumes
control of the aura as a medium of your own
spiritual expression; it becomes no longer an
instrument for healing by radiatory activity, and
leaves the patient alone (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p.
658).
By this “sealing” and “shutting” process the
healer is specifically empowering each patient by
leaving them free and independent and having no
dependence on the healer. Both healer and patient
can then reassume their independent and unique
spiritual path.
Next, give thanks to your fellow healers on
soul levels and to the higher powers or beings for
their help and for the opportunity to work with the
energies of healing and to be of service to the Plan
of the Great One.
Then when you feel you are ready, gently bring
the patient back to everyday consciousness by
lightly touching their shoulders and back of the
neck (between the shoulder blades). This has the
effect also of grounding their energies back onto
the earth (see photo #12 in Appendix B).
When the patient is ready, take them to the
waiting room to rest quietly for a while. It is very
restful to the patient to see fresh flowers and herbs
as they quietly think about the treatment and come
back to their physical reality. Plants have a
profound healing effect on the inner bodies, their
colors and fragrance giving hope and strength to
the person.
At this point, make a few notes on the major
findings during the healing, including the triangle
you found important to the healing.
After about five to ten minutes, bring the
patient back to the world with a little constructive
chat. But remember that speaking about the healing
dissipates it, diluting much of your valuable work.
It is a good idea to remind the person that speaking
about the healing to anyone should be avoided.
(One great spiritual teacher recommends the
following: “Say nothing to anyone about one’s
spiritual experiences, yea, be silent about them
even to one’s self” [Steiner, 1947]).
Let the healing do its inner work of adjustment
... and then send the patient on their way with a
smile!

Summary of the healing procedure

Here is an outline of the stages of esoteric
healing, from start to finish.
1. Ask the patient to relax and to close the eyes.
2. Align your threefold personality with your soul.
3. Establish the Higher Triangle. Now sound the
Group Mantram.
4. Attune yourself with the patient by opening the
Radiatory Healing Triangle, then open the
Magnetic Healing Triangle, (open the Ray
Attunement Triangles, if indicated), do the
Protecting (against transference) Triangle and
Activating Triangles (Placing-Vitalizing-
Directing Triangles), finally do the Triangle of
Transfer to complete this important stage of
preparation for healing. (With a little practice
this should not take more than two or three
minutes.)
5. Diagnose the centers (ajna, solar plexus, base,
 sacral, heart, throat, alta major, head, ajna again)
in the ajna to find the needed center (see Chapter
7, B. Diagnosis).
6. Light and activate the four primary vitality
triangles (#1-4).
7. Do the primary diagnostic triangle, called the
Synchronizing Triangle (see Chapter 6 and
Chapter 7, a. The Synchronizing Triangle).
8. Visualize and activate the triangle circuits as
diagnosed intuitively by the creative intelligence.
(The sequence is similar to that of balancing:
start with the solar plexus triangles, then go to
the base triangles, sacral, heart, vagus nerve,
throat, head triangles, and triangles involving the
senses.)
9. Balance the pairs of opposing centers against
each other (Chapter 7, Balancing the pairs of
centers).
10. Create the circle of protection with the
Radiatory Mantram.
11. Seal (or close) the Radiatory and Magnetic
Healing Triangles.
12. Restore the patient to their normal waking
consciousness.
 8.
TREATING THE THREE
INHERITED PLANETARY
INFLUENCES

The spread of cancer

Any unusual growth of cells in the body can be
called a “new growth” or “neoplasm.” Most of
these are simple local growths with no serious
consequences and are therefore called “benign.”
The common wart is an example of such a “benign
tumor.” Sometimes, however, a “new growth”
becomes malignant, behaves in a very different
manner, and causes the frightening and serious
conditions called “cancer.”
Most people think of cancer as a single
disease. This is true only in the sense that all
cancer is characterized by an unrestrained growth
of cells. In most cases these cells build up into
tumors that compress, invade, and destroy normal
tissues. If left untreated, these conditions usually
lead to death. Whatever the specific form of cancer
involved, these “malignant” tumors generally share
some common characteristics. These are:
1. A higher rate of cell growth (or lower rate of
cell death) than the normal tissues from which
the cancers are derived.
2. Failure to maintain the boundaries of normal
tissues.
3. Appearance under the microscope of immature
rather than mature tissues, and
4. A tendency to spread to parts of the body distant
from the original site of the cancer.

Not all of these features necessarily

accompany every malignant tumor, but they are
characteristic of most forms of cancer.
Over the course of a lifetime, the chances of
developing cancer, according to present statistics,
are approximately 25 percent.
We need not go into the specific ins and outs of
these conditions; there are many excellent books
which can explain it very well. What we do want
to explain is some of the more esoteric aspects of
this disease.

An esoteric view
Cancer has been around for a long time. Long
before records were kept, cancer has been
afflicting humans, probably for millions of years.
Strangely, cancer cannot really be understood
except from the angle of another disease. Teachers
of the Ancient Wisdom say cancer grew out of the
syphilitic diseases. So there is a strong connection
between cancer and human sexual activities. The
disease was a reaction to the awful horror of
syphilis. This reaction was taken to such a degree,
however, that humans refused to have sexual
intercourse. A fear overtook the people of the time,
a fear of death by syphilis. By repudiating sexual
intercourse, these ancient people stifled the natural
flow of energy rhythmically moving through the
centers of generation (the sacral center of both men
and women). In time this resulted in a counter
disease to that of the over-expression and use of
the sacral center, a disease of inhibition, called
cancer (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4). The inhibition was
of such persistence that the energy that flowed into
all cells to direct the process of replication instead
caused mutation. In this way, not only the
reproductive behavior of the cell was disturbed
but also that of its progeny. The altered cell breeds
true.
Countless millions have been killed by this
disease (today it is statistically shown that one in
three get cancer, and one in four die of it—BBC
radio 27th September 1990). And countless
millions have been buried, hence the “germs” of
cancer can now be found in the soil of the planet
itself. The Ageless Wisdom suggests that our dead
bodies be burned so that this so-called germ
should be destroyed, gradually cleansing the
planet. It has been heartening to watch how church
after church has been changing its emphasis from
burial to cremation. But the healer knows that in
every atom of the body is to be found a point of
light. We know that the nature of the soul is light.
We know about the light of matter and about the
light of the soul. And in working with disease and
cancer we learn to fuse and blend soul light and
material light to bring about healing (Bailey, 1973,
p. 196).
Cancer is a disease of the misuse of desire
resulting in inertia, and the lack of right emotional
control resulting in fear.
“One of the main sources of cancer as related
to the sacral center, and therefore to the sex organs,
has been the well-intentioned suppression of the
sex life, and of all thought connected with the sex
life, by misguided aspirants; they are those who
find the teaching—monastic and celibate—of the
Middle Ages the line of least resistance. In that
period of time, good people taught that sex was
evil and wicked, something not to be mentioned,
and a potent source of trouble. Normal reactions,
instead of being controlled and transmuted into
creative activity, were violently suppressed and all
thoughts about the sex life were refused
expression” (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4).
For many people, this “Middle-Ages attitude”
still prevails. Usually the center which governs the
area where the cancer has taken hold is overactive.
This shows that the disease is deep within the
structure or genetic life of humanity. We are no
longer fearful of syphilis; it is contained and
controlled by modern drugs. We now fear the “big
C” instead, and the fear, sadly, is one of the
sources of the overactivity.

Esoteric healing and cancer

Cancer involves the will-to-live, but where
new life is generated, there is only distortion and
malfunction. The proper functioning of the body
through the cells is threatened and overstimulated.
In fact this very overestimation can be said to be
the rampant absorption of the life-force of the cell
(and of the person). The patient’s will is sapped. It
takes a different kind of will energy to stimulate a
cancer victim to fight for life. A few patients do
achieve success, and their testimonies of how they
did so can be found on the health shelves in all
bookshops.
Cancer is caused by an inhibited emotional
body and by an etheric body that is overstimulated
in certain areas. It is an illness of the masses; more
advanced people generally do not suffer from
cancer. The so-called average person (one who
has not entered the stream of service to humanity)
has a low or slow vibratory rate. Cancer is an
imposed hastening of this rate, causing an increase
in cellular reproduction, leading to “malignancy.”
From an esoteric understanding the soul wills to
have a faster vibratory rate to conform with its
own plan for the person’s incarnation; the person
resists the new rhythm and the opportunities in life
which would lead to a more mental polarization
rather than an emotional expression, and this
resistance, this damming of the flow towards the
next step in consciousness, results in what we
know as cancer. The suggestion is that the person
who gets cancer should have already developed a
higher consciousness. This higher consciousness
has been held back by the personality and it forms
a focus in one or more areas in the physical body.
This develops as a tumor, which can spread to
other tissues. The person has chosen to remain
locked in the body and its lower desires. The
consciousness of a Master or an Initiate of high
degree vibrates in the whole body analogously to
the way a cancer vibrates in the body of those who
prefer not to move on in spiritual consciousness.
For this reason, in esoteric healing the cancer
patient is always asked to consciously participate
in the healing treatment (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4).
Explaining the process to the patient might take
time, and require much effort on the part of the
patient (who is often not interested in medical
matters, still less in esoteric healing). The
involvement of the patient can be limited to the
actual work on the cancer. Therefore, the healer
will do all the preliminaries—attuning, balancing,
doing the various triangles necessary for that
patient in preparation for working with the patient
on the cancer itself. When it is time to work on the
cancer, it is best to give instructions to the patient
during the process of this treatment. For example,
if the patient has bowel cancer (cancer of the large
intestine):
 Before speaking to the patient, hold the solar
plexus center, sacral center and throat center, the
Triangle of Transmutation used for all cancers.
Whenever directing others in healing, the healer
should create and hold the triangle before
instructing others to do so. Say to the patient
something like the following: “With your mind’s
eye visualize the energy of pure white light flowing
through your solar plexus center to your sex center
(sacral center) and up to your throat center.”
Balance the Triangle of Transmutation (a word that
is symbolically and also technically and
scientifically correct [Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p.
61]), then move the ajna that was holding the solar
plexus center to hold the energy of a healthy part of
the colon, while continuing to hold the other two
centers. Then say to the patient, “Now visualize the
energy of pure white light flowing from your
healthy colon through your sacral center to your
throat center. Let this energy circulate round these
three points.” We never focus on the cancer itself,
but always on the healthy tissue in the same organ.
This is an important point, for if the cancer itself is
held, it will be further stimulated, making the
problems even worse. Now you have coordinated
the will of the patient with your own (or with that
of the healing group). The final stage is to visualize
the whole organ as healthy. Do this first yourself.
Then say to the patient, “Still visualizing the flow
of pure white light from the healthy colon to your
sacral center and to your throat center of creative
service, visualize your colon as being whole and
healthy and bathed in light.” Then, after a while,
say, “Allow pure love to flow in light through
those three points.” For only when the primary and
ancient fear that has got into the cellular codes is
replaced with love and light can right function
return. When you feel ready, go back to holding the
Triangle of Transmutation, and ask the patient to do
the same. Next, ask the patient to release the
triangle and relax. You will then complete the
healing by balancing the centers of polarity,
circling the patient with light and sealing the
Magnetic and Radiatory Healing Triangles as usual
(see Chapter 7, Balancing the pairs of centers).
In more advanced esoteric healing, the healer
will use the Synchronizing Triangle while the
patient and other healers in the group continue to
work with the Triangle of Transmutation. The
healer should be certain they know what they are
doing before employing the Synchronizing Triangle
in this work. Unless you know what is specifically
required (see Chapter 6, Synchronizing Triangle),
this advanced form of the Synchronizing Triangle
is best left to better qualified esoteric healing
practitioners.

Syphilis, cancer and tuberculosis

These three disease miasms are within all of
us. I am using the term “miasm” in the sense of an
inherited planetary malfunction which no human
can avoid. Our purpose is to transmute these
miasms and so make the planet sacred. I do not
plan here to go deeply into the understanding of
these esoteric miasms (for this, see Appendix A at
the end of this chapter). The approach is slightly
different to Hahnemann’s and homeopathy’s
understanding. But the miasms are worth
reviewing, since they are foundational to all our
woes as well as to our role in spiritualizing the
planet.
Syphilis, cancer and tuberculosis are vortices
within our personality energy structure, set there at
a time when we entered this planetary organism
hundreds of millions of years ago. They act as
precursors to disease, resulting in the myriad
illnesses known to modern pathology. Syphilis is
the earliest evil emerging from this planetary form
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 58). It is related to the
satisfaction of physical desire (p. 312) as shown
by the excesses indulged in aeons ago during the
middle period of the Lemurian epoch (p. 58). In
that era began a primary misuse of the sex life and
a primary misuse of the energy of substance itself
(p. 59). We know, of course, that syphilis is caused
by an entity called the spirochaeta pallida. I
believe we can also say that when the collapse of
the planetary life occurred, another alien entity
entered, not exactly alien in itself but alien in that it
was subservient to the life of the planetary being.
And then due to a fundamental breakdown in the
management of substance, this entity gained an
undesired and consequently undesirable
dominance. That is to say, the entity which we call
the planetary disease of syphilis is unwittingly in
control of the planet, simply because the planetary
life (Logos) is in a chronic state of collapse or
devitalization. Instead of the energy of light and
love controlling and dominating, the opposite does,
namely, hatred, darkness and so-called evil. This
is the undreamt-of nightmare of the One About
Naught May Be Said, in which the whole basis of
creation has degenerated to a partial cosmic chaos,
a cosmic form of a mentally handicapped person.
To grasp these thoughts is not easy for one not
versed in esotericism and occult meditation, but
they ought to be grasped by the esoteric healer, for
it is on this entity, the planetary spirochaeta, that
we are working when healing the form. We can
recognize this syphilitic miasm wherever we see
breakdowns in structure, separatism, chaos,
factions and wars, whether in the human body, in
nations of humans, or in planetary events.
Tuberculosis, on the other hand, is more of a
mental type of illness, which was “rampant in
Atlantean times ... and generated principally in
Aryan times” (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 59),
gathered, as it were, from the astral world and
forced into the mental world, using the air as the
primary route of access. This forced rising in
consciousness resulted in a starvation of the astral
body of desires and feelings. The body of emotions
became suppressed. The Tibetan Master says the
tuberculosis planetary influence was “imposed by
the Great White Lodge as a penalty ... [forcing]
two issues and confronted the race with two
hitherto unrealized problems. The first was that
psychological attitudes and states of consciousness
can and do bring about physiological conditions,
these being both good and bad. Secondly, for the
first time the people recognized the phenomenon of
death” (p. 232). This problem or miasm makes
many people desire eternal life, and they often
have dreams of never dying. This is certainly not
uncommon in children, and, personally speaking, I
was very clearly aware as a child that I did not
want to die, and I looked with contempt on those
who were succumbing to death. This is a clear
indication of that primary miasm. You can
recognize this planetary dis-ease wherever you
hear references to living forever and “dicing with
death,” or where you encounter people wanting to
acquire more and more physical things, resulting in
possessiveness, spiritual inertia, even thievery and
crime. Cosmetics and especially cosmetic surgery
such as face-lifts are outward manifestations of
this miasm, expressing a person’s desire for youth
and endeavor to defy the ravage of time (p. 61).
This miasm is a mistaken use of the love force (for
more about the source of these primary fractors,
see Appendix A at the end of this chapter).
Notice how this links with Law II of Esoteric
Healing (see Chapter 2).
“Ancient error” “Tainted “Shares with all
streams” natural forms”
Illusion Glamor Maya
Mental Body Astral Body Physical/Etheric
Body
TB Cancer Syphilis
Sacral/Throat/Alta Solar Base/Head
Major Plexus/Heart/Ajna

Tabulation of the three planetary conditions

Let’s end this brief survey by making a
tabulation of these three primary planetary
conditions, a chart which can be useful to the
esoteric healer:

Clearing the Clearing the Clearing the

Tuberculosis Cancer Syphilitic Miasm
Miasm Miasm
1st Initiation 2nd initiation 3rd Initiation
Ray 2 Ray 1 Ray 3
Problem of the Problem of Problem of the
Aryan Race the Atlantean Lemurian Race
 Race
Desire for Eternal Desire of Desire for
Life/Possessiveness Doing/ Separation/Indulgence
Leadership
Mental Body Astral Body Physical Body
Connected to the Connected to Connected to the
Planetary Solar the Planetary Base Center
Plexus Center Planetary
Sacral Center
Complicated by Complicated Complicated by Maya
Illusion by Glamor
Healing: Healing: Healing: Syphilis
Tuberculosis Cancer Triangle: Sacral
Triangle: Throat Triangle*: Center**-Base
Center-Solar Plexus Solar Plexus Center-
Center- Center-Sacral Throat Center
Heart Center Center-Throat
Center
Concentration Meditation Building the
Antahkarana
The Beautiful The Good The True
Transference Transmutation Transformation
Ahriman (Devil) Asuras Lucifer (Satan)
(Tempter)
Sin Temptation Evil
Love Power Light
*Synonymous with the Triangle of Transmutation.
**Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, cf. p. 316.

It is of interest that the throat center is

implicated in all these planetary forms of healing.
This is due to the fact that the creative thread is
manufactured there, and the building of the
antahkarana leads to the fourth initiation and to the
healing of the planetary personality.
Jesus, the Anointed One, was put through three
major tests at the beginning of his ministry: to cast
himself from the pinnacle of the temple, to turn
stones into bread, and to kneel before the ruler of
the World (Satan, or Lucifer). Each of these
incidents or tests represent for us a confrontation
with one of the great entities of the human group
personality. Even in the original Greek of the New
Testament this is shown:
1. In Mark’s Gospel, the Greek original of the
English translation of “devil” is Satana. This
entity, also known as Lucifer, the fascist arch-ruler
of the earth planet, is humanity’s elementary
archetype of the physical body. The Christ was
tempted to kneel before this entity and was
promised “all the world will be yours,” a physical
glamor of life unending along with ownership of
the planet.
2. The next temptation, mentioned in
Matthew’s Gospel, is by the entity, called in the
Greek, Peirazon, the Tempter (the Asuras of the
Secret Doctrine). It was the lure to capture the
desire body within the forces of matter, by simply
turning stones into bread. The Tempter is the entity
of the astral body.
3. The last temptation, mentioned in the Luke
Gospel, was by the being called, in Greek,
Diabolos, the Devil (Ahriman). His effort was to
tempt the Christ to cast himself from the pinnacle
of the Temple to secure command over life’s
destiny (and thus kill the life of individual
aspiration), the entity and the illusion of the mind.
You can now see the link between the great
deed of Christ and the inherited planetary
influences affecting the very genes of the human
race.[34]
The first exoteric demonstration of the
“overcoming” of temptation, sin and evil, has been
performed by Jesus the Christ and revealed for us
in the New Testament Gospels. Here, outside the
secrecy of the Mystery Centers, this man undertook
the tests of initiation without the security of
hierophants. Jesus’ lower bodies were
transformed, the miasms of planetary inheritance,
which conditioned and held captive the true light
of the Monadic Self, merged and fused with their
higher counterparts (the spiritual Triad), and in that
instant (at the crucifixion or fourth initiation) two
events occurred following the destruction of the
soul, the causal body:
1. Planetary (Universal) salvation was achieved.
2. Personal salvation was made possible for
ordinary man.
This means that no longer was it necessary to
enter the sanctity of a Mystery School of Initiation
to reach occult enlightenment, that is, the
recognition of the Monadic Self, thereby attaining
liberation from this Cosmic Order (in a state of
Dis-ease or occult Imperfection) and the literal
reunion of the Matter of the Planet (which formed
the Enlightened One’s body) with its Original
Purity. This is what is meant by the clearing of the
miasms or planetary influences; it is the purpose of
esoteric healing; it is the way of every esoteric
student.

Appendix A: OUR COSMIC PURPOSE

PART I. THE ESOTERIC PURPOSE OF HEALING
The Esoteric Cause of Disease and Purpose for
Treatment
A Cosmic Perspective
It was said, “When the Avatar comes, He will
convey to humanity something for which we have
as yet no true name. It is neither love nor will as
we understand them. Only a phrase or several
words can convey something of the significance
and then only feebly. This phrase is the principle of
directed purpose. This Principle involves three
factors:
A. Understanding (intuitive and instinctual, but
intelligently interpreted) of the Plan as it can be
worked out in the immediate future.
B. Focused intention, based on the above and
emphasizing an aspect of the will, hitherto
undeveloped in man.
C. Capacity to direct energy (through
understanding and intent) towards a recognized
and desired end, overcoming all obstacles and
 destroying all that stands in the way ... a
destruction brought about by the greatly
strengthened life within the form” (Bailey, 1957,
p. 302). This destruction is not what we think.
Esoterically, this “greatly strengthened life
within the form” is the transformative power that
is seen as destruction by the personality eyes but
as restoration by the eyes of the spirit.
I would like to try to keep what I say simple
(Bailey, 1950b, p. 129). The thought of what is to
be written is very simple, but justifying it is the
not-so-simple part. The simple formula of thought
is as follows: There are many cosmic universes.
The one in which we find ourselves went through a
fault and collapsed. A whole range of “kingdoms”
came into this universe from another to return it to
its former state. The human kingdom is one such
kingdom helping in this process.[35] To elucidate
this thought, as stated above, can be undertaken via
the law of correspondence in any kingdom or
department of life. But for now, I want to try to
justify the title of esoteric healing, and approach
the subject from a different angle, a different
paradigm, a shift away from healing as method, to
why we want to heal—the reason we need to heal,
the urgency for healing, the real purpose of living
in the phenomenal world. We have so far presented
the methods of healing, now we want to focus on
the CAUSE.[36]
Esoteric means getting to the cause, and “The
spiritual man is he who having been both a man of
the world and an occult student has reached the
conclusion that behind all those causes with which
he has been hitherto engaged is a CAUSE; this CAUSAL
UNITY then becomes the goal of his search. This is
the mystery lying behind all the mysteries; this is
the secret of which all that has hitherto been known
and conceived is but the veil; this is the heart of the
Unknown which holds hid the purpose and the key
to all that IS” (Bailey, 1962, pp. 1237–38). Further
on the same page these pivotal words are said:
“Three times the cry goes out to all the Pilgrims
upon the Path of Life: ‘Know thyself’ is the first
great injunction.... ‘Know the Self’ comes next and
when that is achieved, man knows not only himself
but all selves; THE SOUL OF THE UNIVERSE is to him no
longer the sealed book of life but one with the
seven seals broken. Then when the man stands
adept, the cry goes forth ‘Know the ONE’ and the
words ring in the adepts’ ears: ‘Search for that
which is the responsible Cause, ... search for THAT
which the soul reveals’” (Bailey, 1962, p. 1238).
I want to try to reveal to you a part of the
mystery of evil (cf. Chapter 3) that primarily
concerns “the latent consciousness of matter, and
works under the Law of Economy. It concerns
primarily the Self-consciousness of the Logos in
his dense physical body, and his polarization
therein” (Bailey, 1962, p. 720). This involves
every grade of form (every kingdom and every
plane of this cosmic universe), until the point of
origin is achieved—it is the secret of cosmic
incarnation: “Through every grade of form, spirit
or life progresses, until the path of return has been
traversed and the point of origin achieved. This is
the meaning of evolution and here lies THE SECRET
OF THE COSMIC INCARNATION. Eventually spirit forces
itself from form, and attains liberation” (Bailey,
1961, p. 62). Form here means manifestation on
any level. Indeed, let’s look at the great Lord
Buddha’s teaching, and we need go no further than
the very first statement he made after having won
enlightenment. In his profound assessment of the
universe as found in the Four Noble Truths, he
says: “Existence in the phenomenal universe is
inseparable from suffering and sorrow.” OK, this
is true, this is our experience, we know all about
suffering in the world although we might add, we
don’t know much about it “in the universe”[37] as
Buddha mentions—this goes beyond human
sensation, and a hint here is given about something
deeper, something more than we usually think and
imagine.
But let us get back to a deeper cause of disease
and why we are here. H.P. Blavatsky says in her
epic book, The Secret Doctrine, “This universal
strife between good and bad spirits seems to be
only the reproduction of another more ancient and
more terrible strife, that, according to an ancient
myth, took place before the creation of the
universe, between the faithful and the rebellious
legions ... the ‘prologue to manifestation.’”[38] Note
the use of the word universal strife and before the
creation of the universe—the prologue to
manifestation. We are not interested here in
discussing cosmology or the history of the universe
and its amazing evolutionary development or
unfoldment (traced in my book, The Emergence of
the Planetary Heart [1994]). What we want to
reveal here is WHAT happened—as we have just
found out why it happened—and then we can
discover two things: our purpose for living on this
planet in this cosmic universe, and the method of
living.
So we see this amazing event. Let me try to
paraphrase the inner teaching. Let’s try to picture
it: Before the creation of the universe,[39] a Cosmic
Being, in a cosmic space in the wider universe,
who then mysteriously started to become chaotic;
the ancient universal laws of the Being were
abandoned; the rules of conduct, the interaction
between the entities in that Universe began to
conflict; the mechanism, the life force, the cosmic
harmony began to get mixed up, and “terrible
strife” occurred due to “rebellious legions”—we
can only speak in a kind of mythological language
—one day at a later initiation we will know what
really happened to this Universe and why it
happened. But in fact we know something of what
happened. A terrible collapse resulted, a
crumpling, a contracting paralysis, a “fall” that in
effect meant a kind of death, in reality a cosmic
coma, a vegetative state, very different from the
esoteric understanding of pralaya. This gigantic
Being of Universal dimensions fell, collapsed. A
most terrible and terrifying scenario. “A peculiar
condition of affairs was brought about through the
planetary failure” (Bailey, 1962, p. 781).
We can imagine an extraordinary meeting
being called of the Cosmic Beings who witnessed
this disastrous event. Something had to be done.
There was a call for a response. It was here within
the echelons of power, within the cosmic
dimensions of timelessness and spiritual being and
bliss, a dimension of subtlety very different to
what we can experience, that an Entity, a Cosmic
Being in totality voluntarily decided to go and
help. However, this help was not like we would do
when helping an injured brother or child: an
external “administering,” a detached “healing
hand,” or outward expression of sympathy and
compassion. This help required something much
more. It demanded a total abandonment of all that
was owned or achieved, a forsaking of all the
harmony and bliss of cosmic living, a complete
sacrifice of all. It was like moving house from one
where you had all you ever needed, where you
were perfectly happy, to taking a tent in the
harshest desert, or worse. This Being has become
known as the Lord of Sacrifice, also as the Lord of
Love. This Being is us. Us, true, but not just us as
we are now, but also all that exists from stones to
stars to spirits, from matter to man to monads to
mega-beings up to and including the One About
Whom Naught May Be Said. “[This] Lord ...
through meditation is carrying forward processes
which He instituted in His original, creative
meditation—back in the darkest night of time in
which he decided to create this planet of ours for
strictly redemptive purposes. The whole creation
is the result of His[40] directed and controlled
thought—a process of sustained thinking which
sweeps all the creative energies into evolutionary
and cyclic activity, in conformity to the pattern
which He eternally visualizes” (Bailey, 1962, pp.
222–23).
But at the beginning God, the Being who is us
as a whole universal Cosmic Entity, living and
moving in gigantic harmony and perfection, had to
enter into “matter,” the “Imperfect God,” the Fallen
Entity. Remember it wasn’t fallen into matter as we
know it now, hard and dense—it had to be carried
into “matter” from its high spiritual level so as to
be restored, salvaged. To do this a massive
program of differentiation was set in motion by the
incoming, salvaging Cosmic Being, with a time
plan of billions of trillions of years, symbolized by
the separation of the sexes in the Adam and Eve
story. This cosmological evolution has progressed
starting with the so-called first Solar System (the
building of the Matrix of the Universe). This is
veiled by H.P. Blavatsky in the word Akasa: “it is
the universal Soul, the Matrix of the Universe, the
‘Mysterium Magnum’ from which all that exists is
born by separation of differentiation. It is the cause
of existence; it fills all the infinite Space; is Space
itself.” It is the efforts of the seven Cosmic Rays to
form a substance which could eventually be
liberated and restored to its original status—which
is what is meant by the ending of Maya. “The will
and the breath, my brother, are occultly
synonymous terms. In this statement you have the
clue to the ending of Maya.... The entire science of
the breath is built around the use of the Sacred
Word, the OM” (Bailey, 1973, pp. 245, 254).
Our work then, as healers (and is not everyone
on this Path in one way or another?), is to be full of
joy as we journey towards the bliss of
enlightenment. “Therefore be full of joy, O pilgrim
on the Way towards enlightened Being, for gain
and loss are one; darkness and light eternally
reveal the True; love and desire eternally invoke
the Life. Naught disappears but pain. Nothing
remains but bliss” (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 2, pp. 33–
34). This “bliss” is the one thing we have brought
with us as Eternal Monadic Beings of Light—this
Bliss is our Life: “Sacrifice is, technically
speaking, the achievement of a state of bliss and of
ecstasy because it is the realization of another
divine aspect, hidden hitherto by both the soul and
the personality. It is understanding and recognition
of the will-to-good which made creation possible
and inevitable and which was the true cause of
manifestation” (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 5, p. 492).
Please note that it was our sacrifice which made
creation possible and which was the true cause of
manifestation. Amazing, isn’t it?, that the Tibetan
Master Djwhal Khul, throughout his books, never
mentions, elaborates, or deepens our understanding
of these fundamental esoteric causes, the purpose
for the beginning, yet we can find scattered
specific references to the fact. There is only one
reference in the New Testament about this (by
Paul) whereby we can extract an esoteric
connection to this original cause: “I beseech you
therefore, brethren, by the mercies of God, that ye
present your bodies a living sacrifice, holy,
acceptable unto God, which is your reasonable
service” (Romans 12: 1). Ponder these words in
the light of what I have said; they hold revelations
for the sincere seeker. And it’s interesting to note
what DK says in the book, Esoteric Healing, that
we must heal with the “life aspect” and not with
the “consciousness aspect.” This is because the
life aspect is the “jewel” at the center of all things,
from atoms to cells to centers to systems. In
healing, if we work into the life or from the life
aspect, the consciousness “petals” automatically
respond and so healing is effected (more in
Chapter Five, What is an etheric center?—the
seven glands are the replica of the universe).
We were talking about the Beings who have
incarnated into Matter, ourselves included, to
salvage the Imperfect God, and work towards
making this planet Sacred as our service part in
this gigantic process or Plan of salvation and
redemption of this Universe. We have been taking
Matter into ourselves ever since the beginning of
our entry into time and creation—by so doing we
imbue it with Light; it is this substance of our
original, untainted Life that will bring about
restoration of the Cosmic Plan for this Being—
echoed as “Restore the Plan on Earth.”
Djwhal Khul speaks of a “Way of Release” in
which “all drops from our hands; everything is
taken away, and detachment from the world of
phenomenal life and of individuality is inevitably
forced upon us. We are treading the Way of
Loneliness, and must learn eventually that we are
essentially neither ego nor non-ego” (Bailey,
1951–70, v. 2, pp. 33–34). And this is true, we are
neither ego nor non-ego because all that we are, all
our bodies or vehicles, are from the Entity we have
come to save—what we are is LIFE itself, nothing
else.
Allow me to quote again from H.P. Blavatsky,
“in occult metaphysics there are, properly
speaking, two ‘ONES’—the one on the unreachable
plane of Absoluteness and Infinity, on which no
speculation is possible, and the Second ‘One’ on
the plane of Emanations. The former can neither
emanate nor be divided, as it is eternal, absolute,
and immutable. The Second, being, so to speak, the
reflection of the first One (for it is the Logos ... in
the Universe of Illusion), can do all this. It
emanates from itself ... the seven Rays or Dhyan-
Chohans; in other words, the Homogeneous
becomes the Heterogeneous, the ‘Protyle’
differentiates into the Elements, i.e. the (saving)
Life takes on or identifies with the ‘many’ as the
differentiating ‘fractors’ of the fallen Universal
Being and evolves with the form until restoration
(zero point) is achieved. But these, unless they
return into their primal Element, can never cross
beyond the Laya, or zero-point.... Those who
‘descend and ascend’—the incarnating Monads,
and men striving towards purification and
‘ascending, but still not having quite reached the
goal’—may cross the ‘circle of the Pass-Not,’ only
on the day ‘Be-With-Us’; that day when man,
freeing himself from the trammels of ignorance,
and recognizing fully the non-separateness of the
Ego within his personality—erroneously regarded
as his own—from the UNIVERSAL EGO ... merges
thereby into the One Essence to become not only
one ‘with us’ (the manifested universal lives which
are ‘ONE’ LIFE), but that very LIFE ITSELF”
(Blavatsky, 1977). Another pivotal reference from
The Secret Doctrine. Please let me try to explain.
So what are we doing in Healing? What are
we really doing? Before I answer your question
may I just say this. That all healing is purificatory
but only because it is the substance itself that has
been contaminated. This is the misunderstood
esoteric tenet which the church calls “sin”; true,
we are born in sin, not ours but that of the Cosmic
Universal Being who “fell”—it is not our fault and
nothing to do with us in reality. Its substance has
been taken on by us (we have evolved within its
substance, we are enduring the pain and suffering
of compounded, restricted, matter, the fallen form
of this failed Cosmic Entity); we are giving our life
daily to this substance to regenerate it and bring it
back to its original state—it is during this process
of transformation and transmutation that diseases
occur requiring special healing methods to safely
defuse their toxicity, their stickiness, their “evil”
quality (their fallen chaotic pattern).
In the very first law of healing it states that “all
disease is the result of inhibited soul LIFE and this
is true of all forms in all kingdoms” (Bailey,
1951–70, v. 4, p. 532, my emphasis). So soul life
or monadic being or the Extra-Dimensional Light
of who we really are, is being inhibited,
fragmented, caused to frictionize—these I call
fractors (see Commentary, #8 later in this chapter)
—everything in our own multi-leveled
consciousness that causes deviation, preventing
our experience of our own continuous
Beginningless Enlightenment. Only higher mystics
and babies experience this oceanic quality. Babies,
says one Tibetan Master, are reflections of
Enlightenment, “... only mystics and very young
children experience in this oceanic manner. Freud
also uses the term ‘oceanic experience’ to describe
the way in which young children do not divide
themselves from their surroundings. Babies are
reflections of Enlightenment. From the Tantric
viewpoint, every experience is dynamically linked
to an aspect of Liberated Energy—of
Enlightenment. This oceanic experience is
distorted into various perverse variants of group
consciousness such as nationalism, racism, elitism
and sectarianism, but we always retain some
means of access to oceanic experience, although
society encourages individuation. The nature of the
fight between individuation and oceanic
experience manifests as our attachment to distorted
reflections of our own Enlightenment.” However,
“The Experience of Enlightenment goes beyond
both oceanic and individuated experience, and
enters into Limitlessness in which such distinctions
are meaningless.... The Experience of
Enlightenment transcends both.... The Intrinsic
Spaciousness of our Being is continuously
reminding us of our Enlightenment” (Nga-kpa
Chögyam, 1988, pp. 151–52).
This then is the true work of healing, indeed of
living. Healing is a practical science and art.
There are many approaches but all with the same
purpose and end: to help or serve others to
transmute their fractors, the deviant crystals of
distorted matter, so that the matter itself on
whatever plane of our cosmic physical plane or
higher can receive correct elimination to effect
right restoration and salvation of matter, the many
vehicles of the fallen Cosmic Universal Being.
“The right use of physical energy by the initiate
gives him the ‘freedom’ of the cosmic physical
plane. The right use of astral energy gives him
power on the cosmic astral, and the correct use of
mental energy gives him entrance on the cosmic
mental” (Bailey, 1979, p. 362). The result is
initiation, revelation, enlightenment, leading to,
“...‘the whole creation groaneth and travaileth
together in pain until now, waiting for the
manifestation of the Sons of God.’ St. Paul is there
referring to planetary purpose and to the
determined insistence of the Sons of God that
eventually—as they bring about the redemption of
substance, of matter and form, and thus prove the
possibility of that redemption through their (our)
own transfigured personalities—their (our) reward
should be eventual manifestation as expressions of
divinity. For this purpose and with this goal in
view, the first of us who attained enlightenment
(called by us Masters and Avatars), instituted the
great evolutionary process of initiation, thus
producing a continuity of revelation and of
enlightenment. In reality, the period of time at
which the final initiation is undergone is simply a
climaxing, triumphant demonstration of the
realization and purpose of all past experiences; it
is fulfillment (by the One Initiator) of the first
promise ever made to the ‘sons of mind’ which
marks the time when they originally started their
redemptive work: it is this merging stage when the
bodies are transmuted by the individual’s LIFE,
that ‘a sudden blazing forth of the individual glory
and its merging at initiation with the glory of the
whole [becomes] the true ‘promised land’”
(Bailey, 1944, v. 2, pp. 385–86). This “true
promised land” is the rod of healing, the sine qua
non that sends us back to our original home, an
escape back into reality—our bridges are burned,
we have completed our work, freedom has been
earned.
This then is the real purpose of healing. The
methods of healing are specific and powerful—
some are simple to do, others are complex. Some
are for curing disease, others are for raising
consciousness and instantly transmuting fractors of
illusion, glamor, and maya into an experience of
the Self as THAT. All healing work is designed to
evoke change, alignment, and acceptance leading
to the gradual increase of the sparkling through of
our Beginningless Enlightened Nature and an
understanding of the Vastness of what we really
are.
PART II. STANZAS AND COMMENTARY:
THE INNER PURPOSE OF HEALING
As a kind of glossary, and as an aid to fuller
understanding and a deepening consciousness of
this perspective of the INNER OR ESOTERIC PURPOSE,
the revelation or theory will be systematized
simply, as stanzas, and then a tentative commentary
will be made for students so as to lead thought into
an amplification. The commentary will involve
viewing the question from different angles;
something more is visible with each repetition.
The simple inscriptions can act as a password for
group discussion, thoughtful reflection and
meditation, and deep still contemplation.
A. Stanzas
1. This Cosmic Universe was perfect. It lost its
perfection due to a cosmic disaster.
2. All that exists in this Cosmic Universe (CU) is
an imposition from another Cosmic Universe.
3. There are many Cosmic Universes in this
system called Dimensional Systemic Reality
(DSR), the full name for this is the Ring-Pass-
Not of a Dimensional Systemic Reality. There
are many DSRs but we have absolutely no
access to them in our present position/condition.
4. Entry into this CU involved total cosmic
sacrifice by another CU within DSR.
5. Without correction of the corrupted CU, DSR
could possibly be corrupted.
6. The cosmic disaster caused such total collapse
of the underlying structure that repair required a
total abandonment of previous achievement by
one CU, and entry into such elementary life
forms by the sacrificing CU, that it could be
called the beginning of creation.
7. At the time of sacrifice the event of creation
occurred and with it the beginning of evolution.
8. All that remained of the sacrifice by the
kingdoms coming into the collapsed CU is their
Life Principle. All else is tainted by the CU’s
misshapen patterns. These are known as
 Fractors.
9. This Life Principle will enable an escape or
return back to the original CU.
10. All that exists in this CU is the result of the
activities of the saving CU.
11. The saving CU is so totally identified with the
collapsed, chaotic CU that many or most in this
CU believe they belong here. This refers to all
the kingdoms to be found here—from atoms to
the great beings whose bodies are the galaxies of
this CU.
12. It has taken literally trillions of years for this
CU to have reached this stage of development on
the way to its restoration.
13. The purpose of the coming of the saving CU to
the CU to be saved is to restore it to its former
glory and so protect the DSR of which we are all
a part.
14. All that exists in this CU are brothers in the
saving CU. We came together and we work with
the same common aim.
15. To save/heal this CU is enormously complex. It
 requires the Life Principle to be an impregnating
force within the matter or substance of the whole
of this CU.
16. The first step was just to “get into” this CU, the
nature of which is so totally different from that of
the saving CU.
17. The second step is to “live out a life” within
the CU.
18. The third step is to actively promote advanced
change within substance/consciousness. This is
the specific work of advanced or esoteric
healing.
19. The fourth step is to live within that pure state
of LIFE without being deflected into the fractors
of that life.
20. Completion of the work for this CU is for the
life of the saving/healing CU to return back to its
original home. This can only be achieved when
the fourth step is continuous in the life and on all
levels of being within the consciousness of this
CU.
B. Commentary
1. This Cosmic Universe was perfect. It lost its
perfection due to a cosmic disaster.
2. All that exists in this Cosmic Universe (CU) is
an imposition from another Cosmic Universe.
3. There are many Cosmic Universes in this
system called Dimensional Systemic Reality
(DSR), the full name for this is the Ring-Pass-
Not of a DSR. There are many DSRs but we
have absolutely no access to them in our
present position/condition.
4. Entry into this CU involved total cosmic
sacrifice by another CU within DSR.
5. Without correction of the corrupted CU, DSR
could possibly be corrupted.
In the clearest and briefest way possible an
explanation will be offered on the first five of the
esoteric stanzas, as they are best handled together.
In the cosmic sphere in which the many
Cosmic Universes (CUs) live, the integrity and
activity is full. It cannot be described adequately in
words due to the state of existence we are in at this
time. All that needs to be known is that a CU is
complete in itself, is in harmony and has a purpose
for its existence. Each CU is totally different to any
other. Each CU exists in a dimension that is
inaccessible to any other.
So what happened to this CU in which we find
ourselves and in which we see such disharmony
and imperfection? The details are not available to
us at this time, but what we can convey will be
laid out openly. This CU was perfect in every
respect. We know it was (is) a dualistic system
where the two elements are the ramifications for
their own integrity. For example, the light depends
on its lightness being revealed due to the darkness;
the darkness could not be experienced as such
were there not light. To illustrate what happened
which led to this chaos or collapse or paralysis of
the CU, we can continue with the example of the
light and dark, rather like the ancient symbol of the
yin and yang, where the yin is dark and the yang is
light like a “69.”
At some point of its eternal life (and we have
an idea this must have been something in the order
of 15 billion of our years ago [Hawking, 2001, p.
169], the reason for this will be made clear later),
the support structure of dark and light began to
break down and the dark began to infiltrate into the
light and vice versa. We cannot reveal why this
occurred, as it is not known and not understood
unless you have reached a certain high level of
realization (and you certainly would not be on this
plane with such knowledge!). All that has been
told us is that there was a kind of “rebellion,”
which is obvious and tells us nothing! But what is
clear and true is that something happened which
led to a complete deterioration of the former
balance and stability, resulting in a kind of coma:
life was preserved but it was as if death had come.
Remember, all this occurred on a very high plane
of expression and nothing like we think at this time
in the material sphere.
So we have the scenario. A Cosmic Universe
within this system (called a Dimensional Systemic
Reality [DSR]) in a state of utter confusion and
inoperative hopelessness throughout its entire
structure of Cosmic Being, from highest to lowest,
and completely unable to get out of its desperate
imbroglio. Picture the scene. It is rather like a
bowl of fish containing say 100 small fish and one
suddenly and almost inexplicably loses all
capacity to swim; it lives and can just feed to stay
alive, but it sinks to the bottom of the bowl
incapacitated. The other fish can do nothing to
revive it or save it. That’s where the analogy ends.
What does happen in this cosmic “fish bowl” or
DSR, we can rightly suppose, is that an emergency
extraordinary cosmic conference is held at the
highest level between all the CUs of the DSR.
Nothing like this has ever happened in the eternal
existence of the DSR. Something must be done.
What can be done? Can something be actioned? If
so, how and at what risk? It was also clear that
such corruption in the “pool” of the DSR might
lead to further “rebellion,” or contamination, or
corruption. Immediate action was required to
avoid this possibility, quite apart from the fact that
one of their “brothers” was crippled and needed
help. After much deliberation and deep
consultation it was seen that there was only one
thing that could be done to save and restore this
“comatose” CU. It meant that one of the DSR’s
CUs would have to sacrifice itself, or all it was, so
as to enter the fallen CU with such complete
identification that restoration of its energies,
organization, structures and patterns of being could
gradually be regained. This sacrifice was very
real. Each CU is totally different to any other. Each
lived in a different dimension and the structure was
completely different to any other CU. Were this not
so it would have been much easier, rather like one
human being, a physician, acting on behalf of a sick
brother, but still keeping himself separate. This is
not so in the cosmic world of CUs. The difference
was even greater than, say, a human being is to a
praying mantis. To restore this being the sacrificing
CU would have to forgo all that it was and actually
become the other CU. Sacrifice had to be total
abandonment. However, to perform the great
healing, this total denial of itself also meant that its
life would be maintained outside, external to this
CU, i.e., in the saving CU. The key to its being, the
central essence of its identity must remain.
However, this was not a lifeline for those of the
sacrificing CU. They couldn’t just suddenly and at
any time simply pull the rip cord if things weren’t
going right. No. The risk and danger was that the
life of the incoming CU could actually be so
identified with the paralyzed CU that it too could
be lost. The purpose of this was that the saving
CU, by so sacrificing itself totally to the collapsed
CU, and by re-seeking its own life and true essence
of being, it would do two things at the same time:
first, it would restore the collapsed one to life and
health, and second, it would maintain its own life
and being and so enable it to return to its original
home in its own space and dimension. This was the
challenge. It is still not known whether it will be
successful. It is still in the process of working.
Hence we can to some extent understand the
esoteric stanza: All that exists in this Cosmic
Universe (CU) is an imposition from another
Cosmic Universe; and explains the fourth step as
found in stanza 19.
There is a truth in the understanding that this is
the esoteric explanation of that statement found in
the Bible which says, “In the beginning was the
Word, and the Word was with God, and the Word
was God. He was with God in the beginning.
Through him all things were made, without him
nothing was made that has been made. In him was
life, and that life was the light (of men). The light
shines in the darkness, but the darkness has not
understood it.” Briefly, let it be recapitulated:
“In the beginning was the Word”—this is the
saving, sacrificing CU.
“and the Word was with God”—this is the
saving CU in the DSR.
“and the Word was God”—all CUs are unique
in themselves and are truly Enlightened, God.
“He was with God in the beginning”—a
reemphasis that a CU is the Cosmic Substance and
is one with the DSR.
 “Through him all things were made; without
him nothing was made that has been made”—here
we have the clear statement that, as a result of the
incoming CU to the collapsed CU, all things in this
CU have been made or generated or created (by the
saving CU, as will be explained in the next
esoteric stanzas).
“In him was life, and that life was the light of
men”—LIFE is the special quality of being which
the saving CU has brought into this ailing CU, and
it is the same life quality as originally held in the
saving CU before it sacrificed itself into this
paralyzed CU that is also in human beings (and all
life forms). The distinction made that the “life was
the light of men” illustrated the purposes and
aspiration of men (i.e., all beings), that the purpose
is to seek the light, i.e., Enlightenment.
“The light shines in the darkness, but the
darkness has not understood it”—the new CU’s
light is now in the substance (darkness) of the
collapsed CU; it will never understand it, just as
the saving CU’s life and light will never totally
comprehend the “darkness” or essential being of
the CU which it has come to restore. (This piece of
information is liable of misinterpretation.) The
reader who is interested in how this links with
Jesus the Christ is asked to refer to the author’s
book, The Emergence of the Planetary Heart.
Let us end this part of the commentary with the
following New Testament verses for consideration
as they can be helpful to some. I haven’t the space
to offer an interpretation, but in the light of the
information given, these quotations will reveal
new perspectives; they hold hidden secrets:
John 3:16. For God [our DSR] so loved the
world [the CU to be saved], that he gave his only
begotten Son [our CU], that whosoever believeth
in him should not perish, but have everlasting life.
Mark 4:22. For there is nothing hid, which
shall not be manifested; neither was any thing kept
secret, but that it should come abroad.
1 John 4:9. In this was manifested the love of
God [our DSR] toward us [our CU in this fallen
CU], because that God [our DSR] sent his only
begotten Son [our CU] into the world [this fallen
CU], that we might live through him. (We must hold
fast to our CU’s LIFE [the Son] while we life in
this CU [the world].)
2 Timothy 1:9. Who hath saved us [this CU],
and called us with an holy calling, not according to
our works, but according to his own purpose and
grace [our CU], which was given us in Christ Jesus
before the world began [our CU].
1 John 3:8. He that committeth sin is of the
devil; for the devil [this fallen CU] sinneth from
the beginning. For this purpose the Son of God [our
saving CU] was manifested, that he might destroy
the works of the devil [fractors of this fallen CU].

We now turn to the next two stanzas.

6. The cosmic disaster caused such total
collapse of the underlying structure that repair
required a total abandonment of previous
achievement by one CU, and entry into such
elementary life forms by the sacrificing CU,
that it could be called the beginning of
 creation.
7. At the time of sacrifice the event of creation
occurred and with it the beginning of evolution.
[Evolution means a beginning as a most
elementary form and ending in a perfected state
where progress in time is no longer of any use.]
The importance of these two stanzas is the link
they make with two considerations regarding the
condition at the beginning of time and that of its
progress—the one of creation and the other of
evolution. And with one simple statement the two
problems are resolved. After the collapse of the
CU the saving CU made a sacrificial entry into the
collapsed CU’s space and dimension. At this point
a new “creation” began, considered to be some 3.5
billion years ago by biologists (I refer to the
estimated beginning of physical life on our planet,
but manifestation on the physical plane was some
15 billion years ago). Esoterically this is a
misinterpretation due to a certain negligence or
ignorance. The time is correct in as much as it
addresses manifestation on this level or plane of
expression—the physical. But it is totally incorrect
to think that the beginning of the salvation process
began just 15 billion years ago. No! The process of
salvation began on the spiritual level the “fall”
originated on. It has taken billions of eons to get it
to this juncture on the physical plane. This is the
juncture that took place 15 billion years ago (cf.
Hawking, p. 266).
To reiterate the beginning of creation has not
been as simple as just creating the cell and coccoid
cyanobacteria (cf. footnote #7) which has led to
the formation of homo erectus. Entry into this CU
took place billions of eons ago, and this was the
real beginning of time (for time by esoteric
definition is really the first touch of the saving CU
with the one who was to be saved) and gradually
the “descent” of this to the present plane,
whereupon the so-called “Big Bang.” The CU into
which the saving CU entered was, as can be
imagined, multi-planar, meaning a being with many
planes to its expression. At the collapse, all the
planes fell into disarray. As has been stated
earlier, this CU is based on a dualistic system. At
the collapse, the whole system went awry. The
process of correcting this mishap was not so much
a putting in of hands and replacing the circuit-
board. It was much more complex than that. The
entering CU had to become the circuitry, had to
become the force of life that ran the circuitry, had
to become the picture it produced, had to become
the effects it caused—had to become all that it was
not, so that it could become what it originally was.
The process is in motion now. All that we can
see and know on earth, on other planets, in the sun,
the stars, the constellations, the galaxies and the
many levels or planes of its expression are the
several restoration phases that are taking place at
this very moment. All the human beings, animals,
birds, insects, reptiles, plant life, rocks and all,
including elemental beings, angelic beings, and
other nonphysical beings from the highest to the
lowest, all can be seen to be the incoming, saving,
CU. We are all brothers! We were that saving CU!
We have all got an important part to play in this
saving process. We all depend on each other for its
ultimate success. Success is not guaranteed, as DK
frequently emphasized. This is because there are
hosts of inimical beings and forces messed up and
interacting falsely with each other—the interacting
fractors, the so-called latent seeds of evil (cf.
Chapter 3). It is our task to put them right whether
we are a rock in the desert, a flower on a remote
hill, a bird in the Andes, an animal in a field, a
human in Barbados, an angel in the fifth sphere, a
Kumara or Bodhisattva—we all have a place, and
we all have a function and purpose in this dramatic
saving act. Devils and the black forces are as much
an important part in this process as are the white
forces. Our work is to put them in the right place
so that harmony abounds and progress and joy
result, and thus we restore the plan on earth and
seal the door where evil dwelt.
What happened for evolution to have reached
our present manifested state is that our CU entered
the fallen CU on all its fallen levels, but in order
for it to begin to regain its former glory, the
process had to be reduced to a common
denominator so that evolutionary development
could then be instituted. On all the spheres this
took place. The various writings on cosmology
have not been accurate in the wider sense. They
have just clarified what had to be done to achieve
physical preparation—the descent of matter, the
involutionary activities of all the kingdoms, and so
on, without chronicling the other planar activities.
But be that as it may, the descriptions of all this
would have been well nigh impossible, and what
we have in cosmological understanding is
extremely sketchy. While acceptable for general
purposes, we do need to remember that this is just
a pinch of what really happened.
At the moment of entry by our CU into the
fallen CU, time and creation and evolution all
began. It will all end, providing it is successful,
when we have given it all back and we depart via
the “Way of Final Return” to our own Home. When
will this be? As soon as it is achieved! The speed
or time taken can be hastened by dedicated work,
or it can be hindered and slowed down by loss of
focus and misinterpretation and wrongful
identification. This can occur at any time of the day
and night, called “being fractored.” That is,
identifying with thoughts, feelings, or acting in such
a way that is not in line with or losing the
awareness and Presence of one’s true inner
purpose—the Life Purpose of our original
intention. These fractors can be tiny and huge. They
can be known or unknown. They affect all who
work on all planes. Fractors are the means of
developing and progressing evolutionary change
and achievement—because they inform us of
choices: the right (rather than the wrong). They are
the other side of the dualistic aspect of this CU.
Any recognition and overcoming of fractors is a
significant step in the re-patterning of this CU—
another light comes on in the “rewiring” of this
burnt-out mega-cosmic Being. Fractors are the
memory of the fall; a loop that prevents liberation,
right relations, the sense of beauty, and the will to
good (love). Fractors are the latent seeds of evil
(see Chapter 3) in every atom and in every level of
the CU—these latent seeds are transformed to
normal, right function by healing and PASE (cf.
Commentary, #18). The fractors themselves
“enjoy” being overcome, because to them they can
then enter their own world, as much as the light
forces which overcame the fractor enters the light-
world of freedom. It is a dual bonus each time. We
do it in our own lives from minute to minute,
indeed from second to second. It hinges on our
WILL—the blissful sacrifice to our Cosmic Light
Self, supported by our love and intelligence. This
is the way of evolution, transformation, revelation
and enlightenment.

8. All that remained of this sacrifice by the

kingdoms coming into the collapsed CU is their
Life Principle. All else is tainted by this CU’s
misshapen patterns. These are known as
Fractors.
We need to realize that we abandoned all that
we were in our CU to enter into the fallen
“calling” CU. That too was imperative. All we
have is our Life Principle. We were stripped of all
other achievements. They were unnecessary to us
in this work. We came as Life to give life. Our
work therefore is to maintain connection with this
Life, and not to betray it in the search of pleasure
(fractors), whatever that may mean in your
individual understanding. This refers to all beings
in our CU, whether they came down before us and
are now so-called Deities, or after us and are
rocks, plants, and animals. Our work is to be here,
to sojourn here without expectations,
unconditioned by the events of our long and
extended past progress, de-fractoring our lives and
so allowing the lights to be turned on. We only
have ourselves to work on; that is our assignment
and that is enough. This goes for all who are in our
CU.

9. This Life Principle (LP) will enable an escape

or return back to the original CU.
As has been explained above, the purpose for
our work in this CU is to restore it to its original
expression. It involves the whole of our CU, and
working on multi-levels of this CU, we are moving
forward with great strides. The initial work has
taken a long time due to its tediously intricate
nature of declassifying the forces with which we
were to work. We came into this CU without the
foggiest idea of what to do! We know nothing about
this CU. Its structure and activities are totally
different to ours. Its state, or dimension, is totally
different to ours. Everything, in a word, was
unknown to us and dissimilar to our CU. What was
worse, or more difficult, it was in chaos,
collapsed, comatose, but still alive. Life, of
course, cannot be killed or done away with; it
simply goes into a different expression. What
would have happened if our CU did not come to
the rescue? Would the fallen CU eventually have
dug itself out of its own grave? The answer is
hypothetical, but it is clear that the decision to set
out to rescue the languishing CU was not a small
one, and that had some other course of action been
implemented that would have been the right thing
to do, we must suppose.
We have nothing but our original Life Principle
(LP) to keep us from falling among the thieves,
liars, murderers, and muggers. Nothing in this CU
belongs to us or can be taken with us back home to
our CU when the time comes. The life in our CU
far outweighs the life in this CU simply because
we belong there and wouldn’t wish to be anywhere
else. An ice cream here tastes like the cream of
nectar at home in our CU! There are actually no
comparisons to be drawn. It is just so totally
different, we cannot even think of a simile to
describe an experience; even memory of our CU
has gone. This is because when we originally came
to this CU, we had to arrive stripped of all we
were so that we could work within this CU simply
as Beings of Life. Time and time again we return to
earth—we are talking about human beings now—
and all our LPs are brought to influence and change
and transform substance—the matter of our bodies
—on all levels of our being. We reincarnate and
gather experiences, and so we live. The
importance of who we are, where we are, who we
meet, what we do, what we own, is of no value at
all save to bring us through our fractors to the
constant awareness of our LP. Once the LP is held
in constant awareness by any one being, we enter a
higher level of help. As this area is filled and
strengthened, the work of progress will
correspondingly be empowered and evolution will
hasten much more quickly. Once the LP is held in
constant awareness by all our CU, we will leave to
return to our own CU. It is like a race to get on a
boat, where the more “people” who manage to get
on, the lighter it becomes, and the more easily it
makes it for others to board, and the sooner it will
depart.

10. All that exists in this CU is the result of the

activities of the saving CU.
Everything that is happening in this CU, the
galaxies moving and spiralling, the constellations,
the stars and planets and suns; everything on the
earth planet, all the human activities, animal
movements, plants growing, crystals, metals and
soils and rocks, all that is happening, all that these
things are, is the result of the work of our CU as it
reprograms, re-patterns, transforms, and restores
the life of the ailing CU. The more we do, the more
we work, the more we think, the more we feel
within our Life Principle (LP), the more the
progress towards fulfillment is achieved. We are
all brethren. All the kingdoms of this planet and all
the beings in the cosmos are of the same CU, as
one giant family. It is a family affair. A family
business. We have the family’s interest at heart. As
we work for the family, we improve ourselves and
so the whole is helped.

11. The saving CU is so totally identified with

the collapsed, chaotic CU that many or most in
this CU believe they belong here. This refers to
all the kingdoms to be found here—from atoms
to the great beings whose bodies are the
galaxies of this CU.
 The problem facing our CU as we work within
this fallen CU is that we have been here so long
that we are beginning to believe that we belong
here, that what we see is what we are, and that
what we see belongs to us. This can be a problem
on any level from the great to the small. It is not
without reason that this should be so. After all, we
came into this CU having left all and everything
behind. We entered this CU with nothing but our LP
(Life Principle, or Principle of Life). And in order
to enter completely we had to become the CU. This
means that we had to enter the actual mechanics of
the Cosmic Universe in its fallen, chaotic state of
existence; it means that we had to bow down to the
totally different structure of this CU, totally
different interaction and purpose of this CU. To do
this we had to mutate and develop according to the
opportunities around us. It was a spiritual
happening. This means that this took place on a
higher level of expression at first, gradually
incarnating downward into manifestation on the
physical level. This took a very long time. But
once it was on the physical level, the diversity had
been accomplished and the development of
structure and foundation (a good solid form) was
secured for the next phase of the work of salvation.
In a way, a circle had to be drawn: first the
downward, in-drawing activity to stabilize the
form, then the gradual elevation of the form, so that
it became once more what it was before. In other
words, the entry into this CU was on all levels, but
in a higher dimension, and to secure its patterns in
substance there had to be a period of materializing
and manifesting; only then could the third and
fourth phases be started. The phases are as
follows:
a. Entry into the fallen structure of the CU.
b. Identifying with the structure and patterns of the
CU by bringing it down into matter on the
physical plane.
c. The gradual elevating of the form back into the
higher expressions of its being.
d. Once complete, the leaving of this CU to its
own life and livelihood.
 The third phase is where we are in the work of
salvation of this CU. It is the phase which entails
great determination and moral endeavor, whether a
tree, a man, or a god. The reason for this is that
there can be too much identification with the form
of this CU. Remember all that is seen is ourselves,
our own CU encapsulated in the forms of this CU.
This is a most important recognition. All who we
see, be it sea, sky, stone, herb, flower, bush,
mushroom, dog, cat, horse, elephant, fish, insect,
bird, reptile, human being, angel forms, elemental
forms, masters, gods, all and everything is of our
own CU. They are our brethren. They are
representing the forms of this CU for its own
salvation. That is their sacrifice be it a wombat,
whale, worm, witch-hazel, or woman. Of course it
is no problem at this point in time. And mostly
people and animals, plants and minerals are rightly
identifying with their own ways: one into matter as
one with themself, and the other into self as
separate from matter. It has taken literally trillions
of years for this CU to have reached this stage of
development on the way to its restoration.
As we have seen, all is timeless and eternal.
Time and finitude began at the moment, the Flash,
the original “big bang,” when our CU entered the
fallen CU.[41] We therefore can experience the
duality of time and timelessness, the form and the
spirit. The former is of this CU in its fallen state;
the latter is of the original Life which we know is
Enlightenment. Progress in the restoration of the
patterns of the fallen CU have gone on ever since
the Flash entry. What we see in ourselves, and the
planet, and the cosmos, with all its achievements,
adaptations, troubles, disasters, mistakes, and
marvels is where we have got, where we have
evolved to, where the re-patterning has reached.
How long this has really been in terms of years is
impossible to say. To say a million years is hard
enough to conceive, to say a billion years
impossible, to say trillions of years is meaningless
to the intellect. Everything is working towards
restoration, no matter what is happening. This is
sometimes difficult to understand. If we don’t
understand, and also if we do, we can hold no
judgment over what is happening and why.
Everything is part of the great unwinding. In the
Eternal Now whatever is being said, whatever is
being done, thought, caused, is exactly right. The
expelling, the elimination, the disease and healing
process may look to the unenlightened eye to be
recipes for disaster. There may appear some
paradoxes, but it is just the lower mind, the
unenlightened matter of self, that cannot see or
reconcile. The course or curse we have taken
could well have developed in a different way.
How the international borders came to be, how
capitalism, communism, and totalitarianism came
to be, how the various religious faiths came to be,
how business came to be, how the innumerable
artifacts of our world have come to be, etc., and all
the results thereof, is entirely based on
conditioning factors and the interacting fractors. It
could have been very different—either better or
worse. The salvaging efforts of many individuals
down the centuries have endeavored to steer us
clear of cliff-top danger. And still we kill, maim,
rape, torture, hurt our brethren—be this in our own
kingdom or in other kingdoms. History is truly
written in blood. All due to mis-identification.
The purpose of the coming of the saving CU to
the CU to be saved is to restore it to its former
glory and so protect the DSR of which we are all a
part. Significantly, the work that we are doing, that
is being done by all kingdoms throughout this
Cosmic Being, can, and eventually will be seen to
be an act of continuous bliss, of supreme beauty. It
is only drudge and hell if we allow the fractors
with which we are dealing in ourselves to get the
better of us. This experience is of the Great
Illusion, Maya. Once this glamor is dismantled, we
enter the Pathless Path which restores the few
grains of matter to their former glory; at which time
we also achieve Illumination. As each Life within
substance (in incarnation), be it human, hornet,
heavenly hosts, hedge in a field, or heliocentric
organism in the outer limits of cosmos, or
whoever, achieves this non-dualistic realization of
Oneness as Self, so the changes required
throughout this CU will be gained. When all have
done their bit, having transformed matter by their
own transformed consciousness, or in other words,
their recognition of their own Absoluteness and
Allness, a Vast Knowing, identified not with this
CU but with its own Self, as the saving CU, not as
something other, but as SELF, then the restoration is
complete. Then Lucifer, this CU, is set back on its
own two feet, and it can then begin to function as it
did before, with everything working, in their
rightful place. Then the “big bang” will flash
again, like an implosion, a coming into itself, and
in an instant the saving CU leaves. Time then is
not. Dualism is ended. The work is completed. The
purpose is achieved.

14. All that exists in this CU are brothers in the

saving CU. We came together and we work with
the same common aim.
All that is sensed, everything that is in the
realm of the sensory, can be seen to be the
workings of the Brothers of Light. Everything on
earth, in the planetary system, in the constellations,
and cosmoses, are workers from our CU.
Incredibly, at first thought, everything that exists is
of our CU. We might even put it more esoterically:
everything is the SELF, you, me, it. THAT. This even
includes our matter, form-selves. The duality is
lost when we achieve enlightenment, or put more
accurately, when we realize that WE ARE ALREADY
COSMICALLY ENLIGHTENED. During our progress
towards this state, we call it evolution. We work
together with our brothers—be they pebbles,
plants, platypuses, people, planetary beings, etc.
We have one purpose and goal: to realize that WE
ARE ALREADY COSMICALLY ENLIGHTENED. Our work
here will then be finished. The way to this
complexly simple state of being is to recognize all
as brothers working towards the same end and to
maintain the presence of awareness of the Life, or
Monad Self, which is the Real You (cf. PASE, see
Commentary, #19).
15. To save/heal this CU is enormously complex.
It requires the Life Principle to be an
impregnating force within the matter or
substance of the whole of this CU.
The Life Principle is the Cosmically
Enlightened Self. We need to allow it to flower
through our form. We need to accept it as the non-
duality, all-encompassing state of peace, beauty,
bliss, ultimate reality of who we are. Never mind
the others. Never mind the plants, the minerals, the
animals, the higher and lower beings on all the
different levels. We all work under strict
guidelines and cosmic rules and laws according to
our nature and individual purpose. At all levels
this work is being carried forward. The
transformation is succeeding. The Life Principle of
every entity that originally came into this CU at the
time of the Flash, has been gathering matter and
substance into itself and via life and death and
rebirth as an endless chain reaction, so the fallen
entity is being re-engineered; the machinery of its
expression is being re-harnessed to its original
energy, and everything is being restored to its
rightful place. We don’t need to do anything. The
Cosmic Being in us, the Cosmic Being who is you,
will achieve the result desired; you need do
nothing at all. Says the poem: “Just live, simply
live.”[42]

16. The first step was just to “get into” this CU,
the nature of which is so totally different from
that of the saving CU.
That is, the acceptance of “form” and “other”
self, and many intermediaries to the true self,
ranging from the actual physical form to the
emotional and mental, abstract mind and intuitive
self, up to atmic self, and this both on the cosmic
physical plane and on the cosmic levels
themselves (for other higher conscious identities).
Only the Life Self, the Zero Point, the
Beginningless Being of Light is not of form. It is
ONE. It needs nothing and no one. It is Life; it is
Purpose; it is Fulfilled; it is Bliss. It is a vague hint
of what religions call God. But it is not “out
there,” rather it is our True Self on a Cosmic
Scale. We entered the collapsed CU and sacrificed
all except this Perfect and Enlightened Self. But
this too was “covered,” or “veiled” so that we
would forget it in our identifying work of salvation
of substance. But the irony is that only by finding
ourselves as the Enlightened Self, that has always
been since the Beginningless Reality, could and
can we complete this saving healing work.

17. The second step is to “live out a life” within

the CU.
Having realized the truth of the Enlightened
Self that has Always Been, we can accept that life
within this fallen, wounded, comatose, paralyzed
Cosmic Being means just that, viz., living out one’s
life. This involves releasing transforming fractors
and the illusions of this CU, and reconnecting with
the truth of who we really are. Then there is no
glamor attached as to who we are in the
personality, what achievements we gain or have in
the personality life, even what consciousness we
claim to have. All we need to do is to live out a
life of detachment, love, and service. There is
nothing to gain, there is nothing to lose (see
Commentary, #15). The Self is all there is. The
Absolute is in all, transforming all. There can be
no judgment about anything, anyone, ideas, ideals,
hopes, fears, strengths, weaknesses, etc., for each
is complete and whole in itself. There is One. This
is the Beauty, the Bliss. It is a Continuous PRESENCE.

18. The third step is to actively promote

advanced change within
substance/consciousness. This is the specific
work of advanced or esoteric healing.
The transformation of substance in forms, on
whatever level, from the lowest subplane to the
highest cosmic dimension of this Cosmic Being is
the esoteric work of the true esoteric healer. This
is done by the one who holds the Presence of
Awareness of the Self as Enlightened (PASE), by
living. Simply living. PETA.[43] This is the so-
called Secret of the Lost Word. It doesn’t matter
if the person is a taxi driver, a doctor, a professor,
a cook, a statesman, housewife, a surfer, or
whatever—they are all just labels and of
absolutely no significance in this context. Holding
the PASE (or SLW), the emphasis of the life
changes. Such a person, holding this alignment,
works the wondrous work of healing. If the person
knows the art of esoteric healing as taught by
teachers of the INEH and GAEH and others, the
work takes on a specific form of help to the one
being healed. It has no influence, ultimately, to the
one healing and is no greater or less than a
gardener or priest who has reached the stage of
PASE. But approaching the state of PASE during
the act of esoteric healing has significant healing
help to the one healing, as to the one receiving the
healing. In both cases the “fractors” are being re-
patterned and transformed for the great expression
of PASE.

19. The fourth step is to live within that pure

state of LIFE without being deflected into the
 fractors of that life.
How is PASE achieved? In esoteric healing, or
in esotericism in general, we have learned two
major truths.
A) That Energy follows Thought (and that
Effects follow Thought).
B) That the principle of “As If” becomes real
the more it is practiced.
These two occult truths can help us who are in
the uninspired, unenlightened state—the more we
recognize that our true nature is Absolute
Enlightenment, the Monadic Being of Light, Life
Itself, and that everyone else is also, and that all
kingdoms are going through the phases of restoring
this to their consciousness, and that the very
business of restoration is the reality of healing the
patterns of the distressed CU on whatever level we
operate (whether we may be operating as an atom,
an asteroid, an ape, an aster in the field, or as an
archangel of cosmic consciousness). So using these
two truisms, as we work with PASE, is the
journey, the Path, healing. We all have the same
work or purpose according to the domain we have
been attributed from the beginning. Every time we
deviate into the senses, the desires, the wants, and
hates, loves and fears, lusts, hopes, wishes, etc.,
we stumble into the fractors of our lives. The
fractors of our life are the very patterns of
substance on all levels we are trying to repair—the
illusions and glamors of our lives which need
transforming. The more we recognize this at the
time of stumbling, the more we are imbuing these
threads of fallen matter with the light of our PASE.
Transformation, transmutation, and transfer are
progressed within us (within the CU of whom we
have temporarily become a part).

20. Completion of the work for this CU is for the

life of the saving/healing CU to return back to
its original home. This can only be achieved
when the fourth step is continuous in the life
and on all levels of being within the
consciousness of this CU.
When PASE is continuous, the work and
purpose has been achieved by us in our own realm.
The pattern (mechanism) of the CU is restored. We,
as individuals, stand ready to return to our own
“Home.” When all beings of the saving CU have
done their destined work, we will abandon the
saved CU and leave It to continue Its own Life. We
will leave with love and understanding. We will
have achieved for the CU the consciousness It fell
from. We will leave (the “Way of Escape”) all we
have achieved to the saved CU. We will take
nothing back. We will return as we came.
 9.
HEALING YOURSELF

To treat yourself using esoteric healing is very

easy. There are two methods of self-healing. In the
first method, treat yourself as a stranger. In this
way you can keep detached from the therapy you
apply to yourself intuitively and from the results
that will start working through your bodies and
consciousness. With your eyes closed, visualize
yourself as being in front of you, and as though you
were a patient you had not met before. Then make
your alignment and attunement as usual. Next,
assess the balance of the centers (diagnose the
centers in the ajna); do the four energy triangles,
the synchronizing triangle and then start working
through the triangles as necessary for your
condition and as the intuition dictates. This should
last for about 15-30 minutes. You conclude by
balancing the centers against their opposites by
closing the Healing Triangle just as you would for
consulting patients.
The second method is very similar to the first,
but here you actually work on the centers in your
body. Do not visualize the etheric outside but reach
each center either directly or in visualization. For
example, point a finger at yourself and visualize
the energy flowing to the center or triangle, thus
avoiding getting the arms in a knot! Then do the
healing on yourself as you would on another
patient, pointing and directing energy into yourself
(rather than into your projected self). Both these
methods are effective. Try them both, and use the
one suited to your needs. You may even combine
the methods in a sitting.
 10.
SEVEN ADVANCED
“MAGICAL” HEALING
TECHNIQUES

This information is given only because I know

there are some advanced healers who will benefit
from it. Since space is limited, I am presenting the
ray technique as written by Alice Bailey in the
final section of her book, Esoteric Healing, and
providing a very brief interpretation.
The ray techniques are given in the form of
seven ancient symbolic statements or formulas,
gathered out of the Book of Rules for Initiated
Disciples. I quote from DK: “I dare not yet give
the simple physical application of these ray
techniques, as it would be too dangerous. When
rightly used and understood they carry terrific
force and—in the wrong hands—could work real
damage ... the lowest significance the modern
student may succeed in interpreting for himself if
he reflects adequately and lives spiritually”
(Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, pp. 705–6). This lowest or
most general interpretation I offer simply to make
these techniques more accessible to a wider group
of healers interested in the rays, and also to
stimulate a deeper understanding from those
already well-versed in the ray philosophy. Read
also the hints and indications given in Esoteric
Healing. The earnest esoteric healer, by following
the indications I have given for each technique,
could apply the specific ray rulers given in
Chapter 5 for each of the centers to develop a ray
technique for each of the three stages of human
development, viz., for undeveloped or average
people, for developed people or disciples, and for
advanced people or initiates. This is an important
hint for the one who would take it up, and refers
directly to the words of the Master: “These seven
techniques or magical statements are susceptible of
three significances” (p. 706).
I am also listing the major group of diseases
and illnesses related to each ray. These are
associated with the seven ray causes of disease,
which can in turn be used in connection with the
specific technique (pp. 292, 298–305). (Regarding
these techniques, I acknowledge the input given by
the students of the University of the Seven Rays in
UK and USA.)

Ray I technique
(Aries; lesser influence on Leo and Capricorn)

Let the dynamic force which rules the

hearts of all within Shamballa come to my aid,
for I am worthy of that aid. Let it descend unto
the third, pass to the fifth and focus on the
seventh. These words mean not what doth at
[first] sight appear. The third, the fifth, the
seventh lie within the first and come from out
 the Central Sun of spiritual livingness. The
highest then awakens within the one who knows
and within the one who must be healed and thus
the two are one. This is mystery deep. The
blending of the healing force effects the work
desired; it may bring death, that great release,
and re-establish thus the fifth, the third, the first,
but not the seventh (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p.
707).
INTERPRETATION
“Let the dynamic force which rules the hearts
of all within Shamballa come to my aid, for I am
worthy of that aid.” This is the heart element of the
first ray force of will and power, both destructive
and constructive. The healer works from the heart-
in-the-head center.
“Let it descend unto the third, pass to the fifth
and focus on the seventh. These words mean not
what doth at [first] sight appear.” At first we may
think this refers to the centers, but actually the
numbers refer to the planes. The will force must be
allowed to descend to the third (atmic) plane, pass
to the fifth (mind) plane and focus on the seventh
(physical) plane.
“The third, the fifth, the seventh lie within the
first and come from out the Central Sun of spiritual
livingness.” The Central Spiritual Sun is first ray,
related to the place where the will of God is
known, Shamballa. Three, five and seven are in the
same line (the so-called “hard” rays or “will” line
of energy progression).
“The highest then awakens within the one who
knows and within the one who must be healed and
thus the two are one. This is mystery deep. The
blending of the healing force effects the work
desired; it may bring death, that great release, and
re-establish thus the fifth, the third, the first, but not
the seventh.” This is the healing treatment. The
highest spiritual energy vibrates in unison or
harmony with the one to be healed. The two
synchronize. The result is destruction leading to
healing, or destruction leading to death of the
physical body (“... not the seventh”).
 This is the triangle you hold if the patient has a
first ray soul: Head center (healer) to head center
(patient) to the center governing the threatening
disease.
Here are the triangles to hold if the patient has
a first-ray personality but does not have a first-ray
soul:
1. If the seat of the trouble is the base center:
sacral (healer) to sacral (patient) to base.
2. If the seat of the trouble is the sacral center:
throat (healer) to throat (patient) to sacral.
3. If the seat of the trouble is the solar plexus
center: throat (healer) to throat (patient) to solar
plexus.
4. If the seat of the trouble is the heart center:
throat (healer) to throat (patient) to heart.
5. If the seat of the trouble is the throat center: ajna
(healer) to ajna (patient) to throat.
6. If the seat of the trouble is the ajna center: head
(healer) to head (patient) to ajna.
7. If the seat of the trouble is the head center: soul
(healer) to soul (patient) to head center.
 You will note that we use the “hard” ray
closest to the center in trouble.
If death is indicated, allow the patient’s soul
and personality to awaken and blend, and then
release the physical body.
Ray I causes of disease:
Key: Pain and Sorrow; the Destroyer.
Soul calling for: Synthesis (Bailey, 1951–70,
v. 2, p. 220); Inclusion; Isolated Unity.
Other connections: Touch; the Occultist; the
Law of Vibration (Bailey, 1962, p. 574); the Law
of Repulse; Sense of Time; Singleness of Purpose.
Indications of first ray activity suggesting use
of the first ray technique:
Crystallization, gall stones, kidney stones,
gout, autoimmune diseases, including certain types
of arthritis, ankylosing spondelitis, atherosclerosis,
TMJ (jaw) clenching, calcification of the pineal
gland, some kinds of cancer (Bailey, 1951–70, v.
4, p. 383), hard tumors, keratosis, anorexia, autism
(blocked frontal brain), tightness, tension, retention
(e.g., chronic constipation), ideé fixe (obsessions
from the mental plane), breaking bones, death,
Parkinson’s disease, rigidity in body, denial,
egotism, arrogance, destructiveness, suicide (the
will to die), killers, murderers, hardness,
suppression, relentless control, inhibition, love of
power, solitariness, foot binding (as in China,
which has a Ray I soul).
Initiation: the Fifth: Revelation (a glimpse of
the Seven Paths in Shamballa).
Statement: I still persist.
Ray Word of Power: I assert the fact.

Ray II technique
(Gemini; lesser influence on Virgo and Pisces)

Let the healing energy descend, carrying its

dual lines of life and its magnetic force. Let that
magnetic living force withdraw and supplement
that which is present in the seventh, opposing
four and six to three and seven, but dealing not
 with five. The circular, inclusive vortex—
descending to the point—disturbs, removes and
then supplies and thus the work is done.
The heart revolves; two hearts revolve as
one; the twelve within the vehicle, the twelve
within the head and the twelve upon the plane of
soul endeavor, cooperate as one and thus the
work is done. Two energies achieve this
consummation and the three whose number is a
twelve respond to the greater twelve. The life is
known and the years prolonged (Bailey, 1951–
70, v. 4, pp. 707–8).
INTERPRETATION
The use of this technique is as follows: hold
the heart center in a triangle with the base (four)
and solar plexus (six) and then with the adaptive
mind allow these centers to oppose the sacral
(three) and ajna (seven). This forms two
tetrahedrons with the one triangle of heart, base
and solar plexus (one to the sacral; the other to the
ajna). Once this is held, open the heart to the
linking twelves (the heart itself with its four
valves, four chambers and four vessels, the heart
lotuses on higher levels, the causal body and the
Hierarchy, connecting with the second ray energy
itself), hence, healing will occur, “the life is
known and the years prolonged.”
Another suggestion for this technique: the
seventh is the physical plane where you are
working with the magnetic, disturbing force of the
life energy. You hold the buddhic and astral
energies together in balance—four and six—and
the spiritual will with the physical will-to-be in
incarnation—atmic with physical—but do not
activate the mind or manasic principle. This is
what you do: as the healer make a triangle with
your heart center, heart-in-the-head center, and
heart of the soul (the twelve petals of the egoic
lotus). Now allow this triangle to act as an
interactive transmitter between the heart center of
your patient and the greater twelve of the Maitreya
and the Life Energy of the Monad (2nd Ray).
Try both possibilities to see which suits your
patient better.
Ray II causes of disease:
Key: Suffocation; Centralization.
Soul calling for: Illumination, e.g., physical
sight due to astral illusion and concrete
knowledge; Occult Vision; Love and Wisdom;
Radiance.
Other connections: Intuition; the True Psychic;
the Law of Cohesion; the Law of Magnetic
Impulse; Power to Save.
Indications of second-ray activity suggesting
use of the second-ray technique:
Cancer (the majority), soft tumors,
pericarditis, hydrocephalus, cysts, endometriosis,
hyperglandular conditions, fungal diseases,
leukemia, high blood pressure, asthma (allergic
type), emphysema, diseases of the immune system,
heart attack, hyperactivity (restlessness),
bronchitis, pneumonia, lymphomas, circulatory
problems, tuberculosis, extra organs, fear, self-
pity, over-sensitivity, attachment, psychic excesses,
love of being loved, over-study, gluttony, coldness,
indifference, contempt for mental limitations in
others, over-accumulation of things.
Initiation: The Seventh: Resurrection.
Statement: Naught is but Me.
Ray Word of Power: I see the greater light.

Ray III technique

(Libra; lesser influence on Cancer and
Capricorn)

The healer stands and weaves. He gathers

from the three, the five, the seven that which is
needed for the heart of life. He brings the
energies together and makes them serve the
third; he thus creates a vortex into which the one
distressed must descend and with him goes the
healer. And yet they both remain in peace and
calm. Thus must the angel of the Lord descend
into the pool and bring the healing life (Bailey,
1951–70, v. 4, p. 708).
INTERPRETATION
Make a triangle from the sacral center to throat
center to base center, since these are the centers
governed by the astral ray influences. Place the
heart center in the middle of the triangle and
visualize the third ray energy descending to it,
dispelling the astral force flowing into the solar
plexus center.
Next, make a triangle between the three head
centers (as one), the five centers up the spine (as
one), and the solar plexus center. In the center of
this triangle visualize the heart (the healing life).
Allow the third ray force to “descend into the
pool” and thus resist the astral glamor in which the
patient is engulfed (see below for the diseases and
conditions which indicate this).
Ray III causes of disease:
Key: Manipulation.
Soul symptom: Separative and selfish
behavior.
Soul calling for: Cooperation.
 Other connections: Sight; the Magician; Law of
Economy; Spheroidal Forms; Rotary Movement
(Bailey, 1962, pp. 40, 48); Law of Disintegration
(p. 580); Stillness. Law of Expansive Response;
Power to Manifest; Power to Evolve; the Weaver.
Indications of third-ray activity requiring the
third-ray technique:
Solar plexus related diseases, astral-plane
related diseases, gastrointestinal (GI) tract
problems, GI sphincter spasm, stomach ulcers,
ulcerative colitis, irritable bowel syndrome,
colitis, gastritis, spastic colon, liver problems,
pancreas problems, gall bladder problems, spleen
problems, anorexia, bulemia, ulcers,
hyperthyroidism, hypoglycemia, esophageal
problems, arrhythmia, obesity, diabetes mellitus,
anxiety or panic attacks, low vitality, brain
disorders, syphilitic diseases, manic depressive,
epilepsy, mental pride, criticism,
obsessive/compulsive behavior, schizophrenia,
over-complex thoughts, carelessness,
manipulation, opportunism, deviousness, lying,
indecisiveness, overadaptablility.
Initiation: The Sixth: Ascension or Decision.
Statement: I am the Worker and the Work, the
One that Is.
Ray Word of Power: Purpose itself am I.

Ray IV technique
(Scorpio; lesser influence on Taurus and
Sagittarius)

The healer knows the place where

dissonance is found. He also knows the power
of sound and the sound which must be heard.
Knowing the note to which the fourth great
group reacts and linking it to the great Creative
Nine, he sounds the note which brings release,
the note which will bring absorption into one.
He educates the listening ear of him who must
be healed; he likewise trains the listening ear of
him who must go forth. He knows the manner of
the sound which brings the healing touch; and
 also that which says: Depart. And thus the work
is done (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p 709).
INTERPRETATION
There are two uses for this technique: one for
death, the other for life.
If the person to be healed is dying, form a
triangle from the Soul (linked to the base center),
to the throat center, to the heart center. Then play
continuously the pure E note. This sound will bring
release of the life thread.
For life, use the same triangle as above, and as
you hold the triangle and visualize the energy flow,
play music, especially that which is keyed or
composed in E. But any creative, beautiful music
will do the work required, particularly music the
patient prefers.
Ray IV causes of disease:
Key: Diffusion.
Soul symptom: Warfare and Struggle.
Soul calling for: A Search for Meaning and its
Revelation; Harmony; Rest; Peace; Synthesis of
True Beauty.
Other connections: Smell; the Artist; Law of
Magnetic Control; the Law of Sacrifice; Power to
Reveal the Path; Power to Reveal the Past; the
Harmony of the Spheres.
Indications of fourth-ray activity indicating the
fourth-ray technique:
Acute viral infectious diseases, epidemics,
influenza, diseases due to debility and
devitalization, insanities, asthma (viral), ME
(postviral syndrome, chronic fatigue syndrome—
see also Ray VII), AIDS, kidney diseases,
temperamental problems, lack of stability,
unpredictability, unreliability, confusion,
vacillation, despair, self-abuse, addiction, suicidal
tendencies, depression, psychosis, narcissism,
over-eagerness for compromise, inertia, turmoil,
self-absorption in suffering, lack of confidence,
worry, moodiness, exaggeration, dramatic type, the
artist.
Initiation: The Fourth,
Crucifixion/Renunciation.
Statement: Beauty and Glory veil me not. I
stand revealed. I am.
Ray Word of Power: Two merge in one.

Ray V technique
(Leo; lesser influence on Sagittarius and
Aquarius)

That which has been given must be used;

that which emerges from within the given mode
will find its place within the healer’s plan. That
which is hidden must be seen and from the
three, great knowledge will emerge. For these
the healer seeks. To these the healer adds the
two which are as one, play its part and the five
must function as if one. The energies descend,
pass through and disappear, leaving the one
who could respond with karma yet to dissipate
and taking with them him who may not thus
respond and so must likewise disappear
 (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 710).
INTERPRETATION
The person who is indicated for this technique
(see below) must also be taking appropriate
physical care as applied by the medical therapist
of the patient’s choice or the healer’s
recommendation. The healer should hold the
following triangle: ajna, which is receptive to
fifth-ray energy, throat center and alta major center
(the five centers in one) or heart center, as this is
the last center of transference to ajna. The healer is
to feel which of these two centers is right for the
particular patient. Group therapy and social
involvement is important for right healing.
Ray V causes of disease:
Keynote: Cleavage.
Soul symptom: Over-Analytical and Critical;
Detachment.
Soul calling for: Understanding Leading to
Identification; Revelation of the Way;
Manifestation of the Great White Light.
Other connections: Mind; the Scientist; Law of
Fixation; Law of the Lower Four; Power to make
the Voice of the Silence Heard.
Indications of fifth-ray activity requiring the
fifth-ray technique:
Cleavages (psychological), mental disorders,
dyslexia/catatonia, insanities, brain lesions,
migraine, metabolic diseases (blockages), cancers
(types), imbecilities, retardation, senility,
antisocial behavior, psychopaths, over-analysis,
excessive doubt, rigid atheism, classism,
separativeness (eg. racists), irreverence, excess
objectivity, rigidity, narrowness, harsh criticism,
social awkwardness, associative disassociation
states (i.e. believing themselves to be someone
else, e.g. as a child).
Initiation: The Third, Transfiguration.
Statement: I mastered energy for I am energy
itself. The Master and the mastered are but One.
Ray Word of Power: Three minds unite.
Ray VI technique
(Sagittarius; lesser influence on Virgo and
Pisces)

Cleaving the waters, let the power descend,

the healer cries. He minds not how the waters
may respond; they oft bring stormy waves and
dire and dreadful happenings. The end is good.
The trouble will be ended when the storm
subsides and energy has fulfilled its charted
destiny. Straight to the heart the power is forced
to penetrate, and into every channel, nadi, nerve
and spleen the power must seek a passage and a
way and thus confront the enemy who has
effected entrance and settled down to live.
Ejection—ruthless, sudden and complete—is
undertaken by the one who sees naught else but
perfect functioning and brooks no interference.
This perfect functioning opens thus the door to
life eternal or to life on earth for yet a little
while (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 711).
INTERPRETATION
This technique is also for healing (life) or to
help the dying. This technique also may be
employed alongside the Fertility Triangles, for it
can “open the door... to life on earth” (p. 711). DK
recommends that people who have a sixth-ray soul
do not use this technique, for it is too drastic and
potent. The healer is called on to build the
following triangle: head center (open to the sixth-
ray energy, “let the power descend”), down to the
solar plexus center (“cleaving the waters” of the
astral glamors and perversions), to the heart center
(from which the energies will be distributed to
affect the whole body, channel, nadi, nerve and
spleen).
The therapy should include the Taste Triangle,
for help towards right discrimination and
creativity; heart activities (to evoke compassion);
and singing.
Ray VI causes of disease:
Keynote: Perversion.
 Soul symptom: Cruelty and Sadism.
Soul calling for: One-pointed Purpose and
Devotion to the Ideal; Restraint.
Other connections: Taste; the Devotee; Law of
Love; Law of Service; Power to Kill Out Desire.
Indications of sixth-ray activity requiring the
sixth-ray technique:
Sexual diseases, sexual perversions and
misuse, sexually transmitted diseases, sadistic
cruelty, impulsive rape, violent sex, sexual abuse,
rigid idealism, emotionalism, selfish love, jealous
love, dependency, unreasoning devotion,
masochism, excesses in all things, mania, sex cults,
cannibalism, genetic engineering leading to
perversion, self-immolation.
Initiation: The Second, Baptism.
Statement: I am the seeker and the sought. I
rest.
Ray Word of Power: The highest light
controls.

Ray VII technique

 (Capricorn; lesser influence on Aries and
Cancer)

Energy and force must meet each other and

thus the work is done. Color and sound in
ordered sequence must meet and blend and thus
the work of magic can proceed. Substance and
spirit must evoke each other and, passing
through the center of the one who seeks to aid,
produce the new and good. The healer energizes
thus with life the failing life, driving it forth or
anchoring it yet more deeply in the place of
destiny. All seven must be used and through the
seven there must pass the energies the need
requires, creating the new man who has for ever
been and will for ever be, and either here or
there (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 712).
INTERPRETATION
The interpretation and use of this technique
involves holding the following triangle: the center
in the healer corresponding to the patient’s soul
ray. For example, if the patient is soul ray two, the
healer holds their own heart center, which also
must be opened up to the energy of the Lord of the
Seventh Ray. This center then radiates out in two
directions to the other points in the triangle: to the
heart center in the head (life thread, energy-spirit);
and to the base center (force, personality,
substance). These two latter points link all the
seven centers producing the new and good—the
new man.
The therapy should include work with rhythms
(dancing, music, drumming), and sequential
activities.
Ray VII causes of disease:
Keynote: Promiscuity.
Soul symptom: Stickler for Time; Haste;
Frustration.
Soul calling for: Rhythmic Living; Orientation.
Other connections: Hearing; the Ritualist; Law
of Sacrifice and Death; Law of Group Progress;
Power to Create and to Cooperate; Power to
Vivify.
Indications of seventh ray activity requiring the
seventh ray technique:
Infectious diseases (slow as well as bacterial
or fungal), autoimmune deficiency syndrome
(AIDS), chronic fatigue syndrome (see also Ray
IV), parasites, candida (fungus), bacterial
conditions (e.g., vaginitis), heart disorders (astral
only), tumors (astral only), cysts, fibrocystic
diseases, various types of hypertrophy, leprosy,
rigid order, overconcern with rules, subservience
to habits, bigotry, perfection, sex magic, addictions
to occult phenomena, perversions of magical
processes and rituals, lack of originality, dishonor
of other life-forms (genetic work on plants and
animals), SIDS (sudden infant death syndrome),
exclusive cults, electromagnetic pollution.
Initiation: The First, Birth.
Statement: The creative work is over. I, the
Creator, am. Naught else remains but Me.
Ray Word of Power: The highest and the
lowest meet.
 The two highest initiations have not been
included in the seven ray qualities as they involve
groups of rays, as follows: the Eighth Initiation of
Transition involves all the Rays of Attribute. The
Ninth Initiation of Refusal (Choosing a Path)
involves all the Rays of Aspect.
THE HEALER IN THE NEW AGE
“The healer in the New Age does not and will
not work directly with the physical body at all;
being an occultist, he will regard that body as not
a principle. He works practically entirely with
the etheric body and with the vital energies,
leaving those energies to make their impact on
the automaton of the physical body according to
directed intent; they will then produce their effect
according to the response of that body,
conditioned as it will be by many factors. The
healer has to think clearly before he can bring
about the desired results, but the energy poured
into the patient’s vehicle is not mental energy, but
one of the seven forms of pranic or life energy.
This travels along the line of force or the channel
which relates and links all the centers and
connects those centers with the glands.” —
Djwhal Khul (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 4, p. 538).
 11.
CASE HISTORIES

The case histories here presented are random

examples of what an esoteric healer does. Each
case included, by the Esoteric Healing Group
Clinic in the U.K., a full treatment which may have
lasted for many weeks. The points here shown
have been deliberately kept simple and are merely
for interest in the hope they will be of some help
and encouragement to the new healer. These
indications and methods do not mean they should
be used for other patients with similar symptoms.
Each person is unique and requires individual
treatment, allowing the soul and intuition to inform
and direct the therapy.

Clinical sketch 1: A woman says she is

constantly irritable and angry, and frequently has
nightmares. She complains of occasional dizziness,
but otherwise feels in good health. Her general
practitioner has found she has slightly high blood
pressure, but no other problem. He suggests that
the patient see a psychiatrist to deal with her
mental state. The esoteric healing group finds she
has an overstimulated Liver Triangle of Force with
a strong involvement of the throat center. The
major triangles the group works with are: the Liver
Triangle of Force, the Gall Bladder Triangle, the
PSL Triangle, the Stomach Triangle, and the GIT
(gastrointestinal tract) Triangle (throat center, solar
plexus center, and the etheric gastrointestinal
system as a whole), and the triangle for irritation
(the Triangle for Imperil). The Blood Pressure
Triangle is also included at first. We work
primarily in the astral/emotional body. Such
treatment cools and disperses excess energy being
deflected to the liver from the solar plexus center,
markedly improving her condition.
 Clinical sketch 2: A male patient complains of
difficulty in urinating, a problem that gradually has
become more frequent over the last few years. He
tells us his GP diagnosed a prostate condition. We
notice he is very pale and wearing a lot of
sweaters. He tells us he has always disliked the
cold. The esoteric healing group finds he has a
very weak Kidney Triangle (base center and the
two etheric kidney organs) and that the Prostate
Triangle (sacral center, etheric gonad glands and
etheric prostate gland) is unbalanced and
overactive. The major triangles the group works
with are: the Basic Triangle, the sacral triangles,
the Prostate Triangle, the Fear Triangle and the
Heart Triangle. We work primarily in the etheric
body to stimulate the circulation of vital force
through these triangles together, thereby reducing
the overactive condition of the prostate. The
patient speaks with interest of new contacts and
relationships, and that the urinary problem has
become less of a bother.
 Clinical sketch 3: A man with an upper
respiratory infection comes to the clinic. He feels
chilled and has a stuffed nose, a slight fever, and a
pounding headache. The esoteric healing group
finds that the lung minors are in a poor condition
due to a deficient throat center. The major triangles
the group works with are the Respiratory Triangle,
and the Immune Triangle. The next day the patient
reported his headache had gone by the time he had
reached home and that he felt a lot better. He had
taken no external treatment. I suggested he come
again in a week for further preventive treatment.
He did and the major triangles the group worked
with were: the Service Triangles, the Diaphragm
Triangle, the Immune Triangle, the Touch Triangle
(from the heart center in this case) and the Ear
Triangle. This man was interested in dowsing and
the group found it necessary to work on the higher
and wider aspects of hearing and sound as well as
of touch and contacts (the hand minors were
indicated here).
 Clinical sketch 4: A young woman comes to
us who is unable to sit for very long due to an
acute back problem. She has seen over the years an
osteopath, a chiropractor, and a medical herbalist,
and, finally, since nothing else helped for very
long, she asked for our help. We looked at her X-
rays and saw where the problem lay: in the second
and third lumbar vertebral disks of her spine. The
disks were practically nonexistent. The esoteric
healing group finds that her base center, sacral
center and throat center are particularly low in
energy. The major triangles the group works with
are: the Service Triangles, the Lower Clearing
Triangle, the Sacral Triangles, the Basic Triangles,
the Fear Triangle, and the Eye Triangles (she is a
person on the spiritual path, so we use the
appropriate triangles for this state of
consciousness). The group finds she is in need of
more focussed vision and a personality-will to
grasp that vision. She finds almost immediate
relief from the pain and she decides to pursue her
interest in art. She returns to the clinic weekly for
many months. Although she is not cured in the
ordinary sense, her sense of confidence and
direction have given her a new sense of purpose.
She is able to live almost normally now.

Clinical sketch 5: A woman with stomach

cancer comes to us and expresses a deep fear of
dying. She was given six months to live. We find
that the solar plexus center is the major cause of
this condition. The major triangles the group works
with are: the Cancer Triangles, the Stomach
Triangle, the PSL Triangle, the Fear Triangle, the
Force Triangles and the Lower Clearing Triangle.
There was no evident improvement of the cancer,
although we were able to speak with her on many
occasions about death as a phase of transition. This
brought her comfort.

Clinical sketch 6: A woman with arthritis in

her fingers and hips comes to us saying that the
condition had significantly worsened since she had
moved from another part of the country. She had
lost all incentive to get involved in anything. We
find her throat center is hardly active at all and her
base center is difficult to balance. The major
triangles the group works with are: the Service
Triangles, the Basic Triangles, the Parathyroid
Triangle and the Lymphatic Triangles. This is a
very chronic case and the progress forward was
very slow. She came to us for years, which
suggested that the soul was definitely keen to work
out the problem despite the rigid personality. She
did show she had moved somewhat. The astral
condition had fixed itself in the etheric body, using
the minute centers as anchors and excuses for
inaction.

Clinical sketch 7: A child with a squint was

brought to us by his mother. He had been born with
this condition in both his eyes, and had been going
to the local eye hospital for regular check-ups. He
was short-sighted in one eye and long-sighted in
the other. He was a very shy boy who lacked
confidence and who tended to be short-tempered
and rude, but who could be very gentle and
responsive at times. We find that his sacral center
needs the most work. The major triangles the group
works with are: the sacral triangles on the etheric
and astral levels, the Basic Triangle, since this
was very arrhythmical in its energy, the eye
triangles (we used the disciple triangles, since he
was still very much in the higher world, as
children are), and the Fear Triangle. After the first
treatment the boy responds in a way that was quite
beyond belief, becoming calmer, more sensitive to
the family, and generally much more integrated in
his behavior. The eyes, however, show no
improvement and he is to have an operation to
improve the squint. Remarkably, subsequent to the
operation, he does not need to wear glasses.

Clinical sketch 8: A man with muscular

dystrophy comes for healing; he has a keen
intellect and a wide range of interests, a teacher by
profession. The esoteric healing group finds his
head center overactive and his alta major center
unresponsive. The major triangles the group works
with are: the Immune Triangle, the Base Triangles
(especially relating to the spine), the Head
Triangle and the Taste Triangle. After some
treatments he becomes even more intent on
overcoming this muscular wasting by doing
exercises and dietary cleansing. Physical
improvement is not noticeable, although he appears
much better in himself and is determined to
succeed. He is thankful for the healing and
believes it to be very helpful. He discontinues his
treatments after the ninth visit.

Clinical sketch 9: A woman with angina

comes to see us who suffers periodically from pain
in the chest when walking or over-working. She
has her own successful business, but it is taking its
toll on her heart. She is taking orthodox medicine
for the pain. We find she is well balanced in the
solar plexus center, but the vagus nerve center and
heart center are both over-fired. The major
triangles the group works with are: the Pranic
Triangle, the Blood Pressure Triangle, the
Diaphragm Triangle, Eye Triangle, the Triangle of
Being and the Synchronizing Triangle. We use
these triangles because she is quite an advanced
person on the path of spiritual development.
However, she has not been able, due to the
pressure of work, to bridge the gap securely
between her personality work and her soul work,
hence the strain on the heart. The therapy causes
her to regulate her diet more strictly than before,
and she joins an environmental group to give her a
change of focus. She also assigns herself more time
for meditation and relaxation. After some months
she reported that the angina had not troubled her
for some time.

Clinical sketch 10: On a different note, I

would like to indicate another healing activity that
our healing group has performed. These concern
the wider aspects of healing. Here are a few
examples. Esoteric healing can also be helpful to
sick animals, but it is not a practice that is easily
performed. It is usually done for the healer’s own
pets or for friends’ pets (in “person” or as distant
healing). A healing group can be formed to work at
healing “planetary illnesses” (international fear,
greed, superiority, power, materialism, evil
separatism, terrorism, exploitation, and so on),
which may include the relationship between
animals and humans. This can be helpful in the
long term especially considering factory farming,
vivisection and animal sports, not to speak of the
cruelty and greed of certain groups of people
working under the banner of supplying industry or
manufacturers with natural animal products. The
major triangles the group works with are: the
human kingdom as a whole (this can be visualized
as a planetary throat center), the particular human
group perpetrating the crime (visualize this as a
minor center closely linked with the planetary
solar plexus center), and the animal species
involved, or simply with the human kingdom, the
animal kingdom and the Earth (as a vital living
energy).
 Note: This healing group has disbanded due to
circumstances beyond their control. However, the
individual members continue healing. Due to our
long association (15 years), we remain deeply
connected on the soul level.
 12.
QUICK REFERENCE
SUMMARY

Summary of opening the healing treatment

Note: When opening triangles, the intuition will
direct the healer where to place the hands. But as a
general principle, the Ajna usually connects with
the highest of the centers being worked with and
the hands connect with the centers nearest to them.

A. ALIGNMENT AND ATTUNEMENT (Chapter 7)

1. Alignment
2. Higher Triangle (Healer’s Soul—Patient’s Soul
—Source of Power, Love and Light)
3. Opening the Triangles of Healing:
i) Radiatory (Soul—Brain—Heart Center, and to
 the aura)
ii) Magnetic (Soul—Heart Center—Brain)
(For working with the Rays, open the Greater
then the Lesser Triangles (Chapter 7, Attunement
with the Governing Ray Energies)
4. Protecting Triangle (Heart Center—Head Center
—Patient)
5. Activating Triangles:
i) Placing Triangle (Head Center—Alta Major
Center—Ajna Center)
ii) Vitalizing Triangle (Pineal gland—Carotid
gland—Pituitary body)
iii) Directing Triangle (Right Eye—Left Eye—
Ajna Center)
6. Triangle of Transfer (Ajna Center—Hand Minor
Centers)
B. DIAGNOSIS (CHAPTER 7)
Diagnosing the center “of greatest need” in the
aura and the ajna center

The triangles of esoteric healing

 What follows is a complete summary of all the
esoteric healing triangles in this book. The number
of each triangle (e.g. 6. Stomach Triangle) is the
same numeral as in chapter 7.
C. VITALIZATION OF THE BODIES OF THE PATIENT
Vitality triangles
1. Pranic Triangle (Vagus Nerve Center—Center
Below Heart Center—Spleen minor)
2. Spleen Triangle of Force (Spleen minor—
Sacral Center—Base Center)
2. Spleen Triangle (Solar Plexus Center—Spleen
minor—Spleen)
3. Immortality Triangle (Throat Center—Pituitary
gland—Pineal gland, transmuted from Spleen
Triangle of Force)
4. Lower Prana Triangle (Spleen minor—Base
Center—Throat Center)
D. ESOTERIC HEALING TREATMENT
[At this point the Synchronizing Triangle is
done, following the indication given during the
assessment of the major centers in the ajna center.]
Triangles for the gastrointestinal tract
5. Liver Triangle of Force (Solar Plexus Center—
Stomach minor—Liver minor)
5. Liver Triangle (Solar Plexus Center—Liver
minor—Liver)
5. Gall Bladder Triangle (Solar Plexus Center—
Stomach minor—Gall Bladder point)
6. Stomach Triangle (Solar Plexus Center—
Stomach minor—Stomach)
7. Astral Preparation Triangle (Head Center of
Healer—Solar Plexus Center of Healer—Astral
Body of Patient)
8. Mental Congestion Triangle (Head Center of
Healer—Head Center of Patient—Centers below
diaphragm of Patient)
9. GIT Triangles (Throat Center—Solar Plexus
Center—Intestinal Point)
10. Triangle for Imperil (Solar Plexus Center—
Head Center—Heart Center)
11. PSL Triangle (Pancreas—Stomach—Liver)
12. Diabetes Triangle (Solar Plexus Center—
Stomach Minor—Base Center)
13. Lower Clearing Triangle (Solar Plexus Center
—Heart Center—Ajna Center)
13. Triangle for Spiritual Facilitation (Ajna
Center—Heart Center—Heart-in-the-Head, with
Solar Plexus Center) (see #66)
14. Responsive Triangle (Soul of Patient—Ajna
Center—Heart Center)
14. Triangles of Stability and Right Group
Relation (Solar Plexus Center—Heart Center—
Throat Center; then Solar Plexus Center—Sacral
Center—Base Center)
15. Triangle for Dispelling Astral Glamor (Soul:
Astral Body—Solar Plexus Center—Heart
Center)
16. Consciousness Stream Triangle (Head Center
—Astral Body—Solar Plexus Center)
Triangles for the spine and renal system
17. Basic Triangle (Base Center—Adrenal points)
18. Spinal Triangles (Base Center—Alta Major
 Center—Spinal Cord; see variations)
19. Triangle for Addictions or Obsessions (Base
Center—Sacral Center—Throat Center)
20. Fear Triangle (Base Center—Kidney points)
21. Fear Transformation Triangle (Base Center—
Solar Plexus Center—Ajna Center)
22. First Initiation Triangle (Base Center—Solar
Plexus Center—Heart Center)
22. Second Initiation Triangle (Base Center—
Heart Center—Throat Center)
23. Third Initiation Triangle (Heart Center—
Throat Center—Seven Head Centers)
Triangles for the reproductive system
24. Sacral Triangle (Sacral Center—Gonad
minors; see variations)
24. Feet Triangle (Sacral Center—Feet minors)
(for use see #42)
24. Prostate Triangle (Sacral Center—Gonad
minor—Prostate point)
25. Triangles of Force (Breastbone minor—Breast
minors, and Sacral Center—Solar Plexus minor
 —Base Center)
25. Shock Triangle (Solar Plexus minor—
Ileocaecal Valve point—Sigmoid point)
25. Life Stream Triangle (Head Center—Heart
Center—Spleen Minor Center)
26. Triangle for Sexual Problems (Head Center—
Throat Center—Sacral Center)
27. Fertility Triangles (a progression of five
triangles)
27. Advanced Fertility Triangles (Sacral Center ...
Adrenal points—Male gonads—Female gonads;
then Sacral Center ... Adrenal points—Gonads
(as one)—Base Center)
28. Triangle of Creative Energy (Throat Center—
Sacral Center—Physical Body)
29. Triangle of the Practical Mystic (Sacral Center
—Throat Center—Ajna Center)
30. Triangle for Creative Energy Distribution
(Sacral Center—Throat Center—Ajna Center)
31. Triangle of Yoga (Buddhic—Astral—Monad)
Triangles for the cardiovascular system
32. Heart Triangle (Heart Center—two Lung
minors)
33. Triangles at Death:
33. Desire Triangle (Soul—Astral Body—Solar
Plexus Center)
33. Withdrawing Triangle (Soul—Head Center—
Ajna Center)
33. Triangle for the Dying (Spleen Minor Center
—Lung Minors—Heart Center)
33. Triangles of Force (see #25)
33. Immortality Triangle (#3)
33. Samadhi Triangles (see #39)
33. First and Fourth Ray Technique (see Chapter
9)
34. Immune Triangle (Heart Center—Spleen
Center—Thigh Bone Marrow Point, Heart
Center—Thymus Point—Spleen Point, Heart
Center—Spleen Center—Heart in the Head
Center)
35. Lymphatic Triangle (Heart Center—Lymph
duct points)
36. Allergy Triangle (Vagus Nerve Center—
 Adrenal minute points)
37. Blood Pressure Triangles (Heart Center—
Ajna Center—Spleen Minor Center) (also, Alta
Major Center—Vagus Nerve Center—Base
Center)
38. Kundalini Triangle (Head Center—Heart
Center—Base Center ... Vagus Nerve Center)
39. Samadhi Triangles (Heart Center—Spleen
Minor Center—Solar Plexus Center with Head
Center—Base Center—Spleen Minor Center)
Triangles for the respiratory and metabolic
systems
40. Diaphragm Triangle (Vagus Nerve Center—
Diaphragm points)
41. Service Triangles (Throat Center—to centers
on Shoulders, Elbows and Hands). Feet Triangle
(Sacral Center—Feet minors)
42. Parathyroid Triangle (Throat Center—
Parathyroid points)
43. Respiratory Triangle (Throat Center—Lung
minors)
44. Triangle of Purpose (Brain—Mind—Soul
Will via [Sacrifice Petals])
45. Sinus Triangle (Throat—Solar Plexus—Sinus
points)
46. Sound Triangle (Throat—Ear Minor—Vocal
apparatus)
Triangles for the nervous system
47. Triangle for the Nerves (Ajna Center—Alta
Major Center—Vagus Nerve Center)
48. Cranio-Sacral Triangle (Ajna Center—Alta
Major Center—Sacral Center)
49. Migraine Triangle (Throat Center—Pituitary
gland—Pineal gland)
50. Creative Fusion Triangle (Throat Center—
Heart Center—Ajna Center)
51. Head Triangle (Head Center—Ajna Center—
Alta Major Center)
52. Triangle of Being (Head Center—Heart Center
—Base Center)
52. Triangle of Becoming (Base Center—Head
Center—Ajna Center)
52. Triangle for the Majority (Ajna Center—Solar
Plexus Center—Sacral Center) (see #63)
53. Triangle of the White Magician (Heart in the
Head Center—Heart Center—Throat Center)
54. Synchronizing Triangle (Head Center of Healer
—Center of Healer—and Corresponding Center
in Patient)
55. General Healing Triangles
Triangles and the senses
56. Hearing Triangle (Throat Center—Ear minors)
57. Touch Triangle (Heart Center or Solar Plexus
Center—Hand minors)
57. Psoriasis Triangle: Heart Center—Base
Center—Sacral Center
58. Triangle of the Third Seed Group (Head Center
—Heart Center—Ajna Center)
59. Eye Triangle (Head Center—Eye minors) (four
specific triangles).
60. Triangle for Dissipating Illusion (Head Center
—Ajna Center—Right Eye minor)
60. Triangle of the First Thread (Throat Center—
 Ajna Center—Head Center)
60. Triangle for Dissipating Glamor (Ajna Center
—Left Eye—Right Eye)
60. Triangle of the Second Thread (Throat Center
—Solar Plexus Center—Heart Center)
60. Triangle for Dissipating Maya (joining the
triangles of Illusion and Glamor)
60. Triangle of the Third Thread (Throat Center—
Heart Center—Spleen minor)
61. Taste Triangle (Solar Plexus Center—Spleen
minor—Tongue point or, Solar Plexus Center and
Spleen minor—Brain point—Tongue point)
62. Smell Triangle (Base Center—Nose point—
Ajna Center)
Advanced triangles
63. Triangle for the Majority (Ajna Center—Solar
Plexus Center—Sacral Center)
64. Triangle for Average Humanity (Soul—Head
Center—Solar Plexus Center)
65. Triangle for Imbeciles and Animals (Group
soul—Solar Plexus Center—Spleen minor
 center)
66. Triangle of Spiritual Facilitation (Solar Plexus
Center with the triangle: Ajna Center—Heart
Center—Heart-in-the-Head Center)
67. Triangle Aiding Self-Consciousness (Solar
Plexus Center—Ajna Center—Heart Center [and
planetary and cosmic connections])
68. Threads Triangle (from the Base Center... to
Solar Plexus Center—Heart Center—Head
Center)
Radiatory Triangle (Soul—Brain—Heart Center
.... Aura)
Inherited planetary influences triangles (see
Chapter 8)
Triangle of Transmutation (for cancer) (Solar
Plexus Center—Sacral Center—Throat Center)
Tuberculosis Triangle (Throat Center—Solar
Plexus Center—Heart Center)
Cancer Triangle (same as Triangle of
Transmutation)
Syphilis Triangle (Sacral Center—Base Center—
 Throat Center)
Ray alignment triangles (see Chapter 7)
Greater Triangle (Soul Ray—Appropriate Vehicle
—Heart Center)
Lesser Triangle (Head Center—Ajna—Center
Related to the Soul Ray)
Seven advanced “magical” triangles (see
Chapter 10)
First Ray Technique (Head Center—Head Center
—Center of distress)
Second Ray Technique (Heart Center—Base
Center (opposing Sacral)—Solar Plexus Center
(opposing Ajna); (Heart Center [of patient]—
Heart Center [healer]—Heart-in-the Head
Center)
Third Ray Technique (Sacral Center—Throat
Center—Base Center)
Fourth Ray Technique (Base Center (soul)—Throat
Center—Heart Center)
Fifth Ray Technique (Ajna Center—Throat Center
 —Alta Major Center)
Sixth Ray Technique (Head Center—Solar Plexus
Center—Heart Center)
Seventh Ray Technique (Heart Center (if second
ray soul)—Heart-in-the-Head Center—Base
Center)
E. CLOSING AND SEALING THE HEALING TRIANGLE
(Chapter 7)

The triangles according to their governing

center
(The number refers to the number of the triangle in
Chapter 7)
BASE CENTER
17. Basic Triangle (Base Center—Adrenal points)
18. Spinal Triangles (Base Center—Alta Major
Center—Spinal Cord; see variations)
19. Triangle for Addictions or Obsessions (Base
Center—Sacral Center—Throat Center)
20. Fear Triangle (Base Center—Kidney points)
21. Fear Transformation Triangle (Base—Solar
Plexus—Ajna Center)
22. First Initiation Triangle (Base Center—Solar
Plexus Center—Heart Center)
22. Second Initiation Triangle (Base Center—
Heart Center—Throat Center)
52. Triangle of Becoming (Base Center—Head
Center—Ajna)
57. Psoriasis Triangle: Heart Center—Base
Center—Sacral Center
62. Smell Triangle (Base Center—Nose point—
Ajna Center)
68. Threads Triangle (from the Base Center to
Solar Plexus Center—Heart Center—Head
Center)
Fourth Ray Technique (Base Center (soul)—
Throat Center—Heart Center). See Chapter 10
for use
SACRAL CENTER
24. Sacral Triangle (Sacral Center—Gonad
minors) (see variations)
24. Feet Triangle (Sacral Center—Feet minors)
(for use see #41)
24. Prostate Triangle (Sacral Center—Gonad
Minor Center—Prostate point)
27. Fertility Triangles (a progression of five
triangles)
27. Advanced Fertility Triangles (Sacral....
Adrenals—Male gonads—Female gonads; then
Sacral... Adrenals—Gonads (as one)—Base
Center)
29. Triangle for the Practical Mystic (Sacral
Center—Throat Center—Ajna Center)
30. Triangle for Creative Energy Distribution
(Sacral Center—Throat Center—Ajna Center)
41. Feet Triangle (Sacral Center—Feet minors)
Syphilis Triangle (Sacral Center—Base Center
—Throat Center), see Chapter 8
Third Ray Technique (Sacral Center—Throat
Center—Base Center), see Chapter 10 for use
SPLEEN CENTER
2. Spleen Triangle of Force (Spleen Minor Center
 —Sacral Center—Base Center)
4. Lower Prana Triangle (Spleen Minor Center—
Base Center—Throat Center)
33. Triangle for the Dying (Spleen Minor Center—
Lung Minor Centers—Heart Center)
SOLAR PLEXUS CENTER
2. Spleen Triangle (Solar Plexus Center—Spleen
Minor Center—Spleen Center)
5. Liver Triangle (Solar Plexus Center—Liver
Minor Center—Liver Center)
5. Liver Triangle of Force (Solar Plexus Center
—Stomach Minor Center—Liver Minor Center)
5. Gall Bladder Triangle (Solar Plexus Center—
Stomach Minor Center—Gall Bladder point)
6. Stomach Triangle (Solar Plexus Center—
Stomach Minor Center—Stomach Center)
10. Triangle for Imperil (Solar Plexus Center—
Head Center—Heart Center)
11. PSL Triangle (Pancreas—Stomach—Liver)
12. Diabetes Triangle (Solar Plexus Center—
Stomach Minor Center—Base Center)
13. Lower Clearing Triangle (Solar Plexus Center
—Heart Center—Ajna Center)
14. Triangles of Stability and Right Group Relation
(Solar Plexus Center—Heart Center—Throat
Center; then Solar Plexus Center—Sacral
Center—Base Center)
15. Triangle for Dispelling Astral Glamor (Astral
Body—Solar Plexus Center—Heart Center)
25. Shock Triangle (Solar Plexus Minor Center—
Ileocaecal Valve point—Sigmoid point)
61. Taste Triangle (Solar Plexus Center—Spleen
Minor Center—Tongue point, or Solar Plexus
Center and Spleen Minor Center—Brain point
—Tongue point)
66. Triangle of Spiritual Facilitation (Solar Plexus
Center with the triangle: Ajna Center—Heart
Center—Heart-in-the-Head Center)
67. Triangle Aiding Self-Consciousness (Solar
Plexus Center—Ajna Center—Heart Center
[and planetary and cosmic connections])
Triangle of Transmutation (for cancer) (Solar
Plexus Center—Sacral Center—Throat Center),
 see Chapter 8
Sixth Ray Technique (see Chapter 10 for use)
HEART CENTER
23. Third Initiation Triangle (Heart Center—
Throat Center—Seven Head Centers)
31. Triangle of Yoga (Buddhic—Astral—Monad)
32. Heart Triangle (Heart Center—two Lung
Minor Centers)
34. Immune Triangle (Heart Center—Spleen
Center—Thigh Bone Marrow Point, Heart
Center—Thymus Point—Spleen Point, Heart
Center—Spleen Center—Heart in the Head
Center)
35. Lymphatic Triangle (Heart Center—Lymph
duct points)
37. Blood Pressure Triangle (Heart Center—Ajna
Center—Spleen Minor Center) (also, Alta
Major Center—Vagus Nerve Center—Base
Center)
39. Samadhi Triangles (Heart Center—Spleen
Center—Solar Plexus with Head Center—Base
 Center—Spleen Center)
57. Touch Triangle (Heart Center or Solar Plexus
Center—Hand minors)
Second Ray Technique (Heart Center—Base
Center (opposing Sacral)—Solar Plexus Center
(opposing Ajna), see Chapter 10 for use
Seventh Ray Technique (Heart Center (if second
ray soul)—Heart-in-the-Head Center—Base
Center), see Chapter 10 for use
57. Psoriasis Triangle: Heart Center—Base Center
—Sacral Center
VAGUS NERVE CENTER
1. Pranic Triangle (Vagus Nerve Center—Center
Below Heart Center—Spleen Minor Center)
36. Allergy Triangle (Vagus Nerve Center—
Adrenal Minutes)
40. Diaphragm Triangle (Vagus Nerve Center—
Diaphragm points)
THROAT CENTER
3. Triangle of Immortality (Throat Center—
 Pituitary gland—Pineal gland, transmuted from
Spleen Triangle of Force)
9. GIT Triangles (Throat Center—Solar Plexus
Center—Intestinal Point)
25. Triangles of Force (Breastbone minor—Breast
minors, and Sacral Center—Solar Plexus minor
—Base Center)
28. Triangle of Energy (Throat Center—Sacral
Center—Physical Body)
41. Service Triangles (Throat Center—to centers
on Shoulders, Elbows and Hands)
42. Parathyroid Triangle (Throat Center—
Parathyroid points)
43. Respiratory Triangle (Throat Center—Lung
minors)
45. Sinus Triangle (Throat Center—Solar Plexus
Center—Sinus points)
49. Migraine Triangle (Throat Center—Pituitary
gland—Pineal gland)
50. Creative Fusion Triangle (Throat Center—
Heart Center—Ajna Center)
56. Hearing Triangle (Throat Center—Ear minors)
60. Triangle of the First Thread (Throat Center—
Ajna—Head Center)
60. Triangle of the Second Thread (Throat Center
—Solar Plexus Center—Heart Center)
60. Triangle for Dissipating Maya (joining the
triangles of Illusion and Glamor)
60. Triangle of the Third Thread (Throat Center—
Heart Center—Spleen minor)
Tuberculosis Triangle (Throat Center—Solar
Plexus Center—Heart Center), see Chapter 8
Cancer Triangle (same as Triangle of
Transmutation), see Chapter 8
AJNA CENTER
47. Triangle for the Nerves (Ajna Center—Alta
Major Center—Vagus Nerve Center)
48. Cranio-Sacral Triangle (Ajna Center—Alta
Major Center—Sacral Center)
60. Triangle for Dissipating Glamor (Ajna Center
—Left Eye—Right Eye)
Fifth Ray Technique (Ajna Center—Throat
Center—Alta Major Center). See Chapter 10
 for use
63. Triangle for the Majority (Ajna Center—Solar
Plexus Center—Sacral Center)
66. Triangle for Spiritual Facilitation (Ajna Center
—Heart Center—Heart-in-the-Head Center,
with Solar Plexus Center)
HEAD CENTER
7. Astral Preparation Triangle (Head Center of
Healer—Solar Plexus Center of Healer—Astral
Body of Patient)
8. Mental Congestion Triangle (Head Center of
Healer—Head Center of Patient—Centers
below diaphragm of Patient)
14. Responsive Triangle (Soul of Patient—Ajna
Center—Heart Center)
15. Triangle for Dispelling Astral Glamor (Soul:
Astral Body—Solar Plexus Center—Heart
Center)
16. Consciousness Stream Triangle (Head Center
—Astral Body—Solar Plexus Center)
25. Life Stream Triangle (Head Center—Heart
 Center—Spleen Center)
26. Triangle for Sexual Problems (Head Center—
Throat Center—Sacral)
33. Triangles for Death:
Desire Triangle (Soul—Astral Body—Solar
Plexus Center)
Withdrawing Triangle (Soul—Head Center—
Ajna Center)
38. Kundalini Triangle (Head Center—Heart
Center—Base Center.... Vagus Nerve Center)
44. Triangle of Purpose (Brain—Mind—Soul Will
[Sacrifice Petals])
51. Head Triangle (Head Center—Ajna Center—
Alta Major Center)
52. Triangle of Being (Head Center—Heart Center
—Base Center)
53. Triangle of the White Magician (Heart in the
Head Center—Heart Center—Throat Center)
54. Synchronizing Triangle (Head Center of Healer
—Center of Healer and Corresponding Center
in Patient)
58. Triangle of the Third Seed Group (Head Center
 —Heart Center—Ajna Center)
59. Eye Triangle (Head Center—Eye minors),
(four specific triangles).
60. Triangle for Dissipating Illusion (Head Center
—Ajna Center—Right Eye minor)
64. Triangle for Average Humanity (Soul—Head
Center—Solar Plexus Center)
65. Triangle for Imbeciles and Animals (Group
soul—Solar Plexus Center—Spleen minor
center)
Radiatory Triangle (Soul—Brain—Heart
Center.... Aura)
Greater Triangle (Soul Ray—Appropriate
Vehicle—Heart Center), see Chapter 7,
Attunement with the Governing Ray Energies
Lesser Triangle (Head Center—Ajna Center—
Center Related to the Soul Ray), see Chapter 7,
Attunement with the Governing Ray Energies
First Ray Technique (Head Center—Head
Center—Center of distress), see Chapter 10 for
use
Sixth Ray Technique (Head Center—Solar
Plexus Center—Heart Center), see Chapter 10
for use
 13.
CONCLUSION

I realize that, by opening up esoteric healing in

this way, it could be misused. My hope is that it
will not be. Esoteric Healing has its own in-built
safeguard: the less one knows about its use, the
less harm can be done either to oneself or to
others. On the other hand, the more that is known
about the philosophy, psychology, and
pneumapharmacology, the more harm can be done
both to oneself and to one’s patients (this would
require deliberate abuse of the techniques). The
real safeguard as one advances in occultism and
white magic is, of course, the amount and quality
of one’s knowledge. By the time one has explored
esotericism in general and esoteric healing in
particular, the probability of willfully wanting to
harm another or even unwillingly seeking to harm
is both extremely unlikely and extremely small. But
falls are possible, even to the most advanced. So
we are called on to maintain steady watchfulness,
for, as the saying goes, “the price of liberation is
constant vigilance.”
My hope is that those of you who have bought
this book will use it, first by studying it—(along
with the works of the Ageless Wisdom), noting the
essentials and building up confidence by applying
it to yourselves and on close friends and
colleagues. If you can, start an esoteric healing
clinic with one or two others. Study this book with
them. Practice with them. When real patients are
magnetically drawn to you, the importance and
power of this healing technique will be realized.
The tool of esoteric healing is the power of thought
as it controls and directs energy. There is a danger
in this work just as there is in any science. But
with the motivation for success backed up by love,
harmlessness and service, safety is assured. And
remember, energy follows thought.
 The Master Djwhal Khul thought it necessary
that esoteric healing be revealed publicly in the
twentieth century. The disciple Alice A. Bailey
considered it warranted. Her book was first
published in 1953. It has taken over fifty years of
subjective group work for a complete and practical
text on esoteric healing to be written and published
based on her book. I hope this greatly up-dated text
book will find its place beside all earnest
practicing healers of every generation. Esoteric
healing has a great future—both in its own
development and its partnership and bridging work
with the whole field of medicine. Hold true to its
roots!
This book is just a beginning. There came a
time when I had to simply accept I could never
complete this book! There is a wealth of material
still waiting to be collated and utilized by the
esoteric healer. I refer especially to that vast body
of knowledge called esoteric astrology, which,
when applied under the Law of Correspondence,
will become a specialist facet of esoteric healing.
There is also the whole issue of the use of the rays
in healing which has been touched on in this book.
This too has an importance beyond our reckoning.
In the main, esoteric healers are not yet ready for
these aspects of esotericism. There is still more
than enough for us to work with and to learn. In this
manner we are preparing the way for future
esoteric healers. And by learning all that is in this
book, we will be more than made ready to take on
those “heavyweights” of the rays and esoteric
astrology if and when necessary. So this book
remains a “guide” and “preparation” to potential
and to established esoteric healers.
I wish you well in this medicine of the future.
“MAY HEALING BE IN YOUR WINGS!”
 “Brother, I do not come to offer you any
dogmas and I do not ask you to believe in that
which so many others believe. I only exhort you
to independent enlightenment, to use your own
mind, developing it instead of letting it become
dull.... I implore you to be persons with right
views, persons who toil untiringly for the
acquisition of real knowledge which will prevail
over suffering.” —Lord Buddha
 14.
ESOTERIC HEALING
GROUP MEDITATION

A. GROUP FUSION (ESOTERIC INHALATION).

We affirm the fact of group fusion and
integration within the heart center of the world
group of healers. We say together:
“I am one with my group, and all that I have is
theirs. May the love which is in my soul pour forth
to them. May the strength which is in me lift and
aid them. May the thoughts which my soul creates
reach and encourage them.”
Alignment and Spiritual Penetration:
Let the group project a line of lighted energy
towards the spiritual Hierarchy of our planet; and
towards the Christ-Maitreya; and extend the line of
light towards Shamballa, the center where the Will
of God is known.
B. HIGHER INTERLUDE (ESOTERIC INHALED PAUSE).
Focussed in the group within the light of
Hierarchy, hold the contemplative mind steady,
perceiving this greater light, being impressed and
infused by the hierarchical Plan for the Planet.
Meditation. Reflect on one of the seed
thoughts: Love. Harmlessness. Sharing. Right
Relationships. Energy. Planetary Healing. Group
Awareness (or meditate on one of the mantrams in
Chapter 15).
C. PRECIPITATION AND ENERGY GROUNDING (ESOTERIC
EXHALATION).
Now, using the creative imagination, visualize
these healing energies streaming into the human
consciousness, directing a planned action on Earth
in line with the esoteric purpose of the ONE.
D. LOWER INTERLUDE (ESOTERIC EXHALED PAUSE).
Now, re-attune and refocus the consciousness
as a group, within the Second Ray Ashram of
Hierarchy. Together, in the group soul, sound the
affirmation:
“In the center of all Love I stand. From that
center I, the soul, will outward move. From that
center, I, the one who serves, will work. May the
love of the divine Self be shed abroad, in my heart,
through my group, and throughout the world.”

Distribution.

As we sound The Mantram of Unification or

The Great Invocation, visualize the energy of love
pouring throughout the planet.

The mantrams can be found on the following

pages.
End by sounding the sacred word, OM, three
times.
 15.
ANCIENT HEALING
MANTRAMS

For All Disciples

These words are written for all disciples, attend
you to them:
Before the eyes can see, they must be incapable of
tears;
Before the ear can hear, it must have lost its
sensitiveness;
Before the voice can speak in the presence of the
Masters,
it must have lost its power to wound;
Before the Soul can stand in the presence of the
Masters,
it must have washed its feet in the blood of the
 heart.

Mantram of Heart, Mind and Soul

Enter thy brother’s Heart and see his woe. Then
Speak.
Enter thy brother’s Mind and read his thoughts,
but only when thy thoughts are pure. Then Think.
Blend with thy brother’s Soul and know him as he
is.
Then focus on the Plan.

Group Healing Mantram

With purity of motive, inspired by a loving heart,
we offer ourselves for this work of healing.
This offer we make as a group and to the one we
seek to heal.

Radiatory Mantram
May the love of the One Soul, focussed in this
group,
radiate upon you, my brother,
and permeate every part of your body—
healing, soothing, strengthening,
and dissipating all that hinders service and good
health.

Mantram of Unification
The sons of men are one, and I am one with them.
I seek to love, not hate;
I seek to serve and not exact due service;
I seek to heal, not hurt.

Let pain bring due reward of light and love.

Let the soul control the outer form, and life and all
events,
and bring to light the love that underlies the
happenings of the time.

Let vision come and insight.

Let the future stand revealed.
Let inner union demonstrate and outer cleavages be
 gone.
Let love prevail. Let all people love.

Mantram of the New Group of World Servers

May the power of the One Life pour through the
group of all true servers;
May the love of the One Soul characterize the lives
of all who seek to aid the Great Ones;
May we fulfill our part in the One Work through
self-forgetfulness, harmlessness and right
speech.

Noontime Recollection
I know, O Lord of Life and Love, about the need.
Touch my heart anew with love
That I, too, may love and give.

The Affirmation of the Disciple

I am a point of light within a greater Light
I am a strand of loving energy within the stream of
 Love divine.
I am a point of sacrificial Fire, focused within the
fiery Will of God.
And thus I stand.

I am a way by which all people may achieve.

I am a source of strength, enabling them to stand.
I am a beam of light, shining upon their way.
And thus I stand.

And standing thus, revolve

And tread this way the ways of all people,
And know the ways of God.
And thus I stand.

The Gayatri
O Thou Who givest sustenance to the universe,
From Whom all things proceed
To Whom all things return,
Unveil to us the face of the true Spiritual Sun
Hidden by a disc of golden Light
That we may know the Truth
And do our whole duty
As we journey to Thy sacred feet.

Mantram to Destroy Glamor

Radiance we are and power.
We stand forever with our hands stretched out,
linking the heavens and the earth,
the inner world of meaning and the subtle world of
glamor.
We reach into the light and bring it down to meet
the need.
We reach into the silent place
and bring from thence the gift of understanding.
Thus with the light we work
and turn the darkness into day.

The Soul Mantram

I am the Soul.
I am the Light Divine.
I am Love.
I am Will.
I am Fixed Design.

The Soul Mantram (full version)

I am the Soul. And also love I am.
Above all else I am both will and fixed design.
My will is now to lift the lower self into the light
divine.
This light I am.
Therefore, I must descend to where the lower self
awaits my coming.
That which desires to lift and that which cries
aloud for lifting are now at-one. Such is my
will.

Affirmation of Love
In the center of all love I stand.
From that center I, the soul, will outward move.
From that center I, the one who serves, will work.
May the love of the divine Self be shed abroad,
In my heart, through my group, and throughout the
 world.

Mantram of Group Unity

I am one with my group, and all that I have is
theirs.
May the love which is in my soul pour forth to
them.
May the strength which is in me lift and aid them.
May the thoughts which my soul creates reach and
encourage them.

Mantram for Money

O Thou in whom we live and move and have our
being,
The Power that can make all things new,
Turn to spiritual purposes the money in the world;
Touch the hearts of people everywhere
So that they may give to the work of the Hierarchy
That which has hitherto been given to material
satisfaction.
The New Group of World Servers needs money in
 large quantities.
I ask that the needed vast sums may be made
available.
May this potent energy of Thine
Be in the hands of the Forces of Light.

Into the Light Mantram

Into the light we move, beckoned thereto by You.
Out of the dark we come, driven thereto by the soul
of all.
Up from the earth we spring and into the ocean of
light we plunge.
Together we come.
Together we move, guided and led by the soul we
serve
And by You, the Master we know.
The master within and the Master without are One.
That One are we.
The One is all—
My soul, Your soul, the Master and the soul of all.
The Self
More radiant than the Sun,
Purer than snow,
Subtler than the ether,
Is the Self, the Spirit in my heart.
I am that Self. That Self am I.

Mantram of the Avatar on the White Horse

I stand within the Radiant Path;
I see the needed approach for the Lotus of Man.
You walk upon the Claiming Way;
Your descent is under the Law of Divine
Deliverance.

I came in Light; I came with Enlightened Mind.

I was the Illumined Third, the Rod of Radiation.
I fused substance with attractive Solar Fire.
You heard the challenge: Enter the Stream of Light.

I enfolded Wisdom; I embodied Peace

And the Force of Latent Submission.
I am the Cosmic Touch of Acquiescence.
Your way awaits my first Touch of Love.

The Way is open; the Path of Ascent stands ready;

Five steps, each raises your head.
The Approach of Appropriation must begin—
Unfold your wings: Love and Think and seek to
Serve.

I await the time: the energies three are absorbed.

Let them confer appropriation (may you see your
divinity).
Let them establish on Earth a station of Light and
Power.
Let them bring about a New World Order.

Let the Lotus and the Dragon and the Star activate
integration.

Service Mantram
O Lord Maitreya, the Christ,
We dedicate ourselves
To be a channel of Thy healing Love,
An instrument of Thy dynamic Peace,
An exponent of Thy compassionate Wisdom,
An expression of Thy fiery Will,
A manifestation of Thy redemptive Power.
To that service
We dedicate our life and our being.

The Great Affirmation

We stand in the consciousness of Brightest Light,
Allowing it to radiate through us
To all kingdoms of the Earth.

We feel the consciousness of Purest Love,

Allowing it to pulse through our Heart,
Opening our Eyes to see Christ in all.

We move in the consciousness of Divine Purpose,

Following the Path traveled by our Teachers,
And knowing the Plan to be the same.
We share in the consciousness of True
Brotherhood,
Where creativity and joy are understood,
As we build the New World Order together.

In the Master’s consciousness

We serve the Light and the Love—
Empowering all on Earth.

The Great Invocation

From the point of Light within the Mind of God
Let light stream forth into the minds of all people.
Let Light descend on Earth.

From the point of Love within the Heart of God

Let love stream forth into the hearts of all people.
May Christ return to Earth.

From the center where the Will of God is known

Let purpose guide the little wills of all people—
The purpose which the Masters know and serve.

From the center which we call the race of humanity

Let the Plan of Love and Light work out
And may it seal the door where evil dwells.

Let Light and Love and Power restore the Plan on

Earth

The Great Invocation

A Mantram for the New Age and for all Humanity
From the point of Light within the Mind of God
Let light stream forth into the minds of men.
Let Light descend on Earth.
From the point of Love within the Heart of God
Let love stream forth into the hearts of men.
May Christ return to Earth.
From the centre where the Will of God is known
Let purpose guide the little wills of men—
The purpose which the Masters know and serve.
From the centre which we call the race of men
Let the Plan of Love and Light work out
And may it seal the door where evil dwells.
Let Light and Love and Power restore the Plan on
Earth.
Many religions believe in a World Teacher or Savior, knowing
him under such names as the Christ, the Lord Maitreya, the Imam
Mahdi, the Bodhisattva, and the Messiah, and these terms are used
in some of the Christian, Hindu, Muslim, Buddhist and Jewish
versions of the Great Invocation.
Men and women of goodwill throughout the world are using
this Invocation in their own language. Will you join them in using the
Invocation every day—with thought and dedication?
By using the Invocation and encouraging others to use it, no
particular group or organization is sponsored. It belongs to all
humanity.
From the website http://www.lucistrust.org/invocation/
 16.
USEFUL ADDRESSES

Godshaer Herbal Healing Clinic

The Old Stables, Ducking Stool Lane,
Christchurch, Dorset BH23 1DS, U.K.
e-mail: alanhopking@godshaer.co.uk –
www.godshaer.co.uk
This is the clinic run by Alan Hopking.
Healing and herbal medicine. It is open for
consultation by appointment.

International Network of Esoteric Healing

(Reg. Charity No. 1032492)
Registered Office: The Hayloft, Palmers Road,
Emsworth, Hampshire
P0107DL, U.K.
e-mail: info@ineh.org
www.ineh.org or the following branches of INEH:
USA: www.esoterichealing.com; Canada:
www.guerisonesoterique.com;
Germany: www.mit-liebe-heilen.de;
Czech Republic: www.esoternileceni.cz;
Greece: www.global-education.org
For details of the Network in over 20
countries, please write to the INEH Secretary.

University of the Seven Rays (Faculty of

Healing)
128 Manhattan Ave., Jersey City Heights, NJ
07307, USA
www.sevenray.com
Degree courses (MSE) on many different
esoteric subjects including a three-year intensive
in Esoteric Healing, pioneered and co-taught by
Alan Hopking in USA and UK. The USR also has a
high quality journal: The Journal of Esoteric
Psychology.

Global Academy of Esoteric Healing

Principal: Alan Hopking –
www.godshaer.co.uk/GAEH.php
Now working entirely within the internet,
GAEH endeavors to supply assistance to all
esoteric healers, answering all questions.

Lucis Trust/Arcane School

UK: Suite 54, 3 Whitehall Court, London SW1A
2EF
USA: 120 Wall Street, 24th Floor, New York, NY
10005
www.lucistrust.org
The most balanced and esoteric training in
meditation and service so far available on our
planet. Excellent journal, publications and leaflets.

The Esoteric Healer

(Journal of the International Network of Esoteric
Healing)
The Editors, 27 South Road, Chorleywood, Herts
WD3 5AS, England
The first esoteric healing research journal on
our planet. Published biannually since 1985.
Covers all aspects of esoteric healing including
articles and news of esoteric healing around the
world. Articles, research information, letters,
information about esoteric healing welcome.
Editors: Alan Hopking and Helen Frankland.
Sample articles on the web: ww.ineh.org or
information about the Journal, e-mail
info@ineh.org

Institute of Planetary Synthesis

PO Box 128, CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland –
www.ipsgeneva.com
Working to make known the Ten Seed Groups
as a possible basis for the future world
civilization; to help establish a University for
Planetary Synthesis for the practice of the science
of man; to promote cooperation on a global scale
among farsighted individuals, groups and
organizations. Many pamphlets and publications.
Highly recommended.
Meditation Mount
PO Box 566, Ojai, CA 93023, USA –
www.meditation.com
An excellent programme of meditation and
study for all stages and ages. Highly recommended.

Sundial House
PO Box 181, Tunbridge Wells, Kent, TN3 9ZA
England, UK
www.sundialhouse.4t.com
A well-established meditation program by
correspondence. Many excellent books and
booklets. Highly recommended.

World Service Intergroup

www.synthesis.tc
The WSI is an international network of
Ageless Wisdom groups committed to developing
intergroup contact, cooperation and synthetic,
subjective work. The purpose of the WSI is to
generate a focused, conscious and deliberate
intergroup effort to specifically assist the
Externalization of the Hierarchy and the
Reappearance of the Christ.

GandhiServe Foundation
Rathausstrasse 51a, 12105 Berlin, Germany
www.gandhiserve.org
GandhiServe, a charitable foundation, aims to
spread the ethics of nonviolence by disseminating
information about and popularizing Mahatma
Gandhi’s life and works.

Pathways To Peace
PO Box 1057, Larkspur, CA 94977, USA
www.pathwaystopeace.org
Pathways To Peace, a pioneer not-for-profit,
non-partisan, local/global Peacebuilding,
consulting (UN Consultative II Status, ECOSOC)
and educational organization.

World University
Desert Sanctuary Campus
P.O. Box 2470, Benson, Arizona 85602, USA
www.worlduniversity.org
The purpose of the World University is to
inspire the world’s peoples of goodwill to place
their humanity above their nationality, to elevate
their faith above their creed, and to reconcile the
many diverse cultural and ideological beliefs into
a synthesis of understanding.

Artists Helping Artists

PO Box 2529, Aptos, CA 95001-2529, USA
http://www.artistshelpingartists.org
When artists, visionaries and humanitarians
gather in proximity and share creative works and
missions, anything becomes possible. Beauty is
increased ... and civilization itself is healed and
transformed.
 Appendix B:
PHOTOS
DEMONSTRATING THE
TRIANGLE CIRCUITS OF
ESOTERIC HEALING
 1. The position of patient and healer at the
beginning of the treatment. The position for
doing Alignment and Attunement, the Higher
Triangles to the opening of the healing triangle
(Chapter 7, Beginning the act of healing.

2. Triangle of transfer (#6)

3. Diagnosis (Chapter 7). Note the position of the
right hand as it holds the five centers in the Ajna.
4. Vitalization of the bodies of the patient (see
Chapter 7). Note: the healer sits to give this
treatment.
5. Esoteric healing treatment (here doing the
Synchronizing Triangle, see Chapter 7).
6. The two Triangles of Force (#25). Note the use
of the three fingers of both hands as they connect
 with these two triangles.

7. The Head Triangle (#51). Note: The ajna is

holding the crown center, the right hand holds the
ajna, and the left hand holds the alta major
center. Note also the hands are held well away
from the patient’s head.
8. Triangle of Being (#52)
 9. Eye Triangles (#59). Note: Healer stands in
front of the patient and the hands are well away
from the patient’s head..
 10. Part of the closing procedure (Chapter 7),
surrounding the patient with protective energy.
11. Sealing the esoteric healing triangle.
 12. Ending the healing treatment.

A. Alignment. The healer at the start of the

healing treatment making his spiritual alignment
 and attunement (see Chapter 7).

B. Esoteric healing: general positioning. The

healer usually stands (or sits) at the back of the
patient (who usually sits). Note the distance the
healer is from the patient and the distance of his
hands from the body of the patient.

C. A general view of an esoteric healing

treatment being given.
 BIBLIOGRAPHY

Bailey, A. (no date). Unpublished letters.

Bailey, A. (1930). The soul and its mechanism:
The problem of psychology. New York: Lucis
Publishing Co.
Bailey, A. (1944). Discipleship in the new age,
Vols. I and II. New York: Lucis Publishing Co.
Bailey, A. (1950a). Letters on occult meditation.
New York: Lucis Publishing Co.
Bailey, A. (1950b). Telepathy and the etheric
vehicle. New York: Lucis Publishing Co.
Bailey, A. (1951–1970). A treatise on the seven
rays. v. 1 (Esoteric psychology), v. 2 (Esoteric
psychology), v. 3 (Esoteric astrology), v. 4
(Esoteric healing), v. 5 (The Rays and
initiations). London & New York: Lucis
 Publishing Co.
Bailey, A. (1954). Education in the new age. New
York: Lucis Publishing Co.
Bailey, A. (1957). The externalisation of the
hierarchy. New York: Lucis Publishing Co.
Bailey, A. (1962). A treatise on cosmic fire. New
York: Lucis Publishing Co.
Bailey, A. (1973). Glamor: A world problem.
London & New York: Lucis Publishing Co.
Bailey, A. (1979). A treatise on white magic, or,
the way of the disciple. London & New York:
Lucis Publishing Co.
Bailey, A. (1988). The light of the soul, its
science and effect: A paraphrase of the Yoga
sutras of Pantanjali with commentary by Alice
A. Bailey. New York: Lucis Publishing Co.
Baker, D. (1997). The egoic lotus. Baker
Publications.
Bhagavadgita (Swami Prabhavandanda & C.
Isherwood, transl.)
Blavatsky, H.P. (1977). The secret doctrine, vol I
and II. California: Theosophical Publ. House.
Goethe, J.W. (1780). Wanderers Nachtlied.
Hawking, S. (2001). The Universe in a Nutshell,
New York: Bantam Books.
Hopking, A. (1988). The esoteric healing
handbook. Christchurch: Godshaer Publishing
Co.
Hopking, A. (1990). Advancing in esoteric
healing. Christchurch: White Ways Publishing
Co.
Hopking, A. (1991). Practical guide to estoric
healing. Christchurch: White Ways Publishing
Co.
Hopking, A. (1994). The emergence of the
planetary heart. Christchurch: Godshaer
Publishing Co.
Johnston, B. (1983). New age healing. England:
Private printing, England.
Kaptchuk, T.J. (1987). Chinese medicine. London:
Rider & Co.
Kauffman, S. (1995). At home in the universe: The
search for laws of self-organization and
complexity. New York: Oxford University
 Press.
Krishnamacharya, K.E. (1983). Spiritual
astrology. India: WTT.
Lansdowne, Z.F. (1987). The chakras and esoteric
healing. Maine: Samuel Weiser.
Laurency, H.T. (1979). The philosopher’s stone.
Lawrence Publishing Foundation.
Laurency, H.T. (1995). Pamphlet on the Secret of
the Sphinx. Lawrence Publishing Foundation.
Leadbeater, C.W. (1925). Masters and the path.
Chicago: Theosophical Press.
Leadbeater, C.W. (1997). Monad. Kessinger
Publishing Co..
McMillan, J. Private paper.
Nga-kpa Chögyam (1988). Journey into vastness:
A handbook of Tibetan meditation techniques.
Longmead, Shaftesbury, Dorset: Element Books.
Oken, A. (1990). Soul-centered astrology. Bantam
Books.
Powell, A.E. (1978). The causal body and the
ego. London: Theosophical Publ. House.
Robbins, M.D. (1988, 1996). Tapestry of the
 Gods, Vol I & II. New Jersey: Seven Rays
Publishing.
Roerich, H. (1971). Foundations of Buddhism.
New York: Agni Yoga Society.
Steiner, R. (1963). Path to initiation into the
lesser mysteries.Rudolf Steiner Press.
Steiner, R. (1975). Spiritual science and
medicine. Rudolf Steiner Press.
Steiner, R. (1985). Theosophy: An introduction to
the supersensible knowledge of the world and
the destination of man. New York:
Anthroposophic Press.
Taber’s Cyclopedic Medical Dictionary (1977).
Tansley, D. (1972). Radionics and the subtle
anatomy of man. England: Health Science
Press.
Tennyson, A. (1942). The lotus eaters.
Thera, N. (1983). Heart of Buddhist meditation.
London: Rider Books.
Two Disciples (1982). The rainbow bridge.
California: The Triune Foundation.
Two Students (1985). Death: The great adventure.
New York: Lucis Publishing Co.
 SELECTED READING

Agni Yoga Society

Agni Yoga (Agni Yoga Series, 1954).
AUM (1929).
Brotherhood (1952).
Fiery World (1976).
Heart (1934).
Hierarchy (1977).
Infinity I & II (1957).
Leaves off Morya’s Garden I & II (1952,
1953).

Assagioli, R. (1975). Psychosynthesis. London:

Turnstone Books
Assagioli, R. (1973). The act of will. New York:
Viking Press.
Bailey, A. (1949). The destiny of the nations.
New York: Lucis Publishing Co.
Bailey, A. (1951). Initiation, human and solar.
New York: Lucis Publishing Co.
Bailey, A. (1961). Consciousness of the atom.
New York: Lucis Publishing Co.
Bailey, A. (1976). The reappearance of the
Christ. New York: Lucis Publishing Co.
Bailey, F. (1979). The spirit of masonry. London:
Lucis Press Ltd.
Bailey, M. (1990). A learning experience.
London: Lucis Press Ltd.
Baker, D. (1977). The seven rays: Keys to the
mysteries. Wellingborough: Aquarian Press
Baker, D. (1974). The jewel in the lotus.
Essendon, Herts., England: D. Baker “Little
Elephant.”
Beesly, R.P. (1969). The robe of many colours.
England: College of Psycho-therapeutics.
Besant, A. (1908). The ancient wisdom.
Theosophical Publ. Soc.
Bohm, D. (1981). The implicate order. London:
 RKP.
Brennan, B. (1988). Hands of light. Bantam
Books.
Burr, H.S. (1972). The fields of life: Our links
with the universe. New York: Ballantine
Books.
Capra, F. (1976). The Tao of physics. England:
Fontana.
Davidson, J. (1988). The web of life. Essex: C.W.
Daniel, Essex.
Dethlefsen, T. & Dahlke, R. (1990). The healing
power of illness. England: Element Books.
Eastcott, M.J. (1984). Meditation and the rhythm
of the year. Kent: Sundial House.
“The Esoteric Healer,” Journal of the
International Network of Esoteric Healing.
England: WhiteWays Publishing Co.
Gerber, R. (1988). Vibrational medicine. Santa
Fe, NM: Bear and Co.
Gordon, R. (1984). Your healing hands. Berkeley,
CA: Wingbow Press.
Hall, R. et al. (1980). Fundamentals of clinical
 endocrinology. Pitman Medical.
Hastings, A.C. (ed.) (1981). Health for the whole
person. New York: Bantam Books.
Jayasuriya, W.F. (1976). The psychology and
philosophy of Buddhism. Malaysia: BMS.
Jurriaanse, A. (1978). Bridges. South Africa:
Bridge Trust.
Jurriaanse, A. (1988). All is relative. South Africa:
Inner Space Publishers.
Karagulla, S. (1967). Breakthrough to creativity.
De Vorss.
Karagulla, S. (1989). The chakras and the human
energy fields. Quest Books.
Krishnamacharya, K.E. (1976). Yoga of Patanjali.
India: WTT.
Laurence, D.R. & Black, J.W. (1978). The
medicine you take. UK: Fontana.
Laurency, H.T. (1979). The knowledge of reality.
Sweden: HTL Publ Foundation.
Laurency, H.T. (1979). The philosopher’s stone.
Lawrence Publishing Foundation.
Leadbeater, C.W. (1997). Monad. Kessinger
 Publishing Co.
Le Shan, L. (1984). You can fight for your life.
Thorsons, Northants.
Medical Group Theosophical Research Centre
London (1958). The mystery of healing. UK:
TPH.
Morrish, F. (1952). Outline of astro-psychology.
London: Rider & Co.
Pagels, H.R. (1982). The cosmic code. Bantam
New Age Books.
Parsell, C. (2003). The best of the best. Nevada
City, CA: Blue Dolphin Publishing.
Powell, A.E. (1979). The etheric double. London:
Theosophical Publ. House.
Schmidt, G. (1980). The dynamics of nutrition.
Bio-Dynamic Lit.
Spangler, D. (1977). Towards a planetary vision.
Findhorn Foundation.
Steiner, R. (1963). Path to initiation into the
lesser mysteries. Rudolf Steiner Press.
Steiner, R. (1975). Spiritual science and
medicine. London: Rudolf Steiner Press.
Steiner, R. (1985). Theosophy: An introduction to
the supersensible knowledge of the world and
the destination of man. New York:
Anthroposophic Press.
Stone, R. (1985). Health building. CRCS
Publications.
Tansley, D. (1984). The raiment of light. England:
RKP.
Thera, N. (1986). The vision of Dhamma. London:
Rider & Co.
Thera, S. (1981). The way of mindfulness.
Buddhist Publ. Soc.
Walker, B. (1977). Encyclopedia of esoteric man.
London: RKP.
 TOPIC LIST

accident
acidity
Activating Triangles
acupuncture
Adam and Eve
addiction
to occult phenomena
adrenal glands
aggression
Ahriman
AIDS
ajna
ajna center
Akasa
alignment
and attunement
lack of
Allergy Triangle
aloneness, outer and our inner cooperation
alta major center
ambition
amniotic fluid
amplification technique
ancestors
angelic beings
anger, repressed
ankylosing spondelitis
Annunciation
anorexia
antahkarana
building of
antisocial behavior
anus
anxiety
apparitions
appointments
Aquarian
arrhythmia
arrogance
arthritic attacks
arthritis
artist
“As If” principle
ascendant
associative disassociation states
asthma
astral body, entity of
astral instability
Astral Preparation Triangle
astral-plane related diseases
astrology
Asuras
atheism, rigid
atherosclerosis
attachment
AUM
aural difficulties
auras
auric toxins
autism
autoimmune diseases
autonomic nerve difficulties
average person
problem of
awkwardness, social

babies
babyhood
back pain, low
bacterial conditions
balancing the centers
baptism
base center
Basic Triangle
Beginningless Enlightenment
Big Bang
bigotry
biliousness
birth, new
Black Lodge
bladder diseases
blindness
bliss
blood
-air exchange
quality of
stream
blood pressure
high
Blood Pressure Triangles
Bodhisattva
bone
broken
fragility
brain
disorders
 lesions
tumors
breasts
breath
shortness of
breathing
techniques
bronchitis
Buddha
Buddhahood
building devas
bulemia
burial

cancer
bowel
intestine
skin
stomach
candida
cannibalism
cardiac failure
cardiovascular system
carelessness
carotid body
causal body
cerebellum
cerebrum
chaos
character, pure
chemicals, industrial misuse of
children
chimeras
Christ
consciousness
chronic fatigue syndrome
circulatory
insufficiency
problems
circulatory system
clairaudience
clairvoyance
classism
cleavages (psychological)
coccyx
cochlea
coldness
colitis
ulcerative
colon, spastic
color
orange
comatose state
communication
compromise, over-eagerness for
conception
confidence, lack of
confidentiality
confusion
congestion
consciousness
continuity of
higher
mental
stream
Consciousness Stream Triangle
constipation
contempt for mental limitations in others
control, relentless
cosmetic surgery
cosmetics
cosmic coma,
Cosmic Plan, restoration of
cough
cranial nerve
Cranio-Sacral Triangle
creation
creative
 blocks
life force
thread
Creative Fusion Triangle
cremation
crime
criticism
Crohn’s disease
crown center
cruelty
sadistic
crystallization
cults, exclusive
cures
cysts

danger
death
dicing with
fear of
of a loved one
survival of the subtle bodies after
time of
debility, diseases due to
decisions
delirium
delusions
denial
dependency
depression
black
desire
inhibited
misapplied
misuse of
transmuting to aspiration
despair
destructiveness
detachment
devil
deviousness
devitalization
diseases due to
devotion
altruistic
unreasoning
dharma
diabetes
mellitus
Diabetes Triangle
Diabolos
diagnosis
Diaphragm Triangle
digestive diseases
digestive system
Dimensional Systemic Reality
disciple
problem of
disease
causes of
defining
dishonor of other life-forms
Dissipating Triangles
distrust
diverticulitis
divine filter
dizziness
doubt, excessive
dramatic type
dreams
of never dying
drugs
Dweller on the Threshold
dyslexia/catatonia
dyspepsia

ears
Earth
 as an energy being
education
egomaniac
egotism
electromagnetic pollution
elemental beings
elimination
embarrassment
emotional
imbalance
upheaval
emotionalism
emphysema
encephalitis
endocrine system
endrometriosis
energy follows thought
entities
environment
active on behalf of
responsibility to
epidemics
epilepsy
esophageal problems
esophagus
esoteric healing
 as a science
definition of
essential qualities of
five phases to the work of
laws and rules of
estrogen
eternal life
etheric
as reflection of the soul
body
energy, sources of
purifying
toxins
evil
cosmic
in the personality
mystery of
sealing door where dwells
evolution, aid to rapid
evolutionary ladder
exaggeration
excesses
excitement
exercise
for the ajna center
in visualization
expulsive technique
extroverts
Eye
of the Father
of the Mother
of the Son
eye problems
Eyes Triangle

face-lifts
factions
failure, sense of
family
relations
fanaticism
fear
of death
unconscious
unknown
Fear Transformation Triangle
Fear Triangle
Fertility Triangles
fervor
fibrocystic diseases
financial ruin
fingers, use of
Fire of Matter
First and Second Initiation Triangles
Fohat
food
foot binding
force, misuse of
form-building
Four Foundations of Mindfulness
fourth ether
fractors
freedom
frigidity
fungal diseases
fungus
future life
fuzzy thoughts

gall bladder
problems
gall stones
gastritis
gastrointestinal (GI)
sphincter spasm
tract problems
Gayatri
General Healing Triangles
genetic engineering, leading to perversion
germs
GIT Triangles
glamor
help to resolve
of curing others
physical
promoters of,
Glamor Triangle
glucose
gluttony
gonad glands
gout
Grand Man of the Heavens
grande mal
Great Bear
Great Illusion
greatest need
group
consciousness
healing
power of a
Group Mantram
guilt-complexes

habit of purity
hair
hallucinations
hands,
happiness
hara
hardness
harmlessness
hatred
head center
seven
working with
Head Triangle
headache
healer
protective measure for
selfishly motivated
healing
absent
asking for
definition of
distant
first
group, members of
methods, failure of
of the planet
of the planetary personality
 reality of
talking about
thought in
true
true work of
understanding the art of
Healing Triangle
opening
sealing
health
normal
three laws of
Hearing Triangle
heart
and nerve difficulties
attack
complaints
disorders
of the center
of the foetus
problems
rate
heart center
Heart of the Sun
Heart Triangle
heart-in-the-head
height
hiccups
hierarchy
Hierarchy of Masters
higher consciousness
Higher Triangle
homosexuality
HRT (hormone replacement therapy)
Huang Di
human relationships, right
hydrocephalus
hylozoism
hyperactivity
hyperglandular conditions
hypertension
hyperthyroidism
hypertrophy
hypoglycemia
hypothalamus
hypothyroidism
hysterectomies

idealism
organ of
rigid
ideé fixe
ileocaecal valve
illness, cause of
illusions
imagination
creative
Imam
imbecilities
Imhotep
Immortality Triangle
immune system
diseases of
Immune Triangles
immunity, true
Imperfect God
imperfection, release of
inadequacy on the physical plane
incarnation
cause of
incense
inclusiveness
indecisiveness
indifference
inertia
spiritual
infection
protection against
infectious diseases
acute viral
inferiority, sense of
infertility
influenza
inheritance
inherited
conditions
tendencies
inhibition
initiate
initiation
eighth
first
fourth
ninth
second
third
innocence at birth
insanity
insecurity
insomnia
insulin
intestine
introverts
intuition
 as a diagnostic tool
irreverence
irritable bowel syndrome
irritation
poison of
islets of Langerhans

jerking
Jesus
jewel
of the center
of the lotus
joy
Jupiter

kamaloca
karma
karmic help
keratosis
Khul, Djwhal
kidney
diseases
problems
stones
unilateral
killers
knees
kundalini
premature raising of
Kundalini Triangle
secondary

larynx
Law
of attraction
of Evil Sharing
of Liberation
of Magnetic Impulse
of Rebirth
laziness
legs
Lemuria
leprosy
leukemia
Life
Principle
Self
life
energy, four distribution agents of
stream
thread
Life Stream Triangle
liver
problems
liver center
Liver Triangle
Liver Triangle of Force
locomotor system
loneliness
Lords
of Love
of Sacrifice
love
as creative power
jealous
of being loved
petals
selfish
Lower Clearing Triangle
Lower Prana Triangle
Lucifer
lunar lords
lung
congestion
Lungs Triangles
lying
lymph
lymphatic
 glands
system
Lymphatic Triangle
lymphomas

magnetic aura around the head

magnetic healing
magnetism
Maitreya
malnutrition
manasic triangle
mania
manic depressive
manifestation, true cause of
manipulation
Mars
masochism
Matrix of the Universe
Maya, ending of
ME (chronic fatigue syndrome)
medical science
medicine, study of
meditation
medulla
oblongata
melatonin
memory
meningitis
menopause
mental
derangement
disorders
pride
shock
unit
Mental Congestion Triangle
Mercury
Messiah
metabolic
diseases
system
metabolism
miasms
migraine
Migraine Triangle,
minor centers
ear
eye
forty-nine
liver
lung
stomach
mis-identification
mistrust
monad
money
moodiness
Moon
Mother of the World
motive, pure
motivelessnes
mouth
mucus
multiple sclerosis
murderers
muscles
muscular control difficulties
muscular dystrophy
music
Mystery Centers
mystic

nadis
eye
narcissism,
narrowness
neatness
negativity in the environment
neoplasm
Neptune
nerves, trapped
Nerves Triangle
nervous
breakdown
disorders
illnesses
tension
nervous system
central
parasympathetic
sympathetic
neural illnesses
neuralgia
neuritis
neuroses
nightmares
nose

obesity
objectivity, excess
obsession
obsessive/compulsive behavior
opportunism
organs, extra
originality, lack of
osteoarthritis
osteoporosis
ovarian tumor
ovaries
over-accumulation of things
over-adaptablility
over-analysis
over-complex thoughts
over-concern with rules
over-sensitivity
over-study
“overcoming” of temptation, sin and evil
ozone depletion

pancreas
problems
panic
attacks
Panic Triangle
parasites
parathyroid glands
Parathyroid Triangle
Parkinson’s
PASE and PETA
Path of Initiation
path of service
Pathless Path
patient
how to speak to
questioning
two sides of
what questions to ask
will of
Peirazon
perfected man
perfection
pericarditis
permanent atom
astral
manasic
physical
personal relationships
personality, greater control of
personality ray
perversion
of magical processes and rituals
PETA
petals
petit mal
phantoms
pharynx
phobias
a world full of
pineal gland
calcification of
Piscean
Pisces
pituitary body
difficulties
pituitary gland
Plan on Earth
planet
cleansing of
ownership of
spiritualizing the
planetary
force
influences, three inherited
life, faults of
Logos
malfunction, inherited
prana
Pleiades
pleurisy
pneumonia
point
of friction
 of life
poison
politicians
possessiveness
postviral syndrome
Poussin, Nicolas
power, love of
pralaya
prana
assimilation of
five
pranic energies
five
seven forms of
Pranic Triangle
predisposing causes
pregnant women
Presence of Awareness of the Self as Enlightened
present moment
procreative energy
progesterone
prolapse
promiscuity
promised land, true
prostatic enlargement
Protecting Triangle
protection of three vital organs
psoriasis
psychic
excesses
phenomena
psychism
psychological types
psychometry
psychopaths
psychosis
puberty
punctuality
purification
purpose
cosmic
on earth

radiation
radiatory activity
radiatory healing
Radiatory Mantram
rainbow bridge, building of
rape, impulsive
Ray
Attunement
Chart
ray energies, five dominant
Ray Five
force
technique
Ray Four
technique
Ray One
technique
Ray Seven
energies
technique
Ray Six
disciples
technique
Ray Three
technique
Ray Two
disciples
technique
rays
seven Cosmic
reasoning mind
rebellion
rebirth
redemption of substance
regrets
rehabilitation
relationship problems
reproductive system
resentment
respiratory diseases
respiratory system
Respiratory Triangle
Responsive Triangle
retardation
retention
rheumatism
rigid order
rigidity
rising sign
Ruckshau

sacral center
of mental body
Sacral Triangle
Sacred Word
sadism
salvation
personal
Plan of,
Planetary (Universal)
Samadhi Triangles
Satana
satchitananda
Saturn
schizophrenia
sciatica
science
of energies
of laya yoga
of occultism
Science of Triangles
Scorpio
secret
of cosmic incarnation
of occult knowledge
of the Fire
to all true meditation work
Secret of the Lost Word
self-absorption in suffering
self-abuse
self-awareness
self-consciousness
self-denial
self-healing
self-immolation
self-pity
self-preservation
selfishness
semen
senility
sense organs
senses
five
separateness
resolve the problem of
separation of the sexes
separatism
separativeness
service
and creativity
in the world
right
Service Triangles
sex
as evil and wicked
cults
energy
function, perversion of
impulse, overdevelopment of
magic
organs
violent
sexual
 abuse
diseases
fears
identification difficulties
inhibition
misuse
perversions
suppression
sexually transmitted diseases
sharing
Shen Nong
Shock Triangle
shocks
shyness
Sight Triangle
sigmoid flexure
silence
sin
sinews
singers
singing
sinuses
Sirius
Siva
skin
sleep
sleeplessness, 88
slipped disc
smell
sense of
Smell Triangle
solar angels
solar plexus center
solar plexus minor center
solar plexus related diseases
solitariness
soul
dimension
guidance
language of
purpose
Soul Mantram
soul’s “garments”
Sound Triangle
sounds of all beings
speakers
speech
maladjustment syndromes
sperm count, low
spinal muscles
Spinal Triangles
spine
spirit and matter, relation of
spiritual
growth
practices, wrong
work
Spiritual Triad
spirochaeta pallida
spleen
astral
problems
spleen center
correspondence in the head center
spleen minor
Spleen Triangle of Force
stability, lack of
star, five-pointed
stimulating technique
stomach
ulcers
Stomach Triangle
stress
stroke
study group
subservience to habits
sudden infant death syndrome (SIDS)
suicidal tendencies
suicide
Sun
sun sign
sunlight
superiority
complex
sense of
suppression
survival
sutratma
swallowing
symptoms
aggravating
of disease
Synchronizing Triangle
syphilis
syphilitic diseases

taste
Taste Triangle
Taurus
teeth damage
telepathic rapport
telepathy
temper
temperament
temperamental problems
Tempter
tension
testes
testosterone
thalamus
thievery
Third Initiation Triangle
Third Seed Group Triangle
thoughtform
negative
Threads Triangle
throat center
thymosin
thymus gland
thyroid gland
thyroxin
tics
tidiness
tightness
timelessness
TMJ (jaw) clenching
tongue
nervous deviation of
ulcers
touch, sense of
Touch Triangle
toxicity
tranquillity
transmutation
of substance
transmuting the past
trauma
Triangle Aiding Self-Consciousness
Triangle for Addictions or Obsessions
Triangle for Average Humanity
Triangle for Dispelling Astral Glamor
Triangle for Dissipating Glamor
Triangle for Dissipating Illusion
Triangle for Dissipating Maya
triangle for groups struggling with the fogs and glamors
Triangle for Imbeciles and Animals
Triangle for Imperil
Triangle for Sexual Problems
Triangle for Spiritual Facilitation
Triangle for the Majority
triangle, how it works
Triangle of Becoming
Triangle of Being
Triangle of Energy
Triange of Matter
Triangle of Spiritual Facilitation
Triangle of the Second Thread
Triangle of the Third Thread
Triangle of the White Magician
Triangle of Transfer
Triangle of Transmutation
Triangles at Death
Triangles of Force
Triangles of Stability and Right Group Relation
triangles to awaken higher sight
trouble, source of
tuberculosis
miasm of
tumors
hard
soft
turmoil
twitches
Two Triangles of Force

ulcer
universal strife
Universe, redemption of
unpredictabilit
unreliability
Uranus
urethra
urine

vacillation
vaginitis
vagus nerve center
varicose
ulcers
veins
vegetable kingdom
vegetarian diet
ventricle, third
Venus
vertebrae
fused
violence
“virgin” of the body
Virgo
vision
inner
intuitive
microscopic
visualization
visualize, power to
vitality
low
withdrawal of
vitalization
of the bodies of the patient
vocal apparatus
vocation, changes in
voice
Vulcan

warfare
wars
Way
of Escape
of Final Return
of Loneliness
webs
damaged
white light
White Lodge
will
and breath
to be
wisdom
work, not ready for
working alone
world health
World Teacher, reappearance of
worry
worth, sense of

youth forces

Zero Point
ABOUT THE AUTHOR
 Alan Hopking was born in the copper-mining
town of Mufulira, Zambia, on May 12, 1950. At
twenty, while working in Cape Town, he was
initiated into Transcendental Meditation (TM). On
his first meditation under his initiator he was told
he had experienced Satchitananda (bliss
consciousness). He went to England and joined the
monastery of St. John in Oxford. After three years
he left and attended Shalesbrook Seminary, to train
as a priest for the Christian Community founded by
Rudolf Steiner. After two years he was sent out to
test his vocation, first in San Francisco for a year,
then to Coburg in Germany for a year. Here his
interest in the teachings of Alice A Bailey was
sparked again. While reading her book Esoteric
Healing, he decided he wanted to train in medicine
and healing. At twenty-eight, Alan returned to
England and enrolled as a full-time student of the
College of Phytotherapy. He graduated in 1981 as
a herbal practitioner. In 1982 he founded the
WhiteWays Group to study, meditate and practice
group healing. This group continued for fifteen
years. In 1984 he trained as an esoteric healing
practitioner under the tutelage of Brenda Johnston,
founder of the International Network of Esoteric
Healing. He graduated in 1985. Soon afterwards
he began to teach for INEH. This started and
continues Alan’s international teaching career of
esoteric healing taking him all over the world. He
served on the INEH committee for over 15 years
and became vice-president and remains an active
consultative member (as a Fellow); he co-edits the
biannual journal, The Esoteric Healer. In 1988 his
first book on esoteric healing was published. In
1991, after three years writing, he published his
Practical Guide to Esoteric Healing.
He was the first director of the Faculty of
Healing in the University of the Seven Rays, co-
teaching an advanced degree-level curriculum of
esoteric healing in California and in England. In
1994 he published the Emergence of the Planetary
Heart. In 1998 he founded the Global Academy of
Esoteric Healing under which he still teaches
today. In 2004 he graduated with a master’s degree
(MA) in philosophy. Alan is married with two
sons. He lives in Christchurch, England. He is still
in practice at his busy clinic of herbal medicine in
the town center. To contact him go to
www.godshaer.co.uk
NOTES
[1]
Another word for centers is chakras.
[2]
Reference to the University of the Seven Rays course on
esoteric healing and the Global Academy of Esoteric
Healing courses and seminars. See Chapter 16.
[3]
The author is well aware of the problem of writing in
masculine and feminine singular. The flow is disrupted with
forms such as his/her, and he/she or s/he. So, where the
singular must be chosen, he prefers to choose one or
other of the personal pronouns in order to keep the flow in
the written word. The author writes to inform not offend.
[4]
The soul is the spirit of the true self which expresses
itself as the personality and through it. Where this
expression is inhibited, illness arises.
[5]
The etheric body is the energy-giving life of the physical
body.
[6]
See also Chapter 8, “Treating the Three Inherited
Planetary Influences.”
[7]
The astral body is the body of emotions and feelings.
[8]Karma is good and bad sowing and reaping as the result
of past actions, in this life or in the past.
[9] For a full explanation of disease, see “Appendix A: Our
Cosmic Purpose.”
[10]I recommend as an excellent training for meditation:
The Arcane School, London, New York, Geneva. Two other
schools which have an excellent sequence of training in
meditation are the Sundial House training (Tunbridge
Wells, England) and the Meditation Mount training in Ojai,
California (addresses in Chapter 16).
[11]
a. Symptoms of Suffering are birth, old age, death,
sorrow, pain, grief, despair, the five aggregates of clinging
(to material form, feeling, perception, mental forms,
consciousness).
b. Origin of Suffering is craving (for the sensual, for
eternal existence, for non-existence).
c. Cessation of Suffering is the fading away of craving and
its extinction.
d. Path leading to the Cessation of Suffering consists of
right understanding, right thought, right speech, right
action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness,
right concentration.
[12]
For a full account of the Christ’s present influence and
what his second coming will do worldwide, see The
Emergence of the Planetary Heart (Hopking, 1994).
[13]
For a full account of the etheric body compiled from
Esoteric Healing by Alice Bailey, see The Esoteric
Healing Handbook (1988), “The Etheric Body” by Alan
Hopking.
[14]The personal pronouns of the original text have been
edited out in order to bring the material into an acceptable
modern idiom, as have exclusive references to the
masculine.
[15]
Of the three equivalent and irreducible aspects—matter,
motion, and consciousness—the primordial atoms or
monads are the smallest possible parts of primordial matter
and the smallest firm points for an individual
consciousness as it exists in this Cosmic Being’s
dimension while it is effecting the healing or repairing
what is called in esotericism, the Grand Plan. (See also
Laurency (1995), p. 27.)
[16]
Animals are un-self-conscious lives as yet, although
domestic animals, dolphins and even some birds are close
to the individualization initiation. The animal soul is the
fusion of the many (the group, or herd) as one.
[17]
For further amplification of this anatomy please consult
other books, e.g. The Egoic Lotus by Douglas Baker, The
Causal Body by A.E. Powell along with his other
compilations, Advancing in Esoteric Healing by Alan
Hopking, A Treatise on Cosmic Fire by Alice A. Bailey,
Rainbow Bridge by Two Disciples, Radionics and the
Subtle Anatomy of Man by D.V. Tansley.
[18]
Earlier I mentioned that there were only five pranic
energies. This depends on where you stand on the spiritual
Path. The higher you go or the more spiritually aware you
become, the more pranic energies become available for
your use. For instance, mineral beings, the so-called
gnomes of the earth, utilize only one energy; plant beings
wield two to three energies; animals use four and most
humans weave with five. But the more advanced humans,
rare in number, can work with seven pranic energies,
coming from the highest planes of consciousness.
[19]Antahkarana
is the esoteric bridge linking the
personality to the soul and spiritual triad.
[20]
Some of the most beautiful esoteric connections
involve the five-pointed star. It can be recognized in the
human form, which has five appendages from the body
(four limbs and a head), five fingers on each hand, and five
toes on each foot. There are five lobes to the lungs; there
are five senses. There are five centers which control
perfected man: the two head centers, heart center, throat
center and base center. There are five pranas. The nadis
have a fivefold sheath. There are five ventricles in the brain.
There are five Commandments and five Rules (Bailey,
1950a, pp. 184, 188). The Lord of the World, the Buddha,
the Christ, the Manu and the Mahachohan “create the five-
pointed star of Humanity at this time” (Bailey, 1951–70, v.
5, p. 90). There are five signs related to the unfoldment, in
time and space, of the human hierarchy: Cancer, Leo,
Scorpio, Capricorn and Pisces. We are in the fifth great
Root Race (called in ancient texts, the Aryan, long before
the German Nazis in this century perverted the name). This
race’s evolution has resulted in the five continents: Europe,
Africa, Asia, Australia and America. There are five energies
(there are usually five dominant ray energies at any time)
active during this period: Ray VI (passing out), Ray VII
(emerging), Ray II and Ray III (expressing the ray type of
the bulk of humanity at this time), and Ray I (which has
been evoked at this time because of humanity’s desperate
need).
[21]
The correspondences in parenthesis are mine.
[22]
See more about breath and healing in Chapter 5, Spleen
Center; also Chapter 6, Breathing techniques, and Chapter
8, regarding freeing ourselves from inherited taints.
[23]
The reader is asked to recall that a center or chakra is
the crossing point of a number of energy lines (meridians
and nadis). On entry the energy discharged, transformed
and recharged according to the constant and multiple input;
the energy is then passed out (output) of the center to the
etheric body and physical body according to the particular
magnetism of the energy released, taking with it its effect
on tissue and cells, organs and systems—hence the
recommended position behind the patient to hold the
center in the etheric spine. Inflow and outflow to and from
the center occurs all the time and all round the chakra.
There is really no one entry or exit point.
[24]
To find out if there is an esoteric healing clinic near
you, wherever you live in the world, you can write to
International Network of Esoteric Healing. See the address
at the back of the book. www.ineh.org or for USA,
www.esoterichealing.com
[25]Telepathy
is related to Rule 1, see Chapter 2. For more
information on telepathy, see Esoteric Healing pages 525
and 550, and Telepathy and the Etheric Vehicle pp. 27-8,
both by Alice Bailey, and The Emergence of the Planetary
Heart by Alan Hopking.
[26]
For example, Soul Centered Astrology by Alan Oken or
Best of the Best by Cheryl Parsell.
[27]Esoteric
healing is healing by groups, but DK indicates
that “it is not always necessary or possible to meet and
work together in group formation. This work can be carried
forward efficiently and potently, if the members work as a
subjective group; each should then follow the instructions
each day and as if he were working in his group in tangible
form. This real linking is brought about by imagining
oneself as in the presence of ‘brothers’ ... a group on the
physical plane (would find) it hard to prevent the
dissipation of force through discussion, through the
ordinary pleasantries of meeting, and through the physical
interplay between personalities. It would be inevitable that
there would be too much conversation, and the work done
would not be adequately effective. From the physical
standpoint they work alone; from the true inner standpoint,
they work in the closest cooperation” (Bailey, 1951–70, v.
4, p. 102–3). Personally, at my clinic, I heal both alone and
with other healers on the physical plane. We do not talk, so
the energy is potent. It is, in our group healing experience,
a great advantage if you can heal together with others. You
are still alone and are responsible, from the soul point of
view, and linked on the subjective level with other healers
not present, but you are working through the etheric
together. As DK says at the beginning of this quote, if it is
“possible” and “dissipation” can be prevented, group
healing on the physical level is preferable. Another notable
statement in Esoteric Healing in this connection speaks
about our outer aloneness and our inner cooperation:
“From the physical standpoint you work alone, from the
true inner standpoint you work in the closest cooperation”
(p. 103).
[28]The description, function, influence and interaction of
the rays goes beyond the scope of this book. For the study
of this subject I recommend, A Treatise on the Seven Rays
(1951–70, in five volumes) by Alice A. Bailey and
Tapestry of the Gods (1988, 1996, in two volumes) by
Michael D. Robbins.
[29]
It is interesting to compare how this Directing Triangle
differs from the Triangle for Dissipating Glamor, for
although they use the same points, the circulation of energy
is different. When all the powers of the body and the
directed attention of the healer are centered in the head,
and when the astral body is quiescent and the mind is active
as a transmitter of soul energy to the three head centers,
you then have an established radiance, or energy emanation
which is a potent force in healing. This radiation is intense,
emanating rays of active energy which can reach the patient
and energize the needed centers.
[30]
“The aura is in reality indicative of the subject’s centers.
From the study of this aura certain things can be
ascertained:
a. whether the development is above or below the
diaphragm.
b. whether the centers are undeveloped or developed.
c. whether the nature of the controlling rays is adequately
clear.
d. whether the point at the center and the petals of the lotus
are controlled, or whether a balance is being achieved.
e. whether the personality is outgoing, and is therefore in a
state of livingness, or whether a withdrawing is taking place
due to introspection and self-centeredness, or to the slow
oncoming of the death process.
f. whether the personality of the soul is in control, and
whether, therefore, a struggle between the two is going on.
You can see, therefore how revealing the aura can be to the
individual who has the ability to read it with accuracy, and
how thankful you should be that such a capacity is relative
rare, or is in the possession of an Initiate or of a Master
Whose nature is love” (Hopking, 1990, pp. 89–90)
[31]
For a full description of insanity, see Esoteric
Psychology (Bailey, 1951–70, v. 2), pp. 457–59.
[32]
These five pranas are described on page 328 in the book
The Light of the Soul (1988) by Alice Bailey.
[33]
This triangle is well worth linking with the triangle
which concerns egoic memory and intellectual pride
involving the throat center, the ajna and the head center, and
connecting with the knowledge petals of the egoic lotus,
called the Triangle of the First Thread. This is the first
triangle a meditator builds in the etheric matter of the
chitta or “mind stuff” on their way to the fifth kingdom.
And just as the process of building the antahkarana is
threefold involving concentration, meditation and finally
contemplation, so is this the stage where the triangle is
built by concentration. The healer works with this triangle
when it appears the patient has become caught up in
intellectual pursuits at the expense of love and reason. This
is its connection with illusion. These threads triangles form
part of the building process within the creative thread itself
(see Education in the New Age by Alice Bailey, pp. 33,
147).
[34]
For a detailed account of this, Christ’s Sixth Initiation,
see the author’s book The Emergence of the Planetary
Heart (1994).
[35]
This is elaborated in Part II. This “thought” came as a
flash of insight which is also captured as Poems I, II, and III
and can be found on my web page:
http://members.aol.com/godshaer/Index.htm
[36]
Originally given as a talk at a conference in
Christchurch, New Zealand, October 1997.
[37]A quote from the translation given by DK in Bailey
(1951–70, v. 2).
[38]
H.P. Blavatsky (1977, p. 390) quoting M. Maury in
Revue Archeologique.
[39]
This will be explained later.
[40]
Actually “Our,” as a whole Cosmic Universe.
[41]
“The earliest signs of life on earth are present 3.45
billion years ago, 300 million years after the crust cooled
sufficiently to support liquid water, well formed, or what
the experts believe are cells are present in the archaic
rocks from that period, e.g., coccoid cyanobacteria from
2.15 billions years.... So it was I think in the Cambrian,
when multicellular life first tested out its possible modes
of being. The particular branchings of life, where the tape
played again, might differ, but the patterns of the branching,
dramatic at first, then dwindling to twiddling with details
later, are likely to be lawful” (Kauffman, 1995, p. 14).
[42]
For the three poems culminating in this quotation, see
www.godshaer.co.uk/GAEH.php
[43]
PASE should be practiced and strengthened with PETA.
That is, Physical (actions and positions) awareness,
Emotional (moods and feelings) awareness; and Thoughts
(ideas and hopes) Awareness.